Panasonic DMCLX100EB de handleiding

Merk: Panasonic

Model: DMCLX100EB

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

SQW0024

M0914KZ0

Message Display →299

Operating Instructions

for advanced features

Digital Camera

Model No. DMC-LX100

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

Q&A Troubleshooting →310

Finding the information you need →2

Contents →4

Contents by Function →10

Menu list →303

SQW0024

Finding the information you need

In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you

need from the following pages.

By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the

information.

Search from “Contents”

P.4 -

Search from the list of function

names

“Contents by Function”

P.10 -

Search from “Names and

Functions of Main Parts”

P.14 -

Search from “List of monitor/

viewfinder displays”

P.293 -

Search from the list of

on-screen messages

“Message displays”

P.299 -

Search from the menu list

“Menu list”

P.303 -

[Rec] ......................... P.303

[Motion Picture]......... P.305

[Custom] ................... P.306

[Setup] ..................... P.308

[Playback] ................. P.309

Search from “Q&A

Troubleshooting”

P.310 -

For details on how to use this manual,

see the next page.

Wi-Fi

function →224

SQW0024

How to use this manual

Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.

Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.

Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.

Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.

Recording mode icons

Recording mode:

In Recording Modes that show icons in black, you can select and execute indicated

menus and functions.

• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.

• By entering keywords in the search field at the top of the Adobe Reader screen, you

can run a keyword search and jump to the corresponding page.

• Operations and other details of this manual may vary depending on the Adobe Reader

version you are using.

■

About the symbols in the text

Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.

Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.

Configurations that can be performed in the [Custom] menu.

Tips for skilful use and points for recording.

Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

(→00) Indicates the reference page. Click to go to the corresponding page.

Click to view the description on the next page.

In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:

→ [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]

SQW0024

Contents

■

Finding the information you need ..... 2

■

How to use this manual ...................... 3

■

Before use ......................................... 12

■

Standard Accessories ...................... 13

Before Use

■

Names and Functions of

Main Parts .......................................... 14

[MENU/SET] button / Cursor button /

Control dial.................................................18

Preparations

■

Attaching the lens cap and

shoulder strap ................................... 19

■

Charging battery ............................... 20

Remaining battery......................................21

Guidelines for number of recordable

pictures and operating time .......................22

■

Inserting and removing the battery/

the card (optional) ............................. 24

■

About the Card .................................. 25

Formatting the card (initialisation)..............26

Recording capacity guidelines

(pictures/recording time) ............................27

■

Setting the clock ............................... 29

Changing time settings ..............................30

■

Setting the menu ............................... 31

Setting the menu screen background ........33

■

Calling frequently-used menus

instantly (Quick Menu) .................... 34

Change the Quick Menu to your

preferred item ............................................35

■

Assigning frequently used

functions to the buttons

(Function buttons) ............................ 37

■

Changing settings using the

control ring ........................................ 39

Changing the settings assigned to the

control ring .................................................40

■

Using the [Setup] menu .................... 41

[Clock Set] .................................................41

[World Time] ...............................................41

[Travel Date] ..............................................42

[Wi-Fi] ........................................................42

[Beep] ........................................................43

[Live View Mode] .......................................43

[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder] ..................44

[Monitor Luminance] ..................................45

[Sleep Mode]..............................................46

[USB Mode] ...............................................47

[TV Connection] .........................................47

[Menu Resume] .........................................49

[Menu Background]....................................49

[Menu Information] .....................................49

[Language] .................................................49

[Version Disp.]............................................50

[Self Timer Auto Off] ...................................50

[No.Reset] ..................................................50

[Reset] .......................................................50

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings] ................................51

[Format] .....................................................51

■

Entering Text ..................................... 52

■

Contents by Function ....................... 10

SQW0024

■

Holding the camera ........................... 53

■

Recording pictures using the

viewfinder ......................................... 54

Switching between the monitor and

viewfinder...................................................54

About Eye Sensor AF ................................55

■

Taking pictures .................................. 56

■

Recording motion pictures .............. 58

■

Select the recording mode ............... 59

Contents

Basics

■

Switching the display information

on the recording screen ................... 62

■

Viewing your pictures ....................... 67

Viewing motion pictures .............................70

■

Switching the display information

on the playback screen .................... 71

■

Deleting pictures ............................... 73

[Delete Single] ...........................................73

To delete multiple (up to 100)/

To delete all pictures ..................................74

Recording mode

■

Taking pictures with

automatic settings

[Intelligent Auto] Mode ..................... 75

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot]) ............................78

Combining pictures into a single still

picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]) ............79

■

Taking pictures after setting the

aperture value and shutter speed ... 80

Taking pictures after automatically setting

the aperture value and shutter speed

([Program AE] Mode) .................................81

■

Taking pictures using picture

effects (Filter) ................................... 89

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures by setting the aperture

value ([Aperture-Priority] Mode).................83

Taking pictures by setting the shutter

speed ([Shutter-Priority] Mode)..................84

Taking pictures by setting the aperture

value and shutter speed

([Manual Exposure] Mode) ........................86

Checking the effects of the aperture value

and shutter speed ([Preview] Mode) ..........88

SQW0024

Contents

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

■

Adjusting the picture quality with

effects [Photo Style] ...................... 100

■

Adjusting highlights and shadows

[Highlight Shadow] ......................... 102

■

Adjusting the White Balance ......... 103

■

Setting the picture quality and

size ................................................... 107

Changing the aspect ratio of the still

pictures ....................................................107

Setting the picture size ............................108

Setting the compression rate of pictures

([Quality]) .................................................109

■

Using the picture correction

functions effectively ........................111

Correcting contrast and exposure

([i.Dynamic])............................................. 111

Enhancing the impression of

high-resolution ([i.Resolution]) ................. 111

Combining still pictures with different

exposures ([HDR]) ................................... 112

Suppressing the noise of a long

exposure ([Long Shtr NR]) ....................... 113

Setting the colour space .......................... 113

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

■

Taking pictures with Auto Focus ... 114

Select the focus mode

(AFS, AFF, AFC) ...................................... 114

Switching [AF Mode] ................................ 115

Changing the position and size of the

AF area ....................................................121

Setting your preferred focusing method

...124

■

Taking close-up pictures

(Macro recording) ........................... 126

Focus range .............................................126

■

Taking pictures with

Manual Focus .................................. 128

MF Assist .................................................131

■

Taking pictures by locking the

focus and/or exposure

[AF/AE Lock] ................................... 133

■

Taking pictures with Exposure

Compensation ................................. 135

■

Setting the ISO Sensitivity ............. 136

Setting the upper limit of

ISO Sensitivity .........................................137

Setting the incremental value of

ISO Sensitivity .........................................138

Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting .......138

■

Setting the metering mode ............. 139

■

Setting the Shutter Type ................. 140

■

Selecting a Drive Mode ................... 141

■

Burst function ................................. 142

■

Recording while exposure is

changed automatically

[Auto Bracket] ................................. 145

■

Automatically changing the

aspect ratio while taking pictures

[Aspect Bracket] ............................. 147

■

Taking pictures with self-timer ...... 148

■

Recording panorama pictures ....... 150

Shutter and Drive Settings

SQW0024

Contents

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

■

Taking pictures automatically

at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot] ........................... 153

■

Creating stop motion animation

[Stop Motion Animation] ................ 156

■

Performing multiple exposures

for a single picture [Multi Exp.] .... 159

■

Disabling the beeps and flash

at the same time

[Silent Mode] ................................... 161

■

Recording with the

Face Recognition function

[Face Recog.] .................................. 162

■

Setting the profile for a baby

or pet to record in a picture ........... 165

■

Displaying the appropriate screen

for specific recording conditions

... 166

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

■

Correcting jitter .............................. 168

■

Using Zoom ..................................... 170

Zoom types and use ................................171

■

Taking pictures using the flash

(supplied) ......................................... 176

Attaching the flash ...................................176

Changing the firing mode

(Manual flash) ..........................................179

Changing Flash Mode..............................180

Setting the 2nd curtain sync ....................182

Adjusting the flash output ........................183

Synchronising the flash output

with the camera during

Exposure Compensation .........................183

Performing wireless flash settings ...........184

■

Recording motion pictures ............ 187

Setting the format, picture size and

recording frame rate ................................187

Adjusting the focus while recording

motion pictures ([Continuous AF]) ...........189

Recording motion pictures .......................190

Recording 4K motion pictures..................194

Creating a high-resolution still picture

from a 4K motion picture [4K PHOTO] ....195

■

Taking still pictures while a motion

picture is being recorded ............... 198

■

Using the [Motion Picture] menu ... 199

[4K PHOTO] .............................................199

[Rec Format] ............................................199

[Rec Quality] ............................................199

[Picture Mode]..........................................199

[Continuous AF] .......................................199

[Mic Level Disp.] ......................................200

[Mic Level Adj.].........................................200

[Wind Cut] ................................................200

Recording motion pictures

SQW0024

Contents

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

■

Viewing the group picture .............. 201

■

Capturing still pictures from

motion pictures ............................... 203

■

Using the [Playback] menu ............ 204

[Slide Show] .............................................204

[Playback Mode] ......................................206

[Location Logging] ...................................207

[RAW Processing] ....................................208

[Title Edit] ................................................. 211

[Text Stamp] .............................................212

[Video Divide] ...........................................214

[Time Lapse Video] ..................................215

[Stop Motion Video] .................................215

[Resize] ....................................................216

[Cropping] ................................................217

[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.] ...........................218

[Favorite] ..................................................219

[Print Set] .................................................220

[Protect] ...................................................221

[Face Rec Edit] ........................................222

[Picture Sort] ............................................223

[Delete Confirmation] ...............................223

Wi-Fi

■

Wi-Fi

Function and

NFC Function .................................. 224

■

What you can do with the

Wi-Fi function .................................. 227

■

Operating the camera by

connecting it to a smartphone ....... 228

Installing the smartphone/tablet app

“Panasonic Image App” ...........................228

Connecting to a smartphone....................229

Connecting to a smartphone using

NFC function ............................................233

Taking pictures via a smartphone

(remote recording) ...................................234

Playing back pictures in the camera on

a smartphone ...........................................235

Saving pictures in the camera to the

smartphone ..............................................235

Easily transferring pictures in

the camera ...............................................236

Sending pictures in the camera to

social networking services .......................237

Adding location information to pictures

in the camera from a smartphone ............237

Operating the camera to send pictures

to a smartphone .......................................239

■

Displaying still pictures on a TV .... 242

■

Wireless printing ............................. 243

■

Sending pictures to AV device ....... 244

■

Sending pictures to a PC ............... 247

■

Using WEB services ....................... 251

When sending images to WEB service....251

When sending images to

[Cloud Sync. Service] ..............................255

■

Using “LUMIX CLUB” ..................... 258

About the [LUMIX CLUB] .........................258

■

About connections ......................... 263

[Via Network]

Connecting via a wireless access point ...264

[Direct]

Connecting directly ..................................267

Connecting quickly with the same settings

as used previously

([Select a destination from History] /

[Select a destination from Favorite]) ........268

Settings for sending pictures ...................270

■

[Wi-Fi Setup] .................................... 272

SQW0024

Contents

Connecting with other devices

■

Enjoying 4K motion pictures ......... 274

Viewing 4K motion pictures .....................274

Storing 4K motion pictures.......................275

■

Viewing on TV screen ..................... 276

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™) ....278

■

Storing recorded still pictures and

motion pictures on your PC ........... 280

About supplied software ..........................281

Installing supplied software......................283

Copying still pictures and

motion pictures ........................................284

■

Storing recorded still pictures and

motion pictures in the recorder ..... 286

Copying by inserting the card into the

recorder ...................................................286

Dubbing playback pictures via AV cables

(optional) ..................................................286

■

Printing ............................................ 287

Printing multiple pictures..........................288

Printing with date and text .......................289

Making print settings on the camera ........290

Others

■

Optional accessories ...................... 291

External Flash (optional) ..........................291

Using the AC adaptor (optional) and

DC coupler (optional) instead

of the battery ............................................292

■

List of monitor/viewfinder

displays ............................................ 293

■

Message displays ........................... 299

■

Menu list .......................................... 303

■

Q&A Troubleshooting .................... 310

■

Usage cautions and notes ............. 326

SQW0024

Contents by Function

Recording

Recording mode ...........................................59

[Preview] .......................................................88

Picture effects (Filter)....................................89

Macro recording ..........................................126

Recording panorama pictures ....................150

[Time Lapse Shot] .......................................153

[Stop Motion Animation] ..............................156

[Multi Exp.] ..................................................159

[Silent Mode] ...............................................161

Focus (AF/MF)

Focus Mode ................................................ 114

AF Mode ..................................................... 115

Adjusting the AF area position ....................121

Manual Focus .............................................128

AF/AE Lock .................................................133

Exposure

AF/AE Lock .................................................133

Exposure Compensation ............................135

ISO sensitivity .............................................136

[Metering Mode] ..........................................139

[Auto Bracket] .............................................145

Recording

Drive

Drive Mode .................................................141

[Aspect Bracket] .........................................147

[Self Timer] .................................................148

Picture Quality and Colour Tone

[Photo Style] ...............................................100

[Highlight Shadow] ......................................102

White Balance ............................................103

[Picture Size] ..............................................108

[Quality] ......................................................109

[i.Dynamic] .................................................. 111

[i.Resolution] ............................................... 111

[HDR] .......................................................... 112

[Long Shtr NR] ............................................ 113

[Color Space] .............................................. 113

Flash

[Flash Mode] ...............................................180

2nd curtain synchro ....................................182

[Flash Adjust.] .............................................183

Wireless flash settings ................................184

Screen settings

[Monochrome Live View] ............................167

[Mic Level Disp.] .........................................200

Motion Picture

[Rec Format] ...............................................187

[Rec Quality] ...............................................187

Motion pictures in 4K ..................................194

[4K PHOTO]................................................195

Taking still pictures while a

motion picture is being recorded ................198

Motion Picture

Audio

[Mic Level Adj.] ...........................................200

[Wind Cut] ...................................................200

Basic settings

[Format] ........................................................26

[Clock Set] ....................................................29

How to set menu items .................................31

[Q.MENU] .....................................................34

[Beep] ...........................................................43

[Sleep Mode] ................................................46

[Reset] (initialisation) ....................................50

Diopter adjustment .......................................55

Display switching ....................................62, 71

Setup/Custom

Customisation

[CUSTOM] in the Quick Menu ......................35

Function buttons ...........................................37

Control ring ...................................................40

Custom Set ...................................................60

[Custom] menu ...........................................306

[Cursor Button Lock] .....................................38

Motion picture button ..................................192

SQW0024

Contents by Function

Playback

[Auto Review] ...............................................57

Picture playback ...........................................67

Playback Zoom .............................................68

Multi Playback ..............................................68

Motion picture playback ................................70

Delete ...........................................................73

Display/playback settings

[Slide Show] ................................................204

[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ................................218

Playback

Edit

[RAW Processing] .......................................208

[Resize] .......................................................216

[Cropping] ...................................................217

Adding information

[Location Logging] ......................................207

[Title Edit] .................................................... 211

[Text Stamp] ................................................212

Image settings

[Favorite] .....................................................219

[Print Set] ....................................................220

[Protect] ......................................................221

Connect

“Image App” ................................................228

NFC ............................................................233

[WPS (Push-Button)] ..........................264, 267

Direct connection ........................................267

Image App

Remote recording .......................................234

Saving images ............................................235

Sending images ..................................236, 239

Sending and adding location information ...237

[Touch Sharing] ...........................................272

Wi-Fi

In combination with other devices

Playing back pictures on a TV ....................242

Printing images ...........................................243

Sending images to an AV device ................244

Sending images to a PC .............................247

Sending images to a WEB service .............251

Using [Cloud Sync. Service] .......................255

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” ..................................281

SILKYPIX ....................................................282

[VIERA Link] ...............................................278

Connecting with other devices

Recorder

Dubbing ......................................................286

Printer

PictBridge ...................................................287

SQW0024

Before Use

Before use

■

Camera handling

Keep the camera away from excessive vibration, force, or

pressure.

●

Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which may damage

the lens, monitor, viewfinder, or camera body. This may also cause the

camera to malfunction or prevent recording.

• Dropping or hitting the camera against a hard surface

• Pushing with excessive force on the lens or monitor

The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or

waterproof.

Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand,

or where water can come into contact with the camera.

●

Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which present a risk

that sand, water, or foreign material may enter the camera through the lens

or openings around buttons. Be especially careful because these conditions

may damage the camera, and such damage may not be repairable.

• In extremely dusty or sandy places

• In the rain or by the shore, where the camera may be exposed to water

■

Condensation (When the lens, the monitor, or viewfinder, is fogged up)

●

Condensation may occur when the camera is exposed to sudden changes

of temperature or humidity. Avoid these conditions, which may make the

lens, monitor, or viewfinder, dirty, cause mould, or damage the camera.

●

If condensation does occur, turn off the camera and wait about two hours

before using it. Once the camera adjusts to the surrounding temperature,

the fogging will clear naturally.

■

Always take a test shot first

Before important events when you will use the camera (at weddings, for example),

always take a test shot to make sure that pictures and sound record correctly.

■

No compensation for missed shots

We cannot compensate for missed shots if technical problems with the camera or card

prevent recording.

■

Carefully observe copyright laws

Unauthorised use of recordings that contain works with copyright for purposes other

than personal use is prohibited under copyright law. Recording of certain material may

be restricted even for the purpose of personal use.

■

Also refer to “Usage cautions and notes” (→326)

SQW0024

Before Use

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

●

The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the

camera was purchased.

For details on the accessories, refer to Basic Operating Instructions.

●

Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.

●

SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card

in the text.

●

Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.

●

Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.

■

Optional accessories

• Cards are optional.

SQW0024

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

1 Self-timer indicator (→148) /

AF Assist Lamp (→53, 125)

2 Control ring (→39)

3 Aspect ratio selector switch

(→107)

4 Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (→176)

The hot shoe cover is already

attached to the hot shoe at the time

of purchase.

5 Aperture ring (→59)

6 Focus selector switch

(→114, 126, 128)

7 Lens front ring

To attach the auto lens cap

(optional), remove the lens front

ring.

8 Lens barrel

9 Lens (Filter diameter Φ43 mm)

1 2 5 643

9 8 7

SQW0024

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

Stereo microphone (→53, 200)

Be careful not to cover the

microphone with your finger. Doing

so may make sound difficult

to record.

Shutter speed dial (→59)

Shutter button

Zoom lever (→170)

[FILTER] button (→89)

Exposure compensation dial

(→135)

[iA] button (→59)

Camera [ON/OFF] switch

Speaker

Be careful not to cover the speaker

with your finger. Doing so may

make sound difficult to hear.

Tripod mount (→329)

Do not attach to a tripod with a

5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or longer screw.

Doing so may damage this unit.

It may not be possible to attach

certain types of tripods properly.

DC coupler cover

Open this cover to use an AC

adaptor (optional) and DC coupler

(optional) in place of the battery.

When using an AC adaptor

(optional), ensure that the

Panasonic DC coupler (optional)

and AC adaptor are used. (→292)

Release lever (→24)

Card/Battery door (→24)

(Top)

10 11 12 14

(Bottom)

18 20 21

1617 15

19 22

SQW0024

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

Viewfinder (LVF) (→54)

In this manual, “viewfinder” is used to indicate the LVF.

Eye Sensor (→54)

Diopter adjustment dial (→55)

[LVF] button (→54) / [Fn3] button (→37)

Strap eyelet (→19)

Monitor

[HDMI] socket (→276)

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (→276, 284, 286, 287)

272523 2624

SQW0024

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

●

The illustrations and screens in this manual may differ from the actual product.

Strap eyelet (→19)

Wi-Fi

antenna

Wi-Fi connection lamp (→225)

[Wi-Fi] button (→225) / [Fn2] button (→37)

Motion picture button (→58)

[AF/AE LOCK] button (→133)

NFC antenna (→233)

[Q.MENU] button (→34)

Playback button (→67)

[Fn1] button (→37) / [

] (Delete/Cancel) button (→32, 73)

[DISP.] button (→62, 71)

[MENU/SET] button / Cursor button / Control dial (→18)

27 35343331 32

SQW0024

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

[MENU/SET] button / Cursor button / Control dial

[MENU/SET] button

Use this button to display the menus, enter the settings, etc. (→31)

Cursor button

This button is used to move the cursor on the menu screens and for

other functions. (→32)

You can perform the following operations while recording.

[ISO] button ( ) (→136)

[WB] (White Balance) button ( ) (→103)

[ ] (Drive Mode) button ( )

Single (→141), Burst (→142), Auto Bracket (→145),

Aspect Bracket (→147), Self-timer (→148), Panorama (→150)

[ ] (AF Mode) button ( ) (→115, 131)

Control dial

Turn the dial to select setting items and change setting values.

(→32, 67)

Disabling the button and dial operation (while recording)

When the [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to the function button, operation of the

[MENU/SET] button, cursor button, and control dial is disabled. (→38)

Enabling/disabling the operation guide display

→ [Custom] → [Dial Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]

• When you set the operation guide to [ON], the operation

guide for the control ring ([

]), control dial ([ ]), and other

parts appear on the recording screen.

●

In this manual, the button that is to be used is indicated by .

SQW0024

Preparations

Attaching the lens cap and shoulder strap

Cover the lens with the lens cap to protect it when you are not taking pictures. We

recommend attaching the lens cap to the camera using the lens cap string to prevent loss

of the lens cap. We also recommend attaching the shoulder strap to prevent the camera

from being dropped.

Use the lens cap string (supplied) to attach the lens cap to the

camera

Make sure that the thicker portion of the string is not hanging over the lens cap or the

shoulder strap eyelet.

Attach the lens cap

To attach and remove the lens

cap, press the areas shown by

arrows in the illustration.

Attach the shoulder strap

Shoulder strap eyelet

• Attach the other end of the shoulder strap.

• Make sure that the shoulder strap does not come loose.

• Attach the shoulder strap with the LUMIX logo on the strap facing out.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may result in injury or accident.

• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.

– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.

SQW0024

Preparations

Charging battery

Always charge before first use! (battery shipped uncharged)

About batteries that you can use with this unit

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the

genuine products are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of

these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to

meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility

that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that

we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a

counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we recommend

that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

• Use the dedicated charger and battery.

Attach the battery paying attention to the

direction of the battery

Connect the charger to the electrical outlet

• The AC mains

lead does not

fit entirely into

the AC input

terminal. A

gap will remain.

Plug-in type

Battery

Charger

(model-specific)

Inlet type

Charging light

([CHARGE])

On: Charging in progress

Off: Charging complete

If light is flashing:

• Battery temperature is

too high or too low. We

recommend charging in a

location where the ambient

temperature is between 10 °C

and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F).

• Battery/charger connector is

dirty. Clean with a dry cloth.

• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.

Detach the battery after charging is completed

• The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power is supplied.

The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the battery charger is connected to

an electrical outlet.

SQW0024

Preparations

Charging battery

Notes on charging time

Charging time Approx. 190 min

• The charging time indicated above is the time required for charging in case when the

battery is completely used up. The time required for charging differs depending on

conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer in cases when temperatures are

either high or low and when the battery has not been used for a long period of time.

Remaining battery

When using the camera, the remaining battery capacity is displayed.

Remaining battery (only when using battery)

(flashes red)

If the battery mark flashes red, recharge or replace a fully charged

battery.

●

Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.

●

If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.

●

Remove battery from camera after use.

• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic objects (such as

clips) when carrying or storing it.

●

To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the monitor goes

off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded

data.)

SQW0024

Preparations

Charging battery

Guidelines for number of recordable pictures and operating

time

Recording still pictures (When using monitor)

Number of recordable pictures

Approx. 350 pictures

(Approx. 300 pictures)

By CIPA standard

Recording time

Approx. 175 min

(Approx. 150 min)

Recording still pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))

Number of recordable pictures

Approx. 320 pictures

(Approx. 270 pictures)

By CIPA standard

Recording time

Approx. 160 min

(Approx. 135 min)

• The values when the flash (supplied) is used are provided in parentheses.

■

Recording conditions by CIPA standard

CIPA is an abbreviation of “Camera & Imaging Products Association”.

• [Program AE] Mode

• Temperature: 23 °C (73.4 °F)/Humidity: 50%RH when monitor is on.

• Using a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card.

• Using the supplied battery.

• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on (when [Stabilizer] is set to [

]).

• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording.

• Rotating the zoom lever from Tele to Wide or vice versa in every recording.

• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery

decreases.

Number reduced if intervals are longer (e.g. to approx. one quarter for 2-minute

intervals under the above conditions).

SQW0024

Preparations

Charging battery

Recording motion pictures (When using monitor)

[Rec Format] [AVCHD] [MP4] [MP4]

[Rec Quality] [FHD/17M/50i] [FHD/20M/25p] [4K/100M/25p]

Available recording time Approx. 125 min Approx. 135 min Approx. 90 min

Actual available recording time

Approx. 60 min Approx. 65 min Approx. 45 min

The time you can actually record when repeatedly turning the camera on and off, starting and

stopping recording and using zoom.

■

Recording conditions

• Temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F), humidity 50%RH

●

[AVCHD] motion pictures:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

●

Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file

size exceeds 4 GB.

• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes 59

seconds.

●

Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes. (You can continue

recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be

recorded and played back in separate files.)

Viewing pictures (When using monitor)

Playback time Approx. 260 min

●

The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the

environment and the operating conditions.

For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable

pictures is reduced.

• In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

• When operations such as the flash and zoom are used repeatedly.

●

If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please

purchase a new battery.

SQW0024

Preparations

Inserting and removing the battery/the card (optional)

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

Slide the release lever to the

[OPEN] position and open the

card/battery door

[OPEN]

[LOCK]

Release lever

Insert the battery and card,

making sure that their

orientation is correct

• Battery:

Insert the battery all the way firmly until

a locking sound is heard, and check that

the lever is hooked over the battery.

• Card:

Insert the card all the way firmly until it

clicks.

Do not touch

the terminal

Charged battery (check orientation)

Card

(check orientation:

terminals face monitor)

Lever

Close the card/battery door and

slide the release lever to the

[LOCK] position

■

To remove

• To remove battery:

Move lever in direction of arrow.

• To remove card:

Press the centre of the card.

Lever

●

Remove battery from camera after use.

●

Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

●

To remove the card or battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the

monitor turns off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card

or recorded data.)

SQW0024

Preparations

About the Card

The following SD standard-based cards (Panasonic brand recommended) can be used.

Type of Card Capacity Notes

SD Memory Cards 8 MB – 2 GB • Can be used with devices compatible with the

respective formats.

• Before using SDXC Memory Cards, check that your

computer and other devices support this type of card.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

• This unit is compatible with UHS-

Ι UHS Speed Class

3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.

• Only the cards listed on the left with the given capacities

are supported.

SDHC Memory Cards 4 GB – 32 GB

SDXC Memory Cards 48 GB, 64 GB

■

About the motion picture recording and speed class

According to the [Rec Format] (→187) and [Rec Quality] (→187) of a motion picture,

the required card differs. Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed

Class or UHS Speed Class.

• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding

continuous writing. Confirm the SD speed by checking the card label or other card

related materials.

[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example

[AVCHD] All

Class 4 or higher

[MP4] FHD/HD/VGA

[MP4] 4K UHS Speed Class 3

• Latest information:

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

Access to the card

The access indication displays red when pictures are being

recorded on the card.

●

While the camera is accessing the card (for an operation such as picture writing, reading, deletion,

or formatting), do not turn off the camera or remove the battery, card, AC adaptor (optional) or DC

coupler (optional). Do not subject the camera to vibrations, impact, or static electricity. The card or

the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation

fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again.

SQW0024

Preparations

About the Card

●

If you set the write-protect switch to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, delete

or format the data or display it by recording date. These operations become

available again when you unlock the switch.

●

It is recommended that you copy important pictures to your computer

(as electromagnetic waves, static electricity, or faults may cause data to be

damaged).

Write-protect

switch

Formatting the card (initialisation)

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit. Since data cannot be

recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Format]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

●

This requires a sufficiently charged battery, or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●

Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.

●

Always format cards with this camera. Please reformat the card with this camera if it has already

been formatted with a computer or another device.

●

If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic.

SQW0024

Preparations

About the Card

Recording capacity guidelines (pictures/recording time)

The number of pictures you can take and the recording time vary in proportion to card

capacity (and depending on recording conditions and type of card).

Recording picture capacity (still pictures)

When aspect ratio is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

L (12.5M) 1090 2200 4420 8820

M (6.5M)

1880 3810 7630 14970

S (3M)

3220 6500 13030 24700

When aspect ratio is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

L (12.5M) 340 700 1400 2800

M (6.5M) 400 810 1620 3230

S (3M) 440 890 1780 3530

●

When the number of recordable pictures exceeds 9,999, “9999+” is displayed.

Recording time capacity (motion pictures)

• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been

recorded.

([h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.)

When [Rec Format] is [AVCHD]

[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

[FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 1h15m00s 2h30m00s 5h00m00s

[FHD/17M/50i] 1h00m00s 2h00m00s 4h05m00s 8h15m00s

[FHD/24M/25p] 43m00s 1h25m00s 2h55m00s 5h50m00s

[FHD/24M/24p] 43m00s 1h25m00s 2h55m00s 5h50m00s

SQW0024

Preparations

About the Card

When [Rec Format] is [MP4]

[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

[4K/100M/25p] 9m00s 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m00s

[4K/100M/24p] 9m00s 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m00s

[FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 1h15m00s 2h30m00s 5h00m00s

[FHD/20M/25p] 49m00s 1h40m00s 3h20m00s 6h40m00s

[HD/10M/25p] 1h30m00s 3h10m00s 6h25m00s 12h50m00s

[VGA/4M/25p] 3h25m00s 7h00m00s 14h10m00s 28h15m00s

●

If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera.

●

[AVCHD] motion pictures:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

●

Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the

file size exceeds 4 GB.

• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes

59 seconds.

●

Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes. (You can continue

recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be

recorded and played back in separate files.)

●

The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.

Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures

that you can take and the available recording time

→ [Custom] →[Remaining Disp.]

[

] (Remaining shots):

Displays the number of pictures that can be recorded.

[ ] (Remaining time):

Displays the remaining recording time.

Number of

recordable

pictures

Available

recording time

SQW0024

Preparations

Setting the clock

The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

Turn the camera on

• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed

to step

Press [MENU/SET] while the message is

displayed

Press to select the language, and press [MENU/SET]

• The [Please set the clock] message appears.

Press [MENU/SET]

Press to select the items (year,

month, day, hour, minute), and press

to set

• To cancel → Press [ ] button.

To set the display order or time display format

• Select [Style] and press [MENU/SET] to display the

setting screen for display order and time display

format.

: Home time

: Destination time

Style

Display order

Time display format

Press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Press [MENU/SET].

When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press

[MENU/SET]

SQW0024

Preparations

Setting the clock

Press to set your home area and

press [MENU/SET]

City or area name

Current time

Difference from GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time)

●

If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you order a photo studio to print the

picture, or when you stamp the date on the pictures with [Text Stamp].

Changing time settings

Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu to change the current time settings.

• Clock settings will be saved for approx. 3 months even after the battery is removed,

provided a fully charged battery was installed in the camera for 24 hours beforehand.

Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu

• For details about how to set the menu (→31)

Set the date and time (Perform steps

. (→29))

SQW0024

Preparations

Setting the menu

You can use the menu to set camera and recording functions, operate playback functions,

and perform other operations. In particular, the [Setup] menu contains some important

settings relating to the camera’s clock and power. Check the settings of this menu before

proceeding to use the camera.

●

When [Menu Resume] (→49) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], the screen

displayed last after you selected the menu item will reappear. It is set to [ON] at

the time of purchase.

●

When the [Menu Information] (→49) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON],

descriptions of the menu items and settings will appear on the menu screen.

Example: To change the [Quality] setting from [

] to [ ] in the [Rec] menu

In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as

follows:

→ [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]

Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu

[Rec]

(→303 -)

You can perform settings for picture size and the flash.

[Motion Picture]

(→305)

You can select the recording format and picture quality and other

settings.

[Custom]

(→306 -)

Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button

operations, can be set up according to your preferences. Also, it

is possible to register the modified settings.

[Setup]

(→308)

You can perform settings that make usage more convenient, such

as the changing the clock settings and beep volume. You can

also perform Wi-Fi function-related settings.

[Playback]

(→309)

You can specify picture protection, cropping, print settings, and

other settings for pictures you have taken.

SQW0024

Preparations

Setting the menu

Press to select the menu item and

press [MENU/SET]

• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial.

• You can also switch to the next page by pressing

[DISP.] button or rotating the zoom lever.

Page

Item

Press to select the setting and press

[MENU/SET]

• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial.

Selected setting

Settings

Press the [ ] button repeatedly until the recording or

playback screen reappears

• During recording, the menu screen can also be exited by pressing the shutter

button halfway.

SQW0024

Preparations

Setting the menu

Switching menu type

Example: Switching to the [Setup] menu from [Rec] menu

Press

Menu type

Press to select a menu switch icon [ ]

• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial.

Press [MENU/SET]

• Select the menu item and perform the setting.

●

The menu types and items that are displayed vary according to the mode.

●

The setting methods vary depending on the menu item.

Setting the menu screen background

You can set the background for the menu screen according to your preferences.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Menu Background]

Press to select the background colour and then press [MENU/SET]

• Exit the menu after it is set.

SQW0024

Preparations

Calling frequently-used menus instantly

(Quick Menu)

You can easily call some of the menu items and set them.

• The menu items and setting items that are displayed differ depending on the recording

mode and settings during recording.

Press [Q.MENU] button to display the

Quick menu

Turn the control dial to select the menu

item, and press or

• The menu item can also be selected by pressing .

Turn the control dial to select the setting

• The setting can also be selected with .

Press [Q.MENU] button to close the Quick

Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items

→ [Custom] → [Q.MENU]

[PRESET]: The default items can be set.

[CUSTOM]: The Quick Menu will consist of desired items. (→35)

Using the Quick menu on the monitor recording information

screen (→62) of [

] (monitor style)

(Press the [DISP.] button repeatedly until the screen appears.)

Press the [Q.MENU] button and turn the control dial to select an item,

and press [MENU/SET].

Turn the control dial to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] to

set.

• You can also set with

and [MENU/SET].

SQW0024

Preparations

Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)

Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item

When [Q.MENU] (→34) in the [Custom] menu is set to [CUSTOM], the Quick Menu can

be changed as desired. Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.

Press to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

Press to select the menu item in the top row

and press [MENU/SET]

Items that can be

setup as Quick Menus

Items that can be displayed

in the Quick Menu screen

Press to select the empty space in the bottom row

and then press [MENU/SET]

• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an

existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item.

• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing

and

select an item to cancel, and then press [MENU/SET].

• Items that can be set are as follows:

[Rec] menu/Recording functions

• [Photo Style] (→100)

• [Picture Size] (→108)

• [Quality] (→109)

• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114)

• [Metering Mode] (→139)

• [i.Dynamic] (→111)

• [i.Resolution] (→111)

• [HDR] (→112)

• [Shutter Type] (→140)

• [Flash Mode] (→180)

• [Flash Adjust.] (→183)

• [i.Zoom] (→172)

• [Digital Zoom] (→173)

• [Stabilizer] (→168)

• [Sensitivity] (→136)

• [White Balance] (→103)

• [AF Mode] (→115)

• [Drive Mode] (→141)

[Motion Picture] menu

• [4K PHOTO] (→195)

• [Motion Pic. Set] (→187)

• [Picture Mode] (→198)

SQW0024

Preparations

Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)

[Custom] menu

• [Silent Mode] (→161)

• [Peaking] (→130)

• [Histogram] (→64)

• [Guide Line] (→65)

• [Zebra Pattern] (→166)

• [Monochrome Live View] (→167)

• [Rec Area] (→192)

• [Zoom lever] (→175)

Press [ ] button

• It will return to screen of step

(→35). Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.

SQW0024

Preparations

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons

(Function buttons)

You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons.

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Fn Button Set]

Press to select the function button you want to

assign a function to and press [MENU/SET]

Press to select the function you want to assign

and press [MENU/SET]

• For details on the functions that can be assigned, refer to (→38).

• To restore the default function button settings, select [Restore to

Default].

SQW0024

Preparations

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)

Assigning a function to a function button

Press the function button to use the assigned function.

• You can assign the following functions to the [Fn1], [Fn2], and [Fn3] buttons.

[Rec] menu/Recording functions

• [Wi-Fi] (→225): [Fn2]

• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→55):

[Fn3]

• [AF/AE Lock] (→133)

• [AF-ON] (→129, 133)

• [Preview] (→88): [Fn1]

• [Level Gauge] (→66)

• [Focus Area Set]

• [Cursor Button Lock]

• [Photo Style] (→100)

• [Picture Size] (→108)

• [Quality] (→109)

• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114)

• [Metering Mode] (→139)

• [Highlight Shadow] (→102)

• [i.Dynamic] (→111)

• [i.Resolution] (→111)

• [HDR] (→112)

• [Shutter Type] (→140)

• [Flash Mode] (→180)

• [Flash Adjust.] (→183)

• [i.Zoom] (→172)

• [Digital Zoom] (→173)

• [Stabilizer] (→168)

• [Sensitivity] (→136)

• [White Balance] (→103)

• [AF Mode/MF] (→115)

• [Drive Mode] (→141)

• [Restore to Default]

[Motion Picture] menu

• [4K PHOTO] (→195)

• [Motion Pic. Set] (→187)

• [Picture Mode] (→198)

[Custom] menu

• [Utilize Custom Set feature]

(→60)

• [Silent Mode] (→161)

• [Peaking] (→130)

• [Histogram] (→64)

• [Guide Line] (→65)

• [Zebra Pattern] (→166)

• [Monochrome Live View]

(→167)

• [Rec Area] (→192)

• [Zoom lever] (→175)

Function button settings at the time of purchase.

• Certain functions cannot be assigned to some function buttons.

●

The function assigned to the function button may not work in some modes or on some display

screens.

●

When [Focus Area Set] is assigned to the function button, you can display the AF area or the MF

Assist position setting screen.

●

When the cursor button is locked, operation of the cursor button, [MENU/SET] button, and control

dial is disabled. To enable operation, press the function button again.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The function assigned to the [Fn1] button will not work in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect], [One Point Color], [Sunshine])

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

●

The function assigned to the [Fn2] button will not work in the following case:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When recording 4K motion pictures after setting [4K PHOTO] to [ON]

SQW0024

Preparations

Changing settings using the control ring

The “Control Ring” is an easy and convenient way to adjust several settings, depending

on the camera mode selected. You can use the control ring to change the settings of the

unit.

Items that can be set by the control ring vary depending on recording modes.

Following are the pre-assigned settings.

Recording mode Setting

[Intelligent Auto] Mode Step Zoom (→174)

[Program AE] Mode Step Zoom (→174)

[Aperture-Priority] Mode Step Zoom (→174)

[Shutter-Priority] Mode

Shutter speed adjustment

(→84)

[Manual Exposure] Mode

Shutter speed adjustment

(→86)

You can use the control ring to change the following settings values, which cannot be set using the

shutter speed dial.

– Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds (electronic shutter (→140))

– Slower speed than 1 second (mechanical shutter (→140))

– Setting in 1/3 EV steps

●

The control ring is assigned to selecting the picture effect (Filter) when you are recording a

panorama picture. (→150)

●

When Manual Focus is set, focus adjustment is assigned to the control ring. (→128)

●

The control ring can be used to change to your preferred settings. (→40)

SQW0024

Preparations

Changing settings using the control ring

Changing the settings assigned to the control ring

Changes the settings assigned to the control ring.

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Control Ring]

Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

Settings that can be assigned

[DEFLT] [Normal]

[Zoom] (→170)

[Step Zoom] (→174)

[Sensitivity] (→136)

[White Balance] (→103)

[Filter Select] (→89)

[OFF] [Not Set]

• To return to the default setting, select [Normal].

(→39)

• If you do not use the control ring, select [OFF]

([Not Set]).

●

The assigned function setting applies to all the Recording Modes.

The function assigned to the control ring may not work in some combinations of Recording Mode

or settings used for recording (panorama picture recording, Filter setting, etc.)

●

When Manual Focus is set, the control ring is fixed to the function for adjusting the focus. You

cannot use the settings assigned using the [Control Ring]. (→128)

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

[Clock Set] and [Sleep Mode] are important for clock setting and battery life. Please

check these before use.

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Clock Set]

Set time, date, and display format. (→30)

[World Time]

Set the recording date and time with the local time at your destination.

• Set [Home] when you use the camera for the first time after purchasing it. You can set

[Destination] after setting [Home].

Settings: [Destination] / [Home]

Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select area and press [MENU/SET]

City/area name

Difference with

home time

Current time at selected destination

When [Destination] has been selected When [Home] has been selected

■

To set summer time

Press

in step

. (Press again to release the setting)

• When summer time [ ] is set, the current time is advanced by 1 hour. If the setting is cancelled,

the time automatically returns to the current time.

■

When you come back from your travel destination

Select [Home] in step

and press [MENU/SET].

●

If you cannot find your destination in the area displayed on the screen, set based on difference

with home time.

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Travel Date]

If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the

picture was taken will be recorded.

■

[Travel Setup]

Settings: [SET] / [OFF]

Use to select [Travel Setup] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the departure date and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the return date and press [MENU/SET]

■

To record [Location]

Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the location.

Select [Location] in step

above, and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Enter your location (Entering text (→52))

●

To print [Location] or the number of days that have passed, either use [Text Stamp] or print using

the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD.

●

The travel date is calculated from the set departure date and the date set in the camera’s clock.

When destination is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based on local destination

time.

●

When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not

displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.

●

When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically cancelled.

●

[Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures.

●

[Location] is not recorded when you record motion pictures.

[Wi-Fi]

Settings: [Wi-Fi Function] / [Wi-Fi Setup]

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. (→227, 272)

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Beep]

Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds.

■

[Beep Volume]

Settings:

(High) / (Low) / (Off)

■

[Shutter Vol.]

Settings:

(High) / (Low) / (Off)

■

[Shutter Tone]

Settings:

/ /

●

When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [Shutter Vol.] are set to “Off”.

[Live View Mode]

Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View screen) when

recording pictures.

Settings

[30fps]

Picture quality has higher priority over display speed and pictures are displayed at

30 fps.

For example, use when you want to record a comparatively slow-moving subject while

confirming the focusing. Minimises power consumption and the operating time is

extended.

[60fps]

Display speed has higher priority over picture quality and pictures are displayed at

60 fps. The displayed pictures will appear slightly grainy.

For example, use when you want to record a fast-moving subject.

●

The [Live View Mode] setting does not affect the recorded picture.

●

The display speed may slow down in dark locations.

●

When the viewfinder is used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to [60fps].

●

When the AC adaptor (optional) is used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to [60fps].

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]

Adjust brightness and colour of the monitor or viewfinder. It is suggested to use the

default settings.

These are intended to provide a preview of the actual picture, as accurately as possible.

Settings

[Brightness]

Adjusts the brightness.

[Contrast]

Adjusts the contrast.

[Saturation]

Adjusts the vividness of colours.

[Red Tint]

Adjusts red hues.

[Blue Tint]

Adjusts blue hues.

Press to select the setting item and press to make adjustments

• You can also make adjustments with the control dial.

Press [MENU/SET]

●

It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in

use.

●

Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not

be affected.

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Monitor Luminance]

Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level.

Settings

The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

The brightness is increased.

The brightness is standard.

The brightness is decreased.

●

Because the picture shown on the monitor screen emphasises brightness, some subjects may

look different than their actual appearance, but this will not affect the recorded picture.

●

[ ] returns to ordinary brightness if there is no operation for 30 seconds when recording. (Press

any button to make the screen brighter again.)

●

Setting [ ] or [ ] reduces the operating time.

●

Cannot select [ ] during playback.

●

When the AC adaptor (optional) is used, the initial setting is [ ].

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Sleep Mode]

The camera automatically turns off if no operation is performed for a preset period of time.

• To restore → Press the shutter button halfway, or turn on the power again.

Settings: [10MIN.] / [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF]

Not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording/playback

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When connected to computer/printer

• During Slide Shows

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

• When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional)

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[USB Mode]

Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with

USB connection cable (supplied).

Settings

[Select on connection]

Select communication method each time you connect to a computer

or PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PictBridge(PTP)]

Select when connecting to a PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PC]

Select when connecting to a computer.

[TV Connection]

Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to a TV or other device.

■

[Video Out]

This setting performs when the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is connected.

Settings

[NTSC] Video output is set to NTSC system.

[PAL] Video output is set to PAL system.

■

[TV Aspect]

This setting performs when an AV cable (optional) is connected.

Settings: [16:9] / [4:3]

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[TV Connection] (continued)

■

[HDMI Mode]

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high-

definition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI micro cable.

Settings

[AUTO]

Automatically sets the output resolution based on information from a

connected TV.

[4K]

Outputs pictures with a resolution of 3840×2160 pixels using a progressive

scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (2,160 lines).

[1080p]

Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (1,080 lines).

[1080i]

Outputs pictures using an interlace scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (1,080 lines).

[720p]

Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (720 lines).

[576p]

/[480p]

Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (576

/480

lines).

When [Video Out] is set to [PAL]

When [Video Out] is set to [NTSC]

●

This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.

●

If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than

[AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[TV Connection] (continued)

■

[VIERA Link]

Enable automatic linking with other VIERA Link-compatible devices, and operability with

a VIERA remote control when connecting via an HDMI micro cable. (→278)

Settings

[ON]

Operations may be performed via the remote control of the VIERA Link-compatible

device.

• Not all operations will be available.

• Operability of the camera’s own buttons will be limited.

[OFF] Operations must be performed via the camera’s own buttons.

●

This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.

[Menu Resume]

Save the last operated menu position.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[Menu Background]

Set the background colour for the menu screen. (→33)

[Menu Information]

Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[Language]

Change display language.

Set the language displayed on the screen.

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Version Disp.]

Check the firmware version of the camera or supplied flash (when the flash is attached).

●

When you press [MENU/SET] while the version is displayed, software information for this unit,

such as the licence, is displayed.

[Self Timer Auto Off]

The self-timer is cancelled if the unit is turned off.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[No.Reset]

Reset picture file numbers. (The folder number is updated and the file number starts from

0001.)

• To reset folder number to 100:

First, format the card, and reset the file numbers using [No.Reset]. Then, select [Yes]

on the folder number reset screen.

●

A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.

Numbers cannot be reset once folder number reaches 999. In this case, save all necessary

pictures to your computer, and format the card (→26).

[Reset]

Reset to the default settings.

■

[Reset Rec. settings?]

■

[Reset setup/custom settings?]

●

Information registered in [Face Recog.] is reset if recording settings are reset.

●

When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset:

• The [Profile Setup] setting

• The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort], [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu

●

Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.

SQW0024

Preparations

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31)

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

Returns [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings.

●

If you want to dispose or give away your camera, always reset it to prevent your personal

information from being mistakenly used.

●

When you request your camera to be fixed, backup your personal information and always reset it

as well.

[Format]

Format (initialise) a memory card. (→26)

SQW0024

Preparations

Entering Text

Use the cursor button to enter names with the Face Recognition function and in [Profile

Setup] (babies and pets), or to register locations in [Travel Date] etc.

• Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered.

• Example of operation for displaying a screen:

→ [Rec] → [Profile Setup] → [SET] → [Baby1] → [Name] → [SET]

Use to select characters

Press [MENU/SET] several times until the

desired character is displayed

Text is inserted at the cursor position.

• [ ]: Enter a blank.

■

To change the character type

• Press [DISP.] button

• Use

to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

Cursor position

■

To continue entering characters

• Use

to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

• Move the zoom lever toward T side

• Turn the control dial to the right

■

Editing text

Use to select [ ] [ ] and press [MENU/SET]. Then, move the cursor

to the text to edit

• You can also use the zoom lever or control dial to reposition the cursor.

Use to select [Delete] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the correct text, and then press [MENU/SET]

When you are finished entering text, use to select

[Set] and press [MENU/SET]

●

A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters when setting names in

[Face Recog.]).

●

A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] (maximum of

6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).

SQW0024

Basics

Holding the camera

• To avoid camera shake, hold it with both hands keeping

your arms close to your body while standing with your

feet slightly apart.

• Do not touch the lens.

• Do not block the microphone when recording motion

pictures.

• Do not block the AF Assist Lamp, or the flash when

you take a picture using it. Do not look at it from close

range.

• Make sure that the camera does not move at the

moment the shutter button is pressed.

AF Assist Lamp

Shoulder strap

Microphone

• We recommend using the supplied shoulder strap to avoid dropping the camera.

About the direction detect function

Still pictures recorded with the camera held vertically can be

automatically displayed in portrait orientation during playback.

(Only when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)

• The direction detect function may not operate correctly if

pictures are taken with the camera pointing up or down.

• Motion pictures cannot be displayed in portrait orientation.

SQW0024

Basics

Recording pictures using the viewfinder

When you use the viewfinder, you can check the view of the subject even if you are in a

bright area.

Switching between the monitor and viewfinder

You can operate the [LVF]/[Fn3] button in two ways, using it

either as the [LVF] button or as a function button [Fn3].

You can use this button as the [LVF] button at the time of

purchase.

• For details on the function button, refer to (→37).

Eye Sensor

[LVF] button

Press [LVF] button

• The display is switched as shown below.

Automatic switching

between viewfinder and

monitor

Viewfinder display Monitor display

Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor

For automatic switching between the viewfinder and monitor, the eye sensor

automatically switches the display to viewfinder when your eye or an object moves close

to the viewfinder.

• The eye sensor may not work correctly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses,

the way you hold the camera, or whether the eyepiece and nearby area are exposed to

strong light. In this case, press the [LVF] button to switch the display.

• During motion picture playback or Slide Show, the eye sensor will not automatically

switch the display to the viewfinder.

• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be set using [Eye Sensor] in the [Custom] menu.

(→55)

SQW0024

Basics

Recording pictures using the viewfinder

Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the

display between the viewfinder and monitor

→ [Custom] → [Eye Sensor]

[Sensitivity]

Use this setting to set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

[HIGH] / [LOW]

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

Use this setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor.

[LVF/MON AUTO] (Automatic switching between viewfinder and

monitor ) / [LVF] (Viewfinder display) / [MON] (Monitor display)

• After the display is switched using the [LVF] button, the setting of [LVF/

Monitor Switch] will also change.

About diopter adjustment

Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that you can see the

viewfinder clearly.

Turn the diopter adjustment dial to adjust until you are able to

clearly see the characters displayed in the viewfinder.

Diopter adjustment dial

About Eye Sensor AF

If the eye sensor is activated when [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON],

the camera automatically adjusts the focus.

• Eye Sensor AF adjusts focus only once when you look into the viewfinder. It does not

continuously adjust the focus while you are looking into the viewfinder.

●

Even when [Eye Sensor AF] is set and the camera automatically adjusts the focus, a beep will not

sound.

Not available in the following case:

●

[Eye Sensor AF] may not work when the lighting is low.

SQW0024

Basics

Taking pictures

• Press the [ ] button ( ) to set the drive mode to [ ] ([Single]).

Select the recording mode (→59)

Adjust focus according to subject

Press halfway (press lightly to focus)

• The aperture value and shutter speed are displayed.

(If the aperture value and shutter speed are shown

in red and flashing, you do not have the appropriate

exposure, unless you are using the flash.)

• When you take a picture in a dark location, [ ] is

displayed for the focus display and it may take longer

to adjust focus than usual.

• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] in the [Rec] menu is set to

[AFF] or [AFC]

– A beep sounds only the first time the camera is

focused while you press the shutter button halfway.

– When Auto Focus mode is set to Custom Multi, such

as [ ] and [ ], the AF area will be momentarily

displayed only for the first time when the camera is

focused while you press the shutter button halfway.

Focus display

( When focus is aligned:

illuminated

When focus is not aligned:

flashing)

Aperture value

Shutter speed

AF area

( When focus is aligned:

green)

Take a picture

Press fully (press the button all the way to record)

●

The focus display flashes and beep sounds when focus is not aligned.

Use the focus range displayed in red as a reference.

Even if the focus display is lit, the camera may be unable to bring the

subject into focus if it is out of range.

●

The AF area display may be larger depending on recording conditions

such as dark locations or zoom ratio.

●

The quality of the picture display may be lower during Auto Focus.

Focus display

Focus range

SQW0024

Basics

Taking pictures

●

Subjects/environments which may make focusing difficult:

• Fast-moving or extremely bright objects, or objects with no colour contrast.

• Taking pictures through glass or near objects emitting light.

• In the dark, or with significant jitter.

• When too close to object or when taking pictures of both distant and close

objects together in the same picture.

Displaying still pictures immediately after taking them

→ [Custom] → [Auto Review]

[Duration Time]

Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures.

[HOLD]: Displaying pictures until you press the shutter button halfway

[5SEC] / [4SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC] / [OFF]

[Playback

Operation

Priority]

[ON]: During [Auto Review], you can switch the playback screen or delete

pictures.

[OFF]: During [Auto Review], you can perform the same button operations as

when you take a picture.

• When [Duration Time] is set to [HOLD], [Playback Operation Priority] is fixed to [ON].

SQW0024

Basics

Recording motion pictures

You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard,

as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in

MP4. (→194)

Audio is recorded in stereo.

Press the motion picture button to start

recording

• Immediately release the motion picture button after

pressing it.

• You can record motion pictures fitting each Recording

Mode (→59).

• While you are recording motion pictures, the recording

status indicator (red) will flash.

• If you do not perform any operation for approximately

1 minute or longer, some of the information on the

screen is turned off. To display the information again,

press the [DISP.] button.

• Do not block the microphones when recording motion

pictures.

• You can also use zoom while recording motion

pictures.

– The operating sounds of the zoom lever or control

ring may be recorded in some cases.

• Still pictures can be taken during motion picture

recording. (→198)

Elapsed recording time

Remaining recording time

(approx.)

Recording state indicator

Press the motion picture button again to end recording

●

For details, read “Recording motion pictures”. (→187)

SQW0024

Basics

Select the recording mode

To select the recording mode using the aperture ring and shutter speed

dial

Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial

• Slowly turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial until they

click to properly align the position.

You can set the aperture ring to [A] (AUTO) or to values between

[1.7] and [16].

To select [Intelligent Auto] Mode

Press [iA] button

• [Intelligent Auto] Mode is set and the recording mode icon

changes to [

]. When you press the [iA] button again, the

recording mode is switched to one that enables settings to be

made using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial.

• When [Intelligent Auto] Mode is selected, the recording mode

that was set using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial is

cancelled.

[Intelligent Auto] Mode (→75)

Take pictures with automatic settings.

[Program AE] Mode (→81)

Record pictures with the aperture value and shutter speed settings automatically

adjusted.

[Aperture-Priority] Mode (→83)

Determine aperture, then record pictures.

[Shutter-Priority] Mode (→84)

Determine shutter speed, then record pictures.

[Manual Exposure] Mode (→86)

Determine the aperture value and shutter speed respectively, and then record

pictures.

SQW0024

Basics

Select the recording mode

Registering a combination of settings to be used during recording

(Custom Set)

You can register up to three combinations of your preferred menu settings. Selecting

[Utilize Custom Set feature] from the [Custom] menu enables you to switch quickly to the

settings you selected for the custom settings.

■

Registering the custom set

Set your preferred menu settings such as [Rec] menu, [Motion Picture] menu, and

[Custom] menu

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Cust.Set Mem.]

Use to select custom set (C1-C3) for registration and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

●

The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.

[Rec] menu [Setup] menu [Playback] menu

• Data registered with [Face

Recog.]

• The [Profile Setup] setting

• All menus • [Rotate Disp.]

• [Picture Sort]

• [Delete Confirmation]

■

Using the custom set

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Utilize Custom Set feature]

Use to select custom set

Press [MENU/SET]

• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the

custom set.

Using the function button to call up the custom settings

Setting the function button to [Utilize Custom Set feature] allows you to switch quickly to

your preferred settings by pressing the function button.

Assign [Utilize Custom Set feature] to your preferred function button using [Fn Button

Set] in the [Custom] menu. (→37)

Press the function button to which [Utilize Custom Set feature] is assigned. Use to

select custom set and press [MENU/SET]

SQW0024

Basics

Select the recording mode

When changing the menu settings

Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily while any one of the custom settings is

selected, the currently registered settings will remain unchanged.

To change the currently registered settings, overwrite the registered data using [Cust.Set

Mem.] on the [Custom] menu.

Not available in the following case:

• In the [Intelligent Auto] Mode

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the recording

screen

You can also turn off the recording information (such as icons for various settings) and the

level gauge (→66).

Press [DISP.] button to switch the display

• You can use [Monitor Disp. Style] and [LVF Disp.Style]

in the [Custom] menu to select either [ ] (Monitor

style display layout) or [ ] (Live View Finder style

display layout) for the display screen of the monitor

and viewfinder.

■

[ ] Monitor style display layout

• The display is switched as shown below. (Example of monitor style display)

With information

Without information

With information

level gauge

Without information

level gauge

Turned off

Monitor recording

information screen

When [Histogram] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], a histogram is displayed. (→64) When

[Expo.Meter] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the exposure meter is displayed. (→81)

This screen is displayed only when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].

(→65) While you are checking the recording information on the monitor, you can use the

viewfinder to record pictures.

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the recording screen

■

[ ] Live View Finder style display layout

• The display is switched as shown below. (Example of viewfinder style display)

With information

(Detailed

information)

With information

(Detailed information)

level gauge

With information

level gauge

When [Histogram] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], a histogram is displayed. (→64) When

[Expo.Meter] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the exposure meter is displayed. (→81)

●

If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information

on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button.

Switching the monitor display method

→ [Custom] → [Monitor Disp. Style]

[

]: Live View Finder style display layout

[ ]: Monitor style display layout

Switching the viewfinder display method

→ [Custom] → [LVF Disp.Style]

[

]: Live View Finder style display layout

[ ]: Monitor style display layout

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the recording screen

Enabling/disabling the histogram display

→ [Custom] → [Histogram] → [ON] / [OFF]

Use

to set the position.

Displays distribution of brightness in picture – e.g.

if the graph peaks at the right, this means there are

several bright areas in the picture. A peak in the centre

represents correct brightness (correct exposure). This

can be used as a reference for exposure correction, etc.

(Example)

Dark ← OK → Bright

●

When the histogram is not the same as that of the recorded picture under the following conditions,

histogram will be displayed in orange:

• When manual exposure assist indicates settings other than 0 EV in [Manual Exposure] Mode or

during Exposure Compensation.

• When the flash fires.

• When the correct exposure is not achieved or when the brightness of the screen cannot be

displayed accurately in a dark location.

●

The histogram displayed during recording is only a reference.

●

The histogram is different from those displayed using the image editing software of a computer.

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the recording screen

Enabling/disabling the guideline display

→ [Custom] → [Guide Line] → [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]

• The guideline is not displayed during panorama picture recording.

When you select [

], you can use to set the

position.

Turning on/off the recording information screen of the monitor

→ [Custom] → [Monitor Info. Disp.] → [ON] / [OFF]

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the recording screen

Using the level gauge

If you want to make sure that the camera is not slanted or tilted, for example, when you

take a picture of a landscape, use the level gauge indication as a reference.

Press [DISP.] button to switch the display

Press the button to switch the display. Press the button until the

level gauge is displayed.

Correct camera angle

■

Using the level gauge

The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the camera so that it

matches the white line.

Tilting up or down

• In this case, it is facing

upward.

Tilting left or right

• In this case, the right side has

dropped.

• When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.

• When pictures are taken in portrait orientation, the level gauge is automatically

switched to one for portrait orientation.

●

Even when angle is more or less corrected, there may be an error of about ±1 degree.

●

When [Level Gauge] is assigned to a function button, you can turn the level gauge on and off

every time you press the function button.

Not available in the following cases:

●

When the camera is being moved, the level gauge may not be displayed correctly.

●

The level gauge may not be displayed correctly or the direction detect function (→53) may not

operate correctly if the pictures are taken with the camera pointing sharply up or down.

SQW0024

Basics

Viewing your pictures

Press the Playback button

Press or turn the control dial to

select the picture to be displayed

• When you press and hold , the pictures are

displayed one after another.

• The playback speed of pictures varies depending on

the playback conditions.

■

Ending Playback

Press the Playback button again or press the Motion picture button.

The Playback can also be ended by pressing the shutter button halfway.

●

When the camera is switched to the playback screen, the lens barrel is retracted after approx.

15 seconds.

Not available in the following cases:

●

This camera is compliant with the unified DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard

formulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA),

and with Exif (Exchangeable image file format). Files that are not DCF-compliant cannot be played

back.

●

It may not be possible to properly play back pictures taken using other cameras on this unit or it

may not be possible to use the functions of this unit for those pictures.

Sending pictures to the WEB services

If you press while a single picture is being displayed, you can send the picture to the

WEB service quickly. (→254)

SQW0024

Basics

Viewing your pictures

Zooming in and viewing “Playback Zoom”

Move the zoom lever toward T side

• Each time you move the zoom lever toward the T side, the

magnification increases through four levels: 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x.

(The picture quality displayed becomes successively lower.)

• To reduce zoom → Move the zoom lever toward W side.

• Move zoom position → Press

Current zoom position

●

Playback zoom cannot be used during motion picture playback, automatic scrolling playback of

panorama pictures or continuous playback.

Viewing a list of pictures “Multi Playback”

Move the zoom lever toward W side

• Move the zoom lever toward the W side and you can switch the

display methods in the following order: 1-picture screen (full-

screen) → 12-picture screen → 30-picture screen → Calendar

screen. (Move the lever to the T side to return.)

• When you select a picture using the cursor button and press

[MENU/SET] on the 12-picture or 30-picture screen, the selected

picture is displayed on the 1-picture screen (full-screen).

• Pictures can also be selected with the control dial.

●

Pictures displayed with [!] cannot be played back.

SQW0024

Basics

Viewing your pictures

Viewing pictures by their recording date “Calendar Playback”

Move the zoom lever toward the W side to display the

calendar screen

Use to select recording date and press

[MENU/SET]

• Pictures are displayed in a 12-picture screen.

• You can also select the date with the control dial.

Selected date

●

You can display the calendar between January 2000 to December 2099.

●

Only months when pictures were taken are shown on the calendar screen. Pictures taken without

clock settings are displayed with the date 1st January, 2014.

●

Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed in the calendar screen

using the appropriate date for the destination’s time zone.

SQW0024

Basics

Viewing your pictures

Viewing motion pictures

This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.

Select a picture with the motion picture icon ([ ]) in

playback mode, and press to start playback

• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on

the screen.

• Some information will not be displayed for motion pictures

recorded in [AVCHD].

Motion picture recording time

Example:

29 minutes and

30 seconds: [29m30s]

Operations during motion picture playback

: Pause/play

: Stop

: Fast rewind (2 steps

)/Single-frame rewind

(while paused)

: Fast forward (2 steps

)/Single-frame forward (while paused)

Control dial (counterclockwise): Volume down

Control dial (clockwise): Volume up

[MENU/SET]: Capturing still pictures from motion pictures (while paused) (→203)

The fast forward or rewind speed increases if you press again.

Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] are rewound frame by frame approximately every

0.5 seconds.

• If is pressed during fast forward or rewind, it will return to normal playback speed.

●

Motion pictures can be viewed on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD.

●

Motion pictures that were recorded by setting the picture effect (Filter) to [Miniature Effect] are

played back at approximately 8x speed.

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the playback

screen

You can disable the display of picture information (file number, etc.) and recording

information (settings used for recording, etc.) when a picture is played back.

Press [DISP.] button to switch the display

• The display is switched as shown below.

With information

Detailed information

display

Histogram display

Without

information

10:00 1.DEC.2014

100-0001

100-00011/98

Without information

If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information

on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button.

During Playback Zoom, Motion Picture Playback, Automatic Scrolling Playback of panorama

pictures, continuous playback or Slide Show: You can only turn the display on or off.

This screen is displayed only when [Highlight] (→72) in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].

●

A histogram of each colour, including R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance), is separately

displayed during playback.

●

During Multi Playback or calendar screen: Display cannot be changed.

SQW0024

Basics

Switching the display information on the playback screen

Enabling/disabling the overexposed area display

→ [Custom] → [Highlight] → [ON] / [OFF]

You can set overexposed areas (areas that are too bright and where there are no shades

of grey) to flash on the screen when the [Auto Review] function is activated or during

playback. This does not affect recorded pictures.

• To reduce overexposed areas, record

a picture by setting negative exposure

compensation (→135) using the histogram

display (→64) and so on as a reference.

(The right edge of the histogram shows the

overexposed portion.)

• This feature is disabled during Multi

Playback, Calendar Playback or Playback

Zoom.

[ON] [OFF]

SQW0024

Basics

Deleting pictures

Deleted pictures cannot be recovered.

Pictures will not be deleted in the following cases:

• Protected pictures.

• Card switch is in “LOCK” position.

• Pictures that are not based on the DCF standard. (→67)

●

Do not turn off the camera while deleting.

●

Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

[Delete Single]

Press [ ] button to delete displayed picture

Use to select [Delete Single] and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press

[MENU/SET].

Delete SingleDelete Single

Delete Multi

Delete All

●

You can set either [Yes] or [No] as the default setting on the deletion confirmation

screen when you perform [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu. [No] is

selected at the time of purchase. (→223)

SQW0024

Basics

Deleting pictures

To delete multiple (up to 100)/To delete all pictures

A picture group (→201) is handled as 1 picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture

group are deleted.)

Press [ ] button while viewing a picture

Use to select [Delete Multi]/[Delete All] and press

[MENU/SET]

• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial.

• When [Delete All] is selected

→ A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press

[MENU/SET].

• You can select [All Delete Except Favorite] in [Delete All] if there

are pictures that have been set as [Favorite] (→219).

Delete SingleDelete Single

Delete MultiDelete Multi

Delete All

(When [Delete Multi] is selected)

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

• Pictures can also be selected with the control dial.

Picture selected

(When [Delete Multi] is selected) Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET].

• May take time depending on number of pictures deleted.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings

[Intelligent Auto] Mode

Recording mode:

This mode is recommended for those who want to point and shoot as the camera

optimises settings to match the subject and recording environment.

The camera optimises the settings and the following functions are activated automatically.

• Automatic Scene Detection / Backlight Compensation / [Face/Eye Detection] /

Auto White Balance / Intelligent ISO sensitivity control / [Red-Eye Removal] / [i.Zoom] /

[i.Resolution] / [Stabilizer] / [i.Dynamic] / [Long Shtr NR] / [Quick AF] / [AF Assist Lamp]

Press [iA] button

The camera switches to [Intelligent Auto] Mode.

• When you press the [iA] button again, the recording

mode is switched to one that is set using the aperture

ring and shutter speed dial.

Point the camera at the subject

• When the camera identifies the optimal scene, the

icon for each scene turns blue for 2 seconds and then

changes to the normal red indication.

• When you press and press the shutter button

halfway, AF Tracking is activated. For details (→117).

Changing the operation method of the [iA] button

→ [Custom] → [iA Button Switch]

[Single Press]: When you press the [iA] button, the camera switches to [Intelligent Auto]

Mode.

[Press and hold]: If you press and hold the [iA] button, the camera switches to

[Intelligent Auto] Mode.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode

Automatic Scene Detection

When taking pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro]

[i-Night Portrait]

[i-Night Scenery]

[i-Handheld Night

Shot]

[i-Food]

[i-Baby]

[i-Sunset] When scene does not correspond to any of the above

When the flash (supplied/optional) is used.

When [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON]. (→78)

When children (that are registered in the camera with Face Recognition) under 3 years old are

recognised.

When recording motion pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Low Light] [i-Macro]

When scene does not correspond to any of the above

• In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the camera adjusts the focus on the eye that is closest to this

unit and matches the exposure with the face. In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the eye to be

focused on cannot be changed. ([Face/Eye Detection])

• When the camera identifies [ ] as the optimal scene and if the camera determines

that jitter is reduced by the use of a tripod or by other means, a shutter speed that

is slower than usual is selected. After pressing the shutter button, do not move the

camera while recording.

• Automatic Scene Detection does not function until the focus is locked on a subject

during AF Tracking.

• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON] and if the camera recognises a face similar to a

registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the [ ], [ ], and [ ]

icons.

●

Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be determined for the same

subject.

About Backlight Compensation

Backlight compensation is automatically activated in [Intelligent Auto] Mode. Backlight

is a condition where a light shines from behind a subject. When there is a backlight,

the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically attempt to correct it by

increasing the brightness of the picture.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode

Using the flash (supplied/optional)

Turn off the camera

Remove the hot shoe cover

Attach the flash

Turn on the camera and the flash

For details (→176, 291).

■

Flash

When the [ON/OFF] switch for the flash (supplied/optional) is set to [OFF], the flash is

set to [

] (Forced Flash Off). When the [ON/OFF] switch is set to [ON], the flash is set

to [ ] (AUTO).

When the flash is turned on, the camera automatically sets [ ], [ ] (Auto/Red-Eye

Reduction), [ ], or [ ] based on the type of subject and brightness.

●

When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the [Red-Eye Removal] function is activated to automatically

detect red-eye and correct the picture data.

●

When [ ] or [ ] is selected, the shutter speed is reduced.

Available menus

You can set only the following menus.

Menu Item

[Rec] [Picture Size] / [Quality] / [AFS/AFF/AFC] / [Burst Rate] / [Self Timer] /

[iHandheld Night Shot] / [iHDR] / [Time Lapse Shot] /

[Stop Motion Animation] / [Face Recog.]

[Motion Picture] [Rec Format] / [Rec Quality] / [AFS/AFF/AFC]

[Custom] [Silent Mode] / [Guide Line] / [Remaining Disp.]

[Setup] All menu items can be set. (→41)

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot])

If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld, [iHandheld

Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less noise without using a tripod

by combining a burst of pictures.

→ [Rec] → [iHandheld Night Shot] → [ON] / [OFF]

●

The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●

A message indicating that multiple pictures are to be recorded appears on the screen. After the

shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●

When the camera is fixed in place on a tripod or by other means, [ ] will not be identified.

●

The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.

Not available in the following cases:

●

This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●

[iHandheld Night Shot] cannot be used in the following cases:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode

Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich

gradation ([iHDR])

When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,

[iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to

create a single still picture rich in gradation.

[iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the screen.

→ [Rec] → [iHDR] → [ON] / [OFF]

●

The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●

A message indicating that multiple pictures are to be recorded appears on the screen. After the

shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●

Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you can record another picture.

●

In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was moving.

Not available in the following cases:

●

This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●

[iHDR] cannot be used in the following cases:

• When the flash is used

• When using [Burst]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and

shutter speed

Recording mode:

You can set the exposure using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial settings.

Using the [Rec] menu to change settings and set up your own recording environment.

You can also record pictures by applying picture effects. (→89)

Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial to set your

preferred recording mode.

Set the aperture ring where it clicks.

Align with

the indicator

Recording mode Aperture ring Shutter speed dial

[Program AE] Mode (→81) [A] (AUTO) [A] (AUTO)

[Aperture-Priority] Mode (→83)

Your preferred settings

[A] (AUTO)

[Shutter-Priority] Mode (→84) [A] (AUTO)

Your preferred settings

[Manual Exposure] Mode (→86)

Your preferred settings

• In [Aperture-Priority] Mode, [Shutter-Priority] Mode, and [Manual Exposure] Mode,

the effect of the aperture value and shutter speed you have set is not applied to the

recording screen. To check the effect on the recording screen, use [Preview] Mode.

(→88)

The brightness of the screen may vary from the actual pictures recorded. Check the

brightness of pictures using the playback screen.

A faster shutter speed than the set shutter speed may be used when you record a

motion picture.

You can set the aperture values between F1.7 and F16.

You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom position.

You can set the shutter speed between 1 second and 1/4000 seconds.

Turn the control ring or control dial to set the shutter speed in the following cases.

• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second

• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value

and shutter speed ([Program AE] Mode)

Take pictures using automatic aperture values and shutter speed settings in accordance

with the brightness of a subject.

Turn the aperture ring to select [A] (AUTO)

Turn the shutter speed dial to select [A] (AUTO)

[Program AE] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes

to [P].

Press the shutter button halfway

• If the aperture value and shutter speed flash red, you do not have

the correct exposure.

2500 125 60 30 15

5.64.02.0 2.8

Programme Shift indication

While the numeric values are displayed in yellow (approximately 10 seconds),

turn the control dial to change the values using Programme Shift (→82)

• To cancel Programme Shift, either turn off the camera or turn the control dial until the

Programme Shift indication turns off.

• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the compensation value.

(→135)

Enabling/disabling the exposure meter display

→ [Custom] → [Expo.Meter] → [ON] / [OFF]

●

When you set this function to [ON], an exposure meter is

displayed during Programme Shift, aperture setting, and

shutter speed operation.

●

Proper exposure is not possible in the range indicated in red.

●

If the exposure meter is not displayed, press the [DISP.]

button to switch the display of the monitor. (→62)

●

The exposure meter will turn off if no operation is performed

for approximately 4 seconds.

Exposure meter

2500 125 60 30 15

5.64.02.0 2.8

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

About Programme Shift

The function for maintaining the same exposure (brightness) while changing the shutter

speed and aperture value combination is called “Programme Shift”. You can use

“Programme Shift” to take pictures by adjusting the shutter speed and aperture value

even in [Program AE] Mode.

1.4

2.0

2.8

4.0

5.6

8.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1613 14 15

1/2

1/4

1/8

1/15

1/30

1/60

1/125

1/250

1/500

1/1000

1/2000

1/4000

1/8000

1/16000

(Aperture value)

(EV)

(Shutter speed)

Programme Shift amount

Programme Shift diagram

Programme Shift limit

●

EV is an abbreviation of “Exposure Value”, a unit indicating the amount of exposure. The EV

changes with the aperture value or the shutter speed.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Programme Shift cannot be used in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When [Sensitivity] is set to [

]

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value

([Aperture-Priority] Mode)

When the aperture value is increased, the range of depth in focus expands, and the

picture shows up clearly from the position of the camera to the background. When the

aperture value is reduced, the range of depth in focus shrinks, and the background can

get blurry.

Turn the shutter speed dial to select [A] (AUTO)

Turn the aperture ring to select the aperture value

[Aperture-Priority] Mode is set and the recording mode icon

changes to [A].

• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to

adjust the compensation value. (→135)

Aperture values

that can be set

Shutter speed set (seconds)

F1.7 - F16

60 - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom

position.

605 30 15 8 4

8.0 11 16

Aperture value

Exposure meter

●

When you turn the aperture ring, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is not

achieved, the numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.

●

If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed

([Shutter-Priority] Mode)

When you increase the shutter speed, you can reduce jitter when recording a subject.

When you decrease the shutter speed, the subject’s movement is shown.

Turn the aperture ring to select [A] (AUTO)

Turn the shutter speed dial to select the shutter speed

[Shutter-Priority] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes

to [S].

• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to

adjust the compensation value. (→135)

Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds)

Aperture value

set

60 - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

F1.7 - F16

8 15 30 60 125

2.02.85.68.01 4.0

Shutter speed

Exposure meter

■

Setting the shutter speed to values not provided on the shutter speed dial

Turn the control ring or control dial to set the following shutter speeds. Check the shutter speed on

the screen.

For details on setting the shutter method, refer to (→140).

• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second

Turn the shutter speed dial to select [4000-] or [1+]

Turn the control ring or control dial to select the shutter speed

• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps

You can set the shutter speed from the setting value of the shutter speed dial in the range of ± 2/3

steps.

Example: To set the shutter speed to 1/400 seconds

Turn the shutter speed dial to select [500]

Turn the control ring or control dial to select [400]

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

●

When you turn the shutter speed dial, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is

not achieved, the numeric value of the shutter speed is shown in red.

●

If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

●

If you switch the recording mode to [Shutter-Priority] Mode when [Sensitivity] is set to [ ],

[Sensitivity] will change to [AUTO].

●

We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

([Manual Exposure] Mode)

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.

The Manual Exposure Assist appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate the

exposure.

Turn the aperture ring to select the aperture value

Turn the shutter speed dial to select the shutter speed

[Manual Exposure] Mode is set and the recording mode icon

changes to [M].

Aperture values that

can be set

Shutter speeds that can be set

(seconds)

F1.7 - F16

T (Time),

60 - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom

position.

You may not be able to select some shutter speeds depending

on the aperture value.

60 125 250 500 1

000

5.64.02.0 2.8

Shutter speed

Manual

Exposure Assist

Aperture value

Exposure meter

■

Setting the shutter speed to values not provided on the shutter speed dial

Turn the control ring or control dial to set the following shutter speeds. For the setting procedures,

refer to (→84).

• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second

• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps

●

If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

●

If you switch the recording mode to [Manual Exposure] Mode when [Sensitivity] is set to [ ],

[Sensitivity] will change to [AUTO].

●

We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Manual exposure assist (estimate)

Shows pictures with standard brightness (appropriate exposure).

Shows brighter pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a faster shutter

speed or increase aperture value.

Shows darker pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a slower shutter

speed or reduce aperture value.

About T (time)

When you set the shutter speed to T (time) and fully press the shutter button, the shutter

opens. (Approximately up to 120 seconds)

When you press the shutter button again, the shutter closes. Use this function when you

want to keep the shutter open for an extended period, for example, to record pictures of

fireworks or night scenes.

• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), make sure to use a fully

charged battery (→20).

• Manual exposure assist is not displayed.

• If you set the shutter speed to T (time) when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO], [Sensitivity]

will change to [200].

• You cannot use this function when the electronic shutter is used.

• You can use this function only in [Manual Exposure] Mode.

●

When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), we recommend

using remote recording with a tripod or smartphone as a remote shutter release

(→228, 234), in order to prevent jitter.

●

When you take still pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), the pictures

may have higher noise levels. If you want to suppress noise, we recommend

taking pictures by setting [Long Shtr NR] to [ON] in the [Rec] menu. (→113)

Enabling/disabling the preview of the selected aperture value and

shutter speed effects on the recording screen

→ [Custom] → [Constant Preview] (M Mode) → [ON] / [OFF]

●

This function is disabled when the flash is used.

●

You can use this function only in [Manual Exposure] Mode.

SQW0024

Recording mode

Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed

([Preview] Mode)

Recording mode:

You can use [Preview] Mode to check the effects of the selected aperture value and

shutter speed.

• Checking the effect of the selected aperture value: This enables you to check the

depth of field (focus range) by physically narrowing the lens aperture blades to the

aperture value used for the actual recording.

• Checking the effect of the selected shutter speed: This allows you to check motion

in a scene by displaying the screen at the shutter speed used for the actual recording.

When the shutter speed is increased, the screen is displayed like a frame dropping.

Use this function to check the effect when you want to capture an image in a scene by

stopping the motion, for example, when you take a picture of water flowing.

Assign [Preview] to the function button (→37)

• The following step is an example of assigning [Preview] to the [Fn1] button.

Press the [Fn1] button to switch the confirmation screen

• Every time you press the [Fn1] button, the screen switches.

Normal recording screen Effect of aperture value Effect of shutter speed

Shtr Speed Effect On

Fn1

Shtr Speed Effect Off

Fn1

Depth of field characteristic

Recording

conditions

Aperture value Small Large

Focal length Telephoto Wide-angle

Distance to a subject Close Far

Depth of field

(Focus range)

Shallow (narrow)

Example:

To take a picture by

deliberately blurring the

background

Deep (wide)

Example:

To take a picture by adjusting

the focus while including the

background

●

You can take a picture even when [Preview] Mode is activated.

●

The range in which you can check the effect of a selected shutter speed is between 8 seconds

and 1/16000 seconds.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects

(Filter)

Recording mode:

You can select your own settings from various effects and take pictures while confirming

these effects on the screen. You can set the effects to be applied to a picture by selecting

a sample picture. You can add picture effects while you record a panorama picture.

Press [FILTER] button

Press or turn the control dial to

select the picture effect (Filter)

• You can select from among 22 picture effects (Filter).

(→92 - 99)

• The picture effect for the sample picture you selected

is applied to the picture shown on the preview display.

Preview display

Effect

Press [MENU/SET]

The display of a picture with a selected picture effect

appears on the screen.

Example: When the picture effect ([Sunshine]) is selected

in [Program AE] Mode

Picture effects

(This is not displayed when [No Effect] is

selected.)

Adjusting the picture effect (→91)

(This is displayed only when a picture effect is

selected.)

Changing the picture effect (Filter)

Press the [FILTER] button again and perform the same procedure from step

above.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

●

Settings will be stored even if the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

●

If you do not want to add picture effects, please select [No Effect].

●

When you set a picture effect, the following settings are fixed.

• White Balance: [AWB]

• [Photo Style]: [Standard]

• [Highlight Shadow]: [Standard]

• [i.Dynamic]: [OFF]

• [HDR]: [OFF]

• [Color Space]: [sRGB]

●

The flash is set to [ ] (Forced Flash Off).

●

The display of a picture reflecting a selected effect in the preview screen or recording screen may

differ from the actual recorded pictures.

Switching the display of a selection screen for applying picture effects

(Filter)

Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display

• Every time you press the [DISP.] button, the screen for which picture effects are selected

changes.

• When you switch the screen to the guide display, a description of the picture effects appears.

Normal display Guide display List display

Effect

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

Adjusting the picture effects according to your preferences

You can easily adjust the setting conditions (such as degree and colouring of an effect) of

the picture effects according to your preferences.

Press to display the setting screen

Turn the control dial to adjust the setting conditions of

the picture effects

• The settings that can be adjusted vary depending on the

selected picture effect. Refer to “Items that can be set” for the

corresponding picture effect.

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

• When you select picture effects, [

] appears on the screen.

• If you do not want to change the current setting, select the centre

point (standard) in the adjustment level bar.

Taking two still pictures with and without picture effects

([Simultaneous record w/o filter])

You can take two still pictures at the same time by pressing the shutter button once; one

with effects and one without effects.

→ [Rec] → [Simultaneous record w/o filter]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• When [ON] is set, the camera will take a still picture with the effects applied and then a still picture

without the effects.

• A still picture recorded without effects applied will use the same menu settings as when the picture

effects (Filter) were applied. The following settings are fixed.

– White Balance: [AWB] (You cannot perform fine adjustments.)

– [i.Dynamic]: [OFF]

• After taking the picture, [Auto Review] will display only the still picture with the effects applied.

●

If you set this function to [ON], burst, Auto Bracket, Aspect Bracket, White Balance Bracket, [Time

Lapse Shot], [Stop Motion Animation] and panorama picture recording will be disabled.

●

This function is disabled during motion picture recording.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Expressive]

This effect emphasises the colour to make a pop art picture.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Vividness Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring

[Retro]

This effect gives a faded image.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring Yellowish colouring Reddish colouring

[Old Days]

This effect adds a bright, soft and nostalgic feel to the overall image.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[High Key]

This effect adds a bright, airy and soft feel to the overall image.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring Pinkish colouring Light-bluish colouring

●

When recording a panorama picture in a scene with low brightness, you may

not be able to achieve the desired results.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Low Key]

This effect adds a dark and relaxing feel to the overall image and

enhances bright parts.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring Reddish colouring Bluish colouring

[Sepia]

This effect creates a sepia image.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[Monochrome]

This effect creates a black and white picture.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring Yellowish colouring Bluish colouring

[Dynamic Monochrome]

This effect gives a higher contrast to create an impressive black and

white picture.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Rough Monochrome]

This effect creates a black and white picture with granular noise.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Grainy image

effect

Weak grainy image

effect

Strong grainy image

effect

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay

compared to normal recording.

[Silky Monochrome]

This effect blurs the overall image to add a soft feel to a black and

white picture.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Degree of

defocusing

Slight defocusing

Strong defocusing

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay

compared to normal recording.

[Impressive Art]

This effect gives your photo a dramatic contrast look.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Vividness Black & white Gaudy colouring

●

When recording a panorama picture, the places where successively taken

pictures are stitched may be noticeable.

[High Dynamic]

This effect produces the optimum brightness for both dark and bright

parts.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Vividness Black & white Gaudy colouring

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Cross Process]

This effect gives your photo a dramatic colour look.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring

Greenish colouring / Bluish colouring /

Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring

[Toy Effect]

This effect reduces peripheral brightness to give the impression of a

toy camera.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring Orangish colour Bluish colouring

[Toy Pop]

This effect creates a vivid and bright image with the look of a toy

camera.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Range in which

peripheral

brightness is

reduced

Small

Large

[Bleach Bypass]

This effect gives a higher contrast and a lower saturation to create a

calm and tranquil picture.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Miniature Effect]

This effect blurs peripheral areas to give the impression of a diorama.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Vividness Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring

■

Defocusing a picture

You can create the impression of a diorama by intentionally creating

a blurred area and focusing area using [Miniature Effect]. You can

set the recording direction (direction of blurred area), position and

size of the focusing area.

Press [Fn1] button

Press or to move the focusing area (frame)

Turn the control dial to select the size of the focusing

area (frame)

Press [MENU/SET]

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal

recording.

●

No audio is recorded for motion pictures.

●

When a motion picture is recorded, the finished recording will be approximately 1/8th of the actual

recorded time period. (If you record a motion picture for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture

recording time will be approximately 1 minute.) The recordable time displayed on the camera is

approx. 8x longer than actual time needed for recording. When the Recording Mode is changed, be

sure to check the recordable time.

●

If you stop recording motion pictures too soon, the camera may continue recording until a certain

time. Hold the camera until the camera stops recording.

●

If [MF] is selected for the focus mode, move the focusing area to the position at which the focus has

been adjusted.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Soft Focus]

This effect blurs the overall image to produce a soft feel.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Degree of

defocusing

Slight defocusing

Strong defocusing

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay

compared to normal recording.

[Fantasy]

This effect creates a fantastical image in a pale colour tone.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Vividness Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring

[Star Filter]

This effect transforms pin-points of light into a star effect.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Length of the rays

of light

Rays of light is

short

Rays of light is long

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay

compared to normal recording.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[One Point Color]

This effect leaves one selected colour to emphasise impressiveness.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Amount of colour

retained

Leaves a small

amount of colour

Leaves a large amount

of colour

■

Selecting colour

Press [Fn1] button

Select the colour to be retained with and press

[MENU/SET]

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

●

The selected colour may not be retained for some subjects.

SQW0024

Picture effects (Filter)

Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter)

For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89).

[Sunshine]

This effect adds a cast of light to the scene.

Items that can be set (Press to display the setting screen)

Colouring

Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring /

Bluish colouring / Whitish colouring

■

Setting the light source

Press [Fn1] button

Press to move the centre of the light source to a

different position

• You can move the centre of the light source to the edge of the

screen.

Tips on positioning the centre of the light

source

You can move the centre of the light source to a point

outside the image to obtain a more natural finish.

Turn the control dial to adjust the size of the light source

• You can change the light source among four sizes.

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored.

Press [MENU/SET]

●

The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal

recording.

100

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the picture quality with effects

[Photo Style]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the colours and picture quality according to the concept of the picture that

you want to create.

→ [Rec] → [Photo Style]

[Standard] Standard setting.

[Vivid] Setting with slightly high contrast and saturation.

[Natural] Setting with slightly low contrast.

[Monochrome]

Setting that creates a picture using monochrome shades of grey only,

such as black and white.

[Scenery]

Setting that creates a picture using vivid colours for the blue sky and

green.

[Portrait] Setting that produces the look of a healthy complexion.

[Custom]

Setting for using colours and picture quality that were registered in

advance.

●

[Photo Style] is fixed to [Standard] when the picture effect (Filter) is set.

●

The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu

is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

101

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style]

■

Adjusting the picture quality

Press to select the type of Photo Style

Standard

Press to select an item and press to adjust

[Contrast]

[+] Increases the contrast in a picture.

[–] Decreases the contrast in a picture.

[Sharpness]

[+] Enhances the outlines in a picture.

[–] Softens the outlines in a picture.

[Noise Reduction]

[+]

Increases the noise reduction effect to reduce noise. This

setting may slightly lower the resolution.

[–]

Lowers the noise reduction effect to achieve a picture

quality with clearer resolution.

[Saturation]

[+] Gaudy colouring

[–] Subdued colouring

[Color Tone]

[+] Bluish colouring

[–] Yellowish colouring

[Filter Effect]

[Yellow]

Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Low)

Records a blue sky clearly.

[Orange]

Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Medium)

Records a blue sky with vibrant colours.

[Red]

Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: High)

Records a blue sky with even more vibrant colours.

[Green]

Applies subdued colouring for the skin and lips of a

person. Emphasises green leaves and makes them

brighter.

[Off] —

[Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. Otherwise, [Saturation] is

displayed.

[Filter Effect] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected.

• When the picture quality is adjusted, [+] will be displayed in the icon.

Press [MENU/SET]

■

Registering the setting for the adjusted picture quality to [Custom]

Perform the picture quality adjustment in Step of “Adjusting the picture quality” and

press the [DISP.] button

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET].

102

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting highlights and shadows

[Highlight Shadow]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while confirming the brightness of

these areas on the screen.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Highlight Shadow]

Press to select the item

([Standard]) No adjustments.

([Higher contrast])

Makes the highlighted areas brighter and shadowed areas

darker.

([Lower contrast])

Makes the highlighted areas darker and shadowed areas

brighter.

([Brighten shadows]) Makes the shadowed areas brighter.

/ / (Custom)

You can set a custom registration shape.

Turn the control ring to adjust the

brightness of the highlighted areas

and turn the control dial to adjust the

brightness of the shadowed areas

• To register your preferred settings, press to select

the registration target icon (Custom 1 ([ ]), Custom 2

([ ]), and Custom 3 ([ ])).

Highlighted area

Shadowed area

Preview display

Press [MENU/SET]

●

You can press the [DISP.] button on the brightness adjustment screen to switch the screen display.

●

The settings registered in [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.

●

The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the

camera is turned off.

●

The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu

is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

103

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Recording mode:

In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of

white takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is

closest to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.

Press [WB] button ( )

Turn the control dial to select the White

Balance and press [MENU/SET]

[AWB] Automatic adjustment in accordance with the light source.

[

]

Adjust to the colour under a clear sky.

[

]

Adjust to the colour under a cloudy sky.

[

]

Adjust to the colour in the shade.

[

]

Adjust to the colour under incandescent lights.

[

]

Adjust to the colour that is optimal for taking pictures using the

flash.

[

]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

Use the White Balance value that was set manually.

[

] Use the preset colour temperature setting.

The [AWB] setting is applied when recording motion pictures.

Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixtures, etc., the optimal White Balance will

vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

●

The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a flash or the subject is

recorded outside of the effective flash range (→177).

●

[White Balance] setting is fixed to [AWB] in the following case:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set

104

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

■

Auto White Balance

When [AWB] (Automatic White Balance) is set, the colouring is adjusted in accordance

with the light source. However, if the scene is too bright or too dark or if other extreme

conditions apply, the pictures may appear reddish or bluish. The White Balance may

not operate correctly if there is a multiple number of light sources. In that case, set the

[White Balance] to settings other than [AWB] to adjust the colouring.

: [AWB] operational range

10000K

9000K

8000K

7000K

6000K

5000K

4000K

3000K

2000K

Cloudy sky (rain)

Shade

Incandescent lighting

Sunset/sunrise

Candlelight

Sunlight

White fluorescent lighting

Blue sky

K=Kelvin Colour Temperature

Setting the White Balance manually

Take a picture of a white object under the target light source to adjust colours.

Press [WB] button ( )

Turn the control dial to select [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ], and press

Point the camera at a white object such as a piece of

paper, ensuring that it is inside the frame at the centre

of the screen, and press [MENU/SET]

●

It may not be possible to set the correct White Balance if subjects are too bright or too dark. In this

case, adjust the brightness and try to set the White Balance again.

105

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Setting the White Balance using colour temperature

You can set the White Balance using colour temperature. Colour temperature is a

numeric value that expresses the colour of light (unit: K

). A picture becomes bluish when

the colour temperature value is higher, and reddish when the temperature value is lower.

Kelvin

Press [WB] button ( )

Turn the control dial to select [ ] and press

Use to select the colour temperature value and

press [MENU/SET]

• You can set the colour temperature from 2,500 K to 10,000 K.

Performing White Balance fine adjustments

White Balance settings can be individually fine-tuned if colours still do not appear as

anticipated.

Select the White Balance and press

Use to perform White Balance fine

adjustments

: A (amber: orangish colours) : B (blue: bluish colours)

: G (green: greenish colours) : M (magenta: reddish

colours)

• Pressing [DISP.] button resets the position back to the centre.

Press [MENU/SET]

●

When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the A (amber) or B (blue) side,

the colour of the White Balance icon displayed on the screen will change to the fine-tuned colour.

●

When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the G (green) or M (magenta)

side, [+] (green) or [-] (magenta) will be displayed in the White Balance icon on the screen.

●

Settings remain applied when using flash.

●

You can perform fine adjustments of the White Balance independently for each White Balance

setting item.

●

When you set a new White Balance value by selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ], or change the

colour temperature by selecting [

], the White Balance fine adjustment level will be returned to

the standard setting (centre point).

106

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Bracket recording using White Balance

Bracket settings are performed based on the fine adjustment values for White Balance,

and three pictures with different colouring are automatically recorded when the shutter

button is pressed once.

Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in

step

of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments”

and turn the control dial to perform the Bracket setting

Turning the control dial to the right : Horizontal ([A] to [B])

Turning the control dial to the left : Vertical ([G] to [M])

Press [MENU/SET]

●

When the White Balance Bracket is set, [BKT] appears on the White Balance icon.

●

When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode]), the White Balance Bracket setting is

cancelled.

●

The shutter sound will be emitted only once.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The White Balance Bracket does not function in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• During motion picture recording

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

• When the [Quality] setting is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

107

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Changing the aspect ratio of the still pictures

Recording mode:

You can easily switch the aspect ratio of still pictures using the aspect ratio selector

switch.

Switching the aspect ratio selector switch

[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 TV

[1:1] Aspect ratio of a square image

[16:9] Aspect ratio of high-definition TV, etc.

[3:2] Aspect ratio of standard film cameras

●

Edges may be cut off when printing - be sure to check in advance. (→324)

Not available in the following case:

●

During panorama picture recording

108

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Setting the picture size

Recording mode:

The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even

when they are printed onto large sheets.

→ [Rec] → [Picture Size]

Aspect ratio 4:3 1:1 16:9 3:2

[Picture Size]

[L] 12.5M

4112×3088

[L] 10M

3088×3088

[L] 11M

4480×2520

[L] 12M

4272×2856

[ M] 6.5M

2976×2232

[ M] 5M

2240×2240

[ M] 8M

3840×2160

[ M] 6.5M

3120×2080

[ S] 3M

2048×1536

[ S] 2.5M

1536×1536

[ S] 2M

1920×1080

[ S] 3M

2112×1408

●

When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], [Picture Size] is fixed to [S].

Not available in the following case:

• During panorama picture recording

109

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality])

Recording mode:

Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.

→ [Rec] → [Quality]

Settings File format Description

[

]

JPEG

Gives priority to picture quality and saves pictures in JPEG file

format.

[

]

Saves pictures in JPEG file format using standard picture quality.

This setting is useful when you want to increase the number of

recordable pictures without changing the number of pixels.

[

]

RAW + JPEG

Saves pictures in JPEG file format in addition to the RAW file

format.

[ ]

[

] RAW

Saves pictures in the RAW file format.

If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG file is also deleted.

The picture size is fixed to the maximum recordable pixels for each image aspect ratio ([L]).

About RAW file

In RAW file format the data is saved without any picture processing by the camera. This

format delivers a higher picture quality than the JPEG format, but the amount of data

is greater. To play back and edit RAW file pictures, you must use this unit or dedicated

software.

You can perform advanced editing of RAW file pictures, such as correcting the White

Balance of pictures recorded previously, and save the pictures in file formats that can be

displayed on a PC.

• You can develop the RAW file pictures using [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.

(→208)

• To develop and edit RAW file pictures on a PC, use the supplied DVD software

(Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”).

110

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Not available in the following cases:

●

The following effects cannot be used on RAW file pictures.

• [Intelligent Auto] Mode

• Picture effects (Filter)

• White Balance

• [Photo Style]

/ [Highlight Shadow]

/ [i.Dynamic]

/ [Red-Eye Removal]

/ [i.Resolution]

[Color Space]

([Rec] menu)

●

You cannot set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] in the following case:

• During panorama picture recording

When you use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, the adjustments are made based on the

settings used during recording. Therefore, you can save JPEG file pictures by using the settings

applied during recording.

If [Red-Eye Removal] is activated during recording, you can use [RAW Processing] in the

[Playback] menu to save JPEG file pictures in which red-eye was detected and corrected.

111

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Correcting contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic])

Recording mode:

Automatically adjusts contrast and exposure to give more lifelike colours when there is

significant contrast between background and subject.

→ [Rec] → [i.Dynamic]

Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] /[LOW] / [OFF]

●

When [AUTO] is set, you can automatically set the strength of the effects based on the recording

conditions.

●

The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu

is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions.

●

The [i.Dynamic] does not function in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

Enhancing the impression of high-resolution ([i.Resolution])

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to record still pictures with

sharper outlines and clearer resolution.

→ [Rec] → [i.Resolution]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] /[LOW] / [EXTENDED] / [OFF]

●

When [EXTENDED] is set, you can take more natural pictures with the impression of high-

resolution.

●

The [EXTENDED] setting will automatically change to the [LOW] setting when recording motion

pictures.

●

The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu

is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

112

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Combining still pictures with different exposures ([HDR])

Recording mode:

The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at different exposures into a single

properly exposed picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures used to create the

HDR picture are not saved. You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and

dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is

large.

A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.

→ [Rec] → [HDR]

[ON] Creates a combined HDR picture.

[OFF] Does not create a combined HDR picture.

[SET]

[Dynamic

Range]

[AUTO]: Takes pictures after automatically setting the adjustment range

of the exposure based on the contrast of a subject.

[±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the adjustment range of

the exposure being set.

[Auto Align]

[ON]: Automatically adjusts the displacement of pictures caused by

jitter, etc. We recommend using this setting to take pictures with a

handheld camera.

[OFF]: Does not adjust the displacement of pictures. We recommend

using this setting when you use a tripod.

■

What is HDR?

HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to a technique for expressing a wide

contrast range.

●

After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●

Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you will be able to record another picture.

●

A subject that was in motion when it was recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.

●

When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of view narrows slightly.

●

When you take pictures using a flash, the flash mode is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off).

Not available in the following cases:

●

This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●

[HDR] cannot be used in the following cases:

• When the [Quality] setting is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

113

SQW0024

Picture Quality and colouring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Suppressing the noise of a long exposure ([Long Shtr NR])

Recording mode:

The camera can automatically eliminate the noise made when taking pictures with a

slower shutter speed (e.g. to record night scenes) in order to take sharp pictures.

→ [Rec] → [Long Shtr NR]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●

While the camera eliminates the noise, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the

same period as the shutter speed selected for the signal processing time.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The [Long Shtr NR] does not function in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• During motion picture recording

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When using the electronic shutter

Setting the colour space

Recording mode:

You can set the method for reproducing the colours to correctly display the recorded

pictures on the screens of a PC or printer, etc.

→ [Rec] → [Color Space]

[sRGB] Sets the sRGB colour space. This setting is widely used for devices such as PCs.

[AdobeRGB]

Sets the AdobeRGB colour space.

AdobeRGB colour space has a wider colour reproduction range than sRGB

colour space. Therefore, AdobeRGB colour space is mainly used for business

applications such as commercial printing.

●

Select [sRGB] if you do not have expert knowledge about AdobeRGB colour space.

●

During motion picture recording, the setting is fixed to [sRGB].

114

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Switch the focus selector

switch to [ ] or [ ]

Auto Focus is

activated.

Align with the

indicator.

Select the focus mode (AFS, AFF, AFC)

Recording mode:

Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

→ [Rec] → [AFS/AFF/AFC]

Focus

selector

switch

Settings

The movement of the

subject and the scene

(recommended)

Description

[AFS]

Subject is still

(Scenery, anniversary

photograph, etc.)

“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”.

Focus is set automatically when the shutter button

is pressed halfway.

Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway.

[AFF]

Movement cannot be

predicted (Children,

pets, etc.)

“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”.

In this mode, focusing is performed automatically

when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

If the subject moves while the shutter button is

pressed halfway, the focus is corrected to match

the movement automatically.

[AFC]

Subject is moving

(Sport, trains, etc.)

“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus

Continuous”. In this mode, while the shutter

button is pressed halfway, focusing is constantly

performed to match the movement of the subject.

When the subject is moving, the focusing is

performed by predicting the subject position at the

time of recording.

— Focusing is performed manually. (→128)

In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the setting is fixed to AF Macro even if you switch the focus selector

switch to [

] or [ ] (AF Macro).

115

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

When recording using [AFF], [AFC]

●

Focusing may take time if the zoom is suddenly changed from max. W to max. T, or if

you suddenly move closer to a subject from a greater distance.

●

Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

●

While the shutter button pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

●

If the light on a subject is insufficient when using [AFF] or [AFC], the camera performs the same

focusing operation as [AFS]. In this case, the indication on the screen will change to yellow [AFS].

Not available in the following case:

●

The camera adjusts the focus using [AFS] in the following case:

• During panorama picture recording

Switching [AF Mode]

Recording mode:

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be

selected.

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select Auto Focus mode and press

[MENU/SET]

• If you press when [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, the AF

area setting screen appears. For details on operation of the AF

area setting screen, refer to (→121).

●

Auto Focus is fixed to [ ] (1-area-focusing) in the following case:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect])

Not available in the following case:

●

Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case:

• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) is set to [AFF] or [AFC]

116

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Taking front-on pictures of people (Face/Eye Detection)

The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts

the focus on the eye that is closer to the camera and the exposure using the face (when

[Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering)).

• The camera can detect up to 15 faces. The camera can detect only the eyes of faces to

be focused on.

When the camera recognises a face, the AF area and eye

used for focusing are displayed.

Yellow: When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame

turns green when the camera is focused.

White: Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other

faces that are the same distance away as faces within

the yellow AF area are also focused.

Eye used for focusing

●

You can change the position and size of the AF area and eye to be used for focusing.

(→121)

●

If [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering) when [ ] (Face/Eye Detection) is selected, the

camera will adjust the exposure using the face of a subject. (→139)

Not available in the following case:

●

If conditions prevent the face from being recognised, such as when the movement of the subject is

too rapid, the AF Mode setting switches to [

] (49-area-focusing).

117

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Automatically locking the focus on a moving subject (AF Tracking)

Align the AF Tracking frame with the subject and press

the shutter button halfway

When the subject is recognised, the AF Tracking frame changes

from white to yellow, and the subject is automatically kept in focus.

If AF Lock fails, a red frame flashes for a while and then turns off.

Retry the locking operation.

• To release AF Tracking → Press [MENU/SET].

• Focus range: same as macro recording [

]

• In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, every time you press

, AF Tracking

and Face Detection are switched.

AF Tracking frame

●

When you set [Metering Mode] to [ ] (Multi Metering), the camera adjusts the exposure using a

locked subject. (→139)

●

Under certain recording conditions, such as when the subject is small or dark, [ ] (AF Tracking)

may not operate correctly. When [

] (AF Tracking) does not work, focus will be on [ ] (1-area-

focusing).

Not available in the following cases:

●

[ ] (AF Tracking) cannot be used in the following case:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

●

In the following cases, [ ] (AF Tracking) performs the operation of [ ] (1-area-focusing).

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome],

[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine])

• [Monochrome] in [Photo Style]

Subject not centred in picture (49-area-focusing) / , etc. (Custom Multi)

(49-area-focusing)

Focuses on the subject in the wide range area (up to 49-area-

focusing) on the recording screen.

●

You can select the focusing area. (→121)

118

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

, etc. (Custom Multi)

You can set the preferred shape of an AF area by selecting 49 points in the AF area,

based on the subject.

Press [ ] button ( )

Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press

• When you press , the AF area setting screen appears.

Use to select the setting item

• The currently set shape of an AF area is displayed on the bottom-

left of the screen.

([Horizontal

Pattern])

Horizontal line shape

Ideal shape for panning,

etc.

([Vertical

Pattern])

Vertical line shape

Ideal shape for recording

structures, etc.

([User

Defined])

Custom shape

/ /

(Custom)

You can set a custom registration shape.

Current AF area shape

Press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

Select the AF area

• The selected AF area is displayed in yellow whereas the unselected area is displayed in white.

When selecting [ ] / [ ]

When [ ] is selected, you can set the size and position of the

area in the vertical direction and when [

] is selected, you can

set the size and position of the area in the horizontal direction.

Operation of buttons Description

Moves position

Control dial Changes the size (up to three lines)

[DISP.] button Restores to the initial settings

119

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

Use to select AF area and press [MENU/SET] to set

(repeat)

• If you press [MENU/SET] again, the setting will be cancelled.

• To cancel all the settings, press the [DISP.] button.

Press [Fn2] button

■

Registering the set AF area in [ ], [ ], and [ ] (Custom)

Press on the screen of step

on (→118)

Use to select the registration target icon and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

●

The settings registered in [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.

●

The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the

camera is turned off.

●

If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the

AF area setting screen will appear.

120

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Determined position for focus (1-area-focusing) / (Pinpoint-focusing)

(1-area-focusing)

Focuses on AF area in centre of picture. (Recommended when focus is difficult to align)

• You can change the position and size of the AF area. (→121)

Locking the focus

If a subject you want to record is not in the centre,

follow the steps below. (Only when [AFS/AFF/AFC]

is set to [AFS])

Focus display

( When focus is aligned: illuminated

When focus is not aligned: flashing)

AF area

( When focus is aligned: green

When focus is not aligned: red)

Adjust focus according to

subject

Align the AF

area with the

subject

Hold down

halfway

Return to desired composition

Press fully

(Pinpoint-focusing)

Enables more precise focusing on a smaller point than [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●

You can set the focus position using the enlarged screen. (→122)

●

When you press the shutter button halfway, an enlarged display of the focus position appears.

●

You can set the timeout for the enlarged display using [Pinpoint AF Time] in the [Custom] menu.

(→122)

●

If [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) is selected while recording motion pictures, the setting is changed to

[

] (1-area-focusing).

Not available in the following case:

●

Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case:

• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) is set to [AFF] or [AFC]

121

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Changing the position and size of the AF area

■

When selecting [ ] / [ ]

You can change the position and size of the AF area.

Select [ ] or [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

To change the AF area

To move the position of the AF area: Press

To change the size of the AF area: Turn the control dial

• If you set the AF area to an eye in the yellow frame when [

] is

selected, the eye to be used for focusing will be changed.

• To restore the AF area to its initial state (position)

→ Press [DISP.] button.

Press [MENU/SET]

■

When selecting [ ]

You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The AF area, which is

configured with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of 9 points each (6 points or

4 points for the groups located at the edges of the screen).

Select [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

Press to select an AF area group

Press [MENU/SET]

• Only the [+] indications (centre points of the selected group) remain on

the screen.

• To cancel the settings for the AF area frame, press [MENU/SET].

Examples of group

122

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

■

When selecting [ ]

You can enlarge the screen to perform more precise settings of the focus position.

• You cannot set the focus position at the edges of the screen.

Select [ ] and press

Use to set the focus position and press [MENU/SET]

• The enlarged assist screen will appear for setting the focus position.

Move [+] to the focus position with

• Pressing [DISP.] button will bring the focus position back to the

centre of the assist screen.

Changing the display of the assist screen

→ [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.

• When [PIP] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3

times to 6 times. When [FULL] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced

approximately 3 times to 10 times. Enlarge or reduce the screen by magnification

factors of x1 steps using the control dial.

Setting the timeout for the enlarged display

→ [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Time] →

[LONG] (approx. 1.5 seconds) / [MID] (approx. 1.0 seconds) /

[SHORT] (approx. 0.5 seconds)

• If you release the shutter button, the enlarged display will turn off even before the

screen timeout.

123

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Enabling/disabling use of cursor button to move the AF area

→ [Custom] → [Direct Focus Area] → [ON] / [OFF]

When [

], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can move the AF area and when [ ] is

selected, you can move the enlarged position.

• When [Custom Multi] such as [ ] is selected, the AF area setting screen is displayed.

• Use the Quick menu (→34) to set functions to be assigned to the cursor button, such as

[Drive Mode], [White Balance] and [Sensitivity].

●

When you set [Metering Mode] (→139) to [ ] (spot-focusing), the metering target will move

along with the AF area. When the AF area is moved to the edges of the screen, the metering

operation may be affected by the surrounding brightness.

Not available in the following cases:

●

[Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set

●

The position and size of the AF area cannot be changed in the Digital Zoom range.

124

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Setting your preferred focusing method

You can use the [Custom] menu to set the focusing method in detail.

Enabling/disabling focus adjustment when the shutter button is

pressed halfway

→ [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [ON] / [OFF]

Enabling/disabling shutter release when the shutter button is

pressed halfway

→ [Custom] → [Half Press Release] → [ON] / [OFF]

Focusing using the [AF/AE LOCK] button

You can use the [AF/AE LOCK] button instead of the shutter button to focus on a subject.

Set the [Custom] menu

→ [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [OFF]

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON]

Press the [AF/AE LOCK] button

The camera focuses on a subject.

Press the shutter button to take a picture

• The camera takes a picture by adjusting the exposure.

Enabling/disabling pre-adjustment of focus

→ [Custom] → [Quick AF] → [ON] / [OFF]

The focus is automatically adjusted when camera blurring is small even when the shutter

button is not pressed. (Increases battery consumption)

●

Press shutter button halfway if focus is difficult to align.

●

[Quick AF] cannot be used in the following cases:

• In the [Preview] Mode

• When the lighting is low

125

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Turning on/off the AF Assist Lamp

→ [Custom] → [AF Assist Lamp] → [ON] / [OFF]

Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too

dark to facilitate focusing. (A large AF area is displayed based on recording conditions.)

●

The AF Assist Lamp has an effective distance of 1.5 m (4.9 feet).

●

AF Assist Lamp is effective for a subject at the centre of the screen. Use the lamp by

positioning a subject at the centre of the screen.

●

If you do not want to illuminate the AF Assist Lamp when you take a picture in a dark

location (e.g. taking a picture of an animal in the dark), set this function to [OFF]. When

the AF Assist Lamp is set to [OFF], sharper focusing will become difficult.

●

The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

Enabling/disabling recording when a subject is out of focus

→ [Custom] → [Focus/Release Priority]

[FOCUS]: Recording is disabled unless the focusing is performed properly.

[RELEASE]: Recording is performed when you fully press the shutter button to

place priority on the shutter release timing that helps to avoid missed

opportunities.

●

Note that a picture may be out of focus when [RELEASE] is set, even if the focus mode

is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC].

●

This function is disabled during motion picture recording.

Enabling/disabling manual focus adjustment after AF

→ [Custom] → [AF+MF] → [ON] / [OFF]

You can manually perform fine focusing during AF Lock (pressing the shutter button

halfway when [AFS/AFF/AFC] is set to [AFS] or setting AF Lock using the [AF/AE LOCK]

button).

126

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking close-up pictures

(Macro recording)

Recording mode:

When you want to enlarge the subject, setting to [ ] (AF Macro) enables you to take

pictures at an even closer distance than the normal focus range (up to 3 cm (0.098 feet)

for max. Wide).

Switch the focus selector

switch to [ ]

Enables close-

up focusing on

a subject. (Auto

Focus functions.)

Align with the

indicator.

Focus range

When a subject is too close to the camera, the picture may not be properly focused.

Shortest recording distance

The shortest recording distance is the distance from the lens front to the subject. This

distance changes gradually depending on the zoom position.

Max. Wide

Max. Tele

0.03 m (0.098 feet)

0.3 m (0.98 feet)

When the focus selector switch

is set to [

] (AF Macro).

Focus selector

switch

Zoom

Max. Wide Max. Tele

[

] 50 cm (1.6 feet) 50 cm (1.6 feet)

[

]

(AF Macro)

3 cm (0.098 feet) 30 cm (0.98 feet)

[

] (→128) 3 cm (0.098 feet) 30 cm (0.98 feet)

• Focus range is displayed when operating the zoom, etc.

Focus range

127

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)

●

In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the shortest recording distance will be the same as that for [ ],

regardless of the focus selector switch setting.

●

It may take some time until distant subjects come into focus.

●

Using a tripod and [Self Timer] is recommended. Also, when recording a subject close to the

camera, we recommend taking a picture without using the flash.

●

Moving the camera after aligning the focus is likely to result in poorly focused pictures if subject is

close to the camera, due to the margin for focus alignment being severely reduced.

●

Resolution may be reduced around the edges of the picture.

128

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Recording mode:

Manual Focus is convenient when you want to lock the focus to take pictures or when it is

difficult to adjust focus using Auto Focus.

Switch the focus selector

switch to [ ]

Focus manually

on a subject.

Align with the

indicator.

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to determine the area to

be enlarged, and press [MENU/SET]

• The screen changes to the assist screen and an

enlarged display appears. (MF Assist) (→131)

• If you press [DISP.] button, the area to be enlarged will

be reset to the centre.

Turn the control ring to adjust focus

Turning the control ring to the right:

Focusing on a nearby subject

Turning the control ring to the left:

Focusing on a distant subject

• Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in

focus. (Peaking) (→130)

• You can confirm the direction of focus adjustment

toward the close distance side or far distance side.

(MF Guide) (→129)

MF Assist

(Enlarged screen)

Peaking

Indicator for

(infinity)

MF Guide

●

After zoom operation, readjust the focus.

●

After cancelling [Sleep Mode], be sure to readjust the focus.

129

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Enabling/disabling MF Guide display

→ [Custom] → [MF Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]

Quickly adjusting the focus using Auto Focus

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON]

If you press the [AF/AE LOCK] button in Manual Focus, Auto Focus is activated.

●

Auto Focus is activated at the centre of the frame.

●

When Auto Focus is activated on the MF Assist screen, the

camera will adjust the focus at the centre of the MF Assist

screen.

130

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Enabling/disabling [Peaking] to add colour to the portions of the

image that are in focus

→ [Custom] → [Peaking]

●

[Peaking] functions during Manual Focus or when you are adjusting focus manually

using [AF+MF].

[ON] Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in focus.

[OFF] The portions of the image that are in focus are not displayed.

[SET]

[Detect

Level]

The detection level for in-focus portions is set.

When [HIGH] is set, portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to

achieve a more precise focus.

Settings: [HIGH] / [LOW]

• The detection level setting does not affect the focus range.

[Display

Color]

Sets the highlighting colour used for [Peaking].

Settings

The available colour settings differ depending on the setting of [Detect

Level].

Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color]

setting as follows.

[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]

[Display Color]

[

] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)

[

] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)

[

] (Green) [ ] (White)

●

When [Peaking] is set to [ON], [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) or [ ] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW]) will be displayed.

●

When [Fn Button Set] (→37) in the [Custom] menu is set to [Peaking], you can switch the setting

in the following order every time the assigned function button is pressed: [ON] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW]) → [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].

●

Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in-focus portions, portions to be

highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions.

●

The colour used for highlighting does not affect recorded pictures.

Not available in the following case:

●

[Peaking] does not function in the following case:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome])

131

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

MF Assist

■

Displaying the MF Assist

• Turn the control ring to display MF Assist.

• You can also display MF Assist by pressing

to display the setting screen, pressing

the cursor button to set the position to be enlarged, and then pressing [MENU/SET].

• When you perform the following operation, the position to be enlarged will be returned

to the centre.

– When you press the [DISP.] button on the screen used for setting of the position to

be enlarged

• If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to

[ON], the setting screen for the enlarged position appears.

■

Closing the MF Assist

• To exit MF Assist, press the shutter button halfway.

• You can also exit MF Assist by pressing [MENU/SET].

• When you display MF Assist by turning the control ring, MF Assist is automatically

ended approximately 10 seconds after you finish the operation.

Not available in the following case:

●

The MF Assist is disabled in the Digital Zoom range or when recording motion pictures.

Setting the display method of MF Assist

→ [Custom] → [MF Assist]

[ ]

Turn the control ring or press the [

] button ( ) to enlarge the position.

[

]

Turn the control ring to enlarge the position.

[

]

Press the [

] button ( ) to enlarge the position.

[OFF]

The control ring or [

] button ( ) cannot be used to enlarge the position.

132

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Changing the MF Assist display

→ [Custom] → [MF Assist Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.

• When [PIP] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3

times to 6 times. When [FULL] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced

approximately 3 times to 10 times. Enlarge or reduce the screen by magnification

factors of x1 steps using the control dial.

133

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure

[AF/AE Lock]

Recording mode:

The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with

the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take

a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock).

Point the camera at the subject

Lock the focus and/or exposure while you

press and hold the [AF/AE LOCK] button

• When you release the [AF/AE LOCK] button, the focus

and/or exposure lock is cancelled.

• Only the exposure is locked at the time of purchase.

While you press and hold the

[AF/AE LOCK] button, move the camera to

compose the picture you want to take and

fully press the shutter button

• When [AE LOCK] is set, press the shutter button

halfway to focus, then press it fully.

Focus is locked (AF Lock)

Setting the function of the [AF/AE LOCK] button

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK]

Locks exposure only.

• [AEL], aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the correct

exposure is achieved.

[AF LOCK]

Locks focus only.

• [AFL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject

comes into focus.

[AF/AE LOCK]

Locks focus and exposure.

• [AFL], [AEL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the

subject is in focus and the correct exposure is achieved.

[AF-ON] Auto Focus is activated.

Maintaining/not maintaining the lock when [AF/AE LOCK] button is

released

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock Hold] → [ON] / [OFF]

134

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure [AF/AE Lock]

●

AF Lock only is effective in the following case:

• [Manual Exposure] Mode

●

During Manual Focus, only AE Lock can be used.

●

Only the AF Lock is enabled when you are recording motion pictures. Once you cancel AF Lock

while recording motion pictures, you cannot perform the AF Lock operation again.

●

The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway, even when AE is locked.

●

Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

●

Lock is cancelled when a zoom operation is performed after locking the exposure and/or focus.

Perform the locking operation again.

135

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation

Recording mode:

Corrects the exposure when there is a backlight or when the subject is too dark or too

bright.

Turn the exposure compensation dial to

select the compensation value

Under-exposed Optimum exposure Over-exposed

Adjust the exposure to the [+] direction Adjust the exposure to the [-] direction

• You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between –3 EV and

+3 EV.

●

Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.

●

When [Auto Exposure Comp.] of [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the flash output is also

automatically adjusted based on the exposure compensation value. (→183)

136

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

Set ISO Sensitivity (sensitivity to lighting) manually.

We recommend higher settings to take clear pictures in darker locations.

Press [ISO] button ( )

Turn the control dial to select ISO

Sensitivity and press [MENU/SET]

AUTO

ISO Sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200

depending

on the brightness of a subject.

(Intelligent ISO)

ISO Sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200

depending

on the movement and brightness of a subject.

100

/200/400/800/1600/

3200/6400/12800/25600

ISO Sensitivity is xed at the selected setting.

• When [ISO Increments] is set to [1/3EV], more ISO Sensitivity

settings can be selected. (→138)

When [ISO Limit Set] (→137) in the [Rec] menu is set to other than [OFF], the ISO Sensitivity is

automatically set in the range up to the [ISO Limit Set] setting value.

Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON].

Setting guide

Sensitivity [200] [25600]

Location

(recommended)

Bright

(outdoors)

Dark

Shutter speed Slow Fast

Interference Low High

Subject blur High Low

137

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

●

When [High Dynamic] is selected for the picture effect (Filter), [Sensitivity] is fixed to [AUTO].

●

When a picture effect (Filter) other than [High Dynamic] is selected or when [Multi Exp.] is set, ISO

Sensitivity can be set in a range up to [3200].

●

For details on the available flash range used when the [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO], refer to

(→177).

●

Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:

• [Shutter-Priority] Mode

• [Manual Exposure] Mode

●

When [Direct Focus Area] (→123) is set to [ON], the cursor button functions as an operation for

moving the AF area. In that case, use the Quick menu (→34) to set the ISO Sensitivity.

●

You can use the following settings when recording motion pictures:

[AUTO], [200] - [6400]

Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

You can set the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or [ ].

→ [Rec] → [ISO Limit Set]

Settings: [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] / [25600] / [OFF]

Not available in the following case:

• During motion picture recording

138

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Setting the incremental value of ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

You can change the setting to increase ISO Sensitivity by 1 EV or 1/3 EV.

→ [Rec] → [ISO Increments]

[1/3EV]

[L.100]

/ [L.125]

/ [L.160]

/ [200] / [250] / [320] / [400] / [500] / [640] / [800] / [1000] /

[1250] / [1600] / [2000] / [2500] / [3200] / [4000] / [5000] / [6400] / [8000] / [10000] /

[12800] / [16000] / [20000] / [25600]

[1 EV]

[L.100]

/ [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] / [25600]

Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON].

●

When this setting is changed from [1/3EV] to [1 EV], the setting for [Sensitivity] may be changed.

(The closest ISO Sensitivity that can be set for [1 EV] will be used.)

Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting

Recording mode:

You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO Sensitivity.

→ [Rec] → [Extended ISO]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

139

SQW0024

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the metering mode

Recording mode:

You can change the metering method used for measuring brightness.

→ [Rec] → [Metering Mode]

[Metering Mode] Brightness measurement position Conditions

(Multiple)

Whole screen

Normal usage

(produces balanced pictures)

(Centre weighted)

Centre and surrounding area Subject in centre

(Spot)

Centre of [+] (spot metering target)

Spot metering target

Great difference between

brightness of subject and

background

(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,

backlighting)

• The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting

in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be

changed automatically.

140

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Setting the Shutter Type

Recording mode:

You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and

electronic shutter.

Mechanical shutter Electronic shutter

Description

Starts the exposure electronically

and ends the exposure using the

mechanical shutter.

Starts and ends the exposure

electronically.

Flash ○ –

Shutter Speed

(seconds)

60 - 1/4000

- 1/16000

Shutter sound

Mechanical shutter sound

Electronic shutter sound

You can set ISO Sensitivity up to [ISO 3200]. When ISO Sensitivity is higher than [ISO 3200], the

shutter speed will be faster than 1 second.

You cannot turn off the mechanical shutter sound.

You can use [Shutter Vol.] to adjust the volume of the electronic shutter sound. (→43)

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Shutter Type]

[AUTO]

The shutter mode automatically switches based on the recording conditions

and shutter speed.

• The mechanical shutter mode has higher priority over the electronic

shutter mode because the mechanical shutter has less function-related

restrictions when recording with a flash, etc.

[MSHTR] Uses only the mechanical shutter mode to take a picture.

[ESHTR] Uses only the electronic shutter mode to take a picture.

●

When [ ] is displayed on the screen, the electronic shutter is used to take a picture.

●

When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], the electronic shutter is used to take a picture.

●

When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the electronic shutter is used to take a picture.

●

If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the

picture may be skewed in some cases.

●

When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic

shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter

speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→84)

●

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject when you

use this function. Use at your own risk.

141

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

Recording mode:

You can switch the operation to be performed when you press the shutter button.

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the drive mode and

press [MENU/SET]

Drive Mode

[Single] When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is recorded.

[Burst] (→142)

The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is

pressed.

[Auto Bracket]

(→145)

Each time the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are

recorded with different exposure settings based on the Exposure

Compensation range.

[Aspect Bracket]

(→147)

When the shutter button is pressed, 4 pictures with 4 different aspect

ratios are automatically recorded.

[Self Timer]

(→148)

When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes place after the

set time has elapsed.

[Panorama

Shot]

(→150)

The pictures are recorded in succession while you press the shutter

button and move the camera horizontally or vertically, and then the

camera combines the pictures into a single panorama picture.

Cannot be set when using [Intelligent Auto] Mode.

• To cancel drive mode, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ]. The recording is switched to

“Single”.

• When you press , you can change the settings of each drive mode. Note,

however, that you cannot change the settings of [Single] and [Aspect Bracket].

142

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

Recording mode:

The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is pressed.

• Pictures that are taken while the [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] are recorded together as a

single burst group (→201).

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the burst icon ([ ],

etc.) and press

Press to select the burst speed and

press [MENU/SET]

[SH]

(Super high

speed)

[H]

(High speed)

[M]

(Middle

speed)

[L]

(Low speed)

Speed

(pictures/

sec.)

[AFS] 40 11 7 2

[AFF] / [AFC] ― 6.5 6.5 2

Live View during burst

recording

None None Available Available

No. of

pictures

With RAW files ―

Without RAW

files

Depends on the capacity of the card

The electronic shutter will be activated.

The number of burst pictures is limited by the picture-taking conditions and the type and/or

status of the card used.

Pictures can be taken until the card becomes full. However, the burst speed will become

slower halfway through the recording. The exact time when the slower burst speed will start

depends on the settings of the aspect ratio, picture size, and quality as well as the type of

card used.

• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings:

– [Picture Size] (→108), [Quality] (→109), Sensitivity (→136), Focus mode

(→114), [Focus/Release Priority] (→125)

• Burst speed can also be set with [Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.

• For information about RAW files, refer to (→109).

143

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

Focus on the subject and take a picture

• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst

Mode.

■

To cancel burst

In step

, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

Focusing in burst mode

Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→114) and the setting of [Focus/Release

Priority] (→125) in the [Custom] menu.

Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority] Focus

[AFS]

[FOCUS]

At the first picture

[RELEASE]

[AFF] / [AFC]

[FOCUS]

Normal focusing

[RELEASE]

Predicted focusing

[MF] — Focus set with Manual Focus

Focus is fixed in the first picture when dark subjects are recorded or the burst speed is set to [SH].

Since the camera records a burst of pictures while it adjusts the focus, the burst speed may be

slower.

The camera predicts the focus within a possible range by giving higher priority to the burst speed.

144

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

●

When the burst speed is set to [H] and if many burst pictures are taken, the burst speed may be

reduced while burst pictures are being taken.

●

When the burst speed is set to [SH] or [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFS] or [MF]), and the

exposure and White Balance are fixed to those of the first picture.

When the burst speed is set to [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]), [M], or [L], and the

exposure and White Balance are adjusted individually for each still picture.

●

Burst speed may be reduced if shutter speed (pictures/sec.) is reduced in darker locations.

●

With repeated recordings, it may take a while between recordings, depending on the usage

conditions.

●

It may take a while to store still pictures that were taken using the burst function. If you

continue to record while storing, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be

reduced. A high-speed card is recommended when recording using the burst function.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome],

[Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine])

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

• During motion picture recording

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

• When recording using the flash

• During T (time) recording

• When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

●

[SH] in Burst Mode cannot be used In the following cases:

• When [Quality] is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

145

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording while exposure is changed automatically

[Auto Bracket]

Recording mode:

Each time the shutter button is pressed, recordings are made of up to 7 pictures with

different exposure settings based on the Exposure Compensation range.

Example of Auto Bracket recording when [Step] is set to [3·1/3] and [Sequence]

is set to [0/–/+]

1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

±0 EV –1/3 EV +1/3 EV

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the Auto Bracket icon

([ ], etc.) and press

Press to select the compensation

range and press [MENU/SET]

Focus on the subject and take a picture

• If you press and hold the shutter button, a burst of

pictures can be recorded.

• The display of Auto Bracket flashes until all of the burst

pictures you have set are recorded.

• The camera restarts recording from the first still picture

if you change the Auto Bracket settings or turn off the

camera before all of the burst pictures you have set

are recorded.

■

To cancel [Auto Bracket]

In step

, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

146

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket]

■

Changing the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording sequence

of Auto Bracket

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Auto Bracket]

Press to select [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] or [Sequence] and press

[MENU/SET]

Press to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

[Single/Burst

Settings]

(single)

(burst)

[Step]

3·1/3 (3 pictures)

3·2/3 (3 pictures)

3·1 (3 pictures)

5·1/3 (5 pictures)

5·2/3 (5 pictures)

5·1 (5 pictures)

7·1/3 (7 pictures)

7·2/3 (7 pictures)

7·1 (7 pictures)

[Sequence]

0/–/+

–/0/+

• You can take one picture at a time when [

] is set.

• A burst of pictures can be recorded up to the number of pictures you have set when [

] is set.

• Close the menu after changing settings.

●

When you take pictures using Auto Bracket after performing Exposure Compensation, the camera

will take pictures using the corrected exposure value as a reference.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The [Auto Bracket] is disabled in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome],

[Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine])

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• During motion picture recording

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

• When recording using the flash

• During T (time) recording

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

147

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Automatically changing the aspect ratio while taking

pictures

[Aspect Bracket]

Recording mode:

When you press the shutter button once, the camera automatically takes four pictures

with four types of aspect ratios (4:3, 3:2, 16:9, and 1:1). (The shutter sounds only once.)

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the aspect bracket icon

([ ]) and press [MENU/SET]

The range that can be

recorded for each aspect

ratio is displayed.

Focus on the subject and take a picture

■

To cancel aspect bracket

In step

, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

●

When [Picture Size] is set to [S], the setting is automatically changed to [M].

●

The same shutter speed, aperture value, focus, [Exposure], [White Balance], and [Sensitivity]

settings are used for all four pictures.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The [Aspect Bracket] is disabled in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Toy Effect],

[Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine])

• During motion picture recording

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

• During T (time) recording

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• When [Quality] is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

148

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking pictures with self-timer

Recording mode:

We recommend using a tripod. This is also effective for preventing jitter when pressing

the shutter button, by setting the self-timer to 2 seconds.

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the self-timer icon

([ ], etc.) and press

Press to select the self-timer

operation setting and press [MENU/SET]

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds and three

pictures are taken at intervals of approximately

2 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 2 seconds.

• You can also set the time for the self-timer using [Self

Timer] in the [Rec] menu.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus,

then press it fully to start recording

• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording will

start.

■

To cancel self-timer

In step

, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• You can cancel the self-timer by turning off the camera. (When [Self Timer Auto Off]

(→50) is set to [ON].)

149

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking pictures with self-timer

●

If you take a picture with a flash when [ ] is set, the flash output may not be stable in some

cases.

Not available in the following cases:

●

It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases:

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• During T (time) recording

●

Self-timer is disabled in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting)

150

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording panorama pictures

Recording mode:

You can easily record a panorama picture by panning the camera towards the direction

you want to record, and automatically combining the burst of pictures taken during that

time.

Press [ ] button ( )

Press to select the panorama icon ([ ], etc.)

and press

Press to select the recording direction and then press

[MENU/SET]

Left → Right

A horizontal guide line is displayed.

Right → Left

Down → Up

A vertical guide line is displayed.

Up → Down

• You can also select the recording direction using [Panorama Direction] in the

[Rec] menu.

Applying a picture effect (Filter)

Press the [FILTER] button to select a picture effect

(→89)

Recording direction

Picture effects

(This is not displayed when [No Effect] is selected.)

Adjusting the picture effect

(This is displayed only when a picture effect is selected.)

• You can also set the picture effects by turning the control

ring.

• [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], and [Sunshine] are

not available.

• When recording panorama pictures, the following effects are not applied to the recording

screen.

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter]

Press [MENU/SET]

Press the shutter button halfway to focus

151

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording panorama pictures

Press the shutter button fully and pan the camera in a small

circular motion to the recording direction to start recording

Taking pictures from left to right

Recording direction and progress status

(approximate)

1 sec.

2 sec.

3 sec.

4 sec.

• Pan the camera at a constant speed.

• You may not be able to take pictures successfully if you move the camera too

quickly or too slowly.

Press the shutter button fully again to end recording

• You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures.

• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.

Tips

●

Pan the camera in the recording direction as steadily as possible.

If the camera shakes too much, it may not be

able to take pictures or may end up creating a

narrow (small) panorama picture.

Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the point that you want to take.

(However, the last frame is not recorded to the end.)

152

SQW0024

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording panorama pictures

■

About panorama picture playback

Panorama pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever the same way as with

other still pictures. If you play back panorama pictures in the same way as playing back

a motion picture, the panorama pictures are scrolled automatically. (→70)

• Unlike motion picture playback, you cannot perform fast forward or fast rewind while

the panorama pictures are scrolling automatically. (You can perform single-frame

forward or rewind while the automatic scrolling operation is paused.)

■

To cancel

In step

, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

●

The zoom position is fixed to the W end.

●

[Stabilizer] does not work when it is set to [ ] (Normal).

●

Since the aperture value and shutter speed are automatically controlled during panorama picture

recording, settings made by the aperture ring or shutter speed dial are disabled.

●

The focus, exposure and White Balance are all fixed to optimal values for the first picture.

If the focusing or brightness of pictures recorded as part of a panorama picture after the first

picture are significantly different from those of the first picture, the panorama picture as a whole

(when all pictures are stitched together) may not have consistent focus and brightness.

●

When the picture effect (Filter) is set, [White Balance] is fixed to [AWB].

●

Since several pictures are stitched together to create a panorama picture, some subjects may be

distorted or the joining portions of successively taken pictures that are stitched may be noticeable.

●

The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama picture varies

depending on the recording direction and number of stitched pictures.

The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows:

• Taking pictures in landscape orientation: Approx. 8176×1920

• Taking pictures in portrait orientation: Approx. 2560×7680

●

[Shutter Type] is fixed to [AUTO].

Not available in the following cases:

●

You cannot record a panorama picture in the following cases.

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• When [Quality] is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• During T (time) recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

• When [Silent Mode] is set

• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON]

●

Panorama pictures may not be created or pictures may not be recorded properly when taking

pictures of the following subjects or when taking pictures in the following recording conditions:

• Subjects that have a continuous monotone or pattern (sky, beach, etc.)

• Moving subjects (person, pet, vehicle, waves, or flowers swaying in the wind, etc.)

• Subjects whose colours or patterns change quickly (such as an image appearing on a display)

• Dark locations

• Locations with a flickering light source (fluorescent lamp, candle light, etc.)

153

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot]

Recording mode:

You can preset data such as recording start time and time lapse to take still pictures

automatically. This setting is convenient for taking pictures at constant intervals for

landscape scenes, observation of the gradual changes in animals/plants, and other

applications. The pictures are recorded as a single group picture (→201). When [Time

Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu is used, you can create a motion picture. (→215)

• Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→29)

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Time Lapse Shot]

Press to select the item and press

[MENU/SET]

[Start Time] [Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.

[Start Time

Set]

Set the time to start recording. Any time up to 23 hours

59 minutes ahead can be set.

Press to select the item (hour and/or minute),

and to set the start time, and then press

[MENU/SET]

[Shooting

Interval] /

[Image

Count]

The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.

: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)

: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

• You can set the interval from 1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds in

1-second intervals.

• You can set the number of pictures to be recorded from 1 picture to 9,999

pictures.

• Be sure to use an interval

setting that is longer than the exposure time

(shutter speed)

. (Illustration below)

If the interval

setting is shorter than the exposure time (shutter speed)

(e.g. recording at night), it may cause the recording to skip.

First Second Third

Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

154

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]

Press the shutter button fully

• The recording starts automatically.

• During recording standby, the camera turns off automatically when no operation

is performed for a preset interval. The [Time Lapse Shot] recording will continue

even if the camera is turned off, and the camera is automatically turned on at the

recording start time. If you want to turn on the camera manually, press the shutter

button halfway.

• When you press the [Fn2] button while the camera is turned on, the pause or end

selection screen will appear. Perform the operation based on the instructions on

the screen. When you press the [Fn2] button while the camera is in the pause

state, the restart or end selection screen will appear. You can also restart the

operation from the pause state by fully pressing the shutter button.

• When a confirmation screen for continuing the creation of a motion picture is

displayed, select [Yes].

Select the motion picture creation method

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality]

Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p]

[Frame Rate]

Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you

can create a more seamless stop motion animation.

[50fps]

/ [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps]

Only available with [FHD/50p] setting

• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],

[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].

[Sequence]

[NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes],

the operation is executed.

• You can also create a motion picture using [Time

Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu. (→215)

155

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]

●

This function is not intended for application-specific systems (monitoring cameras).

●

If you leave the camera unattended during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, make sure that the

camera is not stolen.

●

Exercise caution when you perform [Time Lapse Shot] recording for a long period of time

in cold regions or in a low-temperature or high-temperature/high-humidity environment,

since such use could cause malfunctions.

●

The camera may not be able to record using the preset interval and number of pictures to be

recorded under some recording conditions.

●

If the recording time is longer than the preset interval due to a long exposure, this may cause the

recording to skip.

●

Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●

[Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases:

• When the remaining battery power runs out

• Turning the camera off

If this occurs during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, you can restart the operation by replacing

the battery or card in the pause state and turning the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [ON]. (Note,

however, that the pictures recorded after restarting the operation are saved as another group

picture.) When you replace the battery or card, turn the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF].

●

Do not connect the AV cable (optional), HDMI micro cable or USB connection cable (supplied)

during [Time Lapse Shot] recording.

●

When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the

picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop

motion animation.

●

If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion

picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.

●

You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file

exceeds 4 GB.

●

When a stop motion animation is shorter than 2 seconds, “2s” will be displayed for the motion

picture recording time (→70).

●

When the number of recorded pictures is one, it will not be saved as a group picture.

Not available in the following cases:

●

[Time Lapse Shot] cannot be used In the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

156

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation

[Stop Motion Animation]

Recording mode:

You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation.

• Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→29)

• Still pictures that were captured using frame-by-frame recording are grouped into a

single group picture. (→201)

Before creating stop motion animation

When you use [Stop Motion Animation] to record still pictures by moving a subject such

as a doll little by little and then stitching those pictures, you can create a stop motion

animation as if the subject is moving.

●

To create stop motion animation using this camera, it is necessary to record 1 to

50 frames of still pictures for every 1 second of motion picture.

●

To produce smooth movement of the subject, record the motion using as many frames

as possible and set a higher number of frames per second (frame rate) when you

create a stop motion animation.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Stop Motion Animation]

Press to select the recording method,

and press [MENU/SET]

[Auto

Shooting]

[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval. When the

shutter button is pressed fully, recording starts.

[OFF] Takes pictures manually, one frame at a time.

[Shooting

Interval]

(Available only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])

Set the interval used for [Auto Shooting]. You can set the interval from 1 second

to 60 seconds in 1-second intervals.

Press to select the interval (seconds), press to set the

selected time, and then press [MENU/SET]

157

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

Press to select [New] and press

[MENU/SET]

Press the shutter button fully

• Up to 9,999 frames can be recorded.

Move the subject to decide on the

composition

• Repeat the recording of still pictures in the same way.

• When you turn off the camera during recording, a message to restart recording

will appear when you turn on the camera. To start recording from the next still

picture, select [Yes].

How to create stop motion animation effectively

●

Up to two previously recorded pictures are displayed on the recording screen.

Check this screen as a guideline for determining the amount of required motion.

●

You can press the Playback button to check the recorded pictures. Press the

[ ] button to delete unnecessary pictures. To return to the recording screen,

press the Playback button again.

Press [MENU/SET] to end recording. Next, select [Stop Motion

Animation] in the [Rec] menu and then press [MENU/SET]

again

• A confirmation screen is displayed. It is ended when [Yes] is selected.

• A confirmation screen for creating a motion picture is displayed next, so select

[Yes].

Select a method to create a stop motion animation

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality]

Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p]

[Frame Rate]

Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you

can create a more seamless stop motion animation.

[50fps]

/ [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps]

Only available with [FHD/50p] setting

• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],

[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].

[Sequence]

[NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

158

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

Press to select [OK] and press

[MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes],

the operation is executed.

• You can also create a stop motion animation using

[Stop Motion Video] in the [Playback] menu. (→215)

■

Adding pictures to an already recorded stop motion animation group

When you select [Additional] in step

, group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] are displayed. Select a group picture and press [MENU/SET]. Then, select

[Yes] on the confirmation screen.

●

[Auto Shooting] may not be performed according to the preset interval because recording could

take time under some recording conditions, such as when pictures are taken using a flash.

●

When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the

picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop

motion animation.

●

When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, this

will produce grainy pictures in a stop motion animation.

●

Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●

If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion

picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.

●

You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file

exceeds 4 GB.

●

When a stop motion animation is shorter than 2 seconds, “2s” will be displayed for the motion

picture recording time (→70).

●

If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture. You cannot select

only one recorded still picture using [Additional].

Not available in the following cases:

●

[Stop Motion Animation] cannot be used in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON]

159

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Performing multiple exposures for a single picture

[Multi Exp.]

Recording mode:

You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times of exposure on a

single picture.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Multi Exp.]

Press to select [Start] and press

[MENU/SET]

Decide on your composition and take the

first picture

• After recording the first picture, press the shutter

button halfway to proceed to the next recording.

• Press to select the item and then press [MENU/

SET]. You can perform the following operations.

– [Next]: Proceed to the next recording.

– [Retake]: Delete the result of the last shot and take

another picture.

– [Exit]: Exit Multi Exposure and save the picture that

was taken.

Retake

Exit

Record the second, third, and fourth

pictures

• When you press [Fn1] button while taking pictures, the

pictures that you took are saved and Multi Exposure

is closed.

Retake

Exit

Press to select [Exit] and press

[MENU/SET]

• You can also end the operation by pressing the shutter

button halfway.

160

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.]

■

About the automatic gain compensation setting

Select [Auto Gain] on the screen in step

(→159).

• [ON]: Combines several pictures into one by automatically adjusting the brightness in

accordance with the number of pictures taken.

• [OFF]: Combines several pictures into one by simply overlapping the exposure

results of all pictures, as is. Perform the Exposure Compensation based on

the requirements of a subject.

■

To overlay the pictures on the RAW file picture in a card

Set [Overlay] to [ON] on the screen in step

(→159). After selecting [Start], the

pictures on a card will be displayed. Select the RAW file pictures and press [MENU/

SET] to continue recording.

• You can perform [Overlay] on RAW file pictures recorded using this camera only.

●

Pictures are not saved in memory until Multi Exposure is ended.

●

Information for the picture taken last will be used as recording information of pictures taken using

Multi Exposure.

●

While [Multi Exp.] recording is being performed, you cannot set items displayed in grey on the

menu screen.

Not available in the following cases:

●

[Multi Exp.] cannot be used in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set

• During panorama picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

161

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time

[Silent Mode]

Recording mode:

This mode is useful when you are taking pictures in a quiet environment or public facilities

or when you take pictures of a subject such as a baby or animal.

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Silent Mode]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• This mode will mute beeps, set the flash to [Forced Flash Off], and disable AF

Assist Lamp. The settings for the following functions are fixed:

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– [Flash Mode]: [

] (Forced Flash Off)

– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]

– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (Off)

– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (Off)

●

Even when this mode is set to [ON], the following lamps/indicators will light or flash.

• Self-timer indicator

• Wi-Fi connection lamp

●

The operation sounds of this camera such as the lens aperture sound are not muted.

●

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject when you

use this function. Use at your own risk.

162

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function

[Face Recog.]

Recording mode:

The Face Recognition function recognises a face similar to a registered face and

automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the face with higher priority. Even if a person

you want to focus on is standing at the back or corner in a group photo, the camera will

automatically recognise the person and record this person’s face clearly.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Face Recog.]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [MEMORY]

Default [Face Recog.] setting is [OFF].

When the face pictures are registered, the setting will be [ON] automatically.

■

How the Face Recognition function works

During recording

• The camera recognises a registered face and adjusts

focus and exposure.

• When registered faces that have set names are

recognised, the names are displayed (max. 3 people).

During playback

• The name and age are displayed (if information is

registered).

• The names that have been set for the recognised faces

are displayed (max. 3 people).

• Only pictures of the selected registered people are played

back ([Category Play]).

●

[Face Recog.] functions only when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ].

●

Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain Face Recognition information.

●

The name of the person recognised in the first picture is displayed in the case of group pictures.

●

Face Recognition searches for faces similar to those registered, but there is no guarantee it

will always recognise these faces. In some cases, the camera cannot recognise or incorrectly

recognises even registered people depending on their expression or the environment.

●

Even if Face Recognition information is registered, pictures recorded when the name is [OFF] are

not categorised for Face Recognition in [Category Play].

●

Even if Face Recognition information is changed, Face Recognition information for

previously recorded pictures is not changed.

For example, if a name is changed, pictures recorded before the change are not categorised for

Face Recognition in [Category Play].

●

To change name information for pictures already recorded, perform a [REPLACE] (→222) in [Face

Rec Edit].

163

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]

Not available in the following cases:

●

[Face Recog.] cannot be set in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect])

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

Registering face pictures

Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with such information as name and

birthdate.

■

Recording tips when registering face pictures

• Make sure the subject’s eyes are open and mouth closed;

have the subject face the camera directly, and make sure

the outline of the face, the eyes and eyebrows are not

hidden by hair.

• Make sure there are no heavy shadows on the face.

(During registration, the flash is not used.)

Good example for registering

a face

■

If the camera seems to have difficulty recognising faces when recording

• Register additional pictures of the same person’s face, indoors and outdoors or with

different expressions or angles.

• Register additional pictures at the place you are recording.

• If a registered person is no longer recognised, re-register that person.

Use to select [MEMORY] and then press

[MENU/SET]

654

New

KEN

New

Use to select [New] and then press

[MENU/SET]

• If 6 people are already registered, first delete a registered

person. (→164)

Align the face with the guide and record

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the

operation is executed.

• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets) cannot be

registered.

• When

is pressed, an explanation is displayed.

164

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]

Use to select the item for editing and press [MENU/SET]

[Name]

Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]

Enter the name (See “Entering Text”: (→52))

[Age] Set the birthdate.

Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]

Use to select year, month and day, set with , and press

[MENU/SET]

[Add Images] Up to 3 face pictures of the person can be registered.

Use to select [Add] and press [MENU/SET]

• If only one picture is registered, you can skip the cursor button operation.

Just press [MENU/SET] to register an additional face picture.

• When a registered face picture is selected with cursor button, a screen to

confirm deletion is displayed. Select [Yes] to delete the face picture.

(If only one picture is registered, it cannot be deleted.)

Record the picture (step

(→163))

Editing or deleting information about registered persons

Information about registered people can be edited or deleted.

Use to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the picture of the person to be edited or deleted and

press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Info Edit] Edit name or other registered information. (Step

above)

[Priority] Set priority order for focus and exposure.

Use to select the registration order and press [MENU/SET]

[Delete] Delete information and face pictures of registered persons.

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

165

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Setting the profile for a baby or pet to record in a

picture

Recording mode:

You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the

name or age in months/years in the picture.

■

Setting the name and age in months/years

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Profile Setup]

Settings: [ ] ([Baby1]) / [ ] ([Baby2]) / [ ] ([Pet]) / [OFF] / [SET]

Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Age] or [Name] and then press

[MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET]

Age: Set birthday with , and press [MENU/SET]

Name: (See “Entering Text”: (→52))

Use to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to

finish

■

Cancelling the display of the name and age in months/years

Select [OFF] in step

●

[Age] and [Name] print setting can be made on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the

supplied DVD. Text may also be stamped onto the still picture using [Text Stamp].

Not available in the following case:

●

You cannot record the name or age in months/years in still pictures that are taken while recording

motion pictures ([

] (motion picture priorities)) (→198).

166

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Displaying the appropriate screen for specific

recording conditions

Checking the area where overexposure may occur ([Zebra Pattern])

Recording mode:

You can check the area in a picture that is brighter than a certain brightness, which could

result in overexposure, by displaying such an area using a zebra pattern. You can also

set the brightness to be represented by the zebra pattern.

→ [Custom] → [Zebra Pattern]

[ZEBRA1]

Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a

right-leaning zebra pattern.

[ZEBRA2]

Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a

left-leaning zebra pattern.

[OFF] —

[SET]

Sets the brightness to be displayed for each zebra pattern.

[Zebra 1] / [Zebra 2]

Use to select the brightness and then press [MENU/SET]

• The range of brightness you can select from is [50%] to [105%]. The [OFF]

setting is available for [Zebra 2]. When [100%] or [105%] is selected, only the

overexposed areas are displayed with the zebra pattern. When a smaller numeric

value is set, the range of brightness to be displayed by each zebra pattern will

increase.

167

SQW0024

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions

●

If there is overexposure, we recommend taking pictures using a lower exposure value (→135),

using the histogram (→64) as a guideline.

●

The displayed zebra pattern is not recorded.

●

If you set [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (→37) in the [Custom] menu, every time you press

the assigned function button the setting will switch in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra 2] →

[Zebra OFF]. When [ZEBRA2] is set to [OFF], you can switch the setting quickly in the following

order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra OFF].

Setting a monochrome display for the recording screen

([Monochrome Live View])

Recording mode:

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is useful when a

black and white screen will make it easier to adjust focus in Manual Focus mode.

→ [Custom] → [Monochrome Live View]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• This does not affect recorded pictures.

168

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

Recording mode:

Automatically detects and prevents jitter.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Stabilizer]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

(Normal)

Corrects vertical and horizontal jitter.

(Panning)

Corrects vertical jitter. This setting is ideal for panning (technique of

recording a subject by matching the camera movement with the movement

of a subject going in a specific direction).

[OFF] [Stabilizer] does not work.

To prevent jitter

If a warning is displayed about jitter, use [Stabilizer], a tripod,

or [Self Timer]. In some cases, jitter can be reduced by using

a higher setting for [Sensitivity].

Jitter alert display

169

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

●

When you use a tripod, we recommend setting [Stabilizer] to [OFF].

●

To perform a panning by selecting [ ], we recommend taking pictures using the viewfinder.

●

Cases where the stabiliser function may be ineffective:

• When there is a lot of jitter

• When the zoom magnification is high (also in the Digital Zoom range)

• When taking pictures while following a moving subject

• When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places

●

The panning effect by selecting [ ] is not fully achieved in the following cases:

• Bright summer days or other bright locations

• When the shutter speed is higher than 1/100 seconds

• When the motion of a subject is slow and the speed with which the camera is moved is too slow

(a nice background blur is not achieved)

• When the camera is not adequately tracking the motion of a subject

Not available in the following case:

●

[Stabilizer] cannot be used by selecting [ ] (Normal) during panorama picture recording.

170

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Recording mode:

You can adjust the area of a picture to be taken using zoom.

Zoom lever Control ring

Move the zoom lever Turn the control ring

You can perform zoom operation by assigning

the [Zoom] setting to the control ring. (→40)

T side : Telephoto, Enlarge the subject

W side : Wide-angle, Capture a wider area

Clockwise: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject

Counterclockwise: Wide-angle, Capture a wider

area

The illustration is an example of when using Optical Zoom, [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] in [Program

AE] Mode.

Focus range

i.Zoom range

Optical Zoom range

Digital Zoom range

Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera)

●

Do not touch the lens barrel during zooming.

●

Adjust the focus after adjusting the zoom.

●

The zoom ratio and the zoom bar displayed on the screen are estimates.

●

The camera may make a rattling noise and vibrate when the zoom lever is operated - this is not a

malfunction.

171

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Zoom types and use

The zoom ratio changes when the picture size is changed.

Optical Zoom

You can zoom in without degrading the picture quality.

Maximum magnification: 3.1x

Not available in the following case:

• During panorama picture recording

Extra optical zoom

This function works when picture sizes with [ ] have been selected in [Picture Size]

(→108). Extra optical zoom allows you to zoom in using a higher zoom ratio than Optical

Zoom, without degrading the picture quality.

Maximum magnification: 6.2x

(Including the optical zoom ratio. This maximum zoom ratio varies depending on

the picture size.)

Not available in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Toy Effect], [Toy Pop])

• During panorama picture recording

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When the [Quality] setting is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

• During motion picture recording

172

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

To increase the zoom ratio further, the following zoom can be used in combination.

[i.Zoom]

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio

up to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality.

→ [Rec] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

→ [Motion Picture] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

Not available in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop])

• During panorama picture recording

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When the [Quality] setting is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

173

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

[Digital Zoom]

Recording mode:

Zoom 4x further than Optical/Extra optical zoom. Note that, with Digital Zoom,

enlarging will decrease picture quality.

→ [Rec] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

→ [Motion Picture] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

●

When [Digital Zoom] is used simultaneously with [i.Zoom], you can only increase the zoom ratio

up to 2x.

●

When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (→148) for taking

pictures.

●

The AF area is largely displayed at the centre in the Digital Zoom range.

Not available in the following cases:

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect])

• During panorama picture recording

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When the [Quality] setting is set to [

], [ ] or [ ]

174

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

[Step Zoom]

Recording mode:

You can set the zoom operation to allow easy visualisation of the angle of view (picture

angle) for the focal length of a regular fixed focal length lens (as with a 35 mm film

camera). When using the [Step Zoom], you can operate the zoom ratio as easily as

changing the camera lens.

Turn the control ring (→39)

Current zoom position

(Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera)

■

Using the zoom lever for [Step Zoom]

You can use the zoom lever for [Step Zoom] by setting [Zoom lever] to [Step Zoom] in

the [Custom] menu.

●

The focal length values are for reference only.

Not available in the following case:

• During motion picture recording

175

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Changing the zoom operation settings

→ [Custom] → [Zoom lever]

→ [Custom] → [Control Ring]

Zoom

The zoom operates in the normal way.

Step Zoom

Each time zoom is operated, the zoom stops at the position for

one of the preset focal lengths.

Retaining the zoom position when the camera is turned off

→ [Custom] → [Zoom Resume] → [ON] / [OFF]

176

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Recording mode:

When the flash (supplied) is attached, you can use all flash modes ([MANUAL] setting,

etc.) available for this unit. (Note, however, that this flash cannot be used as a wireless

flash unit.) This section describes how to take a picture using the flash (supplied).

• For details on how to take a picture using the external flash (optional), refer to (→291).

With the flash you can take pictures in dark places or adjust the entire contrast of a

picture by illuminating a subject with a bright background.

Attaching the flash

The hot shoe cover is already attached to the hot shoe at the time of purchase.

Attach the flash to the hot shoe after removing the hot shoe cover.

Removing the hot shoe cover

• Make sure that the Camera [ON/OFF] switch is set to [OFF].

Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the

direction indicated by arrow while pressing it in the

direction indicated by arrow

• Be sure to attach the hot shoe cover when the hot shoe is

not in use.

• Keep the hot shoe cover safely after removing it so that you

do not lose it.

Attaching the flash

Turn off the flash

Hot shoe

Flash [ON/OFF] switch

Firmly insert the flash into the hot shoe of this

unit until it clicks

• Set the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [ON] and turn on the

flash when you take a picture.

●

Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

●

Do not carry the camera holding by the flash when the flash is mounted on the camera.

177

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

■

Removing the flash

Turn off the camera and the flash

Press and hold the lock release button and pull

the flash in the direction indicated by the arrow to

detach the flash

• When detaching the flash, do so slowly and carefully.

• Attach the hot shoe cover to the hot shoe of the camera.

• Store the detached flash in its soft case.

Lock release

button

About [Forced Flash Off] ([ ])

[ ] (Forced Flash Off) will appear on the recording screen and the flash will not fire in

the following cases.

Communication light emission with a wireless flash is also disabled. (→184)

• When the flash is not attached to the camera

• When the flash [ON/OFF] switch is set to [OFF] even if the flash is attached

• When the flash cannot be used to take pictures, for example, when recording motion

pictures

■

The available flash range when [Sensitivity] setting is [AUTO]

Edges of picture may become slightly dark if using flash at short distances without

using zoom (close to max. W). This may be remedied by using a little zoom.

Max. Wide Max. Tele

Approx. 60 cm - 14.1 m (1.97 feet - 46 feet)

Approx. 30 cm - 8.5 m (0.98 feet - 27.9 feet)

When the flash (supplied) is attached and [ISO Limit Set] is [OFF].

178

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

How to use the flash effectively

Taking a picture using the flash with the subject too close may cause overexposure.

When you set [Highlight] in the [Custom] menu to [ON], the overexposed areas will flash

black and white during [Auto Review] or playback. If that happens, we recommend taking

the picture again, for example, after setting a lower flash output using [Flash Adjust.]

(→183).

●

Do not put your hands over the light-emitting area of the flash or look at it from close range.

Do not use the flash at close distances to other subjects (heat/light may damage subject).

●

Flash charging may take time if battery is low or if using flash repeatedly. When the flash is being

charged, the flash icon flashes red, and you cannot take a picture even when you fully press the

shutter button.

●

The flash is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off) in following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set

• During panorama picture recording

• When using the electronic shutter

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

179

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Changing the firing mode (Manual flash)

Recording mode:

You can select whether the flash output is set automatically or manually.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Firing Mode]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[MANUAL]

You can set the flash ratio manually. Using [TTL] allows you to take a picture

as intended, even for dark scenes where the flash output tends to be higher.

●

When [MANUAL] is selected, the flash ratio (e.g. [1/1]) is displayed with the flash icon on the

screen.

■

Setting the flash ratio (When [MANUAL] is selected)

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Manual Flash Adjust.]

Press to select an item and press [MENU/SET]

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64] in 1/3 steps.

180

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Changing Flash Mode

Recording mode:

Set the flash to match the recording.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Mode]

Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

: [Forced Flash On]

: [Forced On/Red-Eye]

Always takes pictures using the flash.

• Ideal for taking pictures with a backlight or when a

subject is located under bright lighting such as a

fluorescent light.

: [Slow Sync.]

: [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]

Takes brighter pictures such as pictures of subjects

against a nightscape by decreasing the shutter speed

when firing a flash.

• Ideal for taking pictures of people against a

nightscape.

: [Forced Flash Off]

Always takes pictures without flash under all recording

conditions.

• Ideal for taking pictures where the use of flash is

prohibited.

This is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→184) and [Firing Mode] is

set to [TTL] (→179).

Two flashes will be emitted. Do not move until after the second flash. Interval between

flashes varies according to brightness of subject.

• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors such as

distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera during the preliminary

flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible.

■

Reducing red-eye

Recording mode:

Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash

red-eye reduction ([ ], [ ]).

→ [Rec] → [Red-Eye Removal]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●

When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [ ]/[ ].

Not available in the following case:

●

Depending on the circumstance, it may not be possible to correct red-eye.

181

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

■

Shutter speeds for each flash mode

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1/60

- 1/4000

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1 - 1/16000

120

- 1/16000

The shutter speed is set to 60 seconds in [Shutter-Priority] Mode and to T (time) in [Manual

Exposure] Mode.

The shutter speed is set to T (time) in [Manual Exposure] Mode.

• In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene.

■

Flash settings for each Recording Mode (When the flash (supplied) is attached)

(○: Available, –: Not available)

Recording Mode

[Intelligent Auto] Mode

–

○

[Program AE] Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

[Aperture-Priority] Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

[Shutter-Priority] Mode ○ ○ – – ○

[Manual Exposure] Mode ○ ○ – – ○

You cannot perform flash settings using the [Rec] menu. Set to [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]

depending on the subject and brightness.

●

Flash settings may be changed when changing Recording Mode.

●

Flash settings will be retained even if the camera is turned off.

182

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Setting the 2nd curtain sync

Recording mode:

2nd curtain sync is a recording method in which the flash fires just before the shutter

closes when you take a picture of a moving subject (such as a car) using the flash with a

slow shutter speed.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Synchro]

Press to select the setting item and press [MENU/SET]

[1ST] 1st curtain sync is the normal recording method

when using the flash.

[2ND] The light source is captured in back of the subject

and this produces a picture that is vibrant and

lively.

●

Normally, set to [1ST].

●

If you set to [2ND], [2nd] will be displayed in the flash icon on the screen.

●

[2ND] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF]. (→184)

●

The [Flash Synchro] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied flash is

used. (→291)

●

When a fast shutter speed is set, the [Flash Synchro] effect may not be sufficiently achieved.

●

When [2ND] is set, you cannot set the flash setting to [ ] or [ ].

183

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Adjusting the flash output

Recording mode:

Adjust the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or too dark.

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Adjust.]

Press to set the flash output and press [MENU/SET]

Settings: -3 EV to +3 EV (unit: 1/3 EV)

When you do not want to adjust the intensity of the flash, select [±0 EV].

●

When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash icon.

●

[Flash Adjust.] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→184) and [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL] (→179).

●

The [Flash Adjust.] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied flash is

used. (→291)

Synchronising the flash output with the camera during

Exposure Compensation

Recording mode:

The flash output is automatically adjusted in accordance with the exposure compensation

value.

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Auto Exposure Comp.]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●

About Exposure Compensation (→135)

●

The [Auto Exposure Comp.] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied

flash is used. (→291)

184

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Performing wireless flash settings

Recording mode:

When you use the flashes (optional: DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L) with the wireless flash

recording function, you can separately control the firing of the flashes in three groups and

of the flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera.

Although the flash (supplied) is not equipped with the wireless flash recording function, it

can be attached to the hot shoe of this unit and you can control the firing of the wireless

flash.

■

Positioning the wireless flash

Position the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera. The following

illustration is an example of the range within which the flash can be positioned. The

flash controllable range varies depending on the surrounding environment.

Flash controllable range

(when a supplied flash is attached)

Example of positioning flashes

2 m

(6.6 feet)

2 m

(6.6 feet)

3 m (9.8 feet)

3 m

(9.8 feet)

• This flash positioning example shows a case where flash unit C is positioned in order to

eliminate the shadows from the subject’s background, which is produced by flash unit A

and flash unit B of the flash group.

• For the number of wireless flashes to be controlled, we recommend setting up to three

flash units in each group.

• When a subject is too close, the communication light emission may affect the exposure

of the picture. This problem can be mitigated if you decrease the flash output by setting

[Communication Light] to [LOW] or using a flash diffuser or similar device.

Preparation

Attach a supplied flash or an optional flash (DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L) to this unit.

Set the wireless flash to RC mode and position the flash

• Select the channel and group of the wireless flash.

185

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Wireless]

Press to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]

• When [Wireless] is set to [ON], [WL] will appear with the flash icon on the recording screen.

• To perform detailed settings for the wireless flash, perform the following settings from the [Flash].

Press to select [Wireless Channel] and press

[MENU/SET]

Firing Mode Flash output

Luminosity ratio

Press to select the channel and press [MENU/SET]

• Select the same channel as the channel set for the wireless flash

in step

Press to select [Wireless Setup] and press

[MENU/SET]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• Press the [DISP.] button to perform a test firing.

[External

Flash]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[AUTO]

: Sets the flash output using an external flash.

[MANUAL]: Manually sets the flash ratio of an external flash.

[OFF]: An external flash fires only for a communication light emission.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of an external flash manually when [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash ratio of an external flash when [Firing Mode] is set to

[MANUAL].

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64]

in 1/3 steps.

[A Group]/

[B Group]/

[C Group]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the wireless flash output.

[AUTO]: Sets the flash output using the wireless flash.

[MANUAL]: Manually sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash.

[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the set group do not fire.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually when [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash when [Firing Mode] is set to

[MANUAL].

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64]

in 1/3 steps.

When the flash (supplied) is attached to this unit, you cannot perform these settings.

186

SQW0024

Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures using the flash (supplied)

■

Setting the communication light emission to be used when wireless flash

recording is performed

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Communication Light]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW]

187

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard,

as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in

MP4. (→194)

Audio is recorded in stereo.

Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate

Recording mode:

Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Rec Format]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[AVCHD] This is a data format suitable for playback on high-definition TVs.

[MP4]

This data format is suited for playing back motion pictures on a computer and other

such devices.

Use to select [Rec Quality] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• Exit the menu after it is executed.

188

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

When [AVCHD] is selected

Item Picture size

Recording frame rate

Sensor output Bit rate

[FHD/28M/50p]

1920×1080 50p 50 fps Approx. 28 Mbps

[FHD/17M/50i] 1920×1080 50i 50 fps Approx. 17 Mbps

[FHD/24M/25p] 1920×1080 50i 25 fps Approx. 24 Mbps

[FHD/24M/24p] 1920×1080 24p 24 fps Approx. 24 Mbps

AVCHD Progressive

When [MP4] is selected

Item Picture size

Recording frame rate

Sensor output Bit rate

[4K/100M/25p] 3840×2160 25p 25 fps Approx. 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/24p] 3840×2160 24p 24 fps Approx. 100 Mbps

[FHD/28M/50p] 1920×1080 50p 50 fps Approx. 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/25p] 1920×1080 25p 25 fps Approx. 20 Mbps

[HD/10M/25p] 1280×720 25p 25 fps Approx. 10 Mbps

[VGA/4M/25p] 640×480 25p 25 fps Approx. 4 Mbps

• What is bit rate

Bit rate is the volume of data for a definite period of time, and the quality becomes

higher when the number gets bigger. This unit uses the “VBR” recording method. “VBR”

is an abbreviation of “Variable Bit Rate”, and the bit rate (volume of data for definite

period of time) is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. Therefore,

the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast movement is recorded.

189

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

■

About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures

Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MP4] may be played back with poor picture or

sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment

compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed

properly. In this case, use this unit.

• When you import and play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/50p],

[FHD/24M/25p], or [FHD/24M/24p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit,

a compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is

required.

• For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p] in the

[MP4] format, refer to “Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→274).

Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures

([Continuous AF])

Recording mode:

Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→114) and the setting of [Continuous AF]

in the [Motion Picture] menu.

[Focus] [Continuous AF] Setting

[AFS]/[AFF]/

[AFC]

[ON]

Allow the focus to be constantly adjusted

automatically while recording motion pictures.

(→114)

[OFF]

Fix focus position at the start of motion picture

recording.

[MF] [ON] / [OFF] Allow the focus to be adjusted manually. (→128)

• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC], the camera will refocus if the

shutter button is pressed halfway while recording motion pictures.

• When Auto Focus is activated while you are recording motion pictures, the focusing

operation sound may be recorded under some conditions. If you want to suppress this

sound, we recommend taking pictures after setting [Continuous AF] to [OFF] in the

[Motion Picture] menu.

• When using zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take some time to focus.

190

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Recording mode:

You can record motion pictures by manually setting the aperture value and shutter speed.

(→80)

The camera automatically sets the aperture value and shutter speed and identifies the

optimal scene to record motion pictures in [Intelligent Auto] Mode. (→76)

Press the motion picture button to start recording

• Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it.

• While you are recording motion pictures, the recording status

indicator (red) will flash.

• If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute

or longer, some of the information on the screen is turned off.

To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button. This

operation takes place to prevent screen burn-in. This is not a

malfunction.

• Do not block the microphones when recording motion pictures.

• You can also use zoom while recording motion pictures.

– The operating sounds of the zoom lever or control ring may be

recorded in some cases.

• Still pictures can be taken during motion picture recording.

(→198)

Elapsed recording time

Remaining recording time

(approx.)

Recording state indicator

Press the motion picture button again to end recording

191

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

About the aperture value and shutter speed to be used for recording

motion pictures

●

About aperture value

• To record motion pictures with a sharp focus on both subject and background, set

the aperture value to a higher number. To record motion pictures with a defocused

background, set a lower number.

●

About the shutter speed

• To record a sharp motion picture of a fast-moving subject, set a faster shutter speed.

To record a motion picture with a trailing effect for a subject’s movements, set a

slower shutter speed.

• When you set a faster shutter speed, the screen noise may increase due to the

higher sensitivity.

• When you record a subject under fluorescent or LED lighting fixtures, etc., the colours

and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

If this happens, we recommend manually adjusting the shutter speed to 1/60 seconds

or 1/100 seconds.

About operation sound when recording ends

Since motion pictures are recorded until the motion picture button is pressed to stop

recording, the operating sound level in the picture may be higher. To suppress this sound,

we recommend trying the following method.

●

Divide the end part of a motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214) in the [Playback]

menu. In some cases, motion pictures cannot be divided at a position close to the

end part of the motion picture. To avoid this problem, continue recording for an extra 3

seconds.

192

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Enabling/disabling the motion picture button

→ [Custom] → [Video Button] → [ON] / [OFF]

●

This function prevents incorrect operation of the button.

Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures

and motion pictures

→ [Custom] → [Rec Area] → (Picture) / (Motion picture)

●

If the aspect ratio is different for still pictures and motion pictures, the angle of view will

change when starting to record a motion picture.

When you set [Rec Area] to [ ], the angle of view setting used for recording motion

pictures is displayed.

●

[Rec Area] should be interpreted as a guideline.

193

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

●

If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera.

●

If Extra optical zoom is used before pressing the motion picture button, these settings will be

cleared, and the recordable area will be changed significantly.

●

Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion

picture, operation noise may be recorded.

●

The zoom speed will be slower than normal during motion picture recording.

●

The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly.

●

Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after

recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

●

If you stop recording motion pictures too soon when you have set picture effect (Filter) of

[Miniature Effect], the camera may continue recording for a certain time. Hold the camera until the

camera stops recording.

●

[ISO Limit Set] is disabled when you are recording motion pictures.

●

Even if you set [Stabilizer] to [ ] (Panning) when you are recording motion pictures, it is fixed to

[

] (Normal).

●

It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler

(optional) when recording motion pictures. (→292)

●

If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor and the power supply is cut off due to a

power outage or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not

be recorded.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases:

• During panorama picture recording

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature

Effect]

, [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine])

Only when recording motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

194

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Recording 4K motion pictures

Recording mode:

You can record high-resolution 4K motion pictures by setting [Rec Quality] to [4K].

• To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→25)

• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion

pictures of other sizes.

■

To record 4K motion pictures

Select the recording mode (→59)

Set the [Rec Format] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [MP4] (→187)

Set [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p]

(→188)

Press the motion picture button to start recording

Press the motion picture button again to end recording

195

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Creating a high-resolution still picture from a 4K motion

picture [4K PHOTO]

You can create a still picture with approximately 8 megapixel resolution from a 4K motion

picture recorded by setting [4K PHOTO]. You can create a still picture that captures a

moment, similar to high-speed burst recording.

This setting is not available in [Intelligent Auto] Mode.

Recording 4K motion pictures

• To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→25)

Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [4K PHOTO]

Press to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]

A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation

is executed.

• The appropriate motion picture mode for capturing a still picture

from a 4K motion picture is selected and the motion picture can

be recorded using still picture quality.

• Since the camera puts higher priority on the focus of a still picture

captured from a 4K motion picture, focusing movement during

motion picture recording may be noticeable.

The camera will automatically perform the following setting items.

Menu Item

[Rec Format] [MP4]

[Rec Quality] [4K/100M/25p]

Press [ ] button to display the recording screen

196

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial to set the recording mode

• We recommend setting [Shutter-Priority] Mode and setting the shutter speed to 1/1000 seconds

or higher to minimise subject blur. To record a subject that is moving quickly, set the shutter

speed to 1/2000 seconds or higher.

Operate the aspect ratio selector switch to set the

aspect ratio for a motion picture

• The aspect ratio of a still picture captured from a 4K motion

picture is the same as the aspect ratio of the motion picture.

Press the motion picture button to start recording

• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be

narrower than motion pictures of other sizes.

Setting a marker

●

When you press the [Fn2] button while recording, you can add a marker to the

motion picture.

●

When you create still pictures from a motion picture, you can quickly move to a

marker position you want to capture as a still picture.

●

You can add up to 40 markers in a single motion picture.

Press the motion picture button again to end recording

• Motion picture recording can also be started or finished by pressing the shutter button.

197

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Creating still pictures from a motion picture

Display the picture that you want to capture as a still

picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being

played back on the camera

• You can press to perform single-frame forward/rewind

operations.

• When you press the [Fn2] button and press

, you can quickly

move to the marker position you set while recording the motion

picture. (You can perform the same operation even during motion

picture playback.)

If you press the [Fn2] button again, you can perform single-frame

forward/rewind operations by pressing

Fn2

Press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET].

• [

] is displayed for a captured still picture.

●

If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV

with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

198

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being

recorded

Recording mode:

Still pictures can be recorded even while a motion picture is being recorded.

(Simultaneous recording)

Press the shutter button fully during the

motion picture recording

• When you take a still picture, the simultaneous

still/motion picture recording icon is displayed.

Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode

Recording mode:

You can use [Picture Mode] in the [Motion Picture] menu to set the recording method of a

still picture to be taken while you record a motion picture.

(motion

picture

priorities)

• Takes a still picture using [Picture Size] [S] (2M). The picture quality may be different

to [S] (2M) of standard pictures.

• Only pictures in JPEG file format are recorded when [Quality] is set to [

], [ ],

or [

]. ([Quality] is used with the [ ] setting when [ ] is set.)

• You can take up to 30 still pictures while you are recording a motion picture.

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set to [Miniature Effect], a still picture may be taken

with a slight delay from the time you fully press the shutter button.

(Still

picture

priorities)

• A still picture is taken with [Picture Size] and [Quality] that you have set.

• While a still picture is being taken, the screen turns black. During this period, the still

picture is taken in the motion picture and the audio is muted.

• You can take up to 4 still pictures while you are recording a motion picture.

●

The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].

Not available in the following cases:

●

Still pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases:

• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p], [4K/100M/24p], or

[VGA/4M/25p]

• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD], [Rec Quality] is set to [FHD/24M/24p] (only available with

[

] ([Photo Priority]) setting)

199

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→31).

• The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic],

[i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and

[Motion Picture] menus.

If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will

also be changed automatically.

• [Motion Picture] menu will not be displayed in the following cases:

– During panorama picture recording

[4K PHOTO]

• For details (→195).

[Rec Format]

• For details (→187).

[Rec Quality]

• For details (→187).

[Picture Mode]

• For details (→198).

[Continuous AF]

• For details (→189).

200

SQW0024

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→31).

[Mic Level Disp.]

Recording mode:

You can set whether or not to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

Not available in the following case:

●

When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect])

[Mic Level Adj.]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the audio input level in 4 steps.

Not available in the following case:

●

When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect])

[Wind Cut]

Recording mode:

If you hear wind noise during an audio recording, you can use [Wind Cut] to effectively

reduce the wind noise.

Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF]

●

When [Wind Cut] is set, the sound quality may differ from that of normal recordings.

Not available in the following case:

●

When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect])

201

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing the group picture

You can consecutively play back multiple pictures in a group or play back group pictures

one by one.

[

]: Group pictures recorded consecutively by setting

[Burst Rate] to [SH] (→142)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]

(→153)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] (→156)

• You can delete or edit pictures in group units. (For example,

if you delete one of pictures in a group, all pictures in that

group will be deleted.)

15 pic.15 pic.

Playing back group pictures consecutively

Select a picture with the group picture icon ([ ], [ ], or [ ]),

and press

• When you play back group pictures one by one, the option settings are displayed.

[From the first picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the first picture in a

group.

[From the current picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the picture currently

played back.

■

Operations during continuous playback

Continuous playback / Pause Stop

Fast rewind playback Fast forward playback

Returning to the previous picture

(while paused)

Scrolling to the next picture

(while paused)

202

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing the group picture

Playing back group pictures one by one

Select a picture with the submenu icon ([ ]), and

press

• The submenu screen will appear.

Display In GroupDisplay In Group

Upload(Wi-Fi)Upload(Wi-Fi)

Use to select [Display In Group] and press

[MENU/SET]

Use to scroll through the pictures

• When you use to select [Exit Display In Group] and press

[MENU/SET] after pressing

again, the normal playback screen

reappears.

• You can use the same operations for pictures stored in a group

as in normal still picture playback. (Multi Playback, Playback

Zoom, deletion of pictures, etc.)

●

Pictures will not be grouped if they are recorded without setting [Clock Set].

●

Burst pictures recorded on another device may not be recognised as group pictures.

203

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Capturing still pictures from motion pictures

Save a scene from a motion picture as a still picture.

• For the method of capturing a still picture from a 4K motion picture recorded by setting

[4K PHOTO] to [ON], refer to (→195).

Display the picture that you want to

capture as a still picture by pressing to

pause a motion picture being played back

on the camera

• When you press while paused, you can perform

fast forward/rewind operations.

Press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and

press [MENU/SET].

• The still picture is saved with aspect ratio of [16:9] and

[Quality] of [ ]. The picture size varies depending on

the motion picture being played back.

– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K]: [M] (8M)

– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [FHD], [HD]: [S] (2M)

●

The picture quality becomes slightly lower depending on the [Rec Quality] setting of the original

motion picture.

●

When a still picture captured from a motion picture is played back, [ ] is displayed.

●

If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV

with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

Not available in the following case:

●

You cannot capture a still picture from the following motion pictures.

• Motion pictures recorded in [MP4] using the [VGA/4M/25p] setting

204

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures

you have taken.

• For the setting procedures of the menu. (→31)

●

In the following cases, new pictures are created after they have been edited. Before starting to

edit, make sure that there is enough free space in the memory card.

• [RAW Processing]

• [Text Stamp]

• [Time Lapse Video]

• [Stop Motion Video]

• [Resize]

• [Cropping]

●

It may not be possible to set or edit pictures taken with other cameras.

[Slide Show]

Automatically play pictures in order. Recommended when viewing on TV screen.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Slide Show]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• When you select [Category Selection], use to select

category and press [MENU/SET]. For details about category,

refer to (→206).

Use to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

■

Operations during Slide Show

Pause/Play Stop

Previous Next

Control dial

(counterclockwise)

Volume down

Control dial

(clockwise)

Volume up

205

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

■

To change settings such as music or display time

Select [Effect] or [Setup] and then press [MENU/SET].

[Effect] [AUTO] / [NATURAL] / [SLOW] / [SWING] / [URBAN] / [OFF]

[Setup] [Duration] [1SEC] / [2SEC] / [3SEC] / [5SEC]

[Repeat] [ON] / [OFF]

[Sound] [OFF]: Music and audio will not play back.

[AUTO]: With still pictures, music will play back, and with motion

pictures, audio will play back.

[Music]: Music effect will play back.

[Audio]: Audio is played back from motion pictures.

●

When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect.

●

[AUTO] can be used only when [Category Selection] is selected. The pictures are played back with

the recommended effects for each category.

●

When you perform a Slide Show playback by setting [Video Only] or [Category Selection] to [ ],

[

], or [ ], [Effect] is fixed to [OFF].

●

When you perform a Slide Show playback for a group picture, and even if [Effect] is set, the effects

are disabled.

●

When panorama pictures, motion pictures, or group pictures are played back, the [Duration]

setting is disabled.

●

[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to [OFF].

●

Part of [Effect] cannot be used when displaying pictures on television using an HDMI micro cable

or when displaying pictures recorded in portrait position.

●

Music effects cannot be added.

206

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Playback Mode]

Recorded pictures can be played back in a variety of ways.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Playback Mode]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

When selecting [Category Play] in step

above

Use to select the category and press [MENU/SET]

• The available categories are as follows.

[Face Recog.]

[i-Portrait], [i-Night Portrait], [i-Baby] in Automatic Scene Detection

[i-Scenery], [i-Sunset] in Automatic Scene Detection

[i-Night Portrait], [i-Night Scenery], [i-Handheld Night Shot] in Automatic Scene

Detection

[i-Food] in Automatic Scene Detection

[Travel Date]

A burst of pictures recorded by setting [Burst Rate] to [SH]

[Time Lapse Shot], [Time Lapse Video]

[Stop Motion Animation], [Stop Motion Video]

Use to select a person to be played back and press [MENU/SET]. Face Recognition is

applied for all the pictures in the group.

●

[Playback Mode] automatically changes to [Normal Play] when the camera is turned on, or when

switching from the recording standby screen to the playback screen.

●

The category for recording motion pictures is different from the category of still pictures used in

some Recording Modes. For that reason, the pictures may not be played back.

207

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Location Logging]

After you send location information (latitude and longitude) obtained by your smartphone/

tablet to this unit, you can write this information on pictures using the unit.

Preparation

Send location information to this unit from your smartphone/tablet. (→237)

• You must install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone/tablet. (→228)

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Location Logging] → [Add Location Data]

Use to select a period for writing location information, and then press

[MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• [

] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.

■

Abort writing location information

Press [MENU/SET] while location information is being written

• [ ] is displayed for the period of the abort operation.

If selected again while [

] is displayed, writing location information will resume where it left off.

■

Delete received location information

Use to select [Delete Location Data] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a period for deleting location information, and then press

[MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

●

Location information can be written only to pictures recorded with this unit.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Location information may not be written if there is not enough free space on your card.

●

The location information will not be written on pictures that were recorded after you sent the

location information (→237).

●

Location information will not be written to AVCHD motion pictures.

●

The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock Set].

Writing the location information using a smartphone/tablet

When you use your smartphone/tablet as a remote controller for this unit, you can write

the location information on pictures using the smartphone/tablet. (→238)

208

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[RAW Processing]

You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format.

The created still pictures are saved in JPEG format. You can develop the pictures while

confirming the effects on the screen.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [RAW Processing]

Press to select RAW file and press [MENU/SET]

Press to select the item

• The following items can be set. The settings used during recording are applied at the time of

setting.

[White Balance]

You can select White Balance to make adjustments. When you select an

item with [ ], you can develop the pictures using the same settings that

were applied for recording.

[Exposure Comp.]

You can perform Exposure Compensation in the range from –1 EV to

+1 EV.

[Photo Style]

You can select the [Photo Style] effects ([Standard], [Vivid], [Natural],

[Monochrome], [Scenery], or [Portrait]).

[i.Dynamic]

You can select the [i.Dynamic] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], or

[OFF]).

[Contrast] You can adjust the contrast.

[Highlight] You can adjust the brightness of a highlighted area.

[Shadow] You can adjust the brightness of a shadowed area.

[Saturation] /

[Color Tone]

You can adjust the saturation. (You can adjust the colouring when

[Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style].)

[Filter Effect]

You can select a Filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] is selected for

[Photo Style])

[Noise Reduction] You can set noise reduction.

[i.Resolution]

You can select the [i.Resolution] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW],

[EXTENDED], or [OFF]).

[Sharpness] You can adjust the impression of resolution.

[Setup]

You can perform the following settings.

[Reinstate Adjustments]: You can restore the settings to the ones used

during recording.

[Color Space]: You can select [Color Space] from either [sRGB] or

[Adobe RGB].

[Picture Size]: You can select the picture size ([L], [M], or [S]) of a JPEG

file when saving pictures.

209

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

Press [MENU/SET] to set

• The setting methods vary depending on the item. For details, refer to “Setting each item”.

Press [MENU/SET]

• The screen in step

reappears. To set another item, repeat steps

Press to select [Begin Processing] and press [MENU/SET]

• Confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

■

Setting each item

When you select an item, the setting screen appears.

Control dial

Used to make adjustments

Used to display the colour temperature

setting screen (→105)

(Only when [White Balance] is set to [

])

Used to display the White Balance fine

adjustment screen (→105)

(Only when [White Balance] is set)

[DISP.] Used to display the comparison screen

[MENU/SET]

Used to finalise an adjustment you just made

and to return to the item selection screen

• If you have selected [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution], or [Sharpness],

the comparison screen is not displayed.

• Pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever.

The following operating methods are available to make adjustments on the comparison

screen.

Control dial

Used to make adjustments

[DISP.] Used to return to the setting screen

[MENU/SET]

Used to finalise an adjustment you just made

and to return to the item selection screen

Current setting

210

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

When [Setup] is selected

When you select an item, the screen for selecting [Reinstate Adjustments], [Color

Space], or [Picture Size] is displayed.

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• When [Reinstate Adjustments] is selected, confirmation screen is displayed. When you select

[Yes], the item selection screen reappears.

Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

●

The result of a RAW file developed by this camera and a RAW file developed by the supplied DVD

software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” will not be exactly the same.

●

The range that can be set using Exposure Compensation varies from the range used during

recording.

●

The [White Balance] setting of still pictures recorded using [Multi Exp.] is fixed to the setting used

during recording.

●

If [Red-Eye Removal] is activated during recording, you can use [RAW Processing] in the

[Playback] menu to save JPEG file pictures in which red-eye was detected and corrected.

●

You cannot perform RAW processing using multiple still pictures simultaneously.

Not available in the following cases:

●

When an AV cable (optional) or an HDMI micro cable is connected, [RAW Processing] is disabled.

●

You can perform RAW processing on pictures recorded using this unit only. [RAW Processing]

cannot be used for pictures recorded on other devices or for pictures recorded in formats other

than the RAW format.

211

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Title Edit]

You can enter characters (comments) on a recorded picture.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Title Edit] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select a still picture

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

TitleTitle

Edit

[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

• To execute → Use

to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET].

[Title Edit] setting

[Title Edit] already set

Enter characters (Entering text (→52))

• To delete a title, delete all the characters in the character input screen.

●

To print text, use [Text Stamp] or “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD.

Not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [

], [ ] or [ ]

212

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Text Stamp]

You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on

the recorded still pictures.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Text Stamp] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select a still picture

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

TextText

Stamp

[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

• To execute → Use

to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET].

[Text Stamp] setting

(

[Text Stamp] already set)

Use to select [Set] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] (→213)

Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] (→213)

Press [ ] button

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• Confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

213

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

■

Items that can be stamped

[Shooting Date] [W/O TIME]: Stamp recording date

[WITH TIME]: Stamp recording date and time

[Name]

: Stamp name registered in Face Recognition

: Stamp name registered in [Profile Setup]

[Location] Stamp location registered in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date]

[Travel Date] Stamp number of days that have elapsed since the travel date set in [Setup]

menu’s [Travel Date]

[Title] Stamp text registered in [Title Edit]

• Items set to [OFF] are not stamped.

●

Do not request date printing in store or make date printing on printer for still pictures with

date stamps. (Date printing may be overlapped.)

●

Characters may be cut off on certain printers.

●

If you stamp text on the pictures in a group, those pictures are saved as new pictures.

●

Text is difficult to read when stamped on pictures of 0.3M or less.

Not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [

]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

• Still pictures taken without setting clock

214

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Video Divide]

A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. This is convenient when you want to keep

just the necessary scenes, or if you wish to delete unnecessary scenes to increase free

space on your card, such as when travelling.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Video Divide]

Use to select a motion picture to split and press [MENU/SET]

Press at where you want to split a motion picture to pause it

• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments to the splitting positions in a

motion picture.

• If you press

again, the motion picture is played back from the last position prior to activating

pause.

Press

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press

[MENU/SET].

• The original motion picture that was split does not remain.

(There will only be the 2 motion pictures that were created after

the split.)

●

During dividing, do not turn off the camera or remove the card or battery. If you do so, the motion

picture may be deleted.

●

If you divide a motion picture recorded in [MP4] when the picture display sequence is set to [FILE

NAME], the order of the pictures will change. It is recommended to set the display sequence to

[DATE/TIME] or to display using [Calendar].

Not available in the following cases:

●

Motion pictures cannot be divided at a location close to the start or end of the motion picture.

●

Motion pictures with a short recording time cannot be divided.

215

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Time Lapse Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Time Lapse Shot]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Time Lapse Video]

Use to select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group and press

[MENU/SET]

Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• The process is the same as that used to create a motion picture after recording pictures using

[Time Lapse Shot]. For details, refer to step

and the subsequent steps (→154).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→155).

[Stop Motion Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Stop Motion Animation]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording

format.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Stop Motion Video]

Use to select a stop motion animation group and press [MENU/SET]

Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• The process is the same as that used to create a motion picture after recording pictures using

[Stop Motion Animation]. For details, refer to step

and the subsequent steps (→157).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→158).

216

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Resize]

Picture size can be reduced to facilitate e-mail attachment and use in web pages, etc.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Resize] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select a still picture and size

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the

operation is executed.

[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the

operation is executed.

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

• To execute → Use

to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET].

Resize setting

●

Picture quality is reduced after resizing.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Still pictures recorded at the smallest recording pixel level cannot be further reduced.

●

Cannot resize the following pictures:

• Motion pictures

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [

]

• Panorama pictures

• Group pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

217

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Cropping]

Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Cropping]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Select area to crop and press [MENU/SET]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the

operation is executed.

Expand Change

position

●

Perform cropping for each picture in the group. (You cannot edit pictures in group units.)

●

If you crop a picture in the group, it is saved as a new picture.

●

Original Face Recognition information will not be copied when still pictures are cropped.

●

Picture quality is reduced after cropping.

Not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [

]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

218

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.]

You can automatically display a still picture recorded in portrait orientation by taking the

picture with the camera held vertically, or manually rotate the picture in 90-degree units.

[Rotate] Rotating a picture manually

• You cannot select [Rotate] when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Rotate]

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• You cannot rotate group pictures.

Use to select the rotation direction and press

[MENU/SET]

[ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise.

[

]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise.

[Rotate Disp.] Rotating a picture automatically to display

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Rotate Disp.] → [ON]

• When this function is set to [OFF], the picture is displayed without changing its orientation.

Not available in the following cases:

●

When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the

OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording

information, etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information

Technology Industries Association)”.

●

A picture may not be automatically rotated to display it with portrait orientation on the Multi

Playback screen, which is displayed for settings such as [Delete Multi].

219

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Favorite]

By labelling your favourite pictures with a star [ ], you can play back your favourite

pictures only, or you can delete all pictures except your favourites.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Favorite] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select picture

[Single]

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Favourite picture setting

[Multi] (up to 999 pictures)

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

2 3

4 5 6

Favourite picture setting

■

To clear all

In step

, select [Favorite] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●

When you set [Favorite] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the

[Favorite] icon of the first picture.

●

Only when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play], you can select [Cancel].

Not available in the following case:

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

220

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Print Set]

Picture/picture no./date printing settings can be made for when printing with DPOF

print-compatible shops or printers. (Ask at the shop to check for compatibility.)

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Print Set] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select a still picture

[Single]

Use to select still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Count

DateDate

[Multi]

Use to select still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Count

2 3

4 5 6

DateDate

Use to set number of still pictures and press [MENU/SET]

(Repeat steps

and

when using [Multi] (up to 999 pictures))

• Date print setting/release → Press

■

To clear all

In step

, select [Print Set] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●

When you have performed [Print Set] for pictures in a group, printing settings are made for the

total of number of pictures set in that group. If the total number of pictures is 1,000 or higher,

[999+] is displayed.

●

When you perform [Print Set] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set and the total

number of pictures are displayed with the Print Set icon of the first picture.

●

Date print setting cannot be made for pictures with a [Text Stamp] applied.

●

Depending on the type of printer, the printer settings may take priority over camera settings.

●

Some DPOF information (print settings) set by other equipment cannot be used. In such cases,

delete all of the DPOF information and then set it again with this camera.

Not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [

]

• Cannot be set for files that are not compliant with the DCF standard.

221

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Protect]

Set protection to disable picture deletion. Prevents deletion of important pictures.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Protect] → [Single] or [Multi]

Select picture

[Single]

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Picture protected

[Multi]

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

2 3

4 5 6

Picture protected

■

To clear all

In step

, select [Protect] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

When you set the write-protect switch on the card to the “LOCK” position, the

picture is not erased.

●

The picture is erased when formatting, even if it is protected.

●

May not be effective when using other devices.

●

When you set [Protect] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the

[Protect] icon of the first picture.

222

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Face Rec Edit]

Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with mistaken Face Recognition.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Face Rec Edit] → [REPLACE] or [DELETE]

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a person and press [MENU/SET]

• If [DELETE], go to step

• People whose Face Recognition information has not been registered cannot be selected.

Use to select the person to replace for another and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]

●

When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot be restored.

●

Pictures for which all Face Recognition information has been deleted are not categorised in Face

Recognition during [Category Play] or [Category Selection].

●

Edit the Face Recognition information in group units for a group picture. (You cannot edit the

information for each picture in a group.)

●

You can edit only the first picture in a group.

223

SQW0024

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Picture Sort]

You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit.

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Picture Sort]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[FILE NAME]

Displays pictures in the folder name or file name sequence. This display

format allows you to find the storage location of a picture on a card more

easily.

[DATE/TIME]

Displays pictures according to the date and time that the pictures were

taken in chronological order. When the pictures are taken using several

cameras and stored on the same card, this display format allows you find

a specific picture more easily.

●

Pictures may not be displayed according to the [DATE/TIME] sequence immediately after a card

is inserted into this unit. In that case, wait a while, and the pictures will be displayed in the [DATE/

TIME] sequence.

[Delete Confirmation]

You can set the Yes/No options that you want to select first on

the confirmation screen when you delete a picture from either

[Yes] or [No].

"No" first"No" first

"Yes" first"Yes" first

Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Delete Confirmation]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

["Yes" first] [Yes] is selected by default to quickly perform a deletion.

["No" first]

[No] is selected by default. This setting will prevent you from

accidentally deleting pictures.

224

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Function and NFC Function

■

Use the camera as a wireless LAN device

When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than

wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety

designs and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility

for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a

wireless LAN device.

■

Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where

this camera is sold

There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries

other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for

any violations.

■

There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted by a third party. We strongly recommend that you enable encryption in the

settings of your wireless access point to ensure information security.

■

Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference

• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,

such as near microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach the camera.

• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones

that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both

devices.

■

Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use

When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched

automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use

(SSID

) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may

be considered as unauthorised access.

SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If the

SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

■

Before Use

• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device

equipped with the wireless LAN function is required.

■

The camera is compatible with NFC

Using the NFC (Near Field Communication) function, the

camera and a smartphone/tablet can easily exchange the

information needed to establish a Wi-Fi connection.

225

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Function and NFC Function

■

About the Wi-Fi connection lamp

[Wi-Fi] button

Wi-Fi connection lamp

Lit blue: When the Wi-Fi function is ON

Blinking blue: When sending data

■

About the [Wi-Fi] button

You can operate the [Wi-Fi]/[Fn2] button in two ways, using it either as the

[Wi-Fi] button or as a function button [Fn2].

It is set to [Wi-Fi] at the time of purchase.

For more details about the function button (→37)

• Before a Wi-Fi connection is established, press the [Wi-Fi] button to perform the

following operations:

(You can also display the same menu by selecting

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function].)

[New Connection]

[Select a destination from History]

(→268)

[Select a destination from Favorite]

(→268)

226

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Function and NFC Function

• Pressing the [Wi-Fi] button during a Wi-Fi connection enables the following operation.

[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.

[Change the Destination]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to

select a different Wi-Fi connection.

[Change Settings for Sending

Images]

For details (→271).

[Register the Current Destination to

Favorite]

Registering the current connection destination or the

connection method, you can easily connect with the

same connection method next time.

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit

(→273).

This item will not be displayed if you press to send pictures to WEB services while the

pictures are displayed (→254).

This item will not be displayed if the destination for [Remote Shooting & View], [Playback on

TV] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Printer].

●

Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while

sending images.

●

The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

●

Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless

access point.

●

We recommend that you use a fully charged battery when you send pictures.

●

When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or

the connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

●

When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred

depending on the details of your contract.

●

Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is

terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.

●

The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service, however

this will not affect the image being sent.

227

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

What you can do with the Wi-Fi function

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone (→228)

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone/tablet

Saving pictures in the camera to the smartphone/tablet

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

Writing the location information on pictures in the camera

Connect easily, transfer pictures easily

You can easily use the Wi-Fi function by

pressing and holding the [Wi-Fi] button or

using the NFC function.

Press and

hold

Hold the device

close to the camera

Displaying still pictures on a TV (→242)

Wireless printing (→243)

Sending pictures to AV device (→244)

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV device in the home (home AV

device).

Sending pictures to a PC (→247)

Using WEB services (→251)

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. You can receive still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a

smartphone/tablet using the Cloud Sync. Service.

• Hereafter, this manual uses the term “smartphone” for both smartphones and tablets

unless it is necessary to distinguish between them.

228

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a

smartphone

You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone.

The “Panasonic Image App” (hereafter “Image App”) must be installed on your

smartphone.

Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”

The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic that allows your smartphone to

perform the following operations of a Wi-Fi-compatible LUMIX.

For Android™ apps For iOS apps

Supported OS

Android 2.3.3 or later

iOS 6.0 or later

(iPhone 3GS is not supported.)

Installation

procedure

Connect your Android device to a

network

Select “Google Play

Store”

Enter “Panasonic Image App” or

“LUMIX” to search for the app

Select “Panasonic Image App” and

install it

• The icon will be added to

the menu.

Connect the iOS device to the

network

Select “App Store

”

Enter “Panasonic Image App” or

“LUMIX” to search for the app

Select “Panasonic Image App” and

install it

• The icon will be added to

the menu.

To connect this unit with [Wi-Fi Direct], Android OS 4.0 or above is required and the device must be

compatible with Wi-Fi Direct™.

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OS versions as of September 2014. Supported OS versions may be

changed without prior notice.

• Some of the screens and information provided in this document may be different

depending on the supported operating system and “Image App” version.

• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of

smartphone being used.

• For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App”

menu.

• For the latest information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.)

• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred

depending on the details of your contract.

229

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Connecting to a smartphone

You can easily establish a Wi-Fi connection on the camera by pressing and holding the

[Wi-Fi] button or using the NFC function.

Preparation

Install “Image App” in advance. (→228)

Press and hold the [Wi-Fi] button

[Wi-Fi] button

Wi-Fi connection lamp

(Lit blue)

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed.

• After the second time, the screen for the previously used

connection method will appear.

• The same screen can be displayed by selecting items from the

menu as follows.

→ [New Connection] →

[Remote Shooting & View]

• When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is

displayed in an enlarged size. If it is difficult to read the code, use

the enlarge view. (If your smartphone cannot read the QR code,

move the camera away from the smartphone or use a connection

method other than the QR code.)

• To change the connection method, press the [DISP.] button and

select the connection method. (→232)

SSID and Password

QR Code

Operate the smartphone

• When the connection is complete, live images being captured by the camera are displayed on

the smartphone.

(It may take some time after the operation for the connection to be established.)

• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used. (→230, 231)

230

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■

Using an iOS device

• When reading a QR Code to connect

(Steps

to are not necessary when reconnecting.)

Start “Image App” (→228)

Select [QR Code] → [OK]

Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”

(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an

enlarged size.)

Install the IMAGE APP profile

Select [Install]

, then select [Install Now]

→ [Done]

• The message is displayed in the Web browser.

• If a passcode is required to unlock the smartphone, you will have to

input the passcode.

Press the home button to close the Web browser

Select [Wi-Fi]

under [Settings]

on the smartphone

Turn on [Wi-Fi]

and select the SSID displayed on this unit

Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→228)

The display may differ depending on the system language setting.

231

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

• When connecting with SSID and password

Select [Wi-Fi]

under [Settings]

on the smartphone

Turn on [Wi-Fi]

and select the SSID displayed on this unit

Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)

Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→228)

The display may differ depending on the system language setting.

■

Using an Android device

• When reading a QR Code to connect

Start “Image App” (→228)

Select [QR Code]

Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”

(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an

enlarged size.)

• When connecting with SSID and password

Start “Image App” (→228)

Select [Wi-Fi]

Select the SSID displayed on this unit

Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)

• If you check the item to display the password, you can confirm the password as you

enter it.

232

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Changing the connection method

To change the connection method, press

the [DISP.] button and select the connection

method.

■

When connecting with [Via Network]

(On the camera)

Select [Via Network] and press [MENU/SET]

• Connect the camera to a wireless access point by following the connection method (→264).

(On your smartphone)

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set

Start “Image App” (→228)

■

When connecting with [Direct]

(On the camera)

Select [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]

• Select [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection], and connect the camera to the smartphone by

following the connection method (→267).

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→228)

Closing the connection

After use, close the connection with the smartphone.

(On the camera)

Press [Wi-Fi] button

(On the recording standby screen, you can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

Select [Terminate the Connection]

• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET].

(On your smartphone)

Close “Image App”

From the “Image App” screen, press the home button on the smartphone to close the app

From the “Image App” screen, press the back button on the smartphone twice to close the app

233

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Connecting to a smartphone using NFC function

Using the NFC (Near Field Communication) function, the camera and a smartphone can

easily exchange the information needed to establish a Wi-Fi connection.

Compatible models:

This function can be used with NFC compatible devices with Android (2.3.3 or above).

(Not available in certain models)

• See the operating instructions of your NFC-compatible smartphone for more

information about smartphone operation and settings.

Preparations

(On the camera)

• Set [NFC Operation] to [ON] (→272)

(On your smartphone)

• Check if your smartphone is a compatible model

• Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

• Install “Image App” in advance (→228)

Start “Image App” on your smartphone

While the [ ] is displayed on the connection

screen of the “Image App”, hold the smartphone

close to the camera

Hold the smartphone

close to this area

(within 5 mm (0.20 inch))

Use to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]

Hold the smartphone close to this area of the

unit again

• When the connection is complete, live images captured

by the camera will be displayed on your smartphone.

• It may take some time to complete the connection.

• Connected smartphones are registered to this unit.

• From the next time and on, you can connect by

performing steps

and

234

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

●

You can register up to 20 smartphones. If the number of registered smartphones exceeds 20,

registrations will be deleted starting from the smartphone touched first.

●

If you perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], smartphone registration will be deleted.

●

If the communication environment is bad, the NFC function may not be usable.

●

If there is not a response immediately, shift the position slightly.

●

Do not bump your smartphone strongly against this unit.

●

See the operating instructions of your NFC-compatible smartphone for more information about

smartphone operation and settings.

●

Metal objects between this unit and the smartphone may interfere with communication. Also, any

stickers, etc., near the NFC area may affect communication performance.

Not available in the following cases:

●

The NFC function cannot be used in the following cases:

• When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode])

• During motion picture recording

• While recording still pictures (during self-timer countdown)

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

• When using [Multi Exp.]

• During motion picture playback, during slide shows, during panorama picture playback, and

during continuous playback of group pictures (including pauses in each case)

• While sending pictures by Wi-Fi

• When connected to computer/printer

●

You cannot transfer still pictures in RAW format, AVCHD motion pictures, or MP4 motion pictures

with [Rec Quality] of [4K].

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Select [ ] from “Image App”

Take pictures

• The recorded images are saved in the camera.

• When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the

camera in place with a tripod or by other means.

• Some settings are not available.

235

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Switch the

location of the

pictures to be

displayed

Select [ ] from “Image App”

• The images captured by the camera are displayed on the smartphone.

• You can switch a picture to be displayed using the icon at the top left on

the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved in the camera.

• When the picture is touched, it is played back at a larger size.

Saving pictures in the camera to the smartphone

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Select [ ] from “Image App”

Press and hold the picture and drag it to save it on the

smartphone

• The picture is saved on the smartphone.

• Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish.

Not available in the following case:

●

You cannot save still pictures in RAW format, AVCHD motion pictures, or MP4 motion pictures with

[Rec Quality] of [4K].

236

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Easily transferring pictures in the camera

You can establish a Wi-Fi connection using the NFC function and easily transfer over

Wi-Fi the picture on display simply by holding the smartphone close to the camera.

Pictures can be transferred as soon as they are recorded, so you can easily transfer them

to your friends’ and family’s smartphones.

“Image App” must be installed to use this function.

Preparations

(On the camera)

• Set [NFC Operation] to [ON] (→272)

• Set [Touch Sharing] to [ON] (→272)

(On your smartphone)

• Check if your smartphone is a compatible model

• Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

• Install “Image App” in advance (→228)

On the camera, play back the picture you wish

to transfer to a smartphone

Hold the smartphone

close to this area

(within 5 mm (0.20 inch))

Start “Image App” on the smartphone you are

transferring the picture to

While the [ ] is displayed on the connection

screen of the “Image App”, hold the smartphone

close to the camera

• It will be transferred to the smartphone.

• If you are transferring multiple pictures, repeat steps

and

. (Multiple pictures cannot be transferred in one

batch.)

• It may take several minutes to complete the picture

transfer depending on the environment used.

237

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Switch the

location of the

pictures to be

displayed

Select [ ] from “Image App”

Press and hold the picture and

drag it to send it to the social

networking service, etc.

• The picture will be sent to the social

networking service or other WEB

services.

• Functions can be assigned to the top,

bottom, left and right as you wish.

Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a

smartphone

You can send the location information acquired from a smartphone to the camera. After

the information is sent, you can write it on the pictures in the camera.

GPS

Starts location information recording

Ends location information recording

Sends and writes the location

information

Start the recording

• Location information that is different from the information acquired during recording may

be written. Take care regarding the following matters.

– Set [Home] of [World Time] of the camera to your home area.

– Once a smartphone starts recording the location information, do not change the

[Home] setting of [World Time] of the camera.

• The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock

Set].

238

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■

Starts location information recording

Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

Select [Geotagging]

Select [ ]

■

Ends location information recording

Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

Select [Geotagging]

Select [ ]

■

Sends and writes the location information

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

Select [Geotagging]

Select [ ]

• Follow the messages on the screen to perform the operation.

• Location information will not be written to AVCHD motion pictures.

• Location information may not be written if there is not enough free space on your card.

• You can also use [Location Logging] in the [Playback] menu to write the sent location

information to the pictures.

●

Caution:

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject when

you use this function. Use at your own risk.

●

On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the

transfer status of location information. Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu for details.

●

(When using “Image App” for iOS)

If you press the Home or On/Off button of a smartphone while location information recording is in

progress, recording is stopped.

239

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Operating the camera to send pictures to a smartphone

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD

[Send Images While Recording] (→240) ○ – – –

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

(→241)

○ –

○

–

Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about

picture playback.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Preparation

Install “Image App” in advance. (→228)

240

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

[Send Images While Recording]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [Smartphone]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]

■

When connecting with [Via Network]

(On the camera)

Connect the camera to a wireless access point (→264)

(On your smartphone)

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set

Start “Image App” (→228)

■

When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]

(On the camera)

Connect the camera to a smartphone (→267)

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→228)

■

When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]

Perform step

(→229).

Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press the

[DISP.] button. (→271)

Take still pictures

• The still pictures are sent automatically after taking them.

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button.

You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete.

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

241

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Smartphone]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]

■

When connecting with [Via Network]

(On the camera)

Connect the camera to a wireless access point (→264)

(On your smartphone)

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set

Start “Image App” (→228)

■

When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]

(On the camera)

Connect the camera to a smartphone (→267)

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→228)

■

When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]

Perform step

(→229).

Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press the

[DISP.] button. (→271)

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

Press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

2 3

4 5 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button.

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

242

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Displaying still pictures on a TV

You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA certified digital

media renderer (DMR) function.

Preparation

Set the TV to DLNA waiting Mode.

• Read the operating instructions for your TV.

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Playback on TV]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.

Take or play back still pictures on this unit

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

●

When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not output using 4K

resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro

cable. (→276)

●

When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the

connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.

●

Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled when the pictures are

played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.

●

It may take some time to establish the Wi-Fi connection or it may not be connected at all

depending on the distance from this unit to the TV.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Playback of motion pictures or panorama pictures, and continuous playback of group pictures are

not displayed on a TV.

●

During the multi/calendar playback, pictures displayed on the screen of this unit are not displayed

on TV.

243

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Wireless printing

You can print out recorded still pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless

LAN-compatible)

printer.

Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.

Contact the printer manufacturers for details on PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers.

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD

[Send Images Stored in the Camera] ○ – – –

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Printer]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select a printer you want to connect

Select the still picture and print

• Pictures are selected the same way as when connecting by USB connection cable (supplied).

For more details (→287).

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

(You can also close the connection by pressing the [

] button.)

Not available in the following case:

●

Motion pictures cannot be printed.

244

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to AV device

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV

devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.

Wireless access point

Home AV device

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD

[Send Images While Recording] (→245) ○ – – –

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

(→246)

○ – – –

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about

picture playback.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Preparations

When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting Mode.

• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

245

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to AV device

[Send Images While Recording]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [AV device]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Take still pictures

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete.

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

246

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to AV device

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [AV device]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

Press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

2 3

4 5 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button.

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

247

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

Still pictures and motion pictures recorded by the camera can be sent to a PC.

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4

AVCHD

[Send Images While Recording] (→249) ○ ○ – –

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

(→250)

○ ○ ○ ○

Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent in file sizes of up to 4 GB. Files larger than 4 GB

cannot be sent.

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about

picture playback.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Preparations

• Turn the computer on.

• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC. (→248)

• If the standard settings are changed for the workgroup on the connected PC, you must change

settings in [PC Connection] on this unit. (→272)

248

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

To create a folder that receives images

• Create a PC user account (account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to

32 characters)) consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive

folder may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters.

■

When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the PC

• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac.

• For details on hardware requirements and installation, read “Installing supplied software”

(→281, 283).

Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new folder,

or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually].

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

■

When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

(For Windows)

Supported OS: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista

Example: Windows 7

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click

Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

(For Mac)

Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.9

Example: OS X v10.8

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the following

order

[File] → [Get Info]

Enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

249

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

[Send Images While Recording]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [PC]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select the PC you want to connect to

• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer

name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name).

Select the folder you want to send to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Take still pictures

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete.

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

250

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [PC]

Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263)

Select the PC you want to connect to

• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer

name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name).

Select the folder you want to send to

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

Press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

2 3

4 5 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button.

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

●

Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in those

folders.

●

If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC.

●

If the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) contains spaces, etc., the name may not be

properly recognised. If you cannot connect, we recommend changing the computer name (for

Mac, the NetBIOS name) to a combination of 15 or less alphanumeric characters only.

251

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. By selecting the setting to automatically transfer still pictures

and motion pictures to [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive the transferred still pictures

and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone.

Wireless access point

WEB services

Cloud

synchronisation

services

LUMIX CLUB

When sending images to WEB service

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD

[Send Images While Recording] (→253) ○ – – –

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

(→253)

○ –

○

–

Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• For details about playback of pictures, check the WEB service to which you will send

the pictures.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→258) to send a picture to a WEB service.

To send images to a WEB service, you need to register the WEB service. (→252)

252

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

●

Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as a

title, the time and date when the images were taken, and the location where the image was

taken. Check this information before uploading images to WEB services.

●

Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.

of images uploaded on WEB services.

●

When uploading images to the WEB service, do not delete images from this camera, even

after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly

uploaded to the WEB service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages

resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.

●

Images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check

images by accessing the WEB service with your smartphone or computer.

●

If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address

registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.

Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB”

When sending images to WEB services, the WEB service being used must be registered

with the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Preparation

Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the

Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service

If you have not registered your email address with “LUMIX CLUB”, register the

email address

Select the WEB service to be used for WEB service link settings and register it

• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.

253

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

[Send Images While Recording]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [Web service]

Select [Via Network] and connect (→264)

Select a WEB service you want to connect

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Take still pictures

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete.

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Web service]

Select [Via Network] and connect (→264)

Select a WEB service you want to connect

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

Press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

2 3

4 5 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button.

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

254

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

■

Quickly sending pictures in the camera to WEB services

Once you send a picture, you can send pictures to the WEB service as quickly and

easily as using a smartphone, only when the environment for connecting to a wireless

access point is available.

Display the picture

Use to select [Yes] after pressing

(When a group picture is being displayed, select

[Upload(Wi-Fi)] → [Yes])

• The camera is connected to the previously used wireless access

point and the pictures are sent to the WEB service.

Upload this image by Wi-Fi?Upload this image by Wi-Fi?

YesYes

NoNo

When no connection history is available for the wireless access point, proceed to the connection

method selection screen. Select the connection method and connect the camera to a wireless

access point. (→264)

If you do not have a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID, proceed to the new login ID sign up screen. Get a

Performing the operation for the first time

After you select [Yes] in step above, the WEB service selection screen appears.

Use to select WEB services and press [MENU/SET]

Check the setting on the confirmation screen for the transmission setting and press

[MENU/SET]

• The picture is sent to the WEB service.

• To change the transmission setting for the picture, press the [DISP.] button. (→271)

• After the second time, the pictures are sent using the same WEB service and the same

picture transmission settings as before.

●

When pictures are displayed as a group, they are all sent. When a single picture in a group is

displayed, only the picture being displayed is sent.

●

To change the transmission settings of a picture or to close the Wi-Fi connection, press the [Wi-Fi]

button. You can also close the connection by pressing the Playback button or [MENU/SET] and

selecting [Yes]. When you switch to Recording Mode, the Wi-Fi connection is closed.

255

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]

■

Sending method, and pictures that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD

[Send Images While Recording] (→256) ○ – – –

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

(→257)

○ –

○

–

Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about

picture playback.

• For more details about picture sending methods. (→270)

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→258) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to send a

picture to a Cloud Folder. Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on a PC or “Image App” on a smartphone to

configure the Cloud Sync. settings.

■

About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of [Cloud Sync. Service]

(Current as of September 2014)

• If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are

temporarily saved in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronised with the device

in use, such as the PC or smartphone.

• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1,000 pictures).

Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer.

Furthermore, when the number of stored images exceeds 1,000, some images may

be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (→271) setting even within 30 days after

the transfer.

• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is

complete, images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after

the transfer.

256

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

[Send Images While Recording]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording]

→ [Cloud Sync. Service]

Check the message and press [MENU/SET]

Select [Via Network] and connect (→264)

Check the send setting

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Take still pictures

• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226)

You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete.

(You can also close the connection by pressing

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] →

[Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].)

257

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

Set the menu

→ [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Cloud Sync. Service]

Check the message and press [MENU/SET]

Select [Via Network] and connect (→264)

Check the send setting

• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is

displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.]

button. (→271)

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

Press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled.

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

2 3

4 5 6

• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button.

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

258

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

About the [LUMIX CLUB]

Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).

If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronise images between the

devices you are using, or transfer these images to WEB services.

Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to WEB services.

• You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (→261)

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Please note;

• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected problems,

and service contents may be changed or added to, without prior notice to the users.

• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance

notice.

259

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

Select [Set/Add Account]

Select [New account]

• Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by pressing [MENU/SET].

• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the camera.

Select [Yes] to acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire a new login ID.

Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set

• For details (→264).

• The settings screen will only appear during the first connection. Connection methods set on this

unit are stored and will be used for subsequent connections. If you want to change the wireless

access point to connect to, press the [DISP.] button, then change the connecting destination.

Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and press [MENU/SET]

• You can press to switch pages.

• Turn the zoom lever clockwise to enlarge the page display (x2 magnification).

• If you turn the zoom lever counterclockwise after enlarging the page, the page returns to its

original size (no magnification).

• You can use

to move the position of the area to be enlarged.

• Press [

] button to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID.

Enter the password

• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52).

Check the login ID and press [MENU/SET]

• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.

When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only

need to enter the numbers.

• A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Press

[MENU/SET].

• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.

260

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Using a previously acquired login ID/confirming and changing login ID

and password ([Set Login ID])

Preparation

To use a previously acquired login ID, confirm your ID and password.

To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from

your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in advance.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

Select [Set/Add Account]

Select [Set Login ID]

• The login ID and password are displayed.

• The password is displayed as “

”.

• Close the menu if only checking the login ID.

Select the item you wish to change

Enter your login ID or password

• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter text.

• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera. If the

password differs from the one you created on your smartphone or PC, you will not be able to

upload images.

Select [Exit]

261

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone

• Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending

images on this unit to other devices or WEB services.

■

When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID

Connect this unit to the smartphone (→229)

From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID

• The login IDs for this unit and the smartphone become the same.

• After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID

may appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login

ID by following the on-screen instructions.

• This operation is not available for [Wi-Fi Direct] connection.

■

When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs

When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit

Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone.

When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone

Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this unit.

Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

Select [Terms of use]

• The camera will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed.

262

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.

You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

Select [Delete account]

• The message is displayed. Press [MENU/SET].

Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen

• The message is displayed. Press [MENU/SET].

Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account

• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID. Exit the

menu after it is executed.

Press [MENU/SET]

• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed.

Press [MENU/SET].

●

Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the camera.

263

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

After selecting the Wi-Fi function and sending destination, select the connection method.

If you are out and unable to use your wireless access point, or temporarily connecting to

equipment you do not ordinarily use, or in a similar situation, it is convenient to make a

direct connection.

If you are connecting with the same settings as used previously, you can quickly start

using the Wi-Fi function by connecting with [Select a destination from History] or [Select a

destination from Favorite].

Wireless access point

Connection method Description

[Via Network] Connects through a wireless access point. (→264)

[Direct] Your equipment connects directly to the camera. (→267)

264

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

[Via Network] Connecting via a wireless access point

Select a connection method to the wireless access point.

• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure

the settings related to the connection and security of

wireless LAN devices. To check if the wireless access

point you are using is compatible with WPS, refer to the

instruction manual of the wireless access point.

Connection method Description

[WPS (Push-Button)]

Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark.

Press the wireless access point WPS button until it

switches to WPS Mode

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[WPS (PIN code)]

Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark.

Select the wireless access point you are connecting to

Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen

into the wireless access point

Press [MENU/SET]

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[From List]

Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility,

or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access

point.

• For details (→265).

265

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility

(connecting by [From List])

Search for available wireless access points.

• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network

authentication is encrypted.

• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, network authentication type,

encryption type, encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.

Select the wireless access point you are connecting to

• Pressing [DISP.] button will search for a wireless access point

again.

• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When connecting

with [Manual Input]” (→266).

(If network authentication is encrypted)

Enter the encryption key

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52).

266

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

■

When connecting with [Manual Input]

On the screen of step

of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility

(connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input] (→265)

Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52).

Select the network authentication type

• For information on network authentication, see the instruction manual of the wireless access

point.

Select the encryption type

• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network

authentication settings.

Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set

[WPA2-PSK] / [WPA-PSK] [TKIP] / [AES]

[Common Key] [WEP]

[Open] [No Encryption] / [WEP]

(When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key

●

Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when a saving wireless access

point.

●

If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak.

Refer to “Message displays” (→299) and “Q&A Troubleshooting” (→310) for details.

●

Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used

in.

267

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

[Direct] Connecting directly

You can select the connection method to your equipment.

Select a connection method with which your equipment is

compatible.

Connection method Description

[Wi-Fi Direct]

Set the device to Wi-Fi Direct™ mode

Select [Wi-Fi Direct]

Select the device to connect to

• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

[WPS Connection]

[WPS (Push-Button)]

Select [WPS (Push-Button)]

Set the device to WPS mode

• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the

[DISP.] button on this unit.

[WPS (PIN code)]

Select [WPS (PIN code)]

Enter the PIN code of the device into this

unit

[Manual Connection]

Enter the SSID and password into the

device. The SSID and password are

displayed on the connection waiting

screen of this unit.

SSID and Password

QR Code

• If the transfer destination is [Smartphone], you can

read the QR Code with your smartphone to connect.

(→229)

To connect this unit with [Wi-Fi Direct], Android OS 4.0 or above is required and the device must be

compatible with Wi-Fi Direct™.

WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the connection

and security of wireless LAN devices.

268

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously

([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from

Favorite])

The camera keeps a History of times you used the Wi-Fi function. You can register items

in the History to Favourite.

You can easily connect with the same settings as used previously by connecting from

History or Favourite.

Press [Wi-Fi] button

Select [Select a destination from History] or [Select a

destination from Favorite]

Item Description

[Select a destination from

History]

Connects using the same settings as

used previously.

[Select a destination from

Favorite]

Connects using settings registered in

Favourite.

Select the desired connection setting

Registering History items to Favourite

Press [Wi-Fi] button

Select [Select a destination from History]

Select the item you wish to register and press

Enter a registration name

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52).

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters.

269

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

Editing items registered in Favourite

Press [Wi-Fi] button

Select [Select a destination from Favorite]

Select the Favourite item you wish to edit and press

Select item

Item Description

[Remove from Favorite] —

[Change the Order in Favorite] Select the destination

[Change the Registered Name]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→52).

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character

will be treated as two characters.

Registering and saving frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to

Favourites

●

The number of settings that can be saved in the history is limited. We recommend that

you register and save frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to Favourite. (→268)

Checking connection details of History or Favourite

●

When selecting History or Favourite items, you can view connection details by pressing

the [DISP.] button.

●

Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] deletes content registered in History and Favourite.

●

When using [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] to connect to

a network to which many PCs are connected, it may be difficult to make the connection because

the camera searches for previously connected equipment out of a large number of equipment

pieces. If you cannot connect, retry the connection using [New Connection].

270

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

Settings for sending pictures

When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then

select the method of sending pictures.

After you have completed connecting, you can also change

the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent.

[Send Images While Recording]

A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.

●

[ ] is displayed on the recording screen while connected by [Send

Images While Recording], and [

] is displayed while files are being

sent.

●

If you turn off the camera before you have completed sending, or if

you close the Wi-Fi connection, or in similar situations, unsent files

will not be resent.

●

You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu

while sending.

Not available in the following case:

●

Motion pictures cannot be sent.

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

You can select and send recorded images.

●

Details of the [Playback] menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent.

Not available in the following cases:

●

Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent.

●

Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent.

271

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

About connections

Changing the settings for sending images

After you have completed connecting, you can change the sending settings, such as the

size of pictures to be sent, by pressing the [DISP.] button.

Item Description

[Size]

Resize the image to send.

[Original] / [Auto]

/ [Change]

• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the

circumstances at the destination.

• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S], or [VGA].

The aspect ratio does not change.

[File Format]

[JPG] / [RAW+JPG] / [RAW]

[Delete Location Data]

Select whether to delete the location information from images before

sending them.

[ON]: Delete the location information, then send.

[OFF]: Keep the location information and send.

• This operation only deletes the location information from the

images that are set to be sent. (The location information will not

be deleted from the original images stored in this unit.)

[Cloud Limit]

You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs

out of free space.

[ON]: Do not send images.

[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.

Only available when the destination is set to [Web service].

Only available when the destination is set to [PC].

Only available when the destination for [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Cloud Sync.

Service] or [Web service].

Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service].

272

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

[Wi-Fi Setup]

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.

[Wi-Fi Setup] cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.

Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → Desired setting

Item Description

[LUMIX CLUB]

Acquires or changes the

“LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

• For details (→258).

[PC Connection]

You can set the workgroup.

You must connect to the same workgroup as the destination

computer when sending pictures to the computer.

(The default is set to “WORKGROUP”)

[Change Workgroup Name]:

Enter the workgroup of the connecting computer. Close the menu

after changing settings.

[Restore to Default]:

Returns settings to default settings. A confirmation screen is

displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.

Exit the menu after it is executed.

• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter

text.

• To use with a computer of the standard settings, you do not have

to change the workgroup.

[Device Name]

You can change the name of

this unit.

Press [DISP.] button

Enter the desired device name

• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter

text.

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

[NFC Operation]

Makes NFC function setting.

[ON]: The NFC function works.

[OFF]

[Touch Sharing]

Set the operation to be

performed when a Wi-Fi

connection is established

using the NFC function.

[ON]: When a Wi-Fi connection is established using the NFC

function while playing back a single picture, the picture

(1 picture) is transferred.

[OFF]

273

SQW0024

Wi-Fi

[Wi-Fi Setup]

Item Description

[Wi-Fi Password]

To prevent incorrect operation

or use of the Wi-Fi function

by a third party and to protect

saved personal information,

it is recommended that you

protect the Wi-Fi function with

a password.

Setting a password will automatically display the password input

screen when the Wi-Fi function is used.

[Setup]:

Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password. Close the menu after

changing settings.

[Delete]:

A confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is

selected.

Exit the menu after it is executed.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→52).

• Make a copy of password. If you forget the password, you can

reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu, however

other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and

IP address of this unit.

• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify

network equipment.

• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to

a network such as the Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes

are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a

wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)

274

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Viewing 4K motion pictures

■

Viewing on TV screen

When you connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV and play

back a motion picture recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K],

you can enjoy high-resolution 4K motion pictures. Although

resolution output will be lower, you can also play back 4K

motion pictures by connecting to a high-definition TV and

other devices that do not have 4K support.

Preparation

When motion pictures are recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K], set [HDMI Mode] (→48) to [AUTO]

or [4K].

Connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the

playback screen (→276)

• When the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to

a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA), the television automatically

switches its input and the playback screen is displayed. For details, refer to (→278).

• You can also play back motion pictures by inserting the card in a

4K-compatible TV equipped with a SD card slot.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

■

Viewing 4K motion pictures on a PC screen

To play back motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” stored in the DVD

(supplied).

• To play back and edit 4K motion pictures, a high-performance PC

environment is required.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

275

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Storing 4K motion pictures

■

Storing 4K motion pictures on your PC

Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the

two together. For details, refer to (→280).

■

Storing 4K motion pictures on a DVD

You cannot transfer or copy motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K] to a

Blu-ray disc or DVD using a Panasonic recorder. (Current as of October 2014)

You can use the supplied DVD software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to convert the file size of

a motion picture to a smaller size or copy it to a DVD.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

276

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the

HDMI micro cable or AV cable (optional).

Preparation

Turn off both camera and TV.

Connect camera to TV

Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong

direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not

insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

■

To connect with an HDMI micro cable

An HDMI micro cable can be used to enable viewing of still and motion pictures in

high-resolution.

Align the marks, and insert.

[HDMI] socket

To HDMI video/audio

input socket

HDMI micro cable

Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not

comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

■

To connect with an AV cable (optional)

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

AV cable (optional)

Yellow:

To video socket

White:

To audio socket

Monaural audio output.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input source to match the

connection socket

Turn on the camera and press the playback button

277

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

■

To connect with an HDMI micro cable

●

Check the [HDMI Mode]. (→48)

●

To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is not

output at 24 frames per second.

●

Bars may appear at the sides or at the top and bottom of the screen, depending on the aspect

ratio setting.

●

Cables that do not comply with HDMI standards will not work.

●

When an HDMI micro cable is connected, pictures are not displayed on the screen.

●

HDMI output will be cancelled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected simultaneously.

●

When the AV cable (optional) and HDMI micro cable are connected at the same time, no picture

is output from the AV cable.

●

Pictures may be momentarily distorted immediately after commencing playback or pausing on

certain televisions.

●

Audio output is stereo.

●

Read the operating instructions for the TV.

■

To connect with an AV cable (optional)

●

Check the [TV Aspect]. (→47)

●

Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).

●

You can play back pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL

system. You can find [Video Out] setting in [TV Connection] from the [Setup] menu.

●

Pictures rotated to portrait may be blurred slightly.

●

Change picture mode settings on TV if aspect ratios are not displayed correctly on widescreen

or high-definition televisions.

●

The viewfinder display cannot be used.

●

Read the operating instructions for the TV.

The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD

Memory Card slot

●

Proper playback (aspect ratio) will be dependent on the TV used for viewing.

●

The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the

TV model.

●

You may not be able to play back panorama pictures. Also you cannot perform

automatic scrolling playback of panorama pictures.

●

For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

278

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)

What is VIERA Link (HDMI)?

●

VIERA Link is a function that automatically links this camera to VIERA Link-

compatible devices by connecting HDMI micro cables for enabling easy operation

with the VIERA remote control. (Some operations are not available.)

●

VIERA Link (HDMI) is an exclusive Panasonic function added to the industry-

standard HDMI control functions known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics

Control). Operation is not guaranteed when connecting with non-Panasonic HDMI

CEC-compatible devices. Refer to your product manual to verify compatibility with

VIERA Link (HDMI).

●

This camera supports VIERA Link (HDMI) Version 5. This is the Panasonic standard

that also supports previous Panasonic VIERA Link devices.

Preparation

Set [VIERA Link] to [ON] (→49).

Connect the camera to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television

(VIERA) with an HDMI micro cable (→276)

Turn on the camera and press the playback button

Operate with the remote control for the TV

• Operate with reference to the operation icons displayed on the screen.

279

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

■

Other related operations

Turning the unit OFF

• The camera can also be turned off when the television is turned off with the remote

control.

Automatic input select

• This function automatically switches the television input to the camera screen

whenever the camera is turned on while it is connected via the HDMI micro cable.

The television can also be switched on via the camera from Standby Mode

(if “Power on link” on the television is set to “on”).

• If VIERA Link (HDMI) does not function correctly (→323)

●

Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not comply with the

HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

●

If you do not know if your TV is VIERA Link (HDMI) compatible, see the TV’s operating

instructions.

●

Cables that do not comply with HDMI standards will not work.

●

When VIERA Link is activated, the [HDMI Mode] setting of this unit is automatically recognised.

●

If the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is [ON], operations via the camera buttons will be limited.

●

Ensure that the television you are connecting to has been set up to enable VIERA Link (HDMI)

(consult your television operating instructions for details).

280

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures

on your PC

Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the

two together.

• Some computers can read directly from the camera’s memory card.

For details, see the instruction manual for your computer.

• If your computer does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message will be displayed

requesting you to format the card. (Do not format the card. This will erase recorded

pictures.)

If the card is not recognised, refer to the following support website.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

■

Computer specifications

You can connect the camera to a computer that can detect a mass storage device

(device that stores a large volume of data).

• Windows: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista

• Mac: OS X v10.5 - v10.9

Some motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] may not be scanned

correctly by copying a file or folder

●

When using Windows, be sure to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the

supplied DVD to copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

●

When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”.

Note, however, that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture

quality settings.

(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)

281

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

About supplied software

The supplied DVD contains the following software.

Install the software on your computer before using.

PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.6 PE

You can capture still pictures or motion pictures to your PC, or organise captured pictures

by categorising by recording date, model name of the digital camera used to record, etc.

You can also correct still pictures, edit motion pictures, or write to DVD.

• Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows

8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows

8 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows

7 (32-bit/64-bit) and SP1

Windows Vista

(32-bit) SP2

CPU

Windows

8.1

Pentium

ΙΙΙ 1 GHz or higherWindows

Windows

Windows Vista

Pentium

ΙΙΙ 800 MHz or higher

Display 1024×768 pixels or more (1920×1080 pixels or more recommended)

RAM

Windows

8.1

1 GB or more (32-bit) / 2 GB or more (64-bit)Windows

Windows

Windows Vista

512 MB or more

Free hard disk

space

450 MB or more for installing software

• To edit 4K motion pictures, you need the 64-bit versions of Windows 8.1, Windows 8,

or Windows 7.

• Refer to the Operating Instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF) for further

information about the operating environment. You can read the Operating Instructions

after launching the software.

282

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

SILKYPIX Developer Studio 4.2 SE

This software develops and edits RAW file pictures. Edited pictures can be saved in a file

format such as JPEG or TIFF that can be displayed on a PC, etc.

• Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows

8.1

Windows

Windows Vista

Mac

OS X v10.5/v10.6/v10.7/v10.8/v10.9

• For details on how to use the SILKYPIX Developer Studio, refer to the “Help” or the

Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website:

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/support/

LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version

(Windows 8.1 / 8 / 7 / Vista)

LoiLoScope is a video editing software that draws out the full power of your PC. Creating

videos is as easy as organising cards on top of a desk. Use your music, picture and

video files to create videos to share with your friends and family by burning it to a DVD,

uploading it to websites, or simply share your videos with your friends via e-mail.

• This will only install a shortcut to the trial version download site.

• For more information on how to use LoiLoScope, read the LoiLoScope manual

available for download at the link below.

Manual URL: http://loilo.tv/product/20

283

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Installing supplied software

The software compatible with your PC will be installed.

Preparations

• Check your PC’s specifications and operating environment for each software.

• Before inserting the DVD (supplied), close all running applications.

Insert the DVD with the supplied software

• If the automatic playback screen is displayed, you can display the menu by selecting and

executing [Launcher.exe].

• In Windows 8.1/Windows 8, you can display the menu by clicking a message that is displayed

after inserting the DVD and then selecting and executing [Launcher.exe].

• You can also display the menu by double-clicking [SFMXXXX] in [Computer]. (The “XXXX”

portion differs depending on the model.)

Click [Applications]

Click [Recommended Installation]

• Continue the installation procedure following the instructions displayed on the screen.

●

If you are using a Mac, you can manually install SILKYPIX.

Insert the DVD with the supplied software

Double-click the application folder on the DVD

Double-click the folder that automatically appears

Double-click the icon in the folder

Not available in the following case:

●

PHOTOfunSTUDIO / LoiLoScope are not compatible with Mac.

284

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Copying still pictures and motion pictures

Preparations

• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on your computer before starting the copying procedure. (→283)

• Turn on the camera and computer.

Connect camera to computer

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic

USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional). Using cables other than the above may cause

a malfunction.

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

[Access] (sending data)

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable

(supplied) while [Access] is displayed.

USB connection cable (supplied)

Use to select [PC] and press [MENU/SET]

• Setting the [USB Mode] to [PC] removes the need to make the setting each time the camera is

connected to the computer.

Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to copy pictures to your computer

• For details on how to use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, see the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” manual (PDF).

●

Do not delete or move copied files and folders using Windows Explorer or other browsers.

Otherwise, you will not be able to play back or edit the files using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

■

For PTP mode

The camera can be connected to your computer even if [USB Mode] (→47) is set to

[PictBridge(PTP)].

• Only picture output can be performed.

• If you cannot connect to your PC in PTP mode, set [USB Mode] to [PC] and

reconnect.

• It may not be possible to import if there are 1,000 or more pictures on the card.

• Motion pictures or RAW pictures cannot be read.

285

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

■

Copying to your computer without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

You can save pictures to use on your computer by dragging and dropping folders and

files into separate folders on your computer.

• The card of this unit contains the following files (folder structure).

●

Windows

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed in “Computer”.

●

Mac

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed on the desktop.

DCIM (Still/motion pictures)

100_PANA (Up to 999 pictures/folder)

Folder number

P1000001.JPG

File number

P1000999.JPG

101_PANA

999_PANA

MISC (DPOF files, Favourite)

PRIVATE

AVCHD (Motion pictures in AVCHD)

Colour Space P: sRGB

_: AdobeRGB

Card

.JPG: Still pictures

.RW2: Still pictures recorded in RAW file

.MP4: [MP4] Motion Pictures

New folders are created in the following cases:

• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder.

• When using cards already containing the same folder number (for example, pictures taken with

other cameras, etc.).

• When recording after performing [No.Reset]. (→50)

●

Turn off the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.

●

Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). When the

battery starts to run out during communications, a warning beep sounds. Cancel communication

via your computer immediately.

●

For more details, consult your computer operating manual.

286

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in

the recorder

Follow the correct method for your device.

Copying by inserting the card into the recorder

You can copy pictures using Panasonic equipment (such as

Blu-ray disc recorders) with support for each file format.

• See the instruction manual for the recorder for details for copying

and playing back.

3232

Dubbing playback pictures via AV cables (optional)

You can transfer or copy the pictures played back on this unit to a recorder, disc, video

tapes, or other media using the standard picture quality. This method is useful as it allows

dubbing to be performed even with devices that are not compatible with high definition

images. Audio will be monaural.

Connect camera to recorder

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

AV cable (optional)

To recorder’s input socket

Start recording on recorder

Start playback on camera

• To stop recording (dubbing), stop the recording on your recorder first before stopping the

playback on the camera.

●

Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).

●

When using a TV with a 4:3 aspect ratio, always change the camera’s [TV Aspect] setting (→47)

to [4:3] before dubbing. Motion pictures copied in the [16:9] setting will appear vertically stretched

when viewed on a 4:3 TV screen.

●

For details on dubbing and playback methods, refer to your recorder’s operating instructions.

287

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Printing

You can connect directly to a PictBridge-compatible printer for printing.

• Some printers can print directly from the camera’s memory card.

For details, see the manual for your printer.

Preparations

• Adjust the print quality or other settings on your printer, as needed.

• Turn on the camera and printer.

Connect camera to printer

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic

USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional). Using cables other than the above may cause

a malfunction.

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable

(supplied) when the cable disconnection icon [

] is

displayed (may not be displayed with some printers).

USB connection cable (supplied)

Use to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a picture and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→290))

■

To cancel print

Press [MENU/SET].

288

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Printing multiple pictures

Multiple pictures are printed at one time.

Press to select [Multi Print] in step

(→287)

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• [Multi Select]: Scroll between pictures with , select pictures to print with the

[MENU/SET]. (Press [MENU/SET] again to release selection.)

Use to select [OK], and press [MENU/SET].

• [Select All]: Print all pictures.

• [Print Set (DPOF)]: Print pictures selected in [Print Set]. (→220)

• [Favorite]: Print pictures selected as [Favorite]. (→219)

Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→290))

• Select [Yes] if print confirmation screen is displayed.

●

The group pictures are displayed one by one instead of all pictures at the same time.

●

Turn off the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.

●

Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) after printing.

●

Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). When

the battery starts to run out during connection, a warning beep sounds. Cancel printing and

disconnect USB connection cable.

●

An orange “●” displayed during printing indicates an error message.

●

Print may be divided into several pictures if printing a large amount of pictures.

(Remaining sheets display may differ from the number of pictures set for printing.)

Not available in the following cases:

●

Motion pictures cannot be printed.

●

Still pictures recorded in a RAW file cannot be printed. (The still pictures recorded in JPEG file

format at the same time as the RAW file can be printed.)

289

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Printing with date and text

Time and date can be set to be printed on the picture when taking the picture by

activating the [Text Stamp] function in the [Playback] menu. (→212)

■

Printing date without [Text Stamp]

Printing in store:

Only recording date can be printed. Request date printing in store.

• Making [Print Set] (→220) settings on the camera in advance allows settings for

numbers of copies and date printing to be designated before giving the card to the

store.

• When printing still pictures of 16:9 Aspect Ratio, check in advance that the store can

accept this size.

Using computer:

Print settings for recording date and text information can be made using

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD.

Using printer:

Recording date can be printed by setting [Print Set] on the camera, or by setting [Print

with Date] (→290) to [ON] when connecting to a printer compatible with date printing.

290

SQW0024

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Making print settings on the camera

Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before

selecting [Print start].

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

Item Settings

[Print with Date] [ON] / [OFF]

[Num.of prints] Set number of pictures (up to 999 pictures)

[Paper Size]

When [

] is selected, the printer settings take priority.

[Page Layout]

[

] (printer takes priority) / [ ] (1 picture, no border) /

[

] (1 picture, with border) / [ ] (2 pictures) / [ ] (4 pictures)

Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

●

When setting [Print with Date] to [ON], check the date printing settings on the printer (printer

settings may be prioritised).

●

To print a picture on which text or a date has been stamped, set [Print with Date] to [OFF]. (The

still picture is printed with the date superimposed on it.)

●

Items may not be displayed if incompatible with printer.

●

To arrange [ ] “2 pictures” or [ ] “4 pictures” in the same still picture, set the number of prints

for the still picture to 2 or 4.

●

To print to paper sizes/layouts not supported by this camera, set to [ ] and make settings on the

printer. (Consult your printer’s operating manual.)

●

Even with completed [Print Set] settings, dates may not be printed, depending on the shop or

printer used.

291

SQW0024

Others

Optional accessories

External Flash (optional)

When you use the flashes (optional: DMW-FL220, DMW-FL360L, or DMW-FL580L), a

wider effective flash range is provided than with the flash (supplied).

Preparation

Set the camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF].

Removing the hot shoe cover

The hot shoe cover is already attached to the hot shoe at the time of purchase.

Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the

direction indicated by arrow while pressing

it in the direction indicated by arrow

• Be sure to attach the hot shoe cover when the hot shoe

is not in use.

• Keep the hot shoe cover safely after removing it so that

you do not lose it.

■

Using the flash (DMW-FL360L: optional)

Attach the external flash to the hot shoe and then turn on the camera and the external

flash

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash]

Press to select [Flash Mode] and press [MENU/SET]

Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• While the external flash is connected, the following icons are displayed.

: External flash Forced ON

External flash Red-Eye Removal Forced ON

: External flash Slow Sync.

External flash Red-Eye Removal Slow Sync.

External flash Forced OFF

• Signal-flashing with wireless flashes is also disabled.

When the flash mode is set to [AUTO] or [MANUAL] on the external flash, you cannot select

the item.

292

SQW0024

Others

Optional accessories

When using other commercially available external flashes that don’t

offer direct communication with the camera (DMC-LX100)

• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash when it is used. When you use

an external flash in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture

value and ISO Sensitivity to match the same settings on the camera.

• Set the camera to [Aperture-Priority] Mode or [Manual Exposure] Mode and then set the

same aperture value and ISO Sensitivity on the external flash. (The proper exposure

cannot be achieved because the aperture value changes in [Shutter-Priority] Mode. The

light of the external flash cannot be properly adjusted since the aperture value cannot

be fixed in [Program AE] Mode.)

●

You can set the aperture value, shutter speed and ISO Sensitivity on the camera even when the

external flash is attached.

●

Some commercially available external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or

reversed polarity. If such flashes are used, they could cause a malfunction or hinder normal

operation of the camera.

●

If you use commercially available external flashes (with communication functions) other than the

ones compatible with this unit, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not

use them.

●

Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the

external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it.

●

When the external flash is attached, the camera will become unstable, and therefore we

recommend using a tripod to take pictures.

●

Detach the external flash when you carry the camera.

●

Be sure to hold both the camera and the external flash when it is attached to the camera. If you

hold only the external flash, it could become detached from the camera.

●

If the White Balance is set to [ ] when the external flash is used, perform fine adjustment of the

White Balance if the recording results are not satisfactory. (→105)

●

If you take pictures close to the subject while taking wide-angle pictures, the light of the flash is

obstructed by the lens and the bottom of the screen may be dark.

●

Refer to (→184) about the settings for the wireless flash.

●

Refer to the operating instructions of the external flash for further details.

Using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional)

instead of the battery

By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play

back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.

The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor.

●

Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).

●

Also read the AC adaptor and DC coupler operating instructions.

293

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (monitor

style) in the monitor.

In recording

[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.

Recording Mode (→59)

Motion picture recording mode

(→58)

Motion picture recording mode

when [4K PHOTO] is set to

[ON] (→195)

Custom Set (→60)

Panorama picture recording

mode (→150)

[Photo Style] (→100)

Flash Mode (→180, 291)

Flash (→182, 184)

50i

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→187)

Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size]

(→108)

Card (displayed only during

recording) (→25)

→ ← ↑ ↓ Panorama Direction (→150)

EXPS

Types of picture effects (Filter)

(→89)

Picture effect (Filter)

adjustment display (→91)

XXmXXs

Elapsed recording time

(→190)

Simultaneous recording

indicator (→198)

Automatic switching between

viewfinder and monitor (→54)

[Peaking] (→130)

[Highlight Shadow] (→102)

[HDR] (→112)

[Multi Exp.] (→159)

Electronic shutter (→140)

294

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

[Quality] (→109)

AFS AFF AFC MF

Focus Mode (→114)

AF Mode (→115)

[Face Recog.] (→162)

AFL AF Lock (→133)

Burst (→142)

[Auto Bracket] (→145)

[Aspect Bracket] (→147)

Self-timer (→148)

Panorama Direction (→150)

Remaining battery (→21)

Picture Mode (Still picture

priorities) (→198)

Macro recording (→126)

Stabiliser (→168)

Jitter alert (→168)

Recording state (Flashes red.)/

Focus (Lights green.) (→56)

Focus (Under low illumination)

(→56)

Wi-Fi connection status

[4K PHOTO] marker (→196)

[Time Lapse Shot] (→153)

[Stop Motion Animation]

(→156)

Histogram (→64)

295

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Destination settings / Travel elapsed days

(→42)

Name

(→165)

Age in years/months

(→165)

Current date/time

World time

: (→41)

AF area (→56, 121)

Spot metering target (→139)

Self-timer

(→148)

[Silent Mode] (→161)

[Mic Level Disp.] (→200)

AEL AE Lock (→133)

[Metering Mode] (→139)

Programme Shift (→81)

1.7 Aperture value (→56)

60 Shutter speed (→56)

Exposure compensation value

(→135)

Manual Exposure Assist (→87)

ISO Sensitivity (→136)

[Dial Guide] (→18)

White Balance Bracket (→106)

White Balance Fine Adjustment

(→105)

White Balance (→103)

Number of recordable

pictures

(→27)

R8m30s

Available recording time

(→27)

Exposure meter (→81)

Zoom (→170, 174)

[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.

This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after

switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.

This is displayed during countdown.

It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available

recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu.

296

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Recording Mode (→59)

Programme Shift (→81)

Motion picture recording mode

(→58)

Motion picture recording mode

when [4K PHOTO] is set to

[ON] (→195)

Custom Set (→60)

Panorama picture recording

mode (→150)

F1.7 Aperture value (→56)

1/60 Shutter speed (→56)

T (time) recording (→87)

Remaining battery (→21)

Card (displayed only during

motion picture recording)

(→25)

ISO Sensitivity (→136)

Exposure compensation value

(→135)

Manual Exposure Assist (→87)

Flash Mode (→180, 291)

Flash (→182, 184)

Single (→141)

Burst (→142)

[Auto Bracket] (→145)

[Aspect Bracket] (→147)

Self-timer (→148)

Panorama Direction (→150)

AFS AFF AFC MF

Focus Mode (→114)

AF Mode (→115)

[Quality] (→109)

50i

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→187)

Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size]

(→108)

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (→225)

Function button setting (→37)

[Photo Style] (→100)

AWB

White Balance (→103)

[i.Dynamic] (→111)

[Metering Mode] (→139)

Number of recordable pictures

(→27)

R8m30s

Available recording time

(→27)

■

On-monitor recording information

[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.

297

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

15 pic.15 pic.

1ST DAY1ST DAY

11 months 30 days

In playback

Playback Mode (→206)

Protected picture (→221)

Number of prints (→220)

With location information

(→207)

Favourites (→219)

Cable disconnect prohibit icon

(→287)

Motion picture playback (→70)

Panorama picture playback

(→152)

Continuous playback of burst

picture group (→201)

Continuous playback of Time

Lapse Shot picture group

(→201)

Continuous playback of stop

motion animation group (→201)

Text stamped display (→212)

XXmXXs

Elapsed playback time

(→70)

Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size]

(→108)

50i

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→187)

[Quality] (→109)

Remaining battery (→21)

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

15 pic. Number of pictures in burst

XXmXXs

Motion picture recording time

(→70)

Acquiring information icon

(→302)

1ST DAY

Travel elapsed days (→42)

Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→254)

Submenu icon (→202, 254)

[Silent Mode] (→161)

11 months 30 days

Age in years/months (→165)

Name

(→164, 165)

Location

(→42)

Title

(→211)

Recording information

[m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”.

The displaying is performed in the following

priority order: title, travel destination, name

(babies and pets), and name ([Face Recog.]).

This is not displayed for motion pictures

recorded in [AVCHD].

298

SQW0024

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

10:00 1.DEC.2014

100-0001

100-00011/98

Recording information

[i.Dynamic]

(→111)

[HDR]

(→112)

[i.Resolution] (→111)

4K motion picture recorded by

setting [4K PHOTO] to [ON] or

a still picture captured from

that 4K motion picture (→195)

Recording date/time

World time (→41)

Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size]

(→108)

[Quality] (→109)

50i

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→187)

[Color Space]

(→113)

100-0001

Folder/File number

(→285)

■

Detailed information display

Histogram (→64)

Recording information

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

100-0001

Folder/File number

(→285)

This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

This is not displayed for motion pictures.

■

Histgram display

299

SQW0024

Others

Message displays

The following explains the meaning of major messages displayed on the monitor or

viewfinder, and how to respond to them.

■

Memory cards

[Memory Card Error] [Format this card?]

• The card format cannot be used with this camera.

→ Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→26)

[Insert SD card again] [Try another card]

• Access to card has failed.

→ Insert card again.

• Try with a different card.

[Read Error] / [Write Error] [Please check the card]

• Data read has failed.

→ Check whether card has been inserted correctly (→24)

• Data write has failed.

→ Turn off the camera and remove the card. Reinsert the card and turn the camera on again.

• Card may possibly be damaged.

→ Try with a different card.

[Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About the

motion picture recording and speed class” (→25).

→ If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class (→25), the data

writing speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory

card and formatting it (→26).

[Memory Card Error] [This memory card cannot be used]

• Not compatible with the camera. Use a compatible card.

[Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.]

• Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (→26)

→ Insert a different card.

300

SQW0024

Others

Message displays

■

Battery

[This battery cannot be used]

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.

• Battery cannot be recognised as terminal is dirty.

→ Wipe any dirt away from the battery terminal.

■

Wi-Fi function

[Failed to connect wireless access point] / [Connection failed] / [No destination found]

• Check following regarding the wireless access point.

→ The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong. Check the authentication type,

encryption type, and encryption key. (→266)

→ Power of the wireless access point is not turned on.

→ Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit.

• Check the network setting of the destination.

• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.

→ Check other devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the

2.4 GHz band.

[No picture to send]

• This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination.

Check the file type of the image to transmit. (→239, 243, 244, 247, 251, 255)

[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.] / [Network disconnected. Transfer stopped.]

• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.

→ Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

• There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time.

→ Try again after a while.

• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after

specific time has passed.

→ Reconnect the connection again.

[Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up on

downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones.]

• Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered.

• Perform Cloud Sync setting. Configure the settings on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” or on a

smartphone with “Image App”. For details on [Cloud Sync. Service], refer to (→255).

[Connection failed]

• Check following regarding the smartphones you intend to connect.

→ The smartphone does not operate.

→ Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.

→ There is no free storage space on the smartphone.

301

SQW0024

Others

Message displays

[Login failed. Please check Login ID and Password.]

• Login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not correct. Please enter it again. If you have

forgotten the login ID or the password, there is information in the login screen of the “LUMIX CLUB”

website.

[Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit] /

[Transfer completed. Some files are left because of destination limit.]

• Check the file format of the image to send.

• Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large. Split the motion picture using [Video

Divide]. (→214)

[Unavailable. Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site.]

• Login to the “LUMIX CLUB” from your smartphone or PC, and set the login details of the

destination WEB service.

[Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together]

• WEB services designed only for pictures, and WEB services designed only for motion pictures

cannot be selected at the same time. Deselect one of the services.

[Cannot get IP address. Please set wireless AP’s IP address setting to DHCP.]

• Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points.

[Cannot connect to server]

• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root certificate.

302

SQW0024

Others

Message displays

■

Others

[Some pictures cannot be deleted] [This picture cannot be deleted]

• Non-DCF pictures (→67) cannot be deleted.

→ Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→26)

[Cannot be set on this picture]

• [Print Set], [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], and other functions cannot be used for pictures that are not

compliant with the DCF standard (→67).

[Please turn camera off and then on again] [System Error]

• The lens is not working correctly.

→ Turn the camera on again. (Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre if display still

remains.)

[A folder cannot be created]

• Folder numbers in use have reached 999.

→ Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera (→26).

Folder number is reset to 100 when performing [No.Reset] (→50).

[Picture is displayed for 16:9 TV] [Picture is displayed for 4:3 TV]

• AV cable (optional) is connected to camera.

→ To remove message immediately → Press [MENU/SET].

→ To change aspect ratio → Change [TV Aspect] (→47).

• USB connection cable (supplied) is only connected to camera.

→ Message disappears when cable is also connected to another device.

[Editing operation cannot proceed as information processing is ongoing.]

• If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring

information icon [

] or [ ] may be displayed for a long time. While either one of

these icons is displayed, some of the [Playback] menus cannot be used.

→ When the camera is turned off while information is being acquired, only the pictures whose

information has been acquired up to that time are saved as a group. When the camera is turned

on again, the camera once again begins acquiring information of the remaining pictures in the

group.

303

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Rec]

You can perform settings such as picture size and flash (supplied/optional).

• The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic],

[i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and

[Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same

name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

[Photo Style]

You can select the effects according to the concept of the picture

that you want to create. Adjusts the colours of effects and picture

quality.

→100

[Picture Size] Set the number of pixels. →108

[Quality] Set the compression rate used for storing pictures. →109

[AFS/AFF/AFC] Select how the focus is adjusted. →114

[Metering Mode]

Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be

changed.

→139

[Burst Rate] Sets the burst speed to be used for burst recording. →142

[Auto Bracket]

Sets the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording

sequence of Auto Bracket.

→146

[Self Timer]

Sets the time before recording starts when you take a picture

using the self-timer.

→148

[Highlight Shadow]

You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while

confirming the brightness of these areas on the screen.

→102

[i.Dynamic] Correcting contrast and exposure. →111

[i.Resolution]

Records still pictures with sharper outlines and the impression of

high-resolution.

→111

[Simultaneous record

w/o filter]

Sets whether to record pictures with Filter and those without Filter

at the same time.

→91

[iHandheld Night

Shot]

Combines nightscape pictures recorded using high-speed burst

recording into a single picture.

→78

[iHDR]

When there is, for example, strong contrast between the

background and the subject, [iHDR] records multiple still pictures

with differing exposures and combines them to create a single still

picture rich in gradation.

→79

[HDR]

The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken with different

exposures into a single properly exposed picture with rich

gradation.

→112

[Multi Exp.]

You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times

of exposure on a single picture.

→159

304

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Time Lapse Shot]

You can preset the recording start time, recording interval, and the

number of pictures to be taken when automatically recording time

lapse motion pictures of subjects such as animals and plants.

→153

[Stop Motion

Animation]

You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation. →156

[Panorama Direction]

You can set the recording direction to be used for recording

panorama pictures.

→150

[Shutter Type]

You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the

mechanical shutter and electronic shutter.

→140

[Flash]

Performs flash settings in accordance with the recording

conditions.

→180

[Red-Eye Removal]

Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when

recording with flash.

→180

[ISO Limit Set]

Sets the optimal ISO Sensitivity using the selected value as the

upper limit of ISO Sensitivity when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or

[

→137

[ISO Increments] Changes the ISO Sensitivity settings every 1/3 EV or 1 EV steps. →138

[Extended ISO]

You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO

Sensitivity.

→138

[Long Shtr NR]

Eliminates the noise made when taking pictures at a slower shutter

speed.

→113

[i.Zoom]

Allows increasing the zoom ratio while suppressing the

deterioration of picture quality.

→172

[Digital Zoom]

Improves the telephoto effect of your pictures. Note that enlarging

will decrease picture quality.

→173

[Color Space]

You can set the method for reproducing the colours to correctly

display the recorded pictures on the screens of a PC or printer,

etc.

→113

[Stabilizer]

Automatically detects jitter during recording and makes

corrections.

→168

[Face Recog.]

Recognises a registered face and automatically adjusts the focus

and exposure for this face with higher priority.

→162

[Profile Setup]

You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a

picture to record the name or age in months/years in the picture.

→165

305

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Motion Picture]

You can perform settings, such as recording format and quality, for recording motion

pictures.

• The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic],

[i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and

[Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same

name in other menu will also be changed automatically.

For details, refer to the corresponding item of the [Rec] menu.

[4K PHOTO]

You can set the motion picture mode used for creating a high-

resolution still picture by capturing a single frame from a 4K motion

picture.

→195

[Rec Format]

Sets the file format (AVCHD, MP4) of the motion picture to be

recorded.

→187

[Rec Quality]

Sets the picture quality of the motion picture (size, frame rate, etc.)

to be recorded.

→187

[Picture Mode]

Sets the recording method of still pictures to be taken while

recording motion pictures.

→198

[Continuous AF] Constantly adjusts the focus on a subject that is in focus. →189

[Mic Level Disp.]

You can set whether or not to display the microphone level on the

recording screen.

→200

[Mic Level Adj.] You can adjust the audio input level in 4 steps. →200

[Wind Cut]

If you hear wind noise during an audio recording, you can use

[Wind Cut] to effectively reduce the wind noise.

→200

306

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Custom]

You can set operations of this unit, such as the screen display method and functions of a

button, according to your preferences. You can also register the changed settings.

[Utilize Custom Set

feature]

Calls up the setting registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. →60

[Cust.Set Mem.] Registers the current camera settings as a custom setting. →60

[Silent Mode] Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time. →161

[AF/AE Lock]

Performs the lock setting of the focus and/or exposure used for

executing AF/AE lock.

→133

[AF/AE Lock Hold]

Sets the [AF/AE LOCK] button operation used for recording by

fixing the focus and/or exposure.

→133

[Shutter AF]

Enables focus adjustment automatically when the shutter button is

pressed halfway.

→124

[Half Press Release]

Enables shutter release when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

→124

[Quick AF] Enables faster focusing when the shutter button is pressed. →124

[Eye Sensor AF] Automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is activated. →55

[Pinpoint AF Time]

Sets the time for displaying the enlarged screen if the shutter

button is pressed halfway when Auto Focus mode is set to [

→122

[Pinpoint AF Display]

Sets whether the assist screen is to be enlarged on a part of the

screen or the entire screen when Auto Focus mode is set to [

→122

[AF Assist Lamp]

Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed

halfway when it is too dark to facilitate focusing.

→125

[Direct Focus Area]

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button while

recording.

→123

→131

[Focus/Release

Priority]

Disables recording when a subject is out of focus. →125

[AF+MF] Allows manual adjustment of the focus after AF is performed. →125

[MF Assist] Sets the display method for MF Assist (enlarged screen). →131

[MF Assist Display]

Sets whether the Assist screen (enlarged screen) is to be enlarged

on part of the screen or over the entire screen.

→132

[MF Guide]

Displays the MF guide used to check the direction of focus on the

screen when the focus is manually adjusted.

→129

307

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Peaking]

When you perform Manual Focus operation, this function

automatically adds colour to the portions of the image that are in

focus.

→130

[Histogram] Sets whether to display the histogram. →64

[Guide Line] Sets the pattern of the guidelines to be displayed while recording. →65

[Highlight]

Flashes the overexposed areas in black and white during [Auto

Review] or playback.

→72

[Zebra Pattern]

Displays the area, where overexposure may occur, using a zebra

pattern.

→166

[Monochrome Live

View]

You can display the recording screen in black and white. →167

[Constant Preview]

(M Mode)

Allows the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed on the

recording screen to be checked when [Manual Exposure] Mode

is set.

→87

[Expo.Meter] Sets whether to display the exposure meter. →81

[Dial Guide] Sets whether to display the operation guide. →18

[LVF Disp.Style] Sets the viewfinder display method. →63

[Monitor Disp. Style] Switching the monitor display method. →62

[Monitor Info. Disp.] Switches the recording information screen of the monitor. →65

[Rec Area]

Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures

and motion pictures.

→192

[Remaining Disp.]

Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures

that you can take and the available recording time.

→28

[Auto Review]

Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still

pictures.

→57

[Fn Button Set] You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons. →37

[Zoom lever] Switches the zoom lever operation setting. →175

[Control Ring] You can assign frequently-used functions to control ring. →40

[Zoom Resume] Retaining the zoom position when the camera is turned off. →175

[Q.MENU] Switches the method for setting Quick Menu items. →34

[iA Button Switch]

Changes the operation method of the [iA] button used for switching

to [Intelligent Auto] Mode.

→75

[Video Button] Enabling/disabling the motion picture button. →192

[Eye Sensor]

Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the

display between the viewfinder and monitor.

→55

308

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Setup]

You can perform settings for convenience of use such as the clock setting and changing

of the beep sounds. You can also perform Wi-Fi function related settings.

[Clock Set] Set time, date, and display format. →29

[World Time] Set the local time at travel destination. →41

[Travel Date]

If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your

trip on which the picture was taken will be recorded.

→42

[Wi-Fi] Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. →272

[Beep] Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds. →43

[Live View Mode]

Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View

screen) when recording pictures.

→43

[Monitor Display]/

[Viewfinder]

Adjust brightness and colour of the monitor or viewfinder. →44

[Monitor Luminance]

You can adjust the brightness of the monitor depending on how

bright it is around the camera.

→45

[Sleep Mode]

The camera automatically turns off if no operation is performed for

a preset period of time.

→46

[USB Mode]

Select communication method for when connecting camera to a

computer or printer with USB connection cable (supplied).

→47

[TV Connection]

Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to

a TV or other device.

→47

[Menu Resume] Save the last operated menu position. →49

[Menu Background] Set the background colour for the menu screen. →49

[Menu Information]

Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the

menu screen.

→49

[Language] Set the language displayed on the screen. →49

[Version Disp.]

Check the firmware version of the camera or supplied flash (when

the flash is attached).

→50

[Self Timer Auto Off] The self-timer is cancelled if the unit is turned off. →50

[No.Reset] Reset picture file numbers. →50

[Reset] Reset to the default settings. →50

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings] Return [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings. →51

[Format] Format (initialise) a memory card. →26

309

SQW0024

Others

Menu list

[Playback]

You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures

you have taken.

[Slide Show] Automatically play pictures in order. →204

[Playback Mode]

You can narrow down the pictures to be displayed with set filters,

such as categories or favourite pictures.

→206

[Location Logging]

You can write location information (longitude/latitude) sent from the

smartphone to the pictures.

→207

[RAW Processing]

You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were

recorded in RAW format. The created still pictures are saved in

JPEG format.

→208

[Title Edit] Allows characters (comments) to be entered on a recorded picture. →211

[Text Stamp]

You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel

destination, travel dates, etc. on the recorded still pictures.

→212

[Video Divide] A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. →214

[Time Lapse Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that

was recorded using [Time Lapse Shot].

→215

[Stop Motion Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that

was recorded using [Stop Motion Animation].

→215

[Resize] Picture size can be reduced. →216

[Cropping] Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas. →217

[Rotate] Manually rotate pictures by 90°. →218

[Rotate Disp.] Automatically rotate portrait pictures. →218

[Favorite]

Allows a label to be assigned to a picture with a mark to set it as

your favourite picture.

→219

[Print Set] Sets the pictures and the number of pictures to be printed. →220

[Protect] Set protection to prevent deletion of pictures by mistake. →221

[Face Rec Edit]

Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with mistaken

Face Recognition.

→222

[Picture Sort]

You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures

on this unit.

→223

[Delete Confirmation]

You can set the Yes/No options that you want to select first on the

confirmation screen when you delete a picture from either [Yes]

or [No].

→223

310

SQW0024

Others

Q&A

Troubleshooting

Try checking these items (→310 - 325) first.

If the problem persists,

Performing [Reset] in the [Setup] menu may resolve the issue (→50). (Note that

except for some items such as [Clock Set], all settings are returned to their values at

the time of purchase.)

Also, see the Panasonic support site for the latest support information.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

■

Battery, power

Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on.

• Battery is not inserted correctly (→24), or needs recharging.

Camera switches off as soon as the camera is turned on.

• Battery needs recharging.

This unit is turned off automatically.

• [Sleep Mode] is activated. (→46)

• If you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link (HDMI) with an HDMI micro cable and turn off

the TV with the remote control for the TV, this unit also turns off.

→ If you are not using VIERA Link (HDMI), set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (→49)

The battery runs down quickly.

• The Wi-Fi connection has been on for a long time.

→ The battery is used up faster with a Wi-Fi connection. Turn off the camera as often as possible

using [Sleep Mode] (→46) or other methods.

311

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Recording

Cannot record pictures.

• Card is full.

→ Free space by deleting unwanted pictures (→73).

• When a large capacity card is used, you may not be able to take a picture for a while after you turn

on the camera.

• Focus is not aligned.

→ When [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], the camera will not record until proper

focusing is achieved. (→125)

Recorded pictures look white.

• Lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.).

→ Turn the camera on to extract lens barrel, and clean lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.

• Lens is foggy (→12).

Recorded pictures are too bright/too dark.

• Adjust the exposure (→135).

• AE Lock (→133) is set inappropriately.

Zooming stops instantaneously.

• When using the Extra Optical Zoom, the zooming action will stop temporarily. This is not a

malfunction.

Some pictures are taken when I press the shutter button just once.

• Camera is set to use [Auto Bracket], White Balance Bracket, [Aspect Bracket], or [Burst]. Self-

Timer is set to [

→ Clear the setting. (→106, 141)

Unable to perform bracket recording.

• The remaining memory space in the card is low.

→ Check the remaining memory space in the card.

Focus not aligned correctly.

• Subject outside of focus range. (→126)

• Caused by jitter or subject movement. (→168)

• [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [RELEASE]. (→125)

• [Shutter AF] is set to [OFF]. (→124)

• AF Lock (→133) is set inappropriately.

Recorded pictures are blurred. The stabiliser function ineffective.

• Shutter speed is slower in dark locations and the stabiliser function is less effective.

→ Hold camera firmly with both hands, keeping arms close to body.

• Use a tripod and the self-timer when using a slower shutter speed (→148).

312

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Recorded pictures appear coarse, or there is interference.

• We recommend trying the following methods.

→ Lower [Sensitivity] (→136).

→ Take pictures in brighter locations.

→ Either adjust [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to a higher setting or set each item other than

[Noise Reduction] to a lower setting. (→101)

→ Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (→113)

→ Change the settings of [Picture Size] (→108) and [Quality] (→109).

• When Digital Zoom is used, the picture quality will become lower if you zoom in higher.

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting

fixture. The subject appears distorted.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup

sensors. This is not a malfunction. If the subject passes quickly in front of the

lens, it will appear slightly distorted.

• If you are taking still pictures using [ESHTR], the striping may be reduced by

setting a slower shutter speed. (→84)

Brightness or colouring of recorded picture different from real life.

• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc., increasing the shutter speed may

introduce slight changes to brightness and colour. These are a result of the characteristics of the

light source and do not indicate a malfunction.

• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting, LED

lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting etc., the colours and screen brightness may change

or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

Reddish horizontal streaks appear on the screen during recording.

• This is characteristic of the MOS sensors, which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. The

streaks appear when the subject has a bright part. Some unevenness may occur in the surrounding

areas, but this is not a malfunction. It is recorded in motion pictures but is not recorded on still

pictures.

• It is recommended that you take pictures while taking care not to expose the screen to sunlight or

any other source of strong light.

Motion picture recording stops midway.

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About the

motion picture recording and speed class” (→25).

• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class, the data writing

speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and

formatting it (→26).

313

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

The screen turns dark while recording motion pictures.

• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may turn dark as time passes in order to slow

battery consumption. This condition, however, will not affect the recorded motion picture.

The screen turns momentarily black or noise is recorded.

• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may momentarily turn black or noise may be

recorded due to static electricity or strong electromagnetic waves (radio transmitters, high-voltage

lines, etc.) under some environmental conditions.

Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult while recording 4K motion

pictures.

• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the

focus at high precision. This is not a malfunction.

Panorama picture recording stops before finishing.

• If the pan motion of the camera is too slow, the camera assumes that the operation has been

aborted and stops recording.

• If the pan motion of the camera is too shaky when it is moved toward the recording direction, the

camera stops recording.

The subject cannot be locked. (AF track fails)

• If the colour of the subject is similar to that of its background, AF Tracking may not function. Set the

AF lock to the colours specific to the subject.

Low or inaudible operating sound.

• The speaker is blocked.

• [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (→161).

314

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Monitor/viewfinder

The monitor/viewfinder is turned off although the camera is turned on.

• When a hand or object is close to the eye sensor, the monitor display mode could be switched to

viewfinder display mode without your knowledge. (→54)

Pictures do not show on the monitor.

• Viewfinder display mode is activated.

→ Press the [LVF] button to switch to the monitor display mode. (→54)

• Monitor is turned off.

→ Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display information. (→62)

• When you connect the camera to a TV using an HDMI micro cable, the picture is not displayed on

a monitor/viewfinder in the following cases.

– During playback

Brightness is unstable.

• Aperture value is set while shutter button is pressed halfway. (Does not affect recorded picture.)

This symptom may also occur when the brightness changes because the zoom is operated or the

camera is moved. This is the automatic aperture operation of the camera and is not a malfunction.

The screen flickers indoors.

• The screen may flicker for a few seconds after turning on. This is an operation to correct flicker

caused by lighting such as fluorescent lights, LED lights, etc. and is not a malfunction.

The screen is too bright/too dark.

• Check [Monitor Luminance] setting. (→45)

• Use [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] to adjust the brightness of the screen. (→44)

Black/blue/red/green dots or interference appears. Monitor looks distorted when touched.

• This is not a fault, and will not be recorded on the actual pictures.

Noise appears on the monitor/viewfinder.

• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor/viewfinder.

Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder when pressing [LVF] button.

• When it is connected to a computer or printer, the camera can display pictures on the monitor only.

315

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Flash

Unable to perform [Flash].

• Flash (supplied/optional) is not attached properly.

→ Properly attach a flash (supplied/optional) to the camera. (→176, 291)

• For details about flash settings, refer to (→176 - 186, 291).

No flash emitted.

The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.

• When the picture effect (Filter) is set

• When camera is set to use [Auto Bracket], White Balance Bracket, or [Aspect Bracket]

• When using [Burst]

• During panorama picture recording

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When the electronic shutter is used (→140)

→ Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [MSHTR].

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (→161)

→ Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF].

The flash fires twice.

• The flash (supplied) fires twice. (Except when [Firing Mode] of [Flash] is set to [MANUAL]) When

red-eye reduction (→180) is set, the firing interval will be longer. Make sure that the subject does

not move until the second firing is completed.

316

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Playback

Pictures have been rotated.

• [Rotate Disp.] is activated. (→218)

Cannot view pictures. There are no recorded pictures.

• A card is not inserted in the camera.

• There is no picture on the card to play back.

• Has the file name of the picture been changed on a computer? If so, it cannot be played back on

the camera.

• [Playback Mode] is set to other than [Normal Play].

→ Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (→206)

Folder/file number displayed as [-]. Picture is black.

• Picture edited on computer or taken with different device.

• Battery removed immediately after picture taken, or picture taken with low battery.

→ Use [Format] to delete (→26).

Incorrect date displayed in Calendar Search.

• Picture edited on computer or taken with different device.

• [Clock Set] is incorrect (→29). (Incorrect date may be displayed in Calendar Search on pictures

copied to a computer and then back to this unit, if computer and camera dates differ.)

White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.

• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round spots

may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting particles of dust in the

air. This is not a fault. A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots

and their position differ in every picture.

[Thumbnail is displayed] is shown on the screen.

• The pictures may have been recorded on another device. If so, they may be displayed with poor

picture quality.

Red areas in pictures appear blackened.

• When digital red-eye correction ([

], [ ]) is operating, if a subject is recorded that has skin-

coloured areas with red areas inside, the digital red-eye correction function may blacken the red

areas.

→ We recommend setting the flash (supplied/optional) to [

], or [Red-Eye Removal] to [OFF]

before recording. (→180)

317

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

An unusual noise, such as a clicking or buzzing noise, is recorded on a motion picture. Audio

is recorded at low volumes.

• When recording a motion picture in a quiet environment, noise due to the motion of the aperture

and focusing mechanism may be recorded on the motion picture. Note that this is not a fault. You

can set the focus operation during motion picture recording to [OFF] using [Continuous AF] (→189).

• Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion

picture, operation noise may be recorded.

• If you block the microphone with your fingers while motion pictures are being recorded, the audio

may be recorded at a low volume or may not be recorded at all. In this case, the camera may pick

up the lens operating sounds more easily.

Operating sounds are recorded at the end of the motion picture recording.

• Since motion pictures are recorded until the motion picture button is pressed to stop recording, the

operating sound level in the picture may be higher. To suppress this sound, we recommend trying

the following method.

→ Divide the end part of a motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214) in the [Playback] menu. In

some cases, motion pictures cannot be divided at a position close to the end part of the motion

picture. To avoid this problem, continue recording for an extra 3 seconds.

Playback and operation sounds are too low.

• The speaker is blocked. (→15)

Motion pictures taken with this camera cannot be played in other cameras.

• Even if a device is compatible with AVCHD and MP4, the motion pictures that were recorded on

this unit may have bad picture quality or sound quality upon playback, or may be unable to be

played back. Also, the recording information may not be displayed correctly.

318

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Wi-Fi function

It cannot connect to the wireless LAN. Radio waves get disconnected.

• Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network.

• Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access

point.

→ Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point.

• When the radio waves are interrupted, the condition may improve by moving the location or

changing the angle of the wireless access point.

• When this unit is placed on a metal table or shelf, the connection may not be established easily

because the camera is affected by radio waves. Use the camera away from metal surfaces.

• It may not automatically connect when the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to

broadcast.

→ Set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast.

• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency

operated nearby?

→ Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away from

the device.

• Is the 5 GHz/2.4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the

5 GHz band?

→ The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz/2.4 GHz simultaneously is

recommended. It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible.

• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the

connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• Perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu.

319

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Wireless access point is not displayed. Or it cannot be connected.

• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.

• The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave

condition.

→ Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

→ Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point.

→ Change the direction of this unit.

•

It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access

point.

→ Check the settings of the wireless access point.

• The wireless access point may not be found depending on the radio wave condition.

→ Perform the [Manual Input]. (→266)

• Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast?

→ It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast. Enter and set the network SSID. (→265)

• Connection methods differ depending on the wireless access point.

→ Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point.

It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone.

• It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi connection setting of the smartphone,

but it is not a malfunction.

This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.

→ Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone.

I have forgotten the login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

320

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

I do not have a wireless access point at my home, but I would like to perform service user

registration of the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Service user registration for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not possible in the environment without a

wireless access point.

The camera cannot be connected to Mac computer/Windows PC via Wi-Fi connection.

→ Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.

→ When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely

from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.

Please confirm clock set and world time of the camera matches with time, date and time zone in

Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely, please match them.

I am having a problem connecting to my Windows 8 PC. The user name and password are not

recognised.

• Depending on the OS version, on Windows 8, for example, there are two types of user account

(local account/Microsoft account).

→ Be sure to set the local account and use the user name and password for the local account.

The Wi-Fi connection is not recognising my PC.

• By default, the Wi-Fi connection uses the default workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If the name

of the workgroup has been changed, it will not be recognised.

→ Select [PC Connection] then [Change Workgroup Name] in the [Wi-Fi Setup] to change the

workgroup name to match that of your PC. (→272)

Pictures cannot be transmitted to the computer.

• If a firewall is enabled by the OS or security software, this unit may be unable to connect to the

computer.

Images cannot be transmitted to the WEB service.

• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.

• WEB service server or the network may be busy.

→ Try again after a while.

→ Check the site of the WEB service you are sending the image to.

321

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

It takes time to transmit an image to the WEB service.

• Is the size of the image too large?

→ Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (→214).

→ Reduce the image size at [Size] (→271), and then send.

• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.

→ Transmit closer to the wireless access point.

The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the WEB service is not there.

• Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image.

• It may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the WEB service depending on

the status of the server.

→ Wait for a while and try again.

• You can check the transmission status on the WEB service link settings by logging into “LUMIX

CLUB”.

I would like to return the image in the WEB service to the camera.

• The images in the WEB Service cannot be saved (downloaded) to this unit. Do not delete the

uploaded images, and make a backup of them.

I cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the WEB service by this unit.

• The images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit.

→ Perform the task using a smartphone or a PC.

Your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password were deleted after sending the camera in to be

repaired.

• The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair.

→ Always make a copy of important settings.

Transmission of the image fails midway. There is an image that could not be transmitted.

• Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red.

• Is the size of the image too large?

→ Divide the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214).

→ Reduce the image size at [Size] (→271), and then send.

• File format of the picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination.

(→239, 243, 244, 247, 251, 255)

• Capacity or number of images in the WEB service is full.

→ Login to “LUMIX CLUB”, and check the status of the destination on the WEB service link

settings.

322

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

→ Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (→51)

However, the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] will be reset.

I cannot send images to an AV device.

• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take a

while.

I cannot connect using the NFC function.

• The smartphone is not NFC compatible.

This function can be used with NFC compatible devices with Android (2.3.3 or above).

• Is the NFC function on the smartphone turned off?

• The [NFC Operation] on this unit is set to [OFF]. (→272)

• The camera has a hard time recognising some smartphone models. If it is not recognised, slowly

shift the smartphone while it is beside the unit.

• If you hold the smartphone for too short a time, the camera may not be able to recognise the

smartphone. Hold the smartphone for a while.

323

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

TV, computer, printer

No image appears on TV. Image blurred or not coloured.

• Not connected correctly (→276).

• The television has not been switched to auxiliary input.

The display on the TV and on the camera do not match.

• Aspect ratio may be incorrect or edges may be cut off with certain televisions.

Cannot play motion pictures on TV.

• Card is inserted into TV.

→ Connect with AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable and play on camera (→276).

Picture is not displayed on full TV screen.

• Check [TV Aspect] settings (→47).

No sound is output from the camera speaker.

• When the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is connected to the camera, no sound is output

from the camera.

VIERA Link (HDMI) is not working.

• Is the HDMI micro cable connected correctly? (→276)

→ Check that the HDMI micro cable is fully inserted.

• Is the camera’s [VIERA Link] setting set to [ON]? (→49)

→ The input setting may not be able to be changed automatically with certain television HDMI

sockets. In this case, please change the input setting with your television’s remote control

(consult your television’s operating instructions for details).

→ Check the VIERA Link (HDMI) settings on the device you are connecting to.

→ Turn the camera off and on again.

→ Turn the “VIERA Link control (HDMI device control)” setting on your television (VIERA) to off and

then to on again. (Consult your VIERA’s operating instructions for details.)

Cannot communicate with the computer.

• Not connected correctly (→284).

• Check whether computer has recognised camera.

→ Set [USB Mode] to [PC] (→47).

→ Turn the camera off and then on again.

Computer does not recognise card.

• Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect with card in place.

• If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC, try connecting the USB connection cable to

another USB terminal.

324

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Computer does not recognise card. (When using an SDXC Memory Card)

→ Check whether your computer is compatible with SDXC Memory Cards.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

→ A message prompting you to format the card may appear when you connect it. Do not format the

card.

→ If the [Access] indicator on the screen does not go off, turn the camera off before disconnecting

the USB connection cable.

Cannot print when connecting to printer.

• Printer not compatible with PictBridge.

• Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)] (→47, 287).

The edges of pictures are cut off when printing.

• Release any trimming or edgeless printing settings on printer before printing. (Refer to the

instruction manual for the printer.)

• The aspect ratio of pictures is different from that of paper used for printing.

→ If printing in shop, check if 16:9 sizes can be printed.

Cannot print panorama pictures properly.

• The aspect ratio of panorama pictures is different from that of regular still pictures, and some

panorama pictures may not be printed correctly.

→ Use a printer with support for panorama pictures. (Refer to the instruction manual for the printer.)

→ We recommend adjusting the size of a picture in accordance with print paper using the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the DVD (supplied).

325

SQW0024

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■

Others

Menu not displayed in desired language.

• Change [Language] setting (→49).

Camera rattles if shaken.

• This sound is made by the lens movement and is not a fault.

The lens makes a clicking noise.

• When the camera is turned on or off, the lens is moved, or an aperture operation is performed,

such a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

• When the brightness changes after a zooming operation or moving the camera, the lens may make

a noise while adjusting the aperture. This is not a malfunction.

Red lamp illuminated when pressing shutter button halfway in dark locations.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [ON] (→125).

AF Assist Lamp is not illuminated.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [OFF] (→125).

• Not illuminated in bright locations.

Part of a picture flashes black and white.

• [Highlight] is set to [ON]. (→72)

Camera is hot.

• Camera may become a little warm during use, but this does not affect performance or quality.

Clock is incorrect.

• Camera has been left for a long period.

→ Reset the clock (→30).

• A long time was taken to set the clock (clock will be behind by the same lapse of time).

When using zoom, picture becomes slightly warped and the edges of the subject become

coloured.

• Pictures may be slightly warped or coloured around the edges, depending on the zoom ratio, but

this is not a fault.

File numbers are not recorded in sequence.

• File numbers are reset when new folders are created (→50).

• If you perform this operation after performing a specific operation, the picture may be saved in a

folder with a different folder number than the previous folder number.

File numbers have jumped backwards.

• Battery was removed/inserted with the camera turned on. (Numbers may jump backwards if folder/

file numbers are not correctly recorded.)

326

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

When in use

●

Camera may become warm if used for long periods of time, but this is not a fault.

●

Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may

be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely

affecting the pictures and/or sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic

fields created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures

and/or sound.

• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning

properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (optional).

Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/

or sound may be adversely affected.

●

Do not extend the supplied cord or cable.

●

Do not allow camera to come into contact with pesticides or volatile substances (can

cause surface damage or coating to peel).

●

Do not keep objects that may be influenced magnetically close to the speaker.

• Magnetised objects such as bank cards, commuter passes, watches, may be

adversely affected by the magnetic influence of the speaker.

●

Never leave the camera and the battery in a car or on a car hood in the summer.

Doing so may cause leakage of the battery electrolyte, overheating, fire or a battery

explosion due to the high temperature.

Caring for your camera

To clean your camera, remove the battery or the DC coupler (optional), or disconnect the

power plug from the outlet, and wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

●

Use a damp cloth to remove stubborn stains, before wiping with a dry cloth.

●

Do not use benzine, thinners, alcohol, or kitchen detergent, as these may damage the

outer casing and finish of the camera.

●

If using a chemically-treated cloth, read the supplied instructions carefully.

327

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

When not using for a while

●

Turn off the camera before removing battery and card (ensure that battery is removed

to prevent damage through over-discharge).

●

Do not leave in contact with rubber or plastic bags.

●

Store together with a drying agent (silica gel) if leaving in drawer, etc. Store batteries in

cool (15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)) places with low humidity (40%RH to 60%RH) and

no major temperature changes.

●

Charge battery once per year and use completely before storing again.

Memory cards

●

To prevent damage to cards and data

• Avoid high temperatures, direct sunlight, electromagnetic waves, and static electricity.

• Do not bend, drop, or expose to strong impacts.

• Do not touch terminals on reverse of card or allow them to become dirty or wet.

●

Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate

handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded

data.

●

When disposing of/transferring memory cards

• If using the “format” or “delete” functions on your camera or computer, this only

changes the file management information, and does not completely delete the data

from within the memory card. When disposing of or transferring your memory cards,

we recommend physically destroying them, or using commercially available computer

data erasing software to completely delete the data from the card. Data within

memory cards should be managed responsibly.

Monitor/viewfinder

●

Do not press hard on the monitor. This may cause uneven display and damage the

monitor.

●

In cold climates or other situations when the camera becomes cold, the monitor or

the viewfinder may appear slightly darker than normal immediately after the camera is

turned on. Normal brightness will return once the internal components have warmed up.

The monitor and viewfinder are made with extremely high precision technology.

However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen.

This is not a malfunction. The monitor and viewfinder screens are controlled with

extremely high precision, but some pixels may be inactive. The spots will not be

recorded on pictures on a card.

328

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Battery

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.

This battery is easily affected by temperature and humidity, and is affected more when the

temperature is high or low.

●

The time required for charging varies depending on conditions of battery usage.

Charging takes longer at high or low temperatures and when the battery has not been

used in some time.

●

Battery will be warm during charging and for some time thereafter.

●

Battery will run out if not used for long periods of time, even after being charged.

●

Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the

resulting heat generated.

●

Frequently charging up battery is not recommended.

(Frequently charging battery reduces maximum usage time and can cause battery to

expand.)

●

If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan.

Please purchase a new battery.

●

When charging:

• Wipe dirt from the battery terminal with a dry cloth.

• Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●

Do not use a damaged or dented battery (especially connectors), e.g. by dropping (can

cause faults).

Charger

●

Depending on the environment while charging, the charging light may flicker due to

static electricity or electromagnetic radiation, etc. This has no effect on charging.

●

Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●

The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a

malfunction.

●

After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A

very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)

●

Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean. When they get dirty, clean with a

dry cloth.

329

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Lens

●

Images may appear slightly white if lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.). Turn the camera on,

hold the extracted lens barrel with your fingers, and gently wipe the lens surface with a

soft, dry cloth.

●

Do not leave the lens exposed to direct sunlight.

When using a tripod or unipod

●

Do not apply excessive force or tighten screws when they are crooked. (This may

damage the camera, screw hole, or label.)

●

Ensure that the tripod is stable. (Refer to the tripod instructions.)

●

You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.

Personal Information

To protect personal information, we recommend that you set a Wi-Fi password. (→273)

If names or birthdays are set in [Profile Setup] or in the [Face Recog.] function, keep in

mind that the camera and recorded pictures will contain personal information.

●

Disclaimer

• Data containing personal information can be altered or lost due to malfunction, static

electricity, accidents, breakdowns, repairs, or other operations.

Panasonic will not be liable for any damage that occurs, direct or indirect, as a result

of the alteration or loss of data containing personal information.

●

When ordering repairs or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After you make a note of the personal information, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/

[Delete account] to delete data containing personal information such as wireless LAN

connection settings that you registered or set in this unit. (→51, 262)

• To protect your personal information, please reset the settings. (→50)

• Remove the memory card from the camera.

• When ordering repairs, settings may be returned to the initial purchase state.

• If the above operations cannot be performed because of a camera malfunction,

consult with the dealer or nearest Service Centre.

●

When transferring or disposing of your memory card, see “When disposing of/

transferring memory cards” in the previous section. (→327)

●

Uploading pictures to WEB services

• Pictures may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such

as titles, recording dates and times, and location information. Before uploading the

pictures to WEB services, check the pictures carefully for information that should not

be disclosed.

330

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

●

SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

●

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

●

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

●

“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of

Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

●

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

●

Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.

●

Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

●

Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

●

iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●

iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

●

Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

●

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance

●

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance

●

“Wi-Fi

” and “Wi-Fi Direct

” are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance

●

“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™” and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance

●

DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification

marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

●

QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

●

This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered

trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

●

Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions are

trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.

331

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-

commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC

Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and

non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video.

No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained

from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

332

SQW0024

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,

(2) the software owned by third party and licenced to Panasonic Corporation, and/or

(3) open source software

The software categorised as (3) is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting

[MENU/SET] → [Setup] → [Version Disp.] → [Software info].

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying

documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries

must not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used

batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance

with your national legislation.

By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources

and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the

environment.

For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your

local municipality.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in

accordance with national legislation.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this

case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical

involved.

Documenttranscriptie

Operating Instructions for advanced features Digital Camera Model No. DMC-LX100 Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and save this manual for future use. Message Display →299 Q&A Troubleshooting →310 Finding the information you need →2 Contents →4 Contents by Function →10 Menu list →303 SQW0024 M0914KZ0 Finding the information you need In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you need from the following pages. By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the information. Search from “Contents” P.4 - Search from the list of function names P.10 - “Contents by Function” Search from “Names and Functions of Main Parts” P.14 - Search from “List of monitor/ viewfinder displays” P.293 - Search from the list of on-screen messages P.299 - Search from the menu list P.303 - “Message displays” “Menu list” [Rec].......................... P.303 [Motion Picture]......... P.305 [Custom].................... P.306 [Setup] ...................... P.308 [Playback].................. P.309 Search from “Q&A Troubleshooting” P.310 - For details on how to use this manual, see the next page. ® Wi-Fi function 2 →224 SQW0024 How to use this manual Recording mode icons Recording mode: In Recording Modes that show icons in black, you can select and execute indicated menus and functions. ••Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page. ••By entering keywords in the search field at the top of the Adobe Reader screen, you can run a keyword search and jump to the corresponding page. ••Operations and other details of this manual may vary depending on the Adobe Reader version you are using. ■■About the symbols in the text Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button. Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button. Configurations that can be performed in the [Custom] menu. Tips for skilful use and points for recording. Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. (→00) Indicates the reference page. Click to go to the corresponding page. Click to view the description on the next page. In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows: → [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ] Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”. Click this icon to jump to “Contents”. Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”. Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page. 3 SQW0024 Contents ■■Finding the information you need...... 2 ■■How to use this manual....................... 3 ■■Contents by Function........................ 10 Before Use ■■Before use.......................................... 12 ■■Standard Accessories....................... 13 ■■Names and Functions of Main Parts........................................... 14 [MENU/SET] button / Cursor button / Control dial.................................................18 Preparations ■■Attaching the lens cap and shoulder strap.................................... 19 ■■Charging battery................................ 20 Remaining battery......................................21 Guidelines for number of recordable pictures and operating time........................22 ■■Inserting and removing the battery/ the card (optional).............................. 24 ■■About the Card................................... 25 Formatting the card (initialisation)..............26 Recording capacity guidelines (pictures/recording time).............................27 ■■Setting the clock................................ 29 Changing time settings...............................30 ■■Setting the menu................................ 31 Setting the menu screen background.........33 ■■Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)..................... 34 Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item.............................................35 ■■Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)............................. 37 ■■Changing settings using the control ring......................................... 39 ■■Using the [Setup] menu..................... 41 [Clock Set]..................................................41 [World Time]................................................41 [Travel Date]...............................................42 [Wi-Fi].........................................................42 [Beep].........................................................43 [Live View Mode]........................................43 [Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]...................44 [Monitor Luminance]...................................45 [Sleep Mode]..............................................46 [USB Mode]................................................47 [TV Connection]..........................................47 [Menu Resume]..........................................49 [Menu Background]....................................49 [Menu Information]......................................49 [Language]..................................................49 [Version Disp.]............................................50 [Self Timer Auto Off]....................................50 [No.Reset]...................................................50 [Reset]........................................................50 [Reset Wi-Fi Settings].................................51 [Format]......................................................51 ■■Entering Text...................................... 52 Changing the settings assigned to the control ring..................................................40 4 SQW0024 Contents Basics ■■Holding the camera............................ 53 ■■Recording pictures using the viewfinder .......................................... 54 Switching between the monitor and viewfinder...................................................54 About Eye Sensor AF.................................55 ■■Taking pictures................................... 56 ■■Recording motion pictures............... 58 ■■Select the recording mode................ 59 ■■Switching the display information on the recording screen.................... 62 ■■Viewing your pictures........................ 67 Viewing motion pictures..............................70 ■■Switching the display information on the playback screen..................... 71 ■■Deleting pictures................................ 73 [Delete Single]............................................73 To delete multiple (up to 100)/ To delete all pictures...................................74 Recording mode ■■Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode...................... 75 Taking pictures using a handheld camera ([iHandheld Night Shot]).............................78 Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]).............79 ■■Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed.... 80 Taking pictures by setting the aperture value ([Aperture-Priority] Mode).................83 Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed ([Shutter-Priority] Mode)..................84 Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed ([Manual Exposure] Mode).........................86 Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed ([Preview] Mode)...........88 Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value and shutter speed ([Program AE] Mode)..................................81 Picture effects (Filter) ■■Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter).................................... 89 5 SQW0024 Contents Picture Quality and colouring Settings ■■Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style]....................... 100 ■■Adjusting highlights and shadows [Highlight Shadow].......................... 102 ■■Adjusting the White Balance.......... 103 ■■Setting the picture quality and size.................................................... 107 Changing the aspect ratio of the still pictures.....................................................107 Setting the picture size.............................108 Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality])..................................................109 ■■Using the picture correction functions effectively.........................111 Correcting contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic])............................................. 111 Enhancing the impression of high-resolution ([i.Resolution]).................. 111 Combining still pictures with different exposures ([HDR]).................................... 112 Suppressing the noise of a long exposure ([Long Shtr NR])........................ 113 Setting the colour space........................... 113 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) ■■Taking pictures with Auto Focus.... 114 Select the focus mode (AFS, AFF, AFC)....................................... 114 Switching [AF Mode]................................. 115 Changing the position and size of the AF area.....................................................121 Setting your preferred focusing method....124 ■■Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)............................ 126 Focus range..............................................126 ■■Taking pictures with Manual Focus................................... 128 MF Assist..................................................131 ■■Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure [AF/AE Lock].................................... 133 ■■Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation.................................. 135 ■■Setting the ISO Sensitivity.............. 136 Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity..........................................137 Setting the incremental value of ISO Sensitivity..........................................138 Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting........138 ■■Setting the metering mode.............. 139 Shutter and Drive Settings ■■Setting the Shutter Type.................. 140 ■■Selecting a Drive Mode.................... 141 ■■Burst function.................................. 142 ■■Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket].................................. 145 6 ■■Automatically changing the aspect ratio while taking pictures [Aspect Bracket].............................. 147 ■■Taking pictures with self-timer....... 148 ■■Recording panorama pictures........ 150 SQW0024 Contents Functions for specific subjects and purposes ■■Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]............................ 153 ■■Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]................. 156 ■■Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.]..... 159 ■■Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time [Silent Mode].................................... 161 ■■Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]................................... 162 ■■Setting the profile for a baby or pet to record in a picture............ 165 ■■Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions.... 166 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash ■■Correcting jitter ............................... 168 ■■Using Zoom...................................... 170 Zoom types and use.................................171 ■■Taking pictures using the flash (supplied).......................................... 176 Attaching the flash....................................176 Changing the firing mode (Manual flash)...........................................179 Changing Flash Mode..............................180 Setting the 2nd curtain sync.....................182 Adjusting the flash output.........................183 Synchronising the flash output with the camera during Exposure Compensation..........................183 Performing wireless flash settings............184 Recording motion pictures ■■Recording motion pictures............. 187 Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate.................................187 Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures ([Continuous AF])............189 Recording motion pictures........................190 Recording 4K motion pictures..................194 Creating a high-resolution still picture from a 4K motion picture [4K PHOTO].....195 ■■Taking still pictures while a motion ■■Using the [Motion Picture] menu.... 199 [4K PHOTO]..............................................199 [Rec Format].............................................199 [Rec Quality].............................................199 [Picture Mode]..........................................199 [Continuous AF]........................................199 [Mic Level Disp.].......................................200 [Mic Level Adj.].........................................200 [Wind Cut].................................................200 picture is being recorded................ 198 7 SQW0024 Contents Playing Back and Editing Pictures ■■Viewing the group picture............... 201 ■■Capturing still pictures from motion pictures................................ 203 ■■Using the [Playback] menu............. 204 [Slide Show]..............................................204 [Playback Mode].......................................206 [Location Logging]....................................207 [RAW Processing].....................................208 [Title Edit].................................................. 211 [Text Stamp]..............................................212 [Video Divide]............................................214 [Time Lapse Video]...................................215 [Stop Motion Video]..................................215 [Resize].....................................................216 [Cropping].................................................217 [Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.]............................218 [Favorite]...................................................219 [Print Set]..................................................220 [Protect]....................................................221 [Face Rec Edit].........................................222 [Picture Sort].............................................223 [Delete Confirmation]................................223 Wi-Fi ■■Wi-Fi® Function and NFC Function................................... 224 ■■What you can do with the Wi-Fi function................................... 227 ■■Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone........ 228 Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”............................228 Connecting to a smartphone....................229 Connecting to a smartphone using NFC function.............................................233 Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)....................................234 Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone............................................235 Saving pictures in the camera to the smartphone...............................................235 Easily transferring pictures in the camera................................................236 Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services........................237 Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a smartphone.............237 Operating the camera to send pictures to a smartphone........................................239 8 ■■Displaying still pictures on a TV..... 242 ■■Wireless printing.............................. 243 ■■Sending pictures to AV device........ 244 ■■Sending pictures to a PC................ 247 ■■Using WEB services........................ 251 When sending images to WEB service....251 When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]...............................255 ■■Using “LUMIX CLUB”...................... 258 About the [LUMIX CLUB]..........................258 ■■About connections.......................... 263 [Via Network] Connecting via a wireless access point....264 [Direct] Connecting directly...................................267 Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously ([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from Favorite]).........268 Settings for sending pictures....................270 ■■[Wi-Fi Setup]..................................... 272 SQW0024 Contents Connecting with other devices ■■Enjoying 4K motion pictures.......... 274 Viewing 4K motion pictures......................274 Storing 4K motion pictures.......................275 ■■Viewing on TV screen...................... 276 VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™).....278 ■■Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC............ 280 About supplied software...........................281 Installing supplied software......................283 Copying still pictures and motion pictures.........................................284 ■■Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in the recorder...... 286 Copying by inserting the card into the recorder....................................................286 Dubbing playback pictures via AV cables (optional)...................................................286 ■■Printing............................................. 287 Printing multiple pictures..........................288 Printing with date and text........................289 Making print settings on the camera.........290 Others ■■Optional accessories....................... 291 External Flash (optional)...........................291 Using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) instead of the battery.............................................292 ■■List of monitor/viewfinder ■■Message displays............................ 299 ■■Menu list........................................... 303 ■■Q&A Troubleshooting..................... 310 ■■Usage cautions and notes.............. 326 displays............................................. 293 9 SQW0024 Contents by Function Recording Recording Recording mode............................................59 [Preview]........................................................88 Picture effects (Filter)....................................89 Macro recording...........................................126 Recording panorama pictures.....................150 [Time Lapse Shot]........................................153 [Stop Motion Animation]...............................156 [Multi Exp.]...................................................159 [Silent Mode]................................................161 Focus (AF/MF) Focus Mode................................................. 114 AF Mode...................................................... 115 Adjusting the AF area position.....................121 Manual Focus..............................................128 AF/AE Lock..................................................133 Exposure AF/AE Lock..................................................133 Exposure Compensation.............................135 ISO sensitivity..............................................136 [Metering Mode]...........................................139 [Auto Bracket]..............................................145 Drive Drive Mode..................................................141 [Aspect Bracket]..........................................147 [Self Timer]..................................................148 Picture Quality and Colour Tone [Photo Style]................................................100 [Highlight Shadow].......................................102 White Balance.............................................103 [Picture Size]...............................................108 [Quality].......................................................109 [i.Dynamic]................................................... 111 [i.Resolution]................................................ 111 [HDR]........................................................... 112 [Long Shtr NR]............................................. 113 [Color Space]............................................... 113 Flash [Flash Mode]................................................180 2nd curtain synchro.....................................182 [Flash Adjust.]..............................................183 Wireless flash settings.................................184 Screen settings [Monochrome Live View].............................167 [Mic Level Disp.]..........................................200 Motion Picture Motion Picture [Rec Format]................................................187 [Rec Quality]................................................187 Motion pictures in 4K...................................194 [4K PHOTO]................................................195 Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded.................198 Audio [Mic Level Adj.]............................................200 [Wind Cut]....................................................200 Setup/Custom Basic settings [Format].........................................................26 [Clock Set].....................................................29 How to set menu items..................................31 [Q.MENU]......................................................34 [Beep]............................................................43 [Sleep Mode].................................................46 [Reset] (initialisation).....................................50 Diopter adjustment........................................55 Display switching.....................................62, 71 10 Customisation [CUSTOM] in the Quick Menu.......................35 Function buttons............................................37 Control ring....................................................40 Custom Set....................................................60 [Custom] menu............................................306 [Cursor Button Lock]......................................38 Motion picture button...................................192 SQW0024 Contents by Function Playback Playback [Auto Review]................................................57 Picture playback............................................67 Playback Zoom..............................................68 Multi Playback...............................................68 Motion picture playback.................................70 Delete............................................................73 Display/playback settings [Slide Show].................................................204 [Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.].................................218 Edit [RAW Processing]........................................208 [Resize]........................................................216 [Cropping]....................................................217 Adding information [Location Logging].......................................207 [Title Edit]..................................................... 211 [Text Stamp].................................................212 Image settings [Favorite]......................................................219 [Print Set].....................................................220 [Protect].......................................................221 Wi-Fi Connect “Image App”.................................................228 NFC.............................................................233 [WPS (Push-Button)]...........................264, 267 Direct connection.........................................267 Image App Remote recording........................................234 Saving images.............................................235 Sending images...................................236, 239 Sending and adding location information....237 [Touch Sharing]............................................272 In combination with other devices Playing back pictures on a TV.....................242 Printing images............................................243 Sending images to an AV device.................244 Sending images to a PC..............................247 Sending images to a WEB service..............251 Using [Cloud Sync. Service]........................255 Connecting with other devices PC “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”...................................281 SILKYPIX.....................................................282 TV [VIERA Link]................................................278 11 Recorder Dubbing.......................................................286 Printer PictBridge....................................................287 SQW0024 Before Use Before use ■■Camera handling Keep the camera away from excessive vibration, force, or pressure. ●●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which may damage the lens, monitor, viewfinder, or camera body. This may also cause the camera to malfunction or prevent recording. •• Dropping or hitting the camera against a hard surface •• Pushing with excessive force on the lens or monitor The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or waterproof. Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand, or where water can come into contact with the camera. ●●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which present a risk that sand, water, or foreign material may enter the camera through the lens or openings around buttons. Be especially careful because these conditions may damage the camera, and such damage may not be repairable. •• In extremely dusty or sandy places •• In the rain or by the shore, where the camera may be exposed to water ■■Condensation (When the lens, the monitor, or viewfinder, is fogged up) ●●Condensation may occur when the camera is exposed to sudden changes of temperature or humidity. Avoid these conditions, which may make the lens, monitor, or viewfinder, dirty, cause mould, or damage the camera. ●●If condensation does occur, turn off the camera and wait about two hours before using it. Once the camera adjusts to the surrounding temperature, the fogging will clear naturally. ■■Always take a test shot first Before important events when you will use the camera (at weddings, for example), always take a test shot to make sure that pictures and sound record correctly. ■■No compensation for missed shots We cannot compensate for missed shots if technical problems with the camera or card prevent recording. ■■Carefully observe copyright laws Unauthorised use of recordings that contain works with copyright for purposes other than personal use is prohibited under copyright law. Recording of certain material may be restricted even for the purpose of personal use. ■■Also refer to “Usage cautions and notes” (→326) 12 SQW0024 Before Use Standard Accessories Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera. ●●The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased. For details on the accessories, refer to Basic Operating Instructions. ●●Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text. ●●SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the text. ●●Please dispose of all packaging appropriately. ●●Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children. ■■Optional accessories ••Cards are optional. 13 SQW0024 Before Use Names and Functions of Main Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Self-timer indicator (→148) / AF Assist Lamp (→53, 125) 2 Control ring (→39) 3 Aspect ratio selector switch (→107) 4 Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (→176) The hot shoe cover is already attached to the hot shoe at the time of purchase. 5 Aperture ring (→59) 9 8 7 6 Focus selector switch (→114, 126, 128) 7 Lens front ring To attach the auto lens cap (optional), remove the lens front ring. 8 Lens barrel 9 Lens (Filter diameter Φ43 mm) 14 SQW0024 Before Use Names and Functions of Main Parts (Top) 10 11 12 13 14 10 Stereo microphone (→53, 200) Be careful not to cover the microphone with your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult to record. 11 Shutter speed dial (→59) 12 Shutter button 13 Zoom lever (→170) 14 [FILTER] button (→89) 17 16 15 15 Exposure compensation dial (→135) 16 [iA] button (→59) 17 Camera [ON/OFF] switch (Bottom) 18 19 20 21 22 18 Speaker Be careful not to cover the speaker with your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult to hear. 19 Tripod mount (→329) Do not attach to a tripod with a 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or longer screw. Doing so may damage this unit. It may not be possible to attach certain types of tripods properly. 20 DC coupler cover Open this cover to use an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) in place of the battery. When using an AC adaptor (optional), ensure that the Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and AC adaptor are used. (→292) 21 Release lever (→24) 22 Card/Battery door (→24) 15 SQW0024 Before Use Names and Functions of Main Parts 23 24 25 26 27 29 28 30 23 Viewfinder (LVF) (→54) In this manual, “viewfinder” is used to indicate the LVF. Eye Sensor (→54) 24 25 Diopter adjustment dial (→55) 26 [LVF] button (→54) / [Fn3] button (→37) 27 Strap eyelet (→19) 28 Monitor 29 [HDMI] socket (→276) 30 [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (→276, 284, 286, 287) 16 SQW0024 Before Use Names and Functions of Main Parts 27 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 27 Strap eyelet (→19) 31 Wi-Fi® antenna 32 Wi-Fi connection lamp (→225) 33 [Wi-Fi] button (→225) / [Fn2] button (→37) 34 Motion picture button (→58) 35 [AF/AE LOCK] button (→133) 36 NFC antenna (→233) 37 [Q.MENU] button (→34) 38 Playback button (→67) 39 [Fn1] button (→37) / [ ] (Delete/Cancel) button (→32, 73) 40 [DISP.] button (→62, 71) 41 [MENU/SET] button / Cursor button / Control dial (→18) ●●The illustrations and screens in this manual may differ from the actual product. 17 SQW0024 Before Use Names and Functions of Main Parts [MENU/SET] button / Cursor button / Control dial [MENU/SET] button Use this button to display the menus, enter the settings, etc. (→31) Cursor button This button is used to move the cursor on the menu screens and for other functions. (→32) You can perform the following operations while recording. [ISO] button ( ) (→136) [WB] (White Balance) button ( ) (→103) [ ] (Drive Mode) button ( ) Single (→141), Burst (→142), Auto Bracket (→145), Aspect Bracket (→147), Self-timer (→148), Panorama (→150) [ ] (AF Mode) button ( ) (→115, 131) Control dial Turn the dial to select setting items and change setting values. (→32, 67) Disabling the button and dial operation (while recording) When the [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to the function button, operation of the [MENU/SET] button, cursor button, and control dial is disabled. (→38) Enabling/disabling the operation guide display → [Custom] → [Dial Guide] → [ON] / [OFF] ••When you set the operation guide to [ON], the operation guide for the control ring ([ ]), control dial ([ ]), and other parts appear on the recording screen. ●●In this manual, the button that is to be used is indicated by 18 . SQW0024 Preparations Attaching the lens cap and shoulder strap Cover the lens with the lens cap to protect it when you are not taking pictures. We recommend attaching the lens cap to the camera using the lens cap string to prevent loss of the lens cap. We also recommend attaching the shoulder strap to prevent the camera from being dropped. 1 Use the lens cap string (supplied) to attach the lens cap to the camera Make sure that the thicker portion of the string is not hanging over the lens cap or the shoulder strap eyelet. 2 Attach the lens cap 3 Attach the shoulder strap To attach and remove the lens cap, press the areas shown by arrows in the illustration. Shoulder strap eyelet ••Attach the other end of the shoulder strap. ••Make sure that the shoulder strap does not come loose. ••Attach the shoulder strap with the LUMIX logo on the strap facing out. ••Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder. –– Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may result in injury or accident. ••Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it. –– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck. 19 SQW0024 Preparations Charging battery Always charge before first use! (battery shipped uncharged) About batteries that you can use with this unit It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine products are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used. ••Use the dedicated charger and battery. 1 Attach the battery paying attention to the direction of the battery 2 Connect the charger to the electrical outlet Plug-in type Inlet type Battery Charging light ([CHARGE]) On: Charging in progress Off: Charging complete Charger (model-specific) •• The AC mains lead does not fit entirely into the AC input terminal. A gap will remain. ••Charge the battery with the charger indoors. 3 20 If light is flashing: ••Battery temperature is too high or too low. We recommend charging in a location where the ambient temperature is between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F). ••Battery/charger connector is dirty. Clean with a dry cloth. Detach the battery after charging is completed ••The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power is supplied. The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the battery charger is connected to an electrical outlet. SQW0024 Preparations Charging battery Notes on charging time Charging time Approx. 190 min ••The charging time indicated above is the time required for charging in case when the battery is completely used up. The time required for charging differs depending on conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer in cases when temperatures are either high or low and when the battery has not been used for a long period of time. Remaining battery When using the camera, the remaining battery capacity is displayed. Remaining battery (only when using battery) (flashes red) If the battery mark flashes red, recharge or replace a fully charged battery. ●●Always use genuine Panasonic batteries. ●●If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product. ●●Remove battery from camera after use. •• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic objects (such as clips) when carrying or storing it. ●●To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the monitor goes off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.) 21 SQW0024 Preparations Charging battery Guidelines for number of recordable pictures and operating time Recording still pictures (When using monitor) Number of recordable pictures Recording time Approx. 350 pictures (Approx. 300 pictures) Approx. 175 min (Approx. 150 min) By CIPA standard Recording still pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF)) Number of recordable pictures Recording time Approx. 320 pictures (Approx. 270 pictures) Approx. 160 min (Approx. 135 min) By CIPA standard •• The values when the flash (supplied) is used are provided in parentheses. ■■Recording conditions by CIPA standard CIPA is an abbreviation of “Camera & Imaging Products Association”. •• [Program AE] Mode •• Temperature: 23 °C (73.4 °F)/Humidity: 50%RH when monitor is on. •• Using a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card. •• Using the supplied battery. •• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on (when [Stabilizer] is set to [ ]). •• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording. •• Rotating the zoom lever from Tele to Wide or vice versa in every recording. •• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery decreases. Number reduced if intervals are longer (e.g. to approx. one quarter for 2-minute intervals under the above conditions). 22 SQW0024 Preparations Charging battery Recording motion pictures (When using monitor) [Rec Format] [AVCHD] [MP4] [MP4] [Rec Quality] [FHD/17M/50i] [FHD/20M/25p] [4K/100M/25p] Approx. 125 min Approx. 135 min Approx. 90 min Approx. 60 min Approx. 65 min Approx. 45 min Available recording time Actual available recording time* * The time you can actually record when repeatedly turning the camera on and off, starting and stopping recording and using zoom. ■■Recording conditions •• Temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F), humidity 50%RH ●●[AVCHD] motion pictures: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds. ●●Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB. •• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes 59 seconds. ●●Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes. (You can continue recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate files.) Viewing pictures (When using monitor) Playback time Approx. 260 min ●●The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the environment and the operating conditions. For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable pictures is reduced. •• In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes. •• When operations such as the flash and zoom are used repeatedly. ●●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please purchase a new battery. 23 SQW0024 Preparations Inserting and removing the battery/the card (optional) ••Make sure that the camera is turned off. 1 2 Slide the release lever to the [OPEN] position and open the card/battery door [OPEN] [LOCK] Release lever Insert the battery and card, making sure that their orientation is correct ••Battery: Insert the battery all the way firmly until a locking sound is heard, and check that the lever is hooked over the battery. ••Card: Insert the card all the way firmly until it clicks. 3 Close the card/battery door and slide the release lever to the [LOCK] position Lever Do not touch the terminal Charged battery (check orientation) Card (check orientation: terminals face monitor) ■■To remove ••To remove battery: Move lever in direction of arrow. ••To remove card: Press the centre of the card. Lever ●●Remove battery from camera after use. ●●Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing. ●●To remove the card or battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the monitor turns off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.) 24 SQW0024 Preparations About the Card The following SD standard-based cards (Panasonic brand recommended) can be used. Type of Card SD Memory Cards Capacity Notes 8 MB – 2 GB •• Can be used with devices compatible with the respective formats. •• Before using SDXC Memory Cards, check that your computer and other devices support this type of card. http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html •• This unit is compatible with UHS-Ι UHS Speed Class 3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards. •• Only the cards listed on the left with the given capacities are supported. SDHC Memory Cards 4 GB – 32 GB SDXC Memory Cards 48 GB, 64 GB ■■About the motion picture recording and speed class According to the [Rec Format] (→187) and [Rec Quality] (→187) of a motion picture, the required card differs. Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class. ••SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous writing. Confirm the SD speed by checking the card label or other card related materials. [Rec Format] [Rec Quality] [AVCHD] All [MP4] FHD/HD/VGA [MP4] 4K Speed class Label example Class 4 or higher UHS Speed Class 3 ••Latest information: http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.) Access to the card The access indication displays red when pictures are being recorded on the card. 50i ●●While the camera is accessing the card (for an operation such as picture writing, reading, deletion, or formatting), do not turn off the camera or remove the battery, card, AC adaptor (optional) or DC coupler (optional). Do not subject the camera to vibrations, impact, or static electricity. The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again. 25 SQW0024 Preparations About the Card ●●If you set the write-protect switch to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, delete or format the data or display it by recording date. These operations become available again when you unlock the switch. ●●It is recommended that you copy important pictures to your computer (as electromagnetic waves, static electricity, or faults may cause data to be damaged). Write-protect switch Formatting the card (initialisation) Format the card before recording a picture with this unit. Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance. 1 Set the menu → [Setup] → [Format] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ●●This requires a sufficiently charged battery, or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). ●●Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting. ●●Always format cards with this camera. Please reformat the card with this camera if it has already been formatted with a computer or another device. ●●If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic. 26 SQW0024 Preparations About the Card Recording capacity guidelines (pictures/recording time) The number of pictures you can take and the recording time vary in proportion to card capacity (and depending on recording conditions and type of card). Recording picture capacity (still pictures) When aspect ratio is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ] [Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB L (12.5M) 1090 2200 32 GB 4420 8820 M (6.5M) 1880 3810 7630 14970 S (3M) 3220 6500 13030 24700 When aspect ratio is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ 64 GB ] [Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB L (12.5M) 340 700 1400 2800 M (6.5M) 400 810 1620 3230 S (3M) 440 890 1780 3530 ●●When the number of recordable pictures exceeds 9,999, “9999+” is displayed. Recording time capacity (motion pictures) ••The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded. ([h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.) When [Rec Format] is [AVCHD] [Rec Quality] 27 8 GB [FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 1h15m00s 2h30m00s 5h00m00s [FHD/17M/50i] 1h00m00s 2h00m00s 4h05m00s 8h15m00s [FHD/24M/25p] 43m00s 1h25m00s 2h55m00s 5h50m00s [FHD/24M/24p] 43m00s 1h25m00s 2h55m00s 5h50m00s SQW0024 Preparations About the Card When [Rec Format] is [MP4] [Rec Quality] [4K/100M/25p] 8 GB 9m00s 16 GB 20m00s 32 GB 64 GB 42m00s 1h20m00s [4K/100M/24p] 9m00s 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m00s [FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 1h15m00s 2h30m00s 5h00m00s [FHD/20M/25p] 49m00s 1h40m00s 3h20m00s 6h40m00s [HD/10M/25p] 1h30m00s 3h10m00s 6h25m00s 12h50m00s [VGA/4M/25p] 3h25m00s 7h00m00s 14h10m00s 28h15m00s ●●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera. ●●[AVCHD] motion pictures: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds. ●●Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB. •• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes 59 seconds. ●●Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]: Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes. (You can continue recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will be recorded and played back in separate files.) ●●The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen. Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures that you can take and the available recording time → [Custom] →[Remaining Disp.] [ ] (Remaining shots): Displays the number of pictures that can be recorded. [ ] (Remaining time): Displays the remaining recording time. Number of recordable pictures 28 Available recording time SQW0024 Preparations Setting the clock The clock is not set when the camera is shipped. 1 Turn the camera on 2 Press [MENU/SET] while the message is displayed 3 Press 4 5 ••If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to step 4. to select the language, and press [MENU/SET] ••The [Please set the clock] message appears. Press [MENU/SET] Press to select the items (year, month, day, hour, minute), and press to set ••To cancel → Press [ : Home time : Destination time ] button. To set the display order or time display format ••Select [Style] and press [MENU/SET] to display the setting screen for display order and time display format. Style Display order Time display format 6 Press [MENU/SET] 7 When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET] 29 ••A confirmation screen is displayed. Press [MENU/SET]. SQW0024 Preparations Setting the clock 8 Press to set your home area and press [MENU/SET] City or area name Current time Difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) ●●If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you order a photo studio to print the picture, or when you stamp the date on the pictures with [Text Stamp]. Changing time settings Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu to change the current time settings. ••Clock settings will be saved for approx. 3 months even after the battery is removed, provided a fully charged battery was installed in the camera for 24 hours beforehand. 1 Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu 2 30 •• For details about how to set the menu (→31) Set the date and time (Perform steps 5 - 6. (→29)) SQW0024 Preparations Setting the menu You can use the menu to set camera and recording functions, operate playback functions, and perform other operations. In particular, the [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power. Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera. ●●When [Menu Resume] (→49) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], the screen displayed last after you selected the menu item will reappear. It is set to [ON] at the time of purchase. ●●When the [Menu Information] (→49) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], descriptions of the menu items and settings will appear on the menu screen. Example: To change the [Quality] setting from [ ] to [ ] in the [Rec] menu In this Operating Instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows: → [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ] 1 31 Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu [Rec] (→303 -) You can perform settings for picture size and the flash. [Motion Picture] (→305) You can select the recording format and picture quality and other settings. [Custom] (→306 -) Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button operations, can be set up according to your preferences. Also, it is possible to register the modified settings. [Setup] (→308) You can perform settings that make usage more convenient, such as the changing the clock settings and beep volume. You can also perform Wi-Fi function-related settings. [Playback] (→309) You can specify picture protection, cropping, print settings, and other settings for pictures you have taken. SQW0024 Preparations Setting the menu 2 Press to select the menu item and press [MENU/SET] Page ••Items can also be selected by turning the control dial. ••You can also switch to the next page by pressing [DISP.] button or rotating the zoom lever. Item 3 Press to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] Selected setting ••Items can also be selected by turning the control dial. Settings 4 Press the [ ] button repeatedly until the recording or playback screen reappears ••During recording, the menu screen can also be exited by pressing the shutter button halfway. 32 SQW0024 Preparations Setting the menu Switching menu type Example: Switching to the [Setup] menu from [Rec] menu 1 2 3 Press Press to select a menu switch icon [ ] •• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial. Press [MENU/SET] •• Select the menu item and perform the setting. Menu type ●●The menu types and items that are displayed vary according to the mode. ●●The setting methods vary depending on the menu item. Setting the menu screen background You can set the background for the menu screen according to your preferences. 1 Set the menu → 2 33 Press [Setup] → [Menu Background] to select the background colour and then press [MENU/SET] •• Exit the menu after it is set. SQW0024 Preparations Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu) You can easily call some of the menu items and set them. ••The menu items and setting items that are displayed differ depending on the recording mode and settings during recording. 1 Press [Q.MENU] button to display the Quick menu 2 Turn the control dial to select the menu item, and press or ••The menu item can also be selected by pressing 50i . 3 Turn the control dial to select the setting 4 Press [Q.MENU] button to close the Quick menu ••The setting can also be selected with . 50i Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items → [Custom] → [Q.MENU] [PRESET]: The default items can be set. [CUSTOM]: The Quick Menu will consist of desired items. (→35) Using the Quick menu on the monitor recording information screen (→62) of [ ] (monitor style) (Press the [DISP.] button repeatedly until the screen appears.) Press the [Q.MENU] button and turn the control dial to select an item, and press [MENU/SET]. Turn the control dial to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] to set. and [MENU/SET]. •• You can also set with 34 SQW0024 Preparations Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu) Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item When [Q.MENU] (→34) in the [Custom] menu is set to [CUSTOM], the Quick Menu can be changed as desired. Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu. 1 Press to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET] 2 3 Press to select the menu item in the top row and press [MENU/SET] Press to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press [MENU/SET] Items that can be setup as Quick Menus •• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item. •• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing and select an item to cancel, and then press [MENU/SET]. •• Items that can be set are as follows: Items that can be displayed in the Quick Menu screen [Rec] menu/Recording functions •• [Photo Style] (→100) •• [Picture Size] (→108) •• [Quality] (→109) •• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) •• [Metering Mode] (→139) •• [i.Dynamic] (→111) •• [i.Resolution] (→111) •• [HDR] (→112) •• [Shutter Type] (→140) •• [Flash Mode] (→180) •• [Flash Adjust.] (→183) •• [i.Zoom] (→172) •• [Digital Zoom] (→173) •• [Stabilizer] (→168) •• [Sensitivity] (→136) •• [White Balance] (→103) •• [AF Mode] (→115) •• [Drive Mode] (→141) [Motion Picture] menu •• [4K PHOTO] (→195) •• [Motion Pic. Set] (→187) 35 •• [Picture Mode] (→198) SQW0024 Preparations Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu) [Custom] menu •• [Silent Mode] (→161) •• [Peaking] (→130) •• [Histogram] (→64) •• [Guide Line] (→65) 4 36 Press [ •• [Zebra Pattern] (→166) •• [Monochrome Live View] (→167) •• [Rec Area] (→192) •• [Zoom lever] (→175) ] button •• It will return to screen of step 1 (→35). Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen. SQW0024 Preparations Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons) You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons. 1 Set the menu → 2 3 [Custom] → [Fn Button Set] Press to select the function button you want to assign a function to and press [MENU/SET] Press to select the function you want to assign and press [MENU/SET] •• For details on the functions that can be assigned, refer to (→38). •• To restore the default function button settings, select [Restore to Default]. 37 SQW0024 Preparations Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons) Assigning a function to a function button Press the function button to use the assigned function. ••You can assign the following functions to the [Fn1], [Fn2], and [Fn3] buttons. •• [Wi-Fi] (→225): [Fn2]* •• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→55): [Fn3]* •• [AF/AE Lock] (→133) •• [AF-ON] (→129, 133) •• [Preview] (→88): [Fn1]* •• [Level Gauge] (→66) •• [Focus Area Set] •• [Cursor Button Lock] •• [Photo Style] (→100) [Rec] menu/Recording functions •• [Picture Size] (→108) •• [Quality] (→109) •• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) •• [Metering Mode] (→139) •• [Highlight Shadow] (→102) •• [i.Dynamic] (→111) •• [i.Resolution] (→111) •• [HDR] (→112) •• [Shutter Type] (→140) •• [Flash Mode] (→180) •• [Flash Adjust.] (→183) •• [i.Zoom] (→172) •• [Digital Zoom] (→173) •• [Stabilizer] (→168) •• [Sensitivity] (→136) •• [White Balance] (→103) •• [AF Mode/MF] (→115) •• [Drive Mode] (→141) •• [Restore to Default] [Motion Picture] menu •• [4K PHOTO] (→195) •• [Motion Pic. Set] (→187) •• [Picture Mode] (→198) [Custom] menu •• [Utilize Custom Set feature] (→60) •• [Silent Mode] (→161) •• [Peaking] (→130) •• [Histogram] (→64) •• [Guide Line] (→65) •• [Zebra Pattern] (→166) •• [Monochrome Live View] (→167) •• [Rec Area] (→192) •• [Zoom lever] (→175) * Function button settings at the time of purchase. ••Certain functions cannot be assigned to some function buttons. ●●The function assigned to the function button may not work in some modes or on some display screens. ●●When [Focus Area Set] is assigned to the function button, you can display the AF area or the MF Assist position setting screen. ●●When the cursor button is locked, operation of the cursor button, [MENU/SET] button, and control dial is disabled. To enable operation, press the function button again. Not available in the following cases: ●●The function assigned to the [Fn1] button will not work in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect], [One Point Color], [Sunshine]) •• When [Multi Exp.] is set ●●The function assigned to the [Fn2] button will not work in the following case: •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When recording 4K motion pictures after setting [4K PHOTO] to [ON] 38 SQW0024 Preparations Changing settings using the control ring The “Control Ring” is an easy and convenient way to adjust several settings, depending on the camera mode selected. You can use the control ring to change the settings of the unit. Items that can be set by the control ring vary depending on recording modes. Following are the pre-assigned settings. Recording mode Setting [Intelligent Auto] Mode Step Zoom (→174) [Program AE] Mode Step Zoom (→174) [Aperture-Priority] Mode Step Zoom (→174) [Shutter-Priority] Mode Shutter speed adjustment* (→84) [Manual Exposure] Mode Shutter speed adjustment* (→86) * You can use the control ring to change the following settings values, which cannot be set using the shutter speed dial. –– Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds (electronic shutter (→140)) –– Slower speed than 1 second (mechanical shutter (→140)) –– Setting in 1/3 EV steps ●●The control ring is assigned to selecting the picture effect (Filter) when you are recording a panorama picture. (→150) ●●When Manual Focus is set, focus adjustment is assigned to the control ring. (→128) ●●The control ring can be used to change to your preferred settings. (→40) 39 SQW0024 Preparations Changing settings using the control ring Changing the settings assigned to the control ring Changes the settings assigned to the control ring. 1 Set the menu → 2 Use [Custom] → [Control Ring] to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] Settings that can be assigned [DEFLT] [Normal] [Zoom] (→170) •• To return to the default setting, select [Normal]. (→39) •• If you do not use the control ring, select [OFF] ([Not Set]). [Step Zoom] (→174) [Sensitivity] (→136) [White Balance] (→103) [Filter Select] (→89) [OFF] [Not Set] ●●The assigned function setting applies to all the Recording Modes. The function assigned to the control ring may not work in some combinations of Recording Mode or settings used for recording (panorama picture recording, Filter setting, etc.) ●●When Manual Focus is set, the control ring is fixed to the function for adjusting the focus. You cannot use the settings assigned using the [Control Ring]. (→128) 40 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu [Clock Set] and [Sleep Mode] are important for clock setting and battery life. Please check these before use. For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Clock Set] Set time, date, and display format. (→30) [World Time] Set the recording date and time with the local time at your destination. ••Set [Home] when you use the camera for the first time after purchasing it. You can set [Destination] after setting [Home]. Settings: [Destination] / [Home] 1 2 Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select area and press [MENU/SET] Current time at selected destination City/area name Difference with home time When [Destination] has been selected When [Home] has been selected ■■To set summer time Press in step 2. (Press again to release the setting) •• When summer time [ ] is set, the current time is advanced by 1 hour. If the setting is cancelled, the time automatically returns to the current time. ■■When you come back from your travel destination Select [Home] in step 1 and press [MENU/SET]. ●●If you cannot find your destination in the area displayed on the screen, set based on difference with home time. 41 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Travel Date] If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the picture was taken will be recorded. ■■[Travel Setup] Settings: [SET] / [OFF] 1 2 3 4 Use to select [Travel Setup] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the departure date and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the return date and press [MENU/SET] ■■To record [Location] Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the location. Select [Location] in step 1 above, and press [MENU/SET] Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET] Enter your location (Entering text (→52)) ●●To print [Location] or the number of days that have passed, either use [Text Stamp] or print using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD. ●●The travel date is calculated from the set departure date and the date set in the camera’s clock. When destination is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based on local destination time. ●●When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording. ●●When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically cancelled. ●●[Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures. ●●[Location] is not recorded when you record motion pictures. [Wi-Fi] Settings: [Wi-Fi Function] / [Wi-Fi Setup] Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. (→227, 272) 42 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Beep] Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds. ■■[Beep Volume] Settings: (High) / (Low) / (Off) Settings: (High) / (Low) / (Off) Settings: / ■■[Shutter Vol.] ■■[Shutter Tone] / ●●When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [Shutter Vol.] are set to “Off”. [Live View Mode] Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View screen) when recording pictures. Settings [30fps] [60fps] Picture quality has higher priority over display speed and pictures are displayed at 30 fps. For example, use when you want to record a comparatively slow-moving subject while confirming the focusing. Minimises power consumption and the operating time is extended. Display speed has higher priority over picture quality and pictures are displayed at 60 fps. The displayed pictures will appear slightly grainy. For example, use when you want to record a fast-moving subject. ●●The [Live View Mode] setting does not affect the recorded picture. ●●The display speed may slow down in dark locations. ●●When the viewfinder is used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to [60fps]. ●●When the AC adaptor (optional) is used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to [60fps]. 43 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder] Adjust brightness and colour of the monitor or viewfinder. It is suggested to use the default settings. These are intended to provide a preview of the actual picture, as accurately as possible. Settings Adjusts the brightness. [Brightness] Adjusts the contrast. [Contrast] Adjusts the vividness of colours. [Saturation] Adjusts red hues. [Red Tint] Adjusts blue hues. [Blue Tint] 1 Press 2 Press [MENU/SET] to select the setting item and press •• You can also make adjustments with the control dial. to make adjustments ●●It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use. ●●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not be affected. 44 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Monitor Luminance] Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level. Settings The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera. The brightness is increased. The brightness is standard. The brightness is decreased. ●●Because the picture shown on the monitor screen emphasises brightness, some subjects may look different than their actual appearance, but this will not affect the recorded picture. ] returns to ordinary brightness if there is no operation for 30 seconds when recording. (Press any button to make the screen brighter again.) ●●Setting [ ] or [ ] reduces the operating time. ●●Cannot select [ ] during playback. ●●When the AC adaptor (optional) is used, the initial setting is [ ]. ●●[ 45 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Sleep Mode] The camera automatically turns off if no operation is performed for a preset period of time. ••To restore → Press the shutter button halfway, or turn on the power again. Settings: [10MIN.] / [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF] Not available in the following cases: •• During motion picture recording/playback •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When connected to computer/printer •• During Slide Shows •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) •• When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) 46 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [USB Mode] Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with USB connection cable (supplied). Settings [Select on connection] [PictBridge(PTP)] Select communication method each time you connect to a computer or PictBridge-compatible printer. Select when connecting to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Select when connecting to a computer. [PC] [TV Connection] Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to a TV or other device. ■■[Video Out] This setting performs when the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is connected. Settings [NTSC] Video output is set to NTSC system. [PAL] Video output is set to PAL system. ■■[TV Aspect] This setting performs when an AV cable (optional) is connected. Settings: [16:9] / [4:3] 47 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [TV Connection] (continued) ■■[HDMI Mode] Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible highdefinition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI micro cable. Settings [AUTO] Automatically sets the output resolution based on information from a connected TV. [4K] Outputs pictures with a resolution of 3840×2160 pixels using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (2,160 lines). [1080p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (1,080 lines). [1080i] Outputs pictures using an interlace scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (1,080 lines). [720p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (720 lines). [576p]*1/[480p]*2 Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (576*1/480*2 lines). *1 When [Video Out] is set to [PAL] *2 When [Video Out] is set to [NTSC] ●●This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected. ●●If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.) 48 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [TV Connection] (continued) ■■[VIERA Link] Enable automatic linking with other VIERA Link-compatible devices, and operability with a VIERA remote control when connecting via an HDMI micro cable. (→278) Settings [ON] Operations may be performed via the remote control of the VIERA Link-compatible device. •• Not all operations will be available. •• Operability of the camera’s own buttons will be limited. [OFF] Operations must be performed via the camera’s own buttons. ●●This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected. [Menu Resume] Save the last operated menu position. Settings: [ON] / [OFF] [Menu Background] Set the background colour for the menu screen. (→33) [Menu Information] Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen. Settings: [ON] / [OFF] [Language] Change display language. Set the language displayed on the screen. 49 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Version Disp.] Check the firmware version of the camera or supplied flash (when the flash is attached). ●●When you press [MENU/SET] while the version is displayed, software information for this unit, such as the licence, is displayed. [Self Timer Auto Off] The self-timer is cancelled if the unit is turned off. Settings: [ON] / [OFF] [No.Reset] Reset picture file numbers. (The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001.) ••To reset folder number to 100: First, format the card, and reset the file numbers using [No.Reset]. Then, select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen. ●●A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned. Numbers cannot be reset once folder number reaches 999. In this case, save all necessary pictures to your computer, and format the card (→26). [Reset] Reset to the default settings. ■■[Reset Rec. settings?] ■■[Reset setup/custom settings?] ●●Information registered in [Face Recog.] is reset if recording settings are reset. ●●When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset: •• The [Profile Setup] setting •• The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort], [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu ●●Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset. 50 SQW0024 Preparations Using the [Setup] menu For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→31) [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] Returns [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings. ●●If you want to dispose or give away your camera, always reset it to prevent your personal information from being mistakenly used. ●●When you request your camera to be fixed, backup your personal information and always reset it as well. [Format] Format (initialise) a memory card. (→26) 51 SQW0024 Preparations Entering Text Use the cursor button to enter names with the Face Recognition function and in [Profile Setup] (babies and pets), or to register locations in [Travel Date] etc. ••Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered. ••Example of operation for displaying a screen: → [Rec] → [Profile Setup] → [SET] → [Baby1] → [Name] → [SET] 1 2 Use to select characters Press [MENU/SET] several times until the desired character is displayed Cursor position Text is inserted at the cursor position. ••[ ]: Enter a blank. ■■To change the character type ••Press [DISP.] button ••Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET] ■■To continue entering characters ••Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET] ••Move the zoom lever toward T side ••Turn the control dial to the right ■■Editing text Use to select [ ] [ ] and press [MENU/SET]. Then, move the cursor to the text to edit ••You can also use the zoom lever or control dial to reposition the cursor. Use to select [Delete] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the correct text, and then press [MENU/SET] 3 When you are finished entering text, use [Set] and press [MENU/SET] to select ●●A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]). ●●A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] (maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]). 52 SQW0024 Basics Holding the camera ••To avoid camera shake, hold it with both hands keeping your arms close to your body while standing with your feet slightly apart. ••Do not touch the lens. ••Do not block the microphone when recording motion pictures. ••Do not block the AF Assist Lamp, or the flash when you take a picture using it. Do not look at it from close range. ••Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed. AF Assist Lamp Microphone Shoulder strap ••We recommend using the supplied shoulder strap to avoid dropping the camera. About the direction detect function Still pictures recorded with the camera held vertically can be automatically displayed in portrait orientation during playback. (Only when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].) ••The direction detect function may not operate correctly if pictures are taken with the camera pointing up or down. ••Motion pictures cannot be displayed in portrait orientation. 53 SQW0024 Basics Recording pictures using the viewfinder When you use the viewfinder, you can check the view of the subject even if you are in a bright area. Switching between the monitor and viewfinder You can operate the [LVF]/[Fn3] button in two ways, using it either as the [LVF] button or as a function button [Fn3]. You can use this button as the [LVF] button at the time of purchase. ••For details on the function button, refer to (→37). [LVF] button Eye Sensor 1 Press [LVF] button •• The display is switched as shown below. Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor Viewfinder display Monitor display Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor For automatic switching between the viewfinder and monitor, the eye sensor automatically switches the display to viewfinder when your eye or an object moves close to the viewfinder. ••The eye sensor may not work correctly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you hold the camera, or whether the eyepiece and nearby area are exposed to strong light. In this case, press the [LVF] button to switch the display. ••During motion picture playback or Slide Show, the eye sensor will not automatically switch the display to the viewfinder. ••The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be set using [Eye Sensor] in the [Custom] menu. (→55) 54 SQW0024 Basics Recording pictures using the viewfinder Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor → [Custom] → [Eye Sensor] [Sensitivity] Use this setting to set the sensitivity of the eye sensor. [HIGH] / [LOW] [LVF/Monitor Switch] Use this setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor. [LVF/MON AUTO] (Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor ) / [LVF] (Viewfinder display) / [MON] (Monitor display) •• After the display is switched using the [LVF] button, the setting of [LVF/ Monitor Switch] will also change. About diopter adjustment Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that you can see the viewfinder clearly. Turn the diopter adjustment dial to adjust until you are able to clearly see the characters displayed in the viewfinder. Diopter adjustment dial About Eye Sensor AF If the eye sensor is activated when [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the camera automatically adjusts the focus. ••Eye Sensor AF adjusts focus only once when you look into the viewfinder. It does not continuously adjust the focus while you are looking into the viewfinder. ●●Even when [Eye Sensor AF] is set and the camera automatically adjusts the focus, a beep will not sound. Not available in the following case: ●●[Eye Sensor AF] may not work when the lighting is low. 55 SQW0024 Basics Taking pictures ••Press the [ 1 2 ] button ( ) to set the drive mode to [ ] ([Single]). Select the recording mode (→59) Adjust focus according to subject Focus display (When focus is aligned: illuminated When focus is not aligned: flashing) Press halfway (press lightly to focus) 3 ••The aperture value and shutter speed are displayed. (If the aperture value and shutter speed are shown in red and flashing, you do not have the appropriate exposure, unless you are using the flash.) ••When you take a picture in a dark location, [ ] is displayed for the focus display and it may take longer Aperture value to adjust focus than usual. Shutter speed ••When [AFS/AFF/AFC] in the [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC] AF area (When focus is aligned: –– A beep sounds only the first time the camera is green) focused while you press the shutter button halfway. –– When Auto Focus mode is set to Custom Multi, such as [ ] and [ ], the AF area will be momentarily displayed only for the first time when the camera is focused while you press the shutter button halfway. Take a picture Press fully (press the button all the way to record) ●●The focus display flashes and beep sounds when focus is not aligned. Use the focus range displayed in red as a reference. Even if the focus display is lit, the camera may be unable to bring the subject into focus if it is out of range. ●●The AF area display may be larger depending on recording conditions such as dark locations or zoom ratio. ●●The quality of the picture display may be lower during Auto Focus. Focus display Focus range 56 SQW0024 Basics Taking pictures ●●Subjects/environments which may make focusing difficult: ••Fast-moving or extremely bright objects, or objects with no colour contrast. ••Taking pictures through glass or near objects emitting light. ••In the dark, or with significant jitter. ••When too close to object or when taking pictures of both distant and close objects together in the same picture. Displaying still pictures immediately after taking them → [Custom] → [Auto Review] [Duration Time] Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures. [HOLD]: Displaying pictures until you press the shutter button halfway [5SEC] / [4SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC] / [OFF] [Playback Operation Priority] [ON]: During [Auto Review], you can switch the playback screen or delete pictures. [OFF]: During [Auto Review], you can perform the same button operations as when you take a picture. ••When [Duration Time] is set to [HOLD], [Playback Operation Priority] is fixed to [ON]. 57 SQW0024 Basics Recording motion pictures You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard, as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in MP4. (→194) Audio is recorded in stereo. 1 Press the motion picture button to start recording ••Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it. ••You can record motion pictures fitting each Recording Mode (→59). ••While you are recording motion pictures, the recording status indicator (red) will flash. ••If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button. ••Do not block the microphones when recording motion pictures. ••You can also use zoom while recording motion pictures. –– The operating sounds of the zoom lever or control ring may be recorded in some cases. ••Still pictures can be taken during motion picture recording. (→198) 2 Recording state indicator Elapsed recording time Remaining recording time (approx.) Press the motion picture button again to end recording ●●For details, read “Recording motion pictures”. (→187) 58 SQW0024 Basics Select the recording mode To select the recording mode using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial 1 Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial •• Slowly turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial until they click to properly align the position. You can set the aperture ring to [A] (AUTO) or to values between [1.7] and [16]. To select [Intelligent Auto] Mode 1 Press [iA] button •• [Intelligent Auto] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes to [ ]. When you press the [iA] button again, the recording mode is switched to one that enables settings to be made using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial. •• When [Intelligent Auto] Mode is selected, the recording mode that was set using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial is cancelled. [Intelligent Auto] Mode (→75) Take pictures with automatic settings. [Program AE] Mode (→81) Record pictures with the aperture value and shutter speed settings automatically adjusted. [Aperture-Priority] Mode (→83) Determine aperture, then record pictures. [Shutter-Priority] Mode (→84) Determine shutter speed, then record pictures. [Manual Exposure] Mode (→86) Determine the aperture value and shutter speed respectively, and then record pictures. 59 SQW0024 Basics Select the recording mode Registering a combination of settings to be used during recording (Custom Set) You can register up to three combinations of your preferred menu settings. Selecting [Utilize Custom Set feature] from the [Custom] menu enables you to switch quickly to the settings you selected for the custom settings. ■■Registering the custom set Set your preferred menu settings such as [Rec] menu, [Motion Picture] menu, and [Custom] menu Set the menu → [Custom] → [Cust.Set Mem.] Use to select custom set (C1-C3) for registration and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ●●The following menu items are not registered as custom settings. [Rec] menu [Setup] menu [Playback] menu •• Data registered with [Face •• All menus •• [Rotate Disp.] Recog.] •• [Picture Sort] •• The [Profile Setup] setting •• [Delete Confirmation] ■■Using the custom set Set the menu → [Custom] → [Utilize Custom Set feature] Use to select custom set Press [MENU/SET] 50i •• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the custom set. Using the function button to call up the custom settings Setting the function button to [Utilize Custom Set feature] allows you to switch quickly to your preferred settings by pressing the function button. Assign [Utilize Custom Set feature] to your preferred function button using [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] menu. (→37) Press the function button to which [Utilize Custom Set feature] is assigned. Use to select custom set and press [MENU/SET] 60 SQW0024 Basics Select the recording mode When changing the menu settings Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily while any one of the custom settings is selected, the currently registered settings will remain unchanged. To change the currently registered settings, overwrite the registered data using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Custom] menu. Not available in the following case: •• In the [Intelligent Auto] Mode 61 SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the recording screen You can also turn off the recording information (such as icons for various settings) and the level gauge (→66). 1 Press [DISP.] button to switch the display ••You can use [Monitor Disp. Style] and [LVF Disp.Style] in the [Custom] menu to select either [ ] (Monitor style display layout) or [ ] (Live View Finder style display layout) for the display screen of the monitor and viewfinder. ■■[ ] Monitor style display layout ••The display is switched as shown below. (Example of monitor style display) With information*1 Without information With information*1 50i Without information + level gauge + level gauge 50i Turned off Monitor recording information screen*2 *1 When [Histogram] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], a histogram is displayed. (→64) When [Expo.Meter] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the exposure meter is displayed. (→81) *2 This screen is displayed only when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON]. (→65) While you are checking the recording information on the monitor, you can use the viewfinder to record pictures. 62 SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the recording screen ■■[ ] Live View Finder style display layout ••The display is switched as shown below. (Example of viewfinder style display) With information (Detailed information)* With information With information (Detailed information)* + level gauge 50i With information + level gauge 50i * When [Histogram] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], a histogram is displayed. (→64) When [Expo.Meter] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the exposure meter is displayed. (→81) ●●If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button. Switching the monitor display method [ [ → [Custom] → [Monitor Disp. Style] ]: Live View Finder style display layout ]: Monitor style display layout Switching the viewfinder display method [ [ 63 → [Custom] → [LVF Disp.Style] ]: Live View Finder style display layout ]: Monitor style display layout SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the recording screen Enabling/disabling the histogram display → Use [Custom] → [Histogram] → [ON] / [OFF] to set the position. Displays distribution of brightness in picture – e.g. if the graph peaks at the right, this means there are several bright areas in the picture. A peak in the centre represents correct brightness (correct exposure). This can be used as a reference for exposure correction, etc. (Example) Dark ← OK → Bright ●●When the histogram is not the same as that of the recorded picture under the following conditions, histogram will be displayed in orange: •• When manual exposure assist indicates settings other than 0 EV in [Manual Exposure] Mode or during Exposure Compensation. •• When the flash fires. •• When the correct exposure is not achieved or when the brightness of the screen cannot be displayed accurately in a dark location. ●●The histogram displayed during recording is only a reference. ●●The histogram is different from those displayed using the image editing software of a computer. 64 SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the recording screen Enabling/disabling the guideline display → [Custom] → [Guide Line] → [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF] ••The guideline is not displayed during panorama picture recording. When you select [ ], you can use to set the position. Turning on/off the recording information screen of the monitor → 65 [Custom] → [Monitor Info. Disp.] → [ON] / [OFF] SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the recording screen Using the level gauge If you want to make sure that the camera is not slanted or tilted, for example, when you take a picture of a landscape, use the level gauge indication as a reference. 1 Press [DISP.] button to switch the display 2 Press the button to switch the display. Press the button until the level gauge is displayed. Correct camera angle ■■Using the level gauge The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the camera so that it matches the white line. Tilting up or down Tilting left or right •• In this case, it is facing upward. •• In this case, the right side has dropped. ••When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green. ••When pictures are taken in portrait orientation, the level gauge is automatically switched to one for portrait orientation. ●●Even when angle is more or less corrected, there may be an error of about ±1 degree. ●●When [Level Gauge] is assigned to a function button, you can turn the level gauge on and off every time you press the function button. Not available in the following cases: ●●When the camera is being moved, the level gauge may not be displayed correctly. ●●The level gauge may not be displayed correctly or the direction detect function (→53) may not operate correctly if the pictures are taken with the camera pointing sharply up or down. 66 SQW0024 Basics Viewing your pictures 1 Press the Playback button 2 Press or turn the control dial to select the picture to be displayed ••When you press and hold , the pictures are displayed one after another. ••The playback speed of pictures varies depending on the playback conditions. ■■Ending Playback Press the Playback button again or press the Motion picture button. The Playback can also be ended by pressing the shutter button halfway. ●●When the camera is switched to the playback screen, the lens barrel is retracted after approx. 15 seconds. Not available in the following cases: ●●This camera is compliant with the unified DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard formulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA), and with Exif (Exchangeable image file format). Files that are not DCF-compliant cannot be played back. ●●It may not be possible to properly play back pictures taken using other cameras on this unit or it may not be possible to use the functions of this unit for those pictures. Sending pictures to the WEB services If you press while a single picture is being displayed, you can send the picture to the WEB service quickly. (→254) 67 SQW0024 Basics Viewing your pictures Zooming in and viewing “Playback Zoom” 1 Move the zoom lever toward T side •• Each time you move the zoom lever toward the T side, the magnification increases through four levels: 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x. (The picture quality displayed becomes successively lower.) •• To reduce zoom → Move the zoom lever toward W side. . •• Move zoom position → Press Current zoom position ●●Playback zoom cannot be used during motion picture playback, automatic scrolling playback of panorama pictures or continuous playback. Viewing a list of pictures “Multi Playback” 1 Move the zoom lever toward W side •• Move the zoom lever toward the W side and you can switch the display methods in the following order: 1-picture screen (fullscreen) → 12-picture screen → 30-picture screen → Calendar screen. (Move the lever to the T side to return.) •• When you select a picture using the cursor button and press [MENU/SET] on the 12-picture or 30-picture screen, the selected picture is displayed on the 1-picture screen (full-screen). •• Pictures can also be selected with the control dial. ●●Pictures displayed with [!] cannot be played back. 68 SQW0024 Basics Viewing your pictures Viewing pictures by their recording date “Calendar Playback” 1 Move the zoom lever toward the W side to display the calendar screen 2 Use to select recording date and press [MENU/SET] Selected date •• Pictures are displayed in a 12-picture screen. •• You can also select the date with the control dial. ●●You can display the calendar between January 2000 to December 2099. ●●Only months when pictures were taken are shown on the calendar screen. Pictures taken without clock settings are displayed with the date 1st January, 2014. ●●Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed in the calendar screen using the appropriate date for the destination’s time zone. 69 SQW0024 Basics Viewing your pictures Viewing motion pictures This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats. 1 Select a picture with the motion picture icon ([ ]) in playback mode, and press to start playback •• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on the screen. •• Some information will not be displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]. Motion picture recording time Example: 29 minutes and 30 seconds: [29m30s] Operations during motion picture playback : Pause/play : Stop : Fast rewind (2 steps*1)/Single-frame rewind*2 (while paused) : Fast forward (2 steps*1)/Single-frame forward (while paused) Control dial (counterclockwise): Volume down Control dial (clockwise): Volume up [MENU/SET]: Capturing still pictures from motion pictures (while paused) (→203) *1 The fast forward or rewind speed increases if you press again. *2 Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] are rewound frame by frame approximately every 0.5 seconds. ••If is pressed during fast forward or rewind, it will return to normal playback speed. ●●Motion pictures can be viewed on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD. ●●Motion pictures that were recorded by setting the picture effect (Filter) to [Miniature Effect] are played back at approximately 8x speed. 70 SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the playback screen You can disable the display of picture information (file number, etc.) and recording information (settings used for recording, etc.) when a picture is played back. 1 Press [DISP.] button to switch the display ••The display is switched as shown below. With information*1 Detailed information display*2 Histogram display*2 Without information*1,*2,*3 R G B 10:00 1.DEC.2014 100-0001 Y 1/98 100-0001 Without information *1 If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button. *2 During Playback Zoom, Motion Picture Playback, Automatic Scrolling Playback of panorama pictures, continuous playback or Slide Show: You can only turn the display on or off. *3 This screen is displayed only when [Highlight] (→72) in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON]. ●●A histogram of each colour, including R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance), is separately displayed during playback. ●●During Multi Playback or calendar screen: Display cannot be changed. 71 SQW0024 Basics Switching the display information on the playback screen Enabling/disabling the overexposed area display → [Custom] → [Highlight] → [ON] / [OFF] You can set overexposed areas (areas that are too bright and where there are no shades of grey) to flash on the screen when the [Auto Review] function is activated or during playback. This does not affect recorded pictures. [ON] [OFF] ••To reduce overexposed areas, record a picture by setting negative exposure compensation (→135) using the histogram display (→64) and so on as a reference. (The right edge of the histogram shows the overexposed portion.) ••This feature is disabled during Multi Playback, Calendar Playback or Playback Zoom. 72 SQW0024 Basics Deleting pictures Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Pictures will not be deleted in the following cases: ••Protected pictures. ••Card switch is in “LOCK” position. ••Pictures that are not based on the DCF standard. (→67) ●●Do not turn off the camera while deleting. ●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). [Delete Single] 1 Press [ 2 Use ] button to delete displayed picture to select [Delete Single] and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. Delete Single Delete Multi Delete All ●●You can set either [Yes] or [No] as the default setting on the deletion confirmation screen when you perform [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu. [No] is selected at the time of purchase. (→223) 73 SQW0024 Basics Deleting pictures To delete multiple (up to 100)/To delete all pictures A picture group (→201) is handled as 1 picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture group are deleted.) 1 Press [ ] button while viewing a picture 2 Use to select [Delete Multi]/[Delete All] and press [MENU/SET] Delete Single •• Items can also be selected by turning the control dial. •• When [Delete All] is selected → A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. •• You can select [All Delete Except Favorite] in [Delete All] if there are pictures that have been set as [Favorite] (→219). 3 (When [Delete Multi] is selected) Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] Delete Multi Delete All Picture selected •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. •• Pictures can also be selected with the control dial. OK 4 74 (When [Delete Multi] is selected) Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. •• May take time depending on number of pictures deleted. SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode Recording mode: This mode is recommended for those who want to point and shoot as the camera optimises settings to match the subject and recording environment. The camera optimises the settings and the following functions are activated automatically. ••Automatic Scene Detection / Backlight Compensation / [Face/Eye Detection] / Auto White Balance / Intelligent ISO sensitivity control / [Red-Eye Removal] / [i.Zoom] / [i.Resolution] / [Stabilizer] / [i.Dynamic] / [Long Shtr NR] / [Quick AF] / [AF Assist Lamp] 1 Press [iA] button 2 Point the camera at the subject The camera switches to [Intelligent Auto] Mode. ••When you press the [iA] button again, the recording mode is switched to one that is set using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial. ••When the camera identifies the optimal scene, the icon for each scene turns blue for 2 seconds and then changes to the normal red indication. ••When you press and press the shutter button halfway, AF Tracking is activated. For details (→117). 50i Changing the operation method of the [iA] button → [Custom] → [iA Button Switch] [Single Press]: When you press the [iA] button, the camera switches to [Intelligent Auto] Mode. [Press and hold]: If you press and hold the [iA] button, the camera switches to [Intelligent Auto] Mode. 75 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode Automatic Scene Detection When taking pictures [i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]*1 [i-Night Scenery] [i-Handheld Night Shot]*2 [i-Food] [i-Baby]*3 [i-Sunset] When scene does not correspond to any of the above * the flash (supplied/optional) is used. *2 When [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON]. (→78) 3 * When children (that are registered in the camera with Face Recognition) under 3 years old are 1 When recognised. When recording motion pictures [i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Low Light] [i-Macro] When scene does not correspond to any of the above ••In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the camera adjusts the focus on the eye that is closest to this unit and matches the exposure with the face. In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the eye to be focused on cannot be changed. ([Face/Eye Detection]) ••When the camera identifies [ ] as the optimal scene and if the camera determines that jitter is reduced by the use of a tripod or by other means, a shutter speed that is slower than usual is selected. After pressing the shutter button, do not move the camera while recording. ••Automatic Scene Detection does not function until the focus is locked on a subject during AF Tracking. ••When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON] and if the camera recognises a face similar to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the [ ], [ ], and [ ] icons. ●●Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be determined for the same subject. About Backlight Compensation Backlight compensation is automatically activated in [Intelligent Auto] Mode. Backlight is a condition where a light shines from behind a subject. When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture. 76 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode Using the flash (supplied/optional) 1 2 3 4 Turn off the camera Remove the hot shoe cover Attach the flash Turn on the camera and the flash For details (→176, 291). ■■Flash When the [ON/OFF] switch for the flash (supplied/optional) is set to [OFF], the flash is set to [ ] (Forced Flash Off). When the [ON/OFF] switch is set to [ON], the flash is set to [ ] (AUTO). When the flash is turned on, the camera automatically sets [ ], [ ] (Auto/Red-Eye Reduction), [ ], or [ ] based on the type of subject and brightness. ●●When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the [Red-Eye Removal] function is activated to automatically detect red-eye and correct the picture data. ●●When [ ] or [ ] is selected, the shutter speed is reduced. Available menus You can set only the following menus. Menu Item [Rec] [Picture Size] / [Quality] / [AFS/AFF/AFC] / [Burst Rate] / [Self Timer] / [iHandheld Night Shot] / [iHDR] / [Time Lapse Shot] / [Stop Motion Animation] / [Face Recog.] [Motion Picture] [Rec Format] / [Rec Quality] / [AFS/AFF/AFC] [Custom] [Silent Mode] / [Guide Line] / [Remaining Disp.] [Setup] All menu items can be set. (→41) 77 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode Taking pictures using a handheld camera ([iHandheld Night Shot]) If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld, [iHandheld Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less noise without using a tripod by combining a burst of pictures. → [Rec] → [iHandheld Night Shot] → [ON] / [OFF] ●●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly. ●●A message indicating that multiple pictures are to be recorded appears on the screen. After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation. ] will not be identified. ●●When the camera is fixed in place on a tripod or by other means, [ ●●The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting. Not available in the following cases: ●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded. ●●[iHandheld Night Shot] cannot be used in the following cases: •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) 78 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures with automatic settings [Intelligent Auto] Mode Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]) When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject, [iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to create a single still picture rich in gradation. [iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the screen. → [Rec] → [iHDR] → [ON] / [OFF] ●●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly. ●●A message indicating that multiple pictures are to be recorded appears on the screen. After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation. ●●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few moments before you can record another picture. ●●In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was moving. Not available in the following cases: ●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded. ●●[iHDR] cannot be used in the following cases: •• When the flash is used •• When using [Burst] •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) 79 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Recording mode: You can set the exposure using the aperture ring and shutter speed dial settings. Using the [Rec] menu to change settings and set up your own recording environment. You can also record pictures by applying picture effects. (→89) 1 Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial to set your preferred recording mode. Align with the indicator Set the aperture ring where it clicks. Recording mode [Program AE] Mode (→81) [Aperture-Priority] Mode (→83) [Shutter-Priority] Mode (→84) [Manual Exposure] Mode (→86) Aperture ring Shutter speed dial [A] (AUTO) [A] (AUTO) Your preferred settings*1 [A] (AUTO) [A] (AUTO) Your preferred settings*2 Your preferred settings*1 Your preferred settings*2 ••In [Aperture-Priority] Mode, [Shutter-Priority] Mode, and [Manual Exposure] Mode, the effect of the aperture value and shutter speed you have set is not applied to the recording screen. To check the effect on the recording screen, use [Preview] Mode. (→88) The brightness of the screen may vary from the actual pictures recorded. Check the brightness of pictures using the playback screen. A faster shutter speed than the set shutter speed may be used when you record a motion picture. *1 You can set the aperture values between F1.7 and F16. You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom position. *2 You can set the shutter speed between 1 second and 1/4000 seconds. Turn the control ring or control dial to set the shutter speed in the following cases. •• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second •• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps 80 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value and shutter speed ([Program AE] Mode) Take pictures using automatic aperture values and shutter speed settings in accordance with the brightness of a subject. 1 Turn the aperture ring to select [A] (AUTO) 2 Turn the shutter speed dial to select [A] (AUTO) 3 Press the shutter button halfway 4 While the numeric values are displayed in yellow (approximately 10 seconds), turn the control dial to change the values using Programme Shift (→82) [Program AE] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes to [P]. •• If the aperture value and shutter speed flash red, you do not have the correct exposure. 0 250 125 2.0 60 2.8 30 4.0 15 5.6 Programme Shift indication •• To cancel Programme Shift, either turn off the camera or turn the control dial until the Programme Shift indication turns off. •• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the compensation value. (→135) Enabling/disabling the exposure meter display → [Custom] → [Expo.Meter] → [ON] / [OFF] ●●When you set this function to [ON], an exposure meter is displayed during Programme Shift, aperture setting, and shutter speed operation. ●●Proper exposure is not possible in the range indicated in red. ●●If the exposure meter is not displayed, press the [DISP.] button to switch the display of the monitor. (→62) ●●The exposure meter will turn off if no operation is performed for approximately 4 seconds. 81 Exposure meter 0 250 125 2.0 60 2.8 30 4.0 15 5.6 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed About Programme Shift The function for maintaining the same exposure (brightness) while changing the shutter speed and aperture value combination is called “Programme Shift”. You can use “Programme Shift” to take pictures by adjusting the shutter speed and aperture value even in [Program AE] Mode. <Example of Programme Shift> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (EV) (Aperture value) 1.4 17 2.0 18 2.8 19 4.0 20 5.6 21 8.0 22 11 23 16 24 22 25 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/250 1/1000 1/4000 1/16000 (Shutter speed) 1/125 1/500 1/2000 1/8000 Programme Shift amount Programme Shift diagram Programme Shift limit ●●EV is an abbreviation of “Exposure Value”, a unit indicating the amount of exposure. The EV changes with the aperture value or the shutter speed. Not available in the following cases: ●●Programme Shift cannot be used in the following cases: •• During motion picture recording ] •• When [Sensitivity] is set to [ 82 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Taking pictures by setting the aperture value ([Aperture-Priority] Mode) When the aperture value is increased, the range of depth in focus expands, and the picture shows up clearly from the position of the camera to the background. When the aperture value is reduced, the range of depth in focus shrinks, and the background can get blurry. 1 Turn the shutter speed dial to select [A] (AUTO) 2 Turn the aperture ring to select the aperture value [Aperture-Priority] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes to [A]. •• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the compensation value. (→135) Aperture values that can be set* F1.7 - F16 Shutter speed set (seconds) 60 - 1/4000 (When the mechanical shutter is used) 1 - 1/16000 (When the electronic shutter is used) * You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom 5 60 8.0 30 11 15 8 4 16 position. Exposure meter Aperture value ●●When you turn the aperture ring, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the numeric values of the aperture are shown in red. ●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red. 83 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed ([Shutter-Priority] Mode) When you increase the shutter speed, you can reduce jitter when recording a subject. When you decrease the shutter speed, the subject’s movement is shown. 1 Turn the aperture ring to select [A] (AUTO) 2 Turn the shutter speed dial to select the shutter speed [Shutter-Priority] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes to [S]. •• To correct the exposure, use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the compensation value. (→135) Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds) 60 - 1/4000 (When the mechanical shutter is used) 1 - 1/16000 (When the electronic shutter is used) Aperture value set F1.7 - F16 8 1 15 8.0 5.6 30 4.0 60 2.8 125 2.0 Exposure meter Shutter speed ■■Setting the shutter speed to values not provided on the shutter speed dial Turn the control ring or control dial to set the following shutter speeds. Check the shutter speed on the screen. For details on setting the shutter method, refer to (→140). •• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second Turn the shutter speed dial to select [4000-] or [1+] Turn the control ring or control dial to select the shutter speed •• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps You can set the shutter speed from the setting value of the shutter speed dial in the range of ± 2/3 steps. Example: To set the shutter speed to 1/400 seconds Turn the shutter speed dial to select [500] Turn the control ring or control dial to select [400] 84 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed ●●When you turn the shutter speed dial, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure is not achieved, the numeric value of the shutter speed is shown in red. ●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red. ●●If you switch the recording mode to [Shutter-Priority] Mode when [Sensitivity] is set to [ [Sensitivity] will change to [AUTO]. ●●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow. 85 ], SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed ([Manual Exposure] Mode) Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed. The Manual Exposure Assist appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate the exposure. 1 Turn the aperture ring to select the aperture value 2 Turn the shutter speed dial to select the shutter speed [Manual Exposure] Mode is set and the recording mode icon changes to [M]. Shutter speeds that can be set*2 (seconds) Aperture values that can be set*1 F1.7 - F16 T (Time), 60 - 1/4000 (When the mechanical shutter is used) 1 - 1/16000 (When the electronic shutter is used) Exposure meter *1 You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom position. 60 *2 You may not be able to select some shutter speeds depending on the aperture value. 125 250 500 1000 2.0 2.8 4.0 5.6 Manual Exposure Assist Shutter speed Aperture value ■■Setting the shutter speed to values not provided on the shutter speed dial Turn the control ring or control dial to set the following shutter speeds. For the setting procedures, refer to (→84). •• Higher speed than 1/4000 seconds or slower shutter speed than 1 second •• Shutter speed setting in 1/3 EV steps ●●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red. ●●If you switch the recording mode to [Manual Exposure] Mode when [Sensitivity] is set to [ [Sensitivity] will change to [AUTO]. ●●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow. 86 ], SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Manual exposure assist (estimate) Shows pictures with standard brightness (appropriate exposure). Shows brighter pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a faster shutter speed or increase aperture value. Shows darker pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a slower shutter speed or reduce aperture value. About T (time) When you set the shutter speed to T (time) and fully press the shutter button, the shutter opens. (Approximately up to 120 seconds) When you press the shutter button again, the shutter closes. Use this function when you want to keep the shutter open for an extended period, for example, to record pictures of fireworks or night scenes. ••When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), make sure to use a fully charged battery (→20). ••Manual exposure assist is not displayed. ••If you set the shutter speed to T (time) when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO], [Sensitivity] will change to [200]. ••You cannot use this function when the electronic shutter is used. ••You can use this function only in [Manual Exposure] Mode. ●●When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), we recommend using remote recording with a tripod or smartphone as a remote shutter release (→228, 234), in order to prevent jitter. ●●When you take still pictures with the shutter speed set to T (time), the pictures may have higher noise levels. If you want to suppress noise, we recommend taking pictures by setting [Long Shtr NR] to [ON] in the [Rec] menu. (→113) Enabling/disabling the preview of the selected aperture value and shutter speed effects on the recording screen → [Custom] → [Constant Preview] (M Mode) → [ON] / [OFF] ●●This function is disabled when the flash is used. ●●You can use this function only in [Manual Exposure] Mode. 87 SQW0024 Recording mode Taking pictures after setting the aperture value and shutter speed Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed ([Preview] Mode) Recording mode: You can use [Preview] Mode to check the effects of the selected aperture value and shutter speed. ••Checking the effect of the selected aperture value: This enables you to check the depth of field (focus range) by physically narrowing the lens aperture blades to the aperture value used for the actual recording. ••Checking the effect of the selected shutter speed: This allows you to check motion in a scene by displaying the screen at the shutter speed used for the actual recording. When the shutter speed is increased, the screen is displayed like a frame dropping. Use this function to check the effect when you want to capture an image in a scene by stopping the motion, for example, when you take a picture of water flowing. 1 Assign [Preview] to the function button (→37) 2 •• The following step is an example of assigning [Preview] to the [Fn1] button. Press the [Fn1] button to switch the confirmation screen •• Every time you press the [Fn1] button, the screen switches. Normal recording screen Effect of aperture value Shtr Speed Effect On Fn1 Effect of shutter speed Shtr Speed Effect Off Fn1 Depth of field characteristic Recording conditions Aperture value Small Large Focal length Telephoto Wide-angle Distance to a subject Depth of field (Focus range) Close Shallow (narrow) Example: To take a picture by deliberately blurring the background Far Deep (wide) Example: To take a picture by adjusting the focus while including the background ●●You can take a picture even when [Preview] Mode is activated. ●●The range in which you can check the effect of a selected shutter speed is between 8 seconds and 1/16000 seconds. 88 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) Recording mode: You can select your own settings from various effects and take pictures while confirming these effects on the screen. You can set the effects to be applied to a picture by selecting a sample picture. You can add picture effects while you record a panorama picture. 1 Press [FILTER] button 2 Press or turn the control dial to select the picture effect (Filter) ••You can select from among 22 picture effects (Filter). (→92 - 99) ••The picture effect for the sample picture you selected is applied to the picture shown on the preview display. 3 Preview display No Effect Press [MENU/SET] The display of a picture with a selected picture effect appears on the screen. Example: When the picture effect ([Sunshine]) is selected in [Program AE] Mode Picture effects (This is not displayed when [No Effect] is selected.) Adjusting the picture effect (→91) (This is displayed only when a picture effect is selected.) Changing the picture effect (Filter) Press the [FILTER] button again and perform the same procedure from step 2 above. 89 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) ●●Settings will be stored even if the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off. ●●If you do not want to add picture effects, please select [No Effect]. ●●When you set a picture effect, the following settings are fixed. •• White Balance: [AWB] •• [Photo Style]: [Standard] •• [Highlight Shadow]: [Standard] •• [i.Dynamic]: [OFF] •• [HDR]: [OFF] •• [Color Space]: [sRGB] ●●The flash is set to [ ] (Forced Flash Off). ●●The display of a picture reflecting a selected effect in the preview screen or recording screen may differ from the actual recorded pictures. Switching the display of a selection screen for applying picture effects (Filter) 1 Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display •• Every time you press the [DISP.] button, the screen for which picture effects are selected changes. •• When you switch the screen to the guide display, a description of the picture effects appears. Normal display No Effect 90 Guide display No Effect List display No Effect SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) Adjusting the picture effects according to your preferences You can easily adjust the setting conditions (such as degree and colouring of an effect) of the picture effects according to your preferences. 1 2 Press to display the setting screen Turn the control dial to adjust the setting conditions of the picture effects •• The settings that can be adjusted vary depending on the selected picture effect. Refer to “Items that can be set” for the corresponding picture effect. •• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen. •• When you select picture effects, [ ] appears on the screen. •• If you do not want to change the current setting, select the centre point (standard) in the adjustment level bar. Taking two still pictures with and without picture effects ([Simultaneous record w/o filter]) You can take two still pictures at the same time by pressing the shutter button once; one with effects and one without effects. → [Rec] → [Simultaneous record w/o filter] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] •• When [ON] is set, the camera will take a still picture with the effects applied and then a still picture without the effects. •• A still picture recorded without effects applied will use the same menu settings as when the picture effects (Filter) were applied. The following settings are fixed. –– White Balance: [AWB] (You cannot perform fine adjustments.) –– [i.Dynamic]: [OFF] •• After taking the picture, [Auto Review] will display only the still picture with the effects applied. ●●If you set this function to [ON], burst, Auto Bracket, Aspect Bracket, White Balance Bracket, [Time Lapse Shot], [Stop Motion Animation] and panorama picture recording will be disabled. ●●This function is disabled during motion picture recording. 91 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Expressive] This effect emphasises the colour to make a pop art picture. Items that can be set (Press Vividness to display the setting screen) Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring [Retro] This effect gives a faded image. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Yellowish colouring Reddish colouring [Old Days] This effect adds a bright, soft and nostalgic feel to the overall image. Items that can be set (Press Contrast to display the setting screen) Low contrast High contrast [High Key] This effect adds a bright, airy and soft feel to the overall image. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Pinkish colouring Light-bluish colouring ●●When recording a panorama picture in a scene with low brightness, you may not be able to achieve the desired results. 92 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Low Key] This effect adds a dark and relaxing feel to the overall image and enhances bright parts. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Reddish colouring Bluish colouring [Sepia] This effect creates a sepia image. Items that can be set (Press Contrast to display the setting screen) Low contrast High contrast [Monochrome] This effect creates a black and white picture. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Yellowish colouring Bluish colouring [Dynamic Monochrome] This effect gives a higher contrast to create an impressive black and white picture. Items that can be set (Press Contrast 93 Low contrast to display the setting screen) High contrast SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Rough Monochrome] This effect creates a black and white picture with granular noise. Items that can be set (Press Grainy image effect to display the setting screen) Weak grainy image effect Strong grainy image effect ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. [Silky Monochrome] This effect blurs the overall image to add a soft feel to a black and white picture. Items that can be set (Press Degree of defocusing to display the setting screen) Slight defocusing Strong defocusing ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. [Impressive Art] This effect gives your photo a dramatic contrast look. Items that can be set (Press Vividness to display the setting screen) Black & white Gaudy colouring ●●When recording a panorama picture, the places where successively taken pictures are stitched may be noticeable. [High Dynamic] This effect produces the optimum brightness for both dark and bright parts. Items that can be set (Press Vividness 94 Black & white to display the setting screen) Gaudy colouring SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Cross Process] This effect gives your photo a dramatic colour look. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Greenish colouring / Bluish colouring / Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring [Toy Effect] This effect reduces peripheral brightness to give the impression of a toy camera. Items that can be set (Press Colouring Orangish colour to display the setting screen) Bluish colouring [Toy Pop] This effect creates a vivid and bright image with the look of a toy camera. Items that can be set (Press Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced Small to display the setting screen) Large [Bleach Bypass] This effect gives a higher contrast and a lower saturation to create a calm and tranquil picture. Items that can be set (Press Contrast 95 Low contrast to display the setting screen) High contrast SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Miniature Effect] This effect blurs peripheral areas to give the impression of a diorama. Items that can be set (Press Vividness to display the setting screen) Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring ■■Defocusing a picture You can create the impression of a diorama by intentionally creating a blurred area and focusing area using [Miniature Effect]. You can set the recording direction (direction of blurred area), position and size of the focusing area. Press [Fn1] button Press or to move the focusing area (frame) Turn the control dial to select the size of the focusing area (frame) Press [MENU/SET] •• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored. ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. ●●No audio is recorded for motion pictures. ●●When a motion picture is recorded, the finished recording will be approximately 1/8th of the actual recorded time period. (If you record a motion picture for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording time will be approximately 1 minute.) The recordable time displayed on the camera is approx. 8x longer than actual time needed for recording. When the Recording Mode is changed, be sure to check the recordable time. ●●If you stop recording motion pictures too soon, the camera may continue recording until a certain time. Hold the camera until the camera stops recording. ●●If [MF] is selected for the focus mode, move the focusing area to the position at which the focus has been adjusted. 96 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Soft Focus] This effect blurs the overall image to produce a soft feel. Items that can be set (Press Degree of defocusing to display the setting screen) Slight defocusing Strong defocusing ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. [Fantasy] This effect creates a fantastical image in a pale colour tone. Items that can be set (Press Vividness to display the setting screen) Subdued colouring Gaudy colouring [Star Filter] This effect transforms pin-points of light into a star effect. Items that can be set (Press Length of the rays Rays of light is of light short to display the setting screen) Rays of light is long ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. 97 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [One Point Color] This effect leaves one selected colour to emphasise impressiveness. Items that can be set (Press Amount of colour retained to display the setting screen) Leaves a small amount of colour Leaves a large amount of colour ■■Selecting colour Press [Fn1] button Select the colour to be retained with [MENU/SET] and press •• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored. ●●The selected colour may not be retained for some subjects. 98 SQW0024 Picture effects (Filter) Taking pictures using picture effects (Filter) For the setting procedures for picture effects (Filter), refer to (→89). [Sunshine] This effect adds a cast of light to the scene. Items that can be set (Press Colouring to display the setting screen) Yellowish colouring / Reddish colouring / Bluish colouring / Whitish colouring ■■Setting the light source Press [Fn1] button Press to move the centre of the light source to a different position •• You can move the centre of the light source to the edge of the screen. Tips on positioning the centre of the light source You can move the centre of the light source to a point outside the image to obtain a more natural finish. Turn the control dial to adjust the size of the light source •• You can change the light source among four sizes. •• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored. Press [MENU/SET] ●●The recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay compared to normal recording. 99 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style] Recording mode: You can adjust the colours and picture quality according to the concept of the picture that you want to create. → [Rec] → [Photo Style] [Standard] Standard setting. [Vivid] Setting with slightly high contrast and saturation. [Natural] Setting with slightly low contrast. [Monochrome] Setting that creates a picture using monochrome shades of grey only, such as black and white. [Scenery] Setting that creates a picture using vivid colours for the blue sky and green. [Portrait] Setting that produces the look of a healthy complexion. [Custom] Setting for using colours and picture quality that were registered in advance. ●●[Photo Style] is fixed to [Standard] when the picture effect (Filter) is set. ●●The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. 100 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style] ■■Adjusting the picture quality Press to select the type of Photo Style Press to select an item and press [Contrast] [Sharpness] [Noise Reduction] [Saturation]*1 [Color Tone]*1 [Filter Effect]*2 Standard to adjust [+] [–] [+] [–] Increases the contrast in a picture. Decreases the contrast in a picture. Enhances the outlines in a picture. Softens the outlines in a picture. Increases the noise reduction effect to reduce noise. This [+] setting may slightly lower the resolution. Lowers the noise reduction effect to achieve a picture [–] quality with clearer resolution. [+] Gaudy colouring [–] Subdued colouring [+] Bluish colouring [–] Yellowish colouring Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Low) [Yellow] Records a blue sky clearly. Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Medium) [Orange] Records a blue sky with vibrant colours. Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: High) [Red] Records a blue sky with even more vibrant colours. Applies subdued colouring for the skin and lips of a [Green] person. Emphasises green leaves and makes them brighter. [Off] — *1 [Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. Otherwise, [Saturation] is displayed. *2 [Filter Effect] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. •• When the picture quality is adjusted, [+] will be displayed in the icon. Press [MENU/SET] ■■Registering the setting for the adjusted picture quality to [Custom] Perform the picture quality adjustment in Step press the [DISP.] button of “Adjusting the picture quality” and •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. 101 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting highlights and shadows [Highlight Shadow] Recording mode: You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while confirming the brightness of these areas on the screen. 1 Set the menu 2 Press → [Rec] → [Highlight Shadow] to select the item ([Standard]) No adjustments. ([Higher contrast]) Makes the highlighted areas brighter and shadowed areas darker. ([Lower contrast]) Makes the highlighted areas darker and shadowed areas brighter. ([Brighten shadows]) / 3 4 / (Custom) Makes the shadowed areas brighter. You can set a custom registration shape. Turn the control ring to adjust the brightness of the highlighted areas and turn the control dial to adjust the brightness of the shadowed areas Highlighted area ••To register your preferred settings, press to select the registration target icon (Custom 1 ([ ]), Custom 2 ([ ]), and Custom 3 ([ ])). Press [MENU/SET] Shadowed area Preview display ●●You can press the [DISP.] button on the brightness adjustment screen to switch the screen display. ●●The settings registered in [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off. ●●The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the camera is turned off. ●●The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. 102 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the White Balance Recording mode: In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of white takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is closest to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source. 1 Press [WB] button ( ) 2 Turn the control dial to select the White Balance and press [MENU/SET] [AWB] Adjust to the colour under a clear sky. ] [ ] Adjust to the colour under a cloudy sky. [ ] Adjust to the colour in the shade. [ ] [ [ Automatic adjustment in accordance with the light source. [ ]/[ ]* ]/[ [ Adjust to the colour under incandescent lights. Adjust to the colour that is optimal for taking pictures using the flash. ]/[ ] ] Use the White Balance value that was set manually. Use the preset colour temperature setting. * The [AWB] setting is applied when recording motion pictures. Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixtures, etc., the optimal White Balance will vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]. ●●The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a flash or the subject is recorded outside of the effective flash range (→177). ●●[White Balance] setting is fixed to [AWB] in the following case: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set 103 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the White Balance ■■Auto White Balance When [AWB] (Automatic White Balance) is set, the colouring is adjusted in accordance with the light source. However, if the scene is too bright or too dark or if other extreme conditions apply, the pictures may appear reddish or bluish. The White Balance may not operate correctly if there is a multiple number of light sources. In that case, set the [White Balance] to settings other than [AWB] to adjust the colouring. : [AWB] operational range 10000K 9000K Blue sky 8000K 7000K 6000K 5000K 4000K 3000K 2000K Cloudy sky (rain) Shade Sunlight White fluorescent lighting Incandescent lighting Sunset/sunrise Candlelight K=Kelvin Colour Temperature Setting the White Balance manually Take a picture of a white object under the target light source to adjust colours. 1 2 3 Press [WB] button ( ) Turn the control dial to select [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ], and press Point the camera at a white object such as a piece of paper, ensuring that it is inside the frame at the centre of the screen, and press [MENU/SET] ●●It may not be possible to set the correct White Balance if subjects are too bright or too dark. In this case, adjust the brightness and try to set the White Balance again. 104 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the White Balance Setting the White Balance using colour temperature You can set the White Balance using colour temperature. Colour temperature is a numeric value that expresses the colour of light (unit: K*). A picture becomes bluish when the colour temperature value is higher, and reddish when the temperature value is lower. * Kelvin 1 2 3 Press [WB] button ( ) Turn the control dial to select [ ] and press Use to select the colour temperature value and press [MENU/SET] •• You can set the colour temperature from 2,500 K to 10,000 K. Performing White Balance fine adjustments White Balance settings can be individually fine-tuned if colours still do not appear as anticipated. 1 2 Select the White Balance and press Use to perform White Balance fine adjustments : A (amber: orangish colours) : G (green: greenish colours) 3 : B (blue: bluish colours) : M (magenta: reddish colours) •• Pressing [DISP.] button resets the position back to the centre. Press [MENU/SET] ●●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the A (amber) or B (blue) side, the colour of the White Balance icon displayed on the screen will change to the fine-tuned colour. ●●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the G (green) or M (magenta) side, [+] (green) or [-] (magenta) will be displayed in the White Balance icon on the screen. ●●Settings remain applied when using flash. ●●You can perform fine adjustments of the White Balance independently for each White Balance setting item. ●●When you set a new White Balance value by selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ], or change the colour temperature by selecting [ ], the White Balance fine adjustment level will be returned to the standard setting (centre point). 105 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Adjusting the White Balance Bracket recording using White Balance Bracket settings are performed based on the fine adjustment values for White Balance, and three pictures with different colouring are automatically recorded when the shutter button is pressed once. 1 Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in step 2 of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments” and turn the control dial to perform the Bracket setting 2 Turning the control dial to the right : Horizontal ([A] to [B]) Turning the control dial to the left : Vertical ([G] to [M]) Press [MENU/SET] ●●When the White Balance Bracket is set, [BKT] appears on the White Balance icon. ●●When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode]), the White Balance Bracket setting is cancelled. ●●The shutter sound will be emitted only once. Not available in the following cases: ●●The White Balance Bracket does not function in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• During motion picture recording •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] •• When the [Quality] setting is set to [ •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] 106 ], [ ] or [ ] SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Setting the picture quality and size Changing the aspect ratio of the still pictures Recording mode: You can easily switch the aspect ratio of still pictures using the aspect ratio selector switch. 1 Switching the aspect ratio selector switch [4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 TV [1:1] Aspect ratio of a square image [16:9] Aspect ratio of high-definition TV, etc. [3:2] Aspect ratio of standard film cameras ●●Edges may be cut off when printing - be sure to check in advance. (→324) Not available in the following case: ●●During panorama picture recording 107 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Setting the picture quality and size Setting the picture size Recording mode: The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when they are printed onto large sheets. → [Rec] → [Picture Size] Aspect ratio 4:3 1:1 16:9 3:2 [L] 12.5M [L] 10M [L] 11M [L] 12M 4112×3088 [Picture Size] [ M] 6.5M 2976×2232 [ S] 3M 2048×1536 3088×3088 4480×2520 [ M] 5M [ M] 8M S] 2.5M [ S] 2M 2240×2240 [ 1536×1536 3840×2160 1920×1080 4272×2856 [ M] 6.5M 3120×2080 [ S] 3M 2112×1408 ●●When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], [Picture Size] is fixed to [S]. Not available in the following case: •• During panorama picture recording 108 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Setting the picture quality and size Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality]) Recording mode: Set the compression rate used for storing pictures. → [Rec] → [Quality] Settings [ ] [ ] JPEG [ ] ] ] Description Gives priority to picture quality and saves pictures in JPEG file format. [ [ File format Saves pictures in JPEG file format using standard picture quality. This setting is useful when you want to increase the number of recordable pictures without changing the number of pixels. RAW + JPEG Saves pictures in JPEG file format in addition to the RAW file format.*1 RAW Saves pictures in the RAW file format.*2 *1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG file is also deleted. *2 The picture size is fixed to the maximum recordable pixels for each image aspect ratio ([L]). About RAW file In RAW file format the data is saved without any picture processing by the camera. This format delivers a higher picture quality than the JPEG format, but the amount of data is greater. To play back and edit RAW file pictures, you must use this unit or dedicated software. You can perform advanced editing of RAW file pictures, such as correcting the White Balance of pictures recorded previously, and save the pictures in file formats that can be displayed on a PC. ••You can develop the RAW file pictures using [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu. (→208) ••To develop and edit RAW file pictures on a PC, use the supplied DVD software (Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”). 109 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Setting the picture quality and size Not available in the following cases: ●●The following effects cannot be used on RAW file pictures. •• [Intelligent Auto] Mode •• Picture effects (Filter) •• White Balance*1 •• [Photo Style]*1 / [Highlight Shadow]*1 / [i.Dynamic]*1 / [Red-Eye Removal]*2 / [i.Resolution]*1 / [Color Space]*1 ([Rec] menu) ●●You cannot set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] in the following case: •• During panorama picture recording *1 When you use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, the adjustments are made based on the settings used during recording. Therefore, you can save JPEG file pictures by using the settings applied during recording. 2 * If [Red-Eye Removal] is activated during recording, you can use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu to save JPEG file pictures in which red-eye was detected and corrected. 110 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Using the picture correction functions effectively Correcting contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic]) Recording mode: Automatically adjusts contrast and exposure to give more lifelike colours when there is significant contrast between background and subject. → [Rec] → [i.Dynamic] Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] /[LOW] / [OFF] ●●When [AUTO] is set, you can automatically set the strength of the effects based on the recording conditions. ●●The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. Not available in the following cases: ●●Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions. ●●The [i.Dynamic] does not function in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] Enhancing the impression of high-resolution ([i.Resolution]) Recording mode: You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to record still pictures with sharper outlines and clearer resolution. → [Rec] → [i.Resolution] Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] /[LOW] / [EXTENDED] / [OFF] ●●When [EXTENDED] is set, you can take more natural pictures with the impression of highresolution. ●●The [EXTENDED] setting will automatically change to the [LOW] setting when recording motion pictures. ●●The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. 111 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Using the picture correction functions effectively Combining still pictures with different exposures ([HDR]) Recording mode: The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at different exposures into a single properly exposed picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures used to create the HDR picture are not saved. You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large. A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format. → [Rec] → [HDR] [ON] Creates a combined HDR picture. [OFF] Does not create a combined HDR picture. [Dynamic Range] [AUTO]: Takes pictures after automatically setting the adjustment range of the exposure based on the contrast of a subject. [±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the adjustment range of the exposure being set. [Auto Align] [ON]: Automatically adjusts the displacement of pictures caused by jitter, etc. We recommend using this setting to take pictures with a handheld camera. [OFF]: Does not adjust the displacement of pictures. We recommend using this setting when you use a tripod. [SET] ■■What is HDR? HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to a technique for expressing a wide contrast range. ●●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation. ●●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few moments before you will be able to record another picture. ●●A subject that was in motion when it was recorded may be recorded as an afterimage. ●●When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of view narrows slightly. ●●When you take pictures using a flash, the flash mode is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off). Not available in the following cases: ●●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded. ●●[HDR] cannot be used in the following cases: ], [ ] or [ ] •• When the [Quality] setting is set to [ •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) 112 SQW0024 Picture Quality and colouring Settings Using the picture correction functions effectively Suppressing the noise of a long exposure ([Long Shtr NR]) Recording mode: The camera can automatically eliminate the noise made when taking pictures with a slower shutter speed (e.g. to record night scenes) in order to take sharp pictures. → [Rec] → [Long Shtr NR] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] ●●While the camera eliminates the noise, [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same period as the shutter speed selected for the signal processing time. Not available in the following cases: ●●The [Long Shtr NR] does not function in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• During motion picture recording •• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] •• When using the electronic shutter Setting the colour space Recording mode: You can set the method for reproducing the colours to correctly display the recorded pictures on the screens of a PC or printer, etc. → [Rec] → [Color Space] [sRGB] Sets the sRGB colour space. This setting is widely used for devices such as PCs. [AdobeRGB] Sets the AdobeRGB colour space. AdobeRGB colour space has a wider colour reproduction range than sRGB colour space. Therefore, AdobeRGB colour space is mainly used for business applications such as commercial printing. ●●Select [sRGB] if you do not have expert knowledge about AdobeRGB colour space. ●●During motion picture recording, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]. 113 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus 1 Switch the focus selector switch to [ ] or [ ] Auto Focus is activated. Align with the indicator. Select the focus mode (AFS, AFF, AFC) Recording mode: Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. → [Rec] → [AFS/AFF/AFC] Focus selector switch * * Settings The movement of the subject and the scene (recommended) Description [AFS] Subject is still (Scenery, anniversary photograph, etc.) “AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. Focus is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway. [AFF] Movement cannot be predicted (Children, pets, etc.) “AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”. In this mode, focusing is performed automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway. If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement automatically. Subject is moving (Sport, trains, etc.) “AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. In this mode, while the shutter button is pressed halfway, focusing is constantly performed to match the movement of the subject. When the subject is moving, the focusing is performed by predicting the subject position at the time of recording. [AFC] — Focusing is performed manually. (→128) * In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the setting is fixed to AF Macro even if you switch the focus selector switch to [ 114 ] or [ ] (AF Macro). SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus When recording using [AFF], [AFC] ●●Focusing may take time if the zoom is suddenly changed from max. W to max. T, or if you suddenly move closer to a subject from a greater distance. ●●Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject. ●●While the shutter button pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen. ●●If the light on a subject is insufficient when using [AFF] or [AFC], the camera performs the same focusing operation as [AFS]. In this case, the indication on the screen will change to yellow [AFS]. Not available in the following case: ●●The camera adjusts the focus using [AFS] in the following case: •• During panorama picture recording Switching [AF Mode] Recording mode: This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. 1 Press [ ] button ( ) 2 Press to select Auto Focus mode and press [MENU/SET] •• If you press when [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, the AF area setting screen appears. For details on operation of the AF area setting screen, refer to (→121). ●●Auto Focus is fixed to [ ] (1-area-focusing) in the following case: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect]) Not available in the following case: ●●Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case: •• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) is set to [AFF] or [AFC] 115 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Taking front-on pictures of people (Face/Eye Detection) The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts the focus on the eye that is closer to the camera and the exposure using the face (when [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering)). ••The camera can detect up to 15 faces. The camera can detect only the eyes of faces to be focused on. When the camera recognises a face, the AF area and eye used for focusing are displayed. Yellow: When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame turns green when the camera is focused. White: Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other faces that are the same distance away as faces within the yellow AF area are also focused. Eye used for focusing ●●You can change the position and size of the AF area and eye to be used for focusing. (→121) ●●If [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering) when [ ] (Face/Eye Detection) is selected, the camera will adjust the exposure using the face of a subject. (→139) Not available in the following case: ●●If conditions prevent the face from being recognised, such as when the movement of the subject is too rapid, the AF Mode setting switches to [ 116 ] (49-area-focusing). SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Automatically locking the focus on a moving subject 1 (AF Tracking) Align the AF Tracking frame with the subject and press the shutter button halfway When the subject is recognised, the AF Tracking frame changes from white to yellow, and the subject is automatically kept in focus. If AF Lock fails, a red frame flashes for a while and then turns off. Retry the locking operation. •• To release AF Tracking → Press [MENU/SET]. ] •• Focus range: same as macro recording [ •• In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, every time you press , AF Tracking and Face Detection are switched. AF Tracking frame ●●When you set [Metering Mode] to [ ] (Multi Metering), the camera adjusts the exposure using a locked subject. (→139) ●●Under certain recording conditions, such as when the subject is small or dark, [ ] (AF Tracking) may not operate correctly. When [ ] (AF Tracking) does not work, focus will be on [ ] (1-areafocusing). ●●[ Not available in the following cases: ] (AF Tracking) cannot be used in the following case: •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] ●●In the following cases, [ ] (AF Tracking) performs the operation of [ ] (1-area-focusing). •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine]) •• [Monochrome] in [Photo Style] Subject not centred in picture (49-area-focusing) / , etc. (Custom Multi) (49-area-focusing) Focuses on the subject in the wide range area (up to 49-areafocusing) on the recording screen. ●●You can select the focusing area. (→121) 117 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus , etc. (Custom Multi) You can set the preferred shape of an AF area by selecting 49 points in the AF area, based on the subject. 1 2 Press [ ] button ( ) 3 Use Select a Custom Multi icon ([ •• When you press ], etc.), and press , the AF area setting screen appears. to select the setting item •• The currently set shape of an AF area is displayed on the bottomleft of the screen. ([Horizontal Pattern]) Horizontal line shape Ideal shape for panning, etc. ([Vertical Pattern]) Vertical line shape Ideal shape for recording structures, etc. ([User Defined]) Custom shape / / (Custom) You can set a custom registration shape. 4 Press 5 Select the AF area Current AF area shape •• The AF area setting screen appears. •• The selected AF area is displayed in yellow whereas the unselected area is displayed in white. When selecting [ ] / [ ] When [ ] is selected, you can set the size and position of the area in the vertical direction and when [ ] is selected, you can set the size and position of the area in the horizontal direction. Operation of buttons Description Moves position Control dial [DISP.] button 118 Changes the size (up to three lines) Restores to the initial settings SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] Use to select AF area and press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat) •• If you press [MENU/SET] again, the setting will be cancelled. •• To cancel all the settings, press the [DISP.] button. 6 Press [Fn2] button ■■Registering the set AF area in [ ], [ ], and [ Press on the screen of step 3 on (→118) Use ] (Custom) to select the registration target icon and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ●●The settings registered in [ ●●The settings adjusted in [ camera is turned off. ], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off. ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the ●●If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the AF area setting screen will appear. 119 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Determined position for focus (1-area-focusing) / (Pinpoint-focusing) (1-area-focusing) Focuses on AF area in centre of picture. (Recommended when focus is difficult to align) ••You can change the position and size of the AF area. (→121) Locking the focus If a subject you want to record is not in the centre, follow the steps below. (Only when [AFS/AFF/AFC] is set to [AFS]) Align the AF 1 Adjust focus according to area with the subject Focus display (When focus is aligned: illuminated When focus is not aligned: flashing) subject Hold down halfway 2 AF area (When focus is aligned: green When focus is not aligned: red) Return to desired composition Press fully (Pinpoint-focusing) Enables more precise focusing on a smaller point than [ ] (1-area-focusing). ●●You can set the focus position using the enlarged screen. (→122) ●●When you press the shutter button halfway, an enlarged display of the focus position appears. ●●You can set the timeout for the enlarged display using [Pinpoint AF Time] in the [Custom] menu. (→122) ] (Pinpoint-focusing) is selected while recording motion pictures, the setting is changed to [ ] (1-area-focusing). ●●If [ Not available in the following case: ●●Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case: •• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→114) is set to [AFF] or [AFC] 120 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Changing the position and size of the AF area ■■When selecting [ ] / [ ] You can change the position and size of the AF area. Select [ ] or [ ] and press •• The AF area setting screen appears. To change the AF area To move the position of the AF area: Press To change the size of the AF area: Turn the control dial •• If you set the AF area to an eye in the yellow frame when [ ] is selected, the eye to be used for focusing will be changed. •• To restore the AF area to its initial state (position) → Press [DISP.] button. Press [MENU/SET] ■■When selecting [ ] You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The AF area, which is configured with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of 9 points each (6 points or 4 points for the groups located at the edges of the screen). Examples of group Select [ ] and press •• The AF area setting screen appears. Press to select an AF area group Press [MENU/SET] •• Only the [+] indications (centre points of the selected group) remain on the screen. •• To cancel the settings for the AF area frame, press [MENU/SET]. 121 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus ■■When selecting [ ] You can enlarge the screen to perform more precise settings of the focus position. ••You cannot set the focus position at the edges of the screen. Select [ ] and press Use to set the focus position and press [MENU/SET] •• The enlarged assist screen will appear for setting the focus position. Move [+] to the focus position with •• Pressing [DISP.] button will bring the focus position back to the centre of the assist screen. Changing the display of the assist screen → [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen. [PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen. ••When [PIP] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3 times to 6 times. When [FULL] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3 times to 10 times. Enlarge or reduce the screen by magnification factors of x1 steps using the control dial. Setting the timeout for the enlarged display → [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Time] → [LONG] (approx. 1.5 seconds) / [MID] (approx. 1.0 seconds) / [SHORT] (approx. 0.5 seconds) ••If you release the shutter button, the enlarged display will turn off even before the screen timeout. 122 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Enabling/disabling use of cursor button to move the AF area → [Custom] → [Direct Focus Area] → [ON] / [OFF] When [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can move the AF area and when [ ] is selected, you can move the enlarged position. ••When [Custom Multi] such as [ ] is selected, the AF area setting screen is displayed. ••Use the Quick menu (→34) to set functions to be assigned to the cursor button, such as [Drive Mode], [White Balance] and [Sensitivity]. ●●When you set [Metering Mode] (→139) to [ ] (spot-focusing), the metering target will move along with the AF area. When the AF area is moved to the edges of the screen, the metering operation may be affected by the surrounding brightness. Not available in the following cases: ●●[Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ●●The position and size of the AF area cannot be changed in the Digital Zoom range. 123 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Setting your preferred focusing method You can use the [Custom] menu to set the focusing method in detail. Enabling/disabling focus adjustment when the shutter button is pressed halfway → [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [ON] / [OFF] Enabling/disabling shutter release when the shutter button is pressed halfway → [Custom] → [Half Press Release] → [ON] / [OFF] Focusing using the [AF/AE LOCK] button You can use the [AF/AE LOCK] button instead of the shutter button to focus on a subject. 1 Set the [Custom] menu → [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [OFF] → [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON] 2 Press the [AF/AE LOCK] button 3 Press the shutter button to take a picture 3 The camera focuses on a subject. •• The camera takes a picture by adjusting the exposure. 2 Enabling/disabling pre-adjustment of focus → [Custom] → [Quick AF] → [ON] / [OFF] The focus is automatically adjusted when camera blurring is small even when the shutter button is not pressed. (Increases battery consumption) ●●Press shutter button halfway if focus is difficult to align. ●●[Quick AF] cannot be used in the following cases: ••In the [Preview] Mode ••When the lighting is low 124 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Auto Focus Turning on/off the AF Assist Lamp → [Custom] → [AF Assist Lamp] → [ON] / [OFF] Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too dark to facilitate focusing. (A large AF area is displayed based on recording conditions.) ●●The AF Assist Lamp has an effective distance of 1.5 m (4.9 feet). ●●AF Assist Lamp is effective for a subject at the centre of the screen. Use the lamp by positioning a subject at the centre of the screen. ●●If you do not want to illuminate the AF Assist Lamp when you take a picture in a dark location (e.g. taking a picture of an animal in the dark), set this function to [OFF]. When the AF Assist Lamp is set to [OFF], sharper focusing will become difficult. ●●The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following case: ••When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] Enabling/disabling recording when a subject is out of focus → [Custom] → [Focus/Release Priority] [FOCUS]: Recording is disabled unless the focusing is performed properly. [RELEASE]: Recording is performed when you fully press the shutter button to place priority on the shutter release timing that helps to avoid missed opportunities. ●●Note that a picture may be out of focus when [RELEASE] is set, even if the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC]. ●●This function is disabled during motion picture recording. Enabling/disabling manual focus adjustment after AF → [Custom] → [AF+MF] → [ON] / [OFF] You can manually perform fine focusing during AF Lock (pressing the shutter button halfway when [AFS/AFF/AFC] is set to [AFS] or setting AF Lock using the [AF/AE LOCK] button). 125 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording) Recording mode: When you want to enlarge the subject, setting to [ ] (AF Macro) enables you to take pictures at an even closer distance than the normal focus range (up to 3 cm (0.098 feet) for max. Wide). 1 Switch the focus selector switch to [ ] Enables closeup focusing on a subject. (Auto Focus functions.) Align with the indicator. Focus range When a subject is too close to the camera, the picture may not be properly focused. Shortest recording distance The shortest recording distance is the distance from the lens front to the subject. This distance changes gradually depending on the zoom position. Max. Wide 0.03 m (0.098 feet) When the focus selector switch is set to [ ] (AF Macro). Max. Tele 0.3 m (0.98 feet) Focus selector switch [ ] [ ] (AF Macro) [ ] (→128) Focus range Zoom Max. Wide Max. Tele 50 cm (1.6 feet) 50 cm (1.6 feet) 3 cm (0.098 feet) 30 cm (0.98 feet) 3 cm (0.098 feet) 30 cm (0.98 feet) •• Focus range is displayed when operating the zoom, etc. 126 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording) ●●In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, the shortest recording distance will be the same as that for [ ], regardless of the focus selector switch setting. ●●It may take some time until distant subjects come into focus. ●●Using a tripod and [Self Timer] is recommended. Also, when recording a subject close to the camera, we recommend taking a picture without using the flash. ●●Moving the camera after aligning the focus is likely to result in poorly focused pictures if subject is close to the camera, due to the margin for focus alignment being severely reduced. ●●Resolution may be reduced around the edges of the picture. 127 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Manual Focus Recording mode: Manual Focus is convenient when you want to lock the focus to take pictures or when it is difficult to adjust focus using Auto Focus. 1 2 3 4 Switch the focus selector switch to [ ] Focus manually on a subject. Align with the indicator. Press [ ] button ( ) Press to determine the area to be enlarged, and press [MENU/SET] ••The screen changes to the assist screen and an enlarged display appears. (MF Assist) (→131) ••If you press [DISP.] button, the area to be enlarged will be reset to the centre. Turn the control ring to adjust focus Turning the control ring to the right: Focusing on a nearby subject Turning the control ring to the left: Focusing on a distant subject ••Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in focus. (Peaking) (→130) ••You can confirm the direction of focus adjustment toward the close distance side or far distance side. (MF Guide) (→129) MF Assist (Enlarged screen) Peaking Indicator for MF Guide (infinity) ●●After zoom operation, readjust the focus. ●●After cancelling [Sleep Mode], be sure to readjust the focus. 128 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Manual Focus Enabling/disabling MF Guide display → [Custom] → [MF Guide] → [ON] / [OFF] Quickly adjusting the focus using Auto Focus → [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON] If you press the [AF/AE LOCK] button in Manual Focus, Auto Focus is activated. ●●Auto Focus is activated at the centre of the frame. ●●When Auto Focus is activated on the MF Assist screen, the camera will adjust the focus at the centre of the MF Assist screen. 129 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Manual Focus Enabling/disabling [Peaking] to add colour to the portions of the image that are in focus → [Custom] → [Peaking] ●●[Peaking] functions during Manual Focus or when you are adjusting focus manually using [AF+MF]. [ON] Colour is added to the portions of the image that are in focus. [OFF] The portions of the image that are in focus are not displayed. [Detect Level] [SET] [Display Color] The detection level for in-focus portions is set. When [HIGH] is set, portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to achieve a more precise focus. Settings: [HIGH] / [LOW] •• The detection level setting does not affect the focus range. Sets the highlighting colour used for [Peaking]. Settings The available colour settings differ depending on the setting of [Detect Level]. Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows. [Detect Level] [Display Color] [HIGH] [LOW] [ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue) [ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange) [ ] (Green) [ ] (White) ●●When [Peaking] is set to [ON], [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) or [ ] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) will be displayed. ●●When [Fn Button Set] (→37) in the [Custom] menu is set to [Peaking], you can switch the setting in the following order every time the assigned function button is pressed: [ON] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) → [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF]. ●●Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in-focus portions, portions to be highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions. ●●The colour used for highlighting does not affect recorded pictures. Not available in the following case: ●●[Peaking] does not function in the following case: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome]) 130 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Manual Focus MF Assist ■■Displaying the MF Assist ••Turn the control ring to display MF Assist. ••You can also display MF Assist by pressing to display the setting screen, pressing the cursor button to set the position to be enlarged, and then pressing [MENU/SET]. ••When you perform the following operation, the position to be enlarged will be returned to the centre. –– When you press the [DISP.] button on the screen used for setting of the position to be enlarged ••If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the setting screen for the enlarged position appears. ■■Closing the MF Assist ••To exit MF Assist, press the shutter button halfway. ••You can also exit MF Assist by pressing [MENU/SET]. ••When you display MF Assist by turning the control ring, MF Assist is automatically ended approximately 10 seconds after you finish the operation. Not available in the following case: ●●The MF Assist is disabled in the Digital Zoom range or when recording motion pictures. Setting the display method of MF Assist → [Custom] → [MF Assist] [ ] Turn the control ring or press the [ ] button ( ) to enlarge the position. [ ] Turn the control ring to enlarge the position. [ ] [OFF] 131 Press the [ ] button ( ) to enlarge the position. The control ring or [ ] button ( ) cannot be used to enlarge the position. SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Manual Focus Changing the MF Assist display → [Custom] → [MF Assist Display] [FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen. [PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen. ••When [PIP] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3 times to 6 times. When [FULL] is selected, the size of the screen is enlarged or reduced approximately 3 times to 10 times. Enlarge or reduce the screen by magnification factors of x1 steps using the control dial. 132 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure [AF/AE Lock] Recording mode: The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock). 1 2 Point the camera at the subject Lock the focus and/or exposure while you press and hold the [AF/AE LOCK] button ••When you release the [AF/AE LOCK] button, the focus and/or exposure lock is cancelled. ••Only the exposure is locked at the time of purchase. 3 While you press and hold the [AF/AE LOCK] button, move the camera to compose the picture you want to take and fully press the shutter button : Focus is locked (AF Lock) ••When [AE LOCK] is set, press the shutter button halfway to focus, then press it fully. Setting the function of the [AF/AE LOCK] button → [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] [AE LOCK] [AF LOCK] [AF/AE LOCK] [AF-ON] Locks exposure only. •• [AEL], aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the correct exposure is achieved. Locks focus only. •• [AFL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject comes into focus. Locks focus and exposure. •• [AFL], [AEL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject is in focus and the correct exposure is achieved. Auto Focus is activated. Maintaining/not maintaining the lock when [AF/AE LOCK] button is released → 133 [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock Hold] → [ON] / [OFF] SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure [AF/AE Lock] ●●AF Lock only is effective in the following case: •• [Manual Exposure] Mode ●●During Manual Focus, only AE Lock can be used. ●●Only the AF Lock is enabled when you are recording motion pictures. Once you cancel AF Lock while recording motion pictures, you cannot perform the AF Lock operation again. ●●The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway, even when AE is locked. ●●Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked. ●●Lock is cancelled when a zoom operation is performed after locking the exposure and/or focus. Perform the locking operation again. 134 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation Recording mode: Corrects the exposure when there is a backlight or when the subject is too dark or too bright. 1 Turn the exposure compensation dial to select the compensation value Under-exposed Optimum exposure Adjust the exposure to the [+] direction Over-exposed Adjust the exposure to the [-] direction ••You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between –3 EV and +3 EV. ●●Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases. ●●When [Auto Exposure Comp.] of [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the flash output is also automatically adjusted based on the exposure compensation value. (→183) 135 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Setting the ISO Sensitivity Recording mode: Set ISO Sensitivity (sensitivity to lighting) manually. We recommend higher settings to take clear pictures in darker locations. 1 Press [ISO] button ( ) 2 Turn the control dial to select ISO Sensitivity and press [MENU/SET] ISO Sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200*1 depending on the brightness of a subject. AUTO (Intelligent ISO) ISO Sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200*1 depending on the movement and brightness of a subject. 100*2/200/400/800/1600/ 3200/6400/12800/25600 ISO Sensitivity is fixed at the selected setting. •• When [ISO Increments] is set to [1/3EV], more ISO Sensitivity settings can be selected. (→138) *1 When [ISO Limit Set] (→137) in the [Rec] menu is set to other than [OFF], the ISO Sensitivity is automatically set in the range up to the [ISO Limit Set] setting value. *2 Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON]. Setting guide Sensitivity Location (recommended) Shutter speed Interference Subject blur 136 [200] Bright (outdoors) Slow Low High [25600] Dark Fast High Low SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Setting the ISO Sensitivity ●●When [High Dynamic] is selected for the picture effect (Filter), [Sensitivity] is fixed to [AUTO]. ●●When a picture effect (Filter) other than [High Dynamic] is selected or when [Multi Exp.] is set, ISO Sensitivity can be set in a range up to [3200]. ●●For details on the available flash range used when the [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO], refer to (→177). ●●Cannot select [ ] in the following cases: •• [Shutter-Priority] Mode •• [Manual Exposure] Mode ●●When [Direct Focus Area] (→123) is set to [ON], the cursor button functions as an operation for moving the AF area. In that case, use the Quick menu (→34) to set the ISO Sensitivity. ●●You can use the following settings when recording motion pictures: [AUTO], [200] - [6400] Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity Recording mode: You can set the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or [ → [Rec] → [ISO Limit Set] Settings: [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] / [25600] / [OFF] ]. Not available in the following case: •• During motion picture recording 137 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Setting the ISO Sensitivity Setting the incremental value of ISO Sensitivity Recording mode: You can change the setting to increase ISO Sensitivity by 1 EV or 1/3 EV. → [Rec] → [ISO Increments] [1/3EV] [1 EV] [L.100]* / [L.125]* / [L.160]* / [200] / [250] / [320] / [400] / [500] / [640] / [800] / [1000] / [1250] / [1600] / [2000] / [2500] / [3200] / [4000] / [5000] / [6400] / [8000] / [10000] / [12800] / [16000] / [20000] / [25600] [L.100]* / [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [12800] / [25600] * Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON]. ●●When this setting is changed from [1/3EV] to [1 EV], the setting for [Sensitivity] may be changed. (The closest ISO Sensitivity that can be set for [1 EV] will be used.) Extending the ISO Sensitivity setting Recording mode: You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO Sensitivity. → [Rec] → [Extended ISO] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] 138 SQW0024 Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure) Setting the metering mode Recording mode: You can change the metering method used for measuring brightness. → [Rec] → [Metering Mode] [Metering Mode] (Multiple) (Centre weighted) Brightness measurement position Conditions Whole screen Normal usage (produces balanced pictures) Centre and surrounding area Subject in centre Centre of [+] (spot metering target) Great difference between brightness of subject and background (e.g. person in spotlight on stage, backlighting) (Spot) Spot metering target ••The menu item is common for both the [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. 139 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Setting the Shutter Type Recording mode: You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and electronic shutter. Mechanical shutter Description Starts the exposure electronically and ends the exposure using the mechanical shutter. Electronic shutter Starts and ends the exposure electronically. Flash ○ – Shutter Speed (seconds) 60 - 1/4000 1*1 - 1/16000 Mechanical shutter sound*2 + Electronic shutter sound*3 Electronic shutter sound*3 Shutter sound *1 You can set ISO Sensitivity up to [ISO 3200]. When ISO Sensitivity is higher than [ISO 3200], the shutter speed will be faster than 1 second. *2 You cannot turn off the mechanical shutter sound. *3 You can use [Shutter Vol.] to adjust the volume of the electronic shutter sound. (→43) 1 Set the menu → [Rec] → [Shutter Type] [AUTO] The shutter mode automatically switches based on the recording conditions and shutter speed. •• The mechanical shutter mode has higher priority over the electronic shutter mode because the mechanical shutter has less function-related restrictions when recording with a flash, etc. [MSHTR] Uses only the mechanical shutter mode to take a picture. [ESHTR] Uses only the electronic shutter mode to take a picture. ●●When [ ] is displayed on the screen, the electronic shutter is used to take a picture. ●●When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], the electronic shutter is used to take a picture. ●●When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the electronic shutter is used to take a picture. ●●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the picture may be skewed in some cases. ●●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→84) ●●Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk. 140 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Selecting a Drive Mode Recording mode: You can switch the operation to be performed when you press the shutter button. 1 Press [ 2 Press to select the drive mode and press [MENU/SET] ] button ( ) Drive Mode [Single] When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is recorded. [Burst] (→142) The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is pressed. [Auto Bracket]* (→145) Each time the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are recorded with different exposure settings based on the Exposure Compensation range. [Aspect Bracket]* When the shutter button is pressed, 4 pictures with 4 different aspect ratios are automatically recorded. (→147) [Self Timer] (→148) When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes place after the set time has elapsed. [Panorama Shot]* (→150) The pictures are recorded in succession while you press the shutter button and move the camera horizontally or vertically, and then the camera combines the pictures into a single panorama picture. * Cannot be set when using [Intelligent Auto] Mode. ••To cancel drive mode, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ]. The recording is switched to “Single”. ••When you press , you can change the settings of each drive mode. Note, however, that you cannot change the settings of [Single] and [Aspect Bracket]. 141 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Burst function Recording mode: The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is pressed. ••Pictures that are taken while the [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] are recorded together as a single burst group (→201). 1 2 Press to select the burst icon ([ etc.) and press 3 Press to select the burst speed and press [MENU/SET] Press [ ] button ( ) [SH] (Super high speed)*1 Speed (pictures/ sec.) [H] (High speed) [M] (Middle speed) [L] (Low speed) [AFS] 40 11 7 2 [AFF] / [AFC] ― 6.5 6.5 2 None None Available Available With RAW files ― 20*3 20*3 20*3 Without RAW files 60 Live View during burst recording No. of pictures*2 ], Depends on the capacity of the card*3 *1 The electronic shutter will be activated. *2 The number of burst pictures is limited by the picture-taking conditions and the type and/or status of the card used. *3 Pictures can be taken until the card becomes full. However, the burst speed will become slower halfway through the recording. The exact time when the slower burst speed will start depends on the settings of the aspect ratio, picture size, and quality as well as the type of card used. ••The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings: –– [Picture Size] (→108), [Quality] (→109), Sensitivity (→136), Focus mode (→114), [Focus/Release Priority] (→125) ••Burst speed can also be set with [Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu. ••For information about RAW files, refer to (→109). 142 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Burst function 4 Focus on the subject and take a picture ••Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst Mode. ■■To cancel burst In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ 50i ]. Focusing in burst mode Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→114) and the setting of [Focus/Release Priority] (→125) in the [Custom] menu. Focus mode [AFS] [AFF] / [AFC]*1 [MF] [Focus/Release Priority] [FOCUS] [RELEASE] [FOCUS] Focus At the first picture Normal focusing*2 [RELEASE] Predicted focusing*3 — Focus set with Manual Focus *1 Focus is fixed in the first picture when dark subjects are recorded or the burst speed is set to [SH]. *2 Since the camera records a burst of pictures while it adjusts the focus, the burst speed may be slower. *3 The camera predicts the focus within a possible range by giving higher priority to the burst speed. 143 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Burst function ●●When the burst speed is set to [H] and if many burst pictures are taken, the burst speed may be reduced while burst pictures are being taken. ●●When the burst speed is set to [SH] or [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFS] or [MF]), and the exposure and White Balance are fixed to those of the first picture. When the burst speed is set to [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]), [M], or [L], and the exposure and White Balance are adjusted individually for each still picture. ●●Burst speed may be reduced if shutter speed (pictures/sec.) is reduced in darker locations. ●●With repeated recordings, it may take a while between recordings, depending on the usage conditions. ●●It may take a while to store still pictures that were taken using the burst function. If you continue to record while storing, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be reduced. A high-speed card is recommended when recording using the burst function. Not available in the following cases: ●●The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine]) •• When White Balance Bracket is set •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) •• During motion picture recording •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] •• When recording using the flash •• During T (time) recording •• When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot] •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] ●●[SH] in Burst Mode cannot be used In the following cases: ], [ ] or [ ] •• When [Quality] is set to [ •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] 144 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket] Recording mode: Each time the shutter button is pressed, recordings are made of up to 7 pictures with different exposure settings based on the Exposure Compensation range. Example of Auto Bracket recording when [Step] is set to [3·1/3] and [Sequence] is set to [0/–/+] 1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture ±0 EV –1/3 EV 1 2 Press [ 3 Press to select the compensation range and press [MENU/SET] 4 Focus on the subject and take a picture Press to select the Auto Bracket icon ([ ], etc.) and press 50i ••If you press and hold the shutter button, a burst of pictures can be recorded. ••The display of Auto Bracket flashes until all of the burst pictures you have set are recorded. ••The camera restarts recording from the first still picture if you change the Auto Bracket settings or turn off the camera before all of the burst pictures you have set are recorded. ■■To cancel [Auto Bracket] In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ 145 +1/3 EV ] button ( ) ]. SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket] ■■Changing the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording sequence of Auto Bracket Set the menu → [Rec] → [Auto Bracket] Press to select [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] or [Sequence] and press [MENU/SET] Press to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] [Single/Burst Settings] (single) (burst) 3·1/3 3·2/3 3·1 5·1/3 [Step] 5·2/3 5·1 7·1/3 7·2/3 7·1 (3 pictures) (3 pictures) (3 pictures) (5 pictures) (5 pictures) (5 pictures) (7 pictures) (7 pictures) (7 pictures) [Sequence] •• You can take one picture at a time when [ ] is set. •• A burst of pictures can be recorded up to the number of pictures you have set when [ •• Close the menu after changing settings. 0/–/+ –/0/+ ] is set. ●●When you take pictures using Auto Bracket after performing Exposure Compensation, the camera will take pictures using the corrected exposure value as a reference. Not available in the following cases: ●●The [Auto Bracket] is disabled in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine]) •• When White Balance Bracket is set •• During motion picture recording •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] •• When recording using the flash •• During T (time) recording •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) •• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] 146 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Automatically changing the aspect ratio while taking pictures [Aspect Bracket] Recording mode: When you press the shutter button once, the camera automatically takes four pictures with four types of aspect ratios (4:3, 3:2, 16:9, and 1:1). (The shutter sounds only once.) 1 2 Press [ ] button ( ) Press to select the aspect bracket icon ([ ]) and press [MENU/SET] The range that can be recorded for each aspect ratio is displayed. 3 Focus on the subject and take a picture ■■To cancel aspect bracket In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ]. ●●When [Picture Size] is set to [S], the setting is automatically changed to [M]. ●●The same shutter speed, aperture value, focus, [Exposure], [White Balance], and [Sensitivity] settings are used for all four pictures. Not available in the following cases: ●●The [Aspect Bracket] is disabled in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine]) •• During motion picture recording •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] •• During T (time) recording •• When White Balance Bracket is set ], [ ] or [ ] •• When [Quality] is set to [ •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] 147 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Taking pictures with self-timer Recording mode: We recommend using a tripod. This is also effective for preventing jitter when pressing the shutter button, by setting the self-timer to 2 seconds. 1 2 Press [ 3 Press to select the self-timer operation setting and press [MENU/SET] ] button ( ) Press to select the self-timer icon ([ ], etc.) and press The shutter is activated after 10 seconds. The shutter is activated after 10 seconds and three pictures are taken at intervals of approximately 2 seconds. The shutter is activated after 2 seconds. ••You can also set the time for the self-timer using [Self Timer] in the [Rec] menu. 4 Press the shutter button halfway to focus, then press it fully to start recording ••The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ••After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording will start. ■■To cancel self-timer In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ]. ••You can cancel the self-timer by turning off the camera. (When [Self Timer Auto Off] (→50) is set to [ON].) 148 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Taking pictures with self-timer ●●If you take a picture with a flash when [ cases. ] is set, the flash output may not be stable in some Not available in the following cases: ●●It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases: •• When White Balance Bracket is set •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• During T (time) recording ●●Self-timer is disabled in the following cases: •• During motion picture recording •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only available with [Auto Shooting] setting) 149 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Recording panorama pictures Recording mode: You can easily record a panorama picture by panning the camera towards the direction you want to record, and automatically combining the burst of pictures taken during that time. 1 2 3 Press [ ] button ( ) Press to select the panorama icon ([ and press ], etc.) Press to select the recording direction and then press [MENU/SET] Left → Right Right → Left Down → Up Up → Down A horizontal guide line is displayed. A vertical guide line is displayed. ••You can also select the recording direction using [Panorama Direction] in the [Rec] menu. Applying a picture effect (Filter) Press the [FILTER] button to select a picture effect (→89) Recording direction Picture effects (This is not displayed when [No Effect] is selected.) Adjusting the picture effect (This is displayed only when a picture effect is selected.) •• You can also set the picture effects by turning the control ring. •• [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], and [Sunshine] are not available. •• When recording panorama pictures, the following effects are not applied to the recording screen. –– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] Press [MENU/SET] 4 150 Press the shutter button halfway to focus SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Recording panorama pictures 5 Press the shutter button fully and pan the camera in a small circular motion to the recording direction to start recording Taking pictures from left to right 2 sec. 1 sec. Recording direction and progress status (approximate) 3 sec. 4 sec. ••Pan the camera at a constant speed. ••You may not be able to take pictures successfully if you move the camera too quickly or too slowly. 6 Press the shutter button fully again to end recording ••You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures. ••Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide. Tips ●●Pan the camera in the recording direction as steadily as possible. If the camera shakes too much, it may not be able to take pictures or may end up creating a narrow (small) panorama picture. Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the point that you want to take. (However, the last frame is not recorded to the end.) 151 SQW0024 Shutter and Drive Settings Recording panorama pictures ■■About panorama picture playback Panorama pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever the same way as with other still pictures. If you play back panorama pictures in the same way as playing back a motion picture, the panorama pictures are scrolled automatically. (→70) ••Unlike motion picture playback, you cannot perform fast forward or fast rewind while the panorama pictures are scrolling automatically. (You can perform single-frame forward or rewind while the automatic scrolling operation is paused.) ■■To cancel In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ]. ●●The zoom position is fixed to the W end. ●●[Stabilizer] does not work when it is set to [ ] (Normal). ●●Since the aperture value and shutter speed are automatically controlled during panorama picture recording, settings made by the aperture ring or shutter speed dial are disabled. ●●The focus, exposure and White Balance are all fixed to optimal values for the first picture. If the focusing or brightness of pictures recorded as part of a panorama picture after the first picture are significantly different from those of the first picture, the panorama picture as a whole (when all pictures are stitched together) may not have consistent focus and brightness. ●●When the picture effect (Filter) is set, [White Balance] is fixed to [AWB]. ●●Since several pictures are stitched together to create a panorama picture, some subjects may be distorted or the joining portions of successively taken pictures that are stitched may be noticeable. ●●The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama picture varies depending on the recording direction and number of stitched pictures. The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows: •• Taking pictures in landscape orientation: Approx. 8176×1920 •• Taking pictures in portrait orientation: Approx. 2560×7680 ●●[Shutter Type] is fixed to [AUTO]. Not available in the following cases: ●●You cannot record a panorama picture in the following cases. •• When White Balance Bracket is set ], [ ] or [ ] •• When [Quality] is set to [ •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• During T (time) recording •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] •• When [Silent Mode] is set •• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] •• When [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] ●●Panorama pictures may not be created or pictures may not be recorded properly when taking pictures of the following subjects or when taking pictures in the following recording conditions: •• Subjects that have a continuous monotone or pattern (sky, beach, etc.) •• Moving subjects (person, pet, vehicle, waves, or flowers swaying in the wind, etc.) •• Subjects whose colours or patterns change quickly (such as an image appearing on a display) •• Dark locations •• Locations with a flickering light source (fluorescent lamp, candle light, etc.) 152 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot] Recording mode: You can preset data such as recording start time and time lapse to take still pictures automatically. This setting is convenient for taking pictures at constant intervals for landscape scenes, observation of the gradual changes in animals/plants, and other applications. The pictures are recorded as a single group picture (→201). When [Time Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu is used, you can create a motion picture. (→215) ••Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→29) 1 Set the menu 2 Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET] → [Start Time] [Rec] → [Time Lapse Shot] [Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button. [Start Time Set the time to start recording. Any time up to 23 hours Set] 59 minutes ahead can be set. Press to select the item (hour and/or minute), and to set the start time, and then press [MENU/SET] [Shooting Interval] / [Image Count] The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set. : Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures) : Setting [MENU/SET]: Set •• You can set the interval from 1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds in 1-second intervals. •• You can set the number of pictures to be recorded from 1 picture to 9,999 pictures. •• Be sure to use an interval setting that is longer than the exposure time (shutter speed) . (Illustration below) If the interval setting is shorter than the exposure time (shutter speed) (e.g. recording at night), it may cause the recording to skip. First 3 153 Press Second Third to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET] SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot] 4 Press the shutter button fully 5 Select the motion picture creation method 6 154 ••The recording starts automatically. ••During recording standby, the camera turns off automatically when no operation is performed for a preset interval. The [Time Lapse Shot] recording will continue even if the camera is turned off, and the camera is automatically turned on at the recording start time. If you want to turn on the camera manually, press the shutter button halfway. ••When you press the [Fn2] button while the camera is turned on, the pause or end selection screen will appear. Perform the operation based on the instructions on the screen. When you press the [Fn2] button while the camera is in the pause state, the restart or end selection screen will appear. You can also restart the operation from the pause state by fully pressing the shutter button. ••When a confirmation screen for continuing the creation of a motion picture is displayed, select [Yes]. ••[Rec Format]: [MP4] [Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture. [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p] [Frame Rate] Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you can create a more seamless stop motion animation. [50fps]* / [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps] * Only available with [FHD/50p] setting •• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps], [2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p]. [Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence. [REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording. Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET] ••A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ••You can also create a motion picture using [Time Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu. (→215) SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot] ●●This function is not intended for application-specific systems (monitoring cameras). ●●If you leave the camera unattended during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, make sure that the camera is not stolen. ●●Exercise caution when you perform [Time Lapse Shot] recording for a long period of time in cold regions or in a low-temperature or high-temperature/high-humidity environment, since such use could cause malfunctions. ●●The camera may not be able to record using the preset interval and number of pictures to be recorded under some recording conditions. ●●If the recording time is longer than the preset interval due to a long exposure, this may cause the recording to skip. ●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). ●●[Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases: •• When the remaining battery power runs out •• Turning the camera off If this occurs during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, you can restart the operation by replacing the battery or card in the pause state and turning the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [ON]. (Note, however, that the pictures recorded after restarting the operation are saved as another group picture.) When you replace the battery or card, turn the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF]. ●●Do not connect the AV cable (optional), HDMI micro cable or USB connection cable (supplied) during [Time Lapse Shot] recording. ●●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop motion animation. ●●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded. ●●You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file exceeds 4 GB. ●●When a stop motion animation is shorter than 2 seconds, “2s” will be displayed for the motion picture recording time (→70). ●●When the number of recorded pictures is one, it will not be saved as a group picture. Not available in the following cases: ●●[Time Lapse Shot] cannot be used In the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] •• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] 155 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation] Recording mode: You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation. ••Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→29) ••Still pictures that were captured using frame-by-frame recording are grouped into a single group picture. (→201) Before creating stop motion animation When you use [Stop Motion Animation] to record still pictures by moving a subject such as a doll little by little and then stitching those pictures, you can create a stop motion animation as if the subject is moving. ●●To create stop motion animation using this camera, it is necessary to record 1 to 50 frames of still pictures for every 1 second of motion picture. ●●To produce smooth movement of the subject, record the motion using as many frames as possible and set a higher number of frames per second (frame rate) when you create a stop motion animation. 1 Set the menu 2 Press to select the recording method, and press [MENU/SET] → [Rec] → [Stop Motion Animation] [Auto Shooting] [ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval. When the shutter button is pressed fully, recording starts. [OFF] Takes pictures manually, one frame at a time. [Shooting Interval] (Available only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON]) Set the interval used for [Auto Shooting]. You can set the interval from 1 second to 60 seconds in 1-second intervals. Press to select the interval (seconds), press selected time, and then press [MENU/SET] 156 to set the SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation] 3 4 5 6 Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET] Press to select [New] and press [MENU/SET] Press the shutter button fully ••Up to 9,999 frames can be recorded. Move the subject to decide on the composition ••Repeat the recording of still pictures in the same way. ••When you turn off the camera during recording, a message to restart recording will appear when you turn on the camera. To start recording from the next still picture, select [Yes]. How to create stop motion animation effectively ●●Up to two previously recorded pictures are displayed on the recording screen. Check this screen as a guideline for determining the amount of required motion. ●●You can press the Playback button to check the recorded pictures. Press the [ ] button to delete unnecessary pictures. To return to the recording screen, press the Playback button again. 7 Press [MENU/SET] to end recording. Next, select [Stop Motion Animation] in the [Rec] menu and then press [MENU/SET] again ••A confirmation screen is displayed. It is ended when [Yes] is selected. ••A confirmation screen for creating a motion picture is displayed next, so select [Yes]. 8 157 Select a method to create a stop motion animation ••[Rec Format]: [MP4] [Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture. [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/50p] / [FHD/25p] / [HD/25p] / [VGA/25p] [Frame Rate] Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you can create a more seamless stop motion animation. [50fps]* / [25fps] / [12.5fps] / [8.3fps] / [6.25fps] / [5fps] / [2.5fps] / [1fps] * Only available with [FHD/50p] setting •• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps], [2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p]. [Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence. [REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording. SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation] 9 Press to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET] ••A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ••You can also create a stop motion animation using [Stop Motion Video] in the [Playback] menu. (→215) ■■Adding pictures to an already recorded stop motion animation group When you select [Additional] in step 4, group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion Animation] are displayed. Select a group picture and press [MENU/SET]. Then, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen. ●●[Auto Shooting] may not be performed according to the preset interval because recording could take time under some recording conditions, such as when pictures are taken using a flash. ●●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop motion animation. ●●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, this will produce grainy pictures in a stop motion animation. ●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). ●●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded. ●●You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file exceeds 4 GB. ●●When a stop motion animation is shorter than 2 seconds, “2s” will be displayed for the motion picture recording time (→70). ●●If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture. You cannot select only one recorded still picture using [Additional]. Not available in the following cases: ●●[Stop Motion Animation] cannot be used in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When the [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is set to [ON] 158 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.] Recording mode: You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times of exposure on a single picture. 1 Set the menu 2 Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET] 3 Decide on your composition and take the first picture → [Rec] → [Multi Exp.] ••After recording the first picture, press the shutter button halfway to proceed to the next recording. ••Press to select the item and then press [MENU/ SET]. You can perform the following operations. –– [Next]: Proceed to the next recording. –– [Retake]: Delete the result of the last shot and take another picture. –– [Exit]: E xit Multi Exposure and save the picture that was taken. 4 Exit Record the second, third, and fourth pictures ••When you press [Fn1] button while taking pictures, the pictures that you took are saved and Multi Exposure is closed. 5 Next Retake Press to select [Exit] and press [MENU/SET] Retake Exit ••You can also end the operation by pressing the shutter button halfway. 159 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.] ■■About the automatic gain compensation setting Select [Auto Gain] on the screen in step 2 (→159). ••[ON]: Combines several pictures into one by automatically adjusting the brightness in accordance with the number of pictures taken. ••[OFF]: Combines several pictures into one by simply overlapping the exposure results of all pictures, as is. Perform the Exposure Compensation based on the requirements of a subject. ■■To overlay the pictures on the RAW file picture in a card Set [Overlay] to [ON] on the screen in step 2 (→159). After selecting [Start], the pictures on a card will be displayed. Select the RAW file pictures and press [MENU/ SET] to continue recording. ••You can perform [Overlay] on RAW file pictures recorded using this camera only. ●●Pictures are not saved in memory until Multi Exposure is ended. ●●Information for the picture taken last will be used as recording information of pictures taken using Multi Exposure. ●●While [Multi Exp.] recording is being performed, you cannot set items displayed in grey on the menu screen. Not available in the following cases: ●●[Multi Exp.] cannot be used in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set •• During panorama picture recording •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] 160 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time [Silent Mode] Recording mode: This mode is useful when you are taking pictures in a quiet environment or public facilities or when you take pictures of a subject such as a baby or animal. 1 Set the menu → [Custom] → [Silent Mode] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] ••This mode will mute beeps, set the flash to [Forced Flash Off], and disable AF Assist Lamp. The settings for the following functions are fixed: –– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR] –– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off) –– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF] –– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (Off) –– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (Off) ●●Even when this mode is set to [ON], the following lamps/indicators will light or flash. •• Self-timer indicator •• Wi-Fi connection lamp ●●The operation sounds of this camera such as the lens aperture sound are not muted. ●●Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk. 161 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.] Recording mode: The Face Recognition function recognises a face similar to a registered face and automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the face with higher priority. Even if a person you want to focus on is standing at the back or corner in a group photo, the camera will automatically recognise the person and record this person’s face clearly. 1 Set the menu → [Rec] → [Face Recog.] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [MEMORY] Default [Face Recog.] setting is [OFF]. When the face pictures are registered, the setting will be [ON] automatically. ■■How the Face Recognition function works During recording ••The camera recognises a registered face and adjusts focus and exposure. ••When registered faces that have set names are recognised, the names are displayed (max. 3 people). During playback ••The name and age are displayed (if information is registered). ••The names that have been set for the recognised faces are displayed (max. 3 people). ••Only pictures of the selected registered people are played back ([Category Play]). ●●[Face Recog.] functions only when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ]. ●●Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain Face Recognition information. ●●The name of the person recognised in the first picture is displayed in the case of group pictures. ●●Face Recognition searches for faces similar to those registered, but there is no guarantee it will always recognise these faces. In some cases, the camera cannot recognise or incorrectly recognises even registered people depending on their expression or the environment. ●●Even if Face Recognition information is registered, pictures recorded when the name is [OFF] are not categorised for Face Recognition in [Category Play]. ●●Even if Face Recognition information is changed, Face Recognition information for previously recorded pictures is not changed. For example, if a name is changed, pictures recorded before the change are not categorised for Face Recognition in [Category Play]. ●●To change name information for pictures already recorded, perform a [REPLACE] (→222) in [Face Rec Edit]. 162 SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.] Not available in the following cases: ●●[Face Recog.] cannot be set in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect]) •• During motion picture recording •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] Registering face pictures Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with such information as name and birthdate. Good example for registering ■■Recording tips when registering face pictures ••Make sure the subject’s eyes are open and mouth closed; a face have the subject face the camera directly, and make sure the outline of the face, the eyes and eyebrows are not hidden by hair. ••Make sure there are no heavy shadows on the face. (During registration, the flash is not used.) ■■If the camera seems to have difficulty recognising faces when recording ••Register additional pictures of the same person’s face, indoors and outdoors or with different expressions or angles. ••Register additional pictures at the place you are recording. ••If a registered person is no longer recognised, re-register that person. 1 2 Use to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET] Use to select [New] and then press [MENU/SET] •• If 6 people are already registered, first delete a registered person. (→164) 3 163 1 New 2 3 5 6 KEN 4 Align the face with the guide and record •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets) cannot be registered. •• When is pressed, an explanation is displayed. SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.] 4 Use to select the item for editing and press [MENU/SET] [Name] Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET] Enter the name (See “Entering Text”: (→52)) [Age] Set the birthdate. Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET] Use to select year, month and day, set with [MENU/SET] [Add Images] , and press Up to 3 face pictures of the person can be registered. Use to select [Add] and press [MENU/SET] •• If only one picture is registered, you can skip the cursor button operation. Just press [MENU/SET] to register an additional face picture. •• When a registered face picture is selected with cursor button, a screen to confirm deletion is displayed. Select [Yes] to delete the face picture. (If only one picture is registered, it cannot be deleted.) Record the picture (step 3 (→163)) Editing or deleting information about registered persons Information about registered people can be edited or deleted. 1 Use to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET] 2 3 Use to select the picture of the person to be edited or deleted and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] [Info Edit] 164 Edit name or other registered information. (Step 4 above) [Priority] Set priority order for focus and exposure. Use to select the registration order and press [MENU/SET] [Delete] Delete information and face pictures of registered persons. •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Setting the profile for a baby or pet to record in a picture Recording mode: You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the name or age in months/years in the picture. ■■Setting the name and age in months/years Set the menu → [Rec] → [Profile Setup] Settings: [ ] ([Baby1]) / [ ] ([Baby2]) / [ ] ([Pet]) / [OFF] / [SET] Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET] Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET] Use to select [Age] or [Name] and then press [MENU/SET] Use to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET] Age: Set birthday with , and press [MENU/SET] Name: (See “Entering Text”: (→52)) Use to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to finish ■■Cancelling the display of the name and age in months/years Select [OFF] in step . ●●[Age] and [Name] print setting can be made on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD. Text may also be stamped onto the still picture using [Text Stamp]. Not available in the following case: ●●You cannot record the name or age in months/years in still pictures that are taken while recording motion pictures ([ 165 ] (motion picture priorities)) (→198). SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions Checking the area where overexposure may occur ([Zebra Pattern]) Recording mode: You can check the area in a picture that is brighter than a certain brightness, which could result in overexposure, by displaying such an area using a zebra pattern. You can also set the brightness to be represented by the zebra pattern. → [Custom] → [Zebra Pattern] [ZEBRA1] Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a right-leaning zebra pattern. [ZEBRA2] Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a left-leaning zebra pattern. [OFF] — Sets the brightness to be displayed for each zebra pattern. [Zebra 1] / [Zebra 2] [SET] 166 1 Use to select the brightness and then press [MENU/SET] •• The range of brightness you can select from is [50%] to [105%]. The [OFF] setting is available for [Zebra 2]. When [100%] or [105%] is selected, only the overexposed areas are displayed with the zebra pattern. When a smaller numeric value is set, the range of brightness to be displayed by each zebra pattern will increase. SQW0024 Functions for specific subjects and purposes Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions ●●If there is overexposure, we recommend taking pictures using a lower exposure value (→135), using the histogram (→64) as a guideline. ●●The displayed zebra pattern is not recorded. ●●If you set [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (→37) in the [Custom] menu, every time you press the assigned function button the setting will switch in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra 2] → [Zebra OFF]. When [ZEBRA2] is set to [OFF], you can switch the setting quickly in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra OFF]. Setting a monochrome display for the recording screen ([Monochrome Live View]) Recording mode: You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is useful when a black and white screen will make it easier to adjust focus in Manual Focus mode. → [Custom] → [Monochrome Live View] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] ••This does not affect recorded pictures. 167 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Correcting jitter Recording mode: Automatically detects and prevents jitter. 1 Set the menu 2 Use → (Normal) [Rec] → [Stabilizer] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] Corrects vertical and horizontal jitter. (Panning) Corrects vertical jitter. This setting is ideal for panning (technique of recording a subject by matching the camera movement with the movement of a subject going in a specific direction). [OFF] [Stabilizer] does not work. To prevent jitter If a warning is displayed about jitter, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, or [Self Timer]. In some cases, jitter can be reduced by using a higher setting for [Sensitivity]. 168 Jitter alert display 50i SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Correcting jitter ●●When you use a tripod, we recommend setting [Stabilizer] to [OFF]. ●●To perform a panning by selecting [ ], we recommend taking pictures using the viewfinder. ●●Cases where the stabiliser function may be ineffective: •• When there is a lot of jitter •• When the zoom magnification is high (also in the Digital Zoom range) •• When taking pictures while following a moving subject •• When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places ●●The panning effect by selecting [ ] is not fully achieved in the following cases: •• Bright summer days or other bright locations •• When the shutter speed is higher than 1/100 seconds •• When the motion of a subject is slow and the speed with which the camera is moved is too slow (a nice background blur is not achieved) •• When the camera is not adequately tracking the motion of a subject Not available in the following case: ●●[Stabilizer] cannot be used by selecting [ 169 ] (Normal) during panorama picture recording. SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom Recording mode: You can adjust the area of a picture to be taken using zoom. Zoom lever Move the zoom lever Control ring Turn the control ring* * You can perform zoom operation by assigning the [Zoom] setting to the control ring. (→40) T side : Telephoto, Enlarge the subject W side : Wide-angle, Capture a wider area Clockwise: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject Counterclockwise: Wide-angle, Capture a wider area The illustration is an example of when using Optical Zoom, [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] in [Program AE] Mode. Focus range Optical Zoom range i.Zoom range Digital Zoom range Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera) ●●Do not touch the lens barrel during zooming. ●●Adjust the focus after adjusting the zoom. ●●The zoom ratio and the zoom bar displayed on the screen are estimates. ●●The camera may make a rattling noise and vibrate when the zoom lever is operated - this is not a malfunction. 170 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom Zoom types and use The zoom ratio changes when the picture size is changed. Optical Zoom You can zoom in without degrading the picture quality. Maximum magnification: 3.1x Not available in the following case: •• During panorama picture recording Extra optical zoom This function works when picture sizes with [ ] have been selected in [Picture Size] (→108). Extra optical zoom allows you to zoom in using a higher zoom ratio than Optical Zoom, without degrading the picture quality. Maximum magnification: 6.2x (Including the optical zoom ratio. This maximum zoom ratio varies depending on the picture size.) Not available in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Toy Effect], [Toy Pop]) •• During panorama picture recording •• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON] •• When [iHDR] is set to [ON] ], [ ] or [ ] •• When the [Quality] setting is set to [ •• During motion picture recording 171 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom To increase the zoom ratio further, the following zoom can be used in combination. [i.Zoom] Recording mode: You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio up to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality. → [Rec] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF] → [Motion Picture] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF] Not available in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop]) •• During panorama picture recording •• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set •• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON] •• When [iHDR] is set to [ON] ], [ ] or [ ] •• When the [Quality] setting is set to [ 172 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom [Digital Zoom] Recording mode: Zoom 4x further than Optical/Extra optical zoom. Note that, with Digital Zoom, enlarging will decrease picture quality. → [Rec] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF] → [Motion Picture] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF] ●●When [Digital Zoom] is used simultaneously with [i.Zoom], you can only increase the zoom ratio up to 2x. ●●When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (→148) for taking pictures. ●●The AF area is largely displayed at the centre in the Digital Zoom range. Not available in the following cases: •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect]) •• During panorama picture recording •• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH] •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Multi Exp.] is set ], [ ] or [ ] •• When the [Quality] setting is set to [ 173 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom [Step Zoom] Recording mode: You can set the zoom operation to allow easy visualisation of the angle of view (picture angle) for the focal length of a regular fixed focal length lens (as with a 35 mm film camera). When using the [Step Zoom], you can operate the zoom ratio as easily as changing the camera lens. 1 Turn the control ring (→39) Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera) ■■Using the zoom lever for [Step Zoom] You can use the zoom lever for [Step Zoom] by setting [Zoom lever] to [Step Zoom] in the [Custom] menu. ●●The focal length values are for reference only. Not available in the following case: •• During motion picture recording 174 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Using Zoom Changing the zoom operation settings → [Custom] → [Zoom lever] → [Custom] → [Control Ring] Zoom Step Zoom The zoom operates in the normal way. Each time zoom is operated, the zoom stops at the position for one of the preset focal lengths. Retaining the zoom position when the camera is turned off → 175 [Custom] → [Zoom Resume] → [ON] / [OFF] SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Recording mode: When the flash (supplied) is attached, you can use all flash modes ([MANUAL] setting, etc.) available for this unit. (Note, however, that this flash cannot be used as a wireless flash unit.) This section describes how to take a picture using the flash (supplied). ••For details on how to take a picture using the external flash (optional), refer to (→291). With the flash you can take pictures in dark places or adjust the entire contrast of a picture by illuminating a subject with a bright background. Attaching the flash The hot shoe cover is already attached to the hot shoe at the time of purchase. Attach the flash to the hot shoe after removing the hot shoe cover. Removing the hot shoe cover ••Make sure that the Camera [ON/OFF] switch is set to [OFF]. 1 Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction indicated by arrow while pressing it in the direction indicated by arrow •• Be sure to attach the hot shoe cover when the hot shoe is not in use. •• Keep the hot shoe cover safely after removing it so that you do not lose it. Attaching the flash 1 2 Turn off the flash Hot shoe Firmly insert the flash into the hot shoe of this unit until it clicks •• Set the Camera [ON/OFF] switch to [ON] and turn on the flash when you take a picture. Flash [ON/OFF] switch ●●Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing. ●●Do not carry the camera holding by the flash when the flash is mounted on the camera. 176 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) ■■Removing the flash Turn off the camera and the flash Press and hold the lock release button and pull the flash in the direction indicated by the arrow to detach the flash Lock release button •• When detaching the flash, do so slowly and carefully. •• Attach the hot shoe cover to the hot shoe of the camera. •• Store the detached flash in its soft case. About [Forced Flash Off] ([ ]) [ ] (Forced Flash Off) will appear on the recording screen and the flash will not fire in the following cases. Communication light emission with a wireless flash is also disabled. (→184) ••When the flash is not attached to the camera ••When the flash [ON/OFF] switch is set to [OFF] even if the flash is attached ••When the flash cannot be used to take pictures, for example, when recording motion pictures ■■The available flash range when [Sensitivity] setting is [AUTO] Edges of picture may become slightly dark if using flash at short distances without using zoom (close to max. W). This may be remedied by using a little zoom. Max. Wide Approx. 60 cm - 14.1 m (1.97 feet - 46 feet)* Max. Tele Approx. 30 cm - 8.5 m (0.98 feet - 27.9 feet)* * When the flash (supplied) is attached and [ISO Limit Set] is [OFF]. 177 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) How to use the flash effectively Taking a picture using the flash with the subject too close may cause overexposure. When you set [Highlight] in the [Custom] menu to [ON], the overexposed areas will flash black and white during [Auto Review] or playback. If that happens, we recommend taking the picture again, for example, after setting a lower flash output using [Flash Adjust.] (→183). ●●Do not put your hands over the light-emitting area of the flash or look at it from close range. Do not use the flash at close distances to other subjects (heat/light may damage subject). ●●Flash charging may take time if battery is low or if using flash repeatedly. When the flash is being charged, the flash icon flashes red, and you cannot take a picture even when you fully press the shutter button. ●●The flash is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off) in following cases: •• During motion picture recording •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set •• During panorama picture recording •• When using the electronic shutter •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] 178 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Changing the firing mode (Manual flash) Recording mode: You can select whether the flash output is set automatically or manually. 1 Set the menu → 2 Use [Rec] → [Flash] → [Firing Mode] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] [TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output. [MANUAL] You can set the flash ratio manually. Using [TTL] allows you to take a picture as intended, even for dark scenes where the flash output tends to be higher. ●●When [MANUAL] is selected, the flash ratio (e.g. [1/1]) is displayed with the flash icon on the screen. ■■Setting the flash ratio (When [MANUAL] is selected) Set the menu → [Rec] → [Flash] → [Manual Flash Adjust.] Press to select an item and press [MENU/SET] •• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64] in 1/3 steps. 179 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Changing Flash Mode Recording mode: Set the flash to match the recording. 1 Set the menu → 2 Press [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Mode] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] : [Forced Flash On] : [Forced On/Red-Eye]* : [Slow Sync.] : [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]* : [Forced Flash Off] Always takes pictures using the flash. •• Ideal for taking pictures with a backlight or when a subject is located under bright lighting such as a fluorescent light. Takes brighter pictures such as pictures of subjects against a nightscape by decreasing the shutter speed when firing a flash. •• Ideal for taking pictures of people against a nightscape. Always takes pictures without flash under all recording conditions. •• Ideal for taking pictures where the use of flash is prohibited. * This is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→184) and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL] (→179). Two flashes will be emitted. Do not move until after the second flash. Interval between flashes varies according to brightness of subject. •• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors such as distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera during the preliminary flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible. ■■Reducing red-eye Recording mode: Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash red-eye reduction ([ ], [ ]). → [Rec] → [Red-Eye Removal] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] ●●When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [ ]/[ ]. Not available in the following case: ●●Depending on the circumstance, it may not be possible to correct red-eye. 180 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) ■■Shutter speeds for each flash mode Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds) Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds) 1/60*1 - 1/4000 1 - 1/16000 120*2 - 1/16000 *1 The shutter speed is set to 60 seconds in [Shutter-Priority] Mode and to T (time) in [Manual Exposure] Mode. *2 The shutter speed is set to T (time) in [Manual Exposure] Mode. ••In [Intelligent Auto] Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene. ■■Flash settings for each Recording Mode (When the flash (supplied) is attached) (○: Available, –: Not available) Recording Mode [Intelligent Auto] Mode –* –* –* –* ○ [Program AE] Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [Aperture-Priority] Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [Shutter-Priority] Mode ○ ○ – – ○ [Manual Exposure] Mode ○ ○ – – ○ * You cannot perform flash settings using the [Rec] menu. Set to [ depending on the subject and brightness. ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] ●●Flash settings may be changed when changing Recording Mode. ●●Flash settings will be retained even if the camera is turned off. 181 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Setting the 2nd curtain sync Recording mode: 2nd curtain sync is a recording method in which the flash fires just before the shutter closes when you take a picture of a moving subject (such as a car) using the flash with a slow shutter speed. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Synchro] Press to select the setting item and press [MENU/SET] [1ST] 1st curtain sync is the normal recording method when using the flash. [2ND] The light source is captured in back of the subject and this produces a picture that is vibrant and lively. ●●Normally, set to [1ST]. ●●If you set to [2ND], [2nd] will be displayed in the flash icon on the screen. ●●[2ND] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF]. (→184) ●●The [Flash Synchro] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied flash is used. (→291) ●●When a fast shutter speed is set, the [Flash Synchro] effect may not be sufficiently achieved. ●●When [2ND] is set, you cannot set the flash setting to [ ] or [ ]. 182 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Adjusting the flash output Recording mode: Adjust the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or too dark. 1 Set the menu → 2 Press [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Adjust.] to set the flash output and press [MENU/SET] Settings: -3 EV to +3 EV (unit: 1/3 EV) When you do not want to adjust the intensity of the flash, select [±0 EV]. ●●When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash icon. ●●[Flash Adjust.] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→184) and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL] (→179). ●●The [Flash Adjust.] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied flash is used. (→291) Synchronising the flash output with the camera during Exposure Compensation Recording mode: The flash output is automatically adjusted in accordance with the exposure compensation value. → [Rec] → [Flash] → [Auto Exposure Comp.] Settings: [ON] / [OFF] ●●About Exposure Compensation (→135) ●●The [Auto Exposure Comp.] setting functions even when an external flash other than the supplied flash is used. (→291) 183 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) Performing wireless flash settings Recording mode: When you use the flashes (optional: DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L) with the wireless flash recording function, you can separately control the firing of the flashes in three groups and of the flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera. Although the flash (supplied) is not equipped with the wireless flash recording function, it can be attached to the hot shoe of this unit and you can control the firing of the wireless flash. ■■Positioning the wireless flash Position the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera. The following illustration is an example of the range within which the flash can be positioned. The flash controllable range varies depending on the surrounding environment. Flash controllable range Example of positioning flashes (when a supplied flash is attached) 3 m (9.8 feet) 2m (6.6 feet) 3m (9.8 feet) 2m (6.6 feet) ••This flash positioning example shows a case where flash unit C is positioned in order to eliminate the shadows from the subject’s background, which is produced by flash unit A and flash unit B of the flash group. ••For the number of wireless flashes to be controlled, we recommend setting up to three flash units in each group. ••When a subject is too close, the communication light emission may affect the exposure of the picture. This problem can be mitigated if you decrease the flash output by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or using a flash diffuser or similar device. Preparation Attach a supplied flash or an optional flash (DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L) to this unit. 1 184 Set the wireless flash to RC mode and position the flash •• Select the channel and group of the wireless flash. SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) 2 Set the menu 3 Press 4 Press to select [Wireless Channel] and press [MENU/SET] Press to select the channel and press [MENU/SET] 5 6 7 → [Rec] → [Flash] → [Wireless] to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET] •• When [Wireless] is set to [ON], [WL] will appear with the flash icon on the recording screen. •• To perform detailed settings for the wireless flash, perform the following settings from the [Flash]. Firing Mode Flash output •• Select the same channel as the channel set for the wireless flash in step 1. Press to select [Wireless Setup] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] •• Press the [DISP.] button to perform a test firing. [External Flash] [A Group]/ [B Group]/ [C Group] Luminosity ratio [Firing Mode] [TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output. [AUTO]*: Sets the flash output using an external flash. [MANUAL]: Manually sets the flash ratio of an external flash. [OFF]: An external flash fires only for a communication light emission. [Flash Adjust.] Adjusts the flash output of an external flash manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL]. [Manual Flash Adjust.] Sets the flash ratio of an external flash when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL]. •• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64] in 1/3 steps. [Firing Mode] [TTL]: The camera automatically sets the wireless flash output. [AUTO]: S ets the flash output using the wireless flash. [MANUAL]: Manually sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash. [OFF]: The wireless flashes of the set group do not fire. [Flash Adjust.] Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL]. [Manual Flash Adjust.] Sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL]. •• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/64] in 1/3 steps. * When the flash (supplied) is attached to this unit, you cannot perform these settings. 185 SQW0024 Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash Taking pictures using the flash (supplied) ■■Setting the communication light emission to be used when wireless flash recording is performed → [Rec] → [Flash] → [Communication Light] Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] 186 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard, as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in MP4. (→194) Audio is recorded in stereo. Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate Recording mode: 1 Set the menu 2 Use 3 4 187 → [Motion Picture] → [Rec Format] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] [AVCHD] This is a data format suitable for playback on high-definition TVs. [MP4] This data format is suited for playing back motion pictures on a computer and other such devices. Use to select [Rec Quality] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] •• Exit the menu after it is executed. SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures When [AVCHD] is selected Item [FHD/28M/50p]* Picture size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate 1920×1080 50p 50 fps Approx. 28 Mbps [FHD/17M/50i] 1920×1080 50i 50 fps Approx. 17 Mbps [FHD/24M/25p] 1920×1080 50i 25 fps Approx. 24 Mbps [FHD/24M/24p] 1920×1080 24p 24 fps Approx. 24 Mbps * AVCHD Progressive When [MP4] is selected Picture size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate [4K/100M/25p] Item 3840×2160 25p 25 fps Approx. 100 Mbps [4K/100M/24p] 3840×2160 24p 24 fps Approx. 100 Mbps [FHD/28M/50p] 1920×1080 50p 50 fps Approx. 28 Mbps [FHD/20M/25p] 1920×1080 25p 25 fps Approx. 20 Mbps [HD/10M/25p] 1280×720 25p 25 fps Approx. 10 Mbps [VGA/4M/25p] 640×480 25p 25 fps Approx. 4 Mbps ••What is bit rate Bit rate is the volume of data for a definite period of time, and the quality becomes higher when the number gets bigger. This unit uses the “VBR” recording method. “VBR” is an abbreviation of “Variable Bit Rate”, and the bit rate (volume of data for definite period of time) is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast movement is recorded. 188 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures ■■About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MP4] may be played back with poor picture or sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed properly. In this case, use this unit. ••When you import and play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/50p], [FHD/24M/25p], or [FHD/24M/24p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit, a compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is required. ••For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p] in the [MP4] format, refer to “Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→274). Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures ([Continuous AF]) Recording mode: Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→114) and the setting of [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu. [Focus] [AFS]/[AFF]/ [AFC] [MF] [Continuous AF] Setting [ON] Allow the focus to be constantly adjusted automatically while recording motion pictures. (→114) [OFF] Fix focus position at the start of motion picture recording. [ON] / [OFF] Allow the focus to be adjusted manually. (→128) ••When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC], the camera will refocus if the shutter button is pressed halfway while recording motion pictures. ••When Auto Focus is activated while you are recording motion pictures, the focusing operation sound may be recorded under some conditions. If you want to suppress this sound, we recommend taking pictures after setting [Continuous AF] to [OFF] in the [Motion Picture] menu. ••When using zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take some time to focus. 189 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Recording mode: You can record motion pictures by manually setting the aperture value and shutter speed. (→80) The camera automatically sets the aperture value and shutter speed and identifies the optimal scene to record motion pictures in [Intelligent Auto] Mode. (→76) 1 Press the motion picture button to start recording •• Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it. •• While you are recording motion pictures, the recording status indicator (red) will flash. •• If you do not perform any operation for approximately 1 minute or longer, some of the information on the screen is turned off. To display the information again, press the [DISP.] button. This operation takes place to prevent screen burn-in. This is not a malfunction. •• Do not block the microphones when recording motion pictures. •• You can also use zoom while recording motion pictures. –– The operating sounds of the zoom lever or control ring may be recorded in some cases. •• Still pictures can be taken during motion picture recording. (→198) 2 Press the motion picture button again to end recording Recording state indicator Elapsed recording time Remaining recording time (approx.) 190 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures About the aperture value and shutter speed to be used for recording motion pictures ●●About aperture value ••To record motion pictures with a sharp focus on both subject and background, set the aperture value to a higher number. To record motion pictures with a defocused background, set a lower number. ●●About the shutter speed ••To record a sharp motion picture of a fast-moving subject, set a faster shutter speed. To record a motion picture with a trailing effect for a subject’s movements, set a slower shutter speed. ••When you set a faster shutter speed, the screen noise may increase due to the higher sensitivity. ••When you record a subject under fluorescent or LED lighting fixtures, etc., the colours and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen. If this happens, we recommend manually adjusting the shutter speed to 1/60 seconds or 1/100 seconds. About operation sound when recording ends Since motion pictures are recorded until the motion picture button is pressed to stop recording, the operating sound level in the picture may be higher. To suppress this sound, we recommend trying the following method. ●●Divide the end part of a motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214) in the [Playback] menu. In some cases, motion pictures cannot be divided at a position close to the end part of the motion picture. To avoid this problem, continue recording for an extra 3 seconds. 191 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Enabling/disabling the motion picture button → [Custom] → [Video Button] → [ON] / [OFF] ●●This function prevents incorrect operation of the button. Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures and motion pictures → [Custom] → [Rec Area] → (Picture) / (Motion picture) ●●If the aspect ratio is different for still pictures and motion pictures, the angle of view will change when starting to record a motion picture. When you set [Rec Area] to [ ], the angle of view setting used for recording motion pictures is displayed. ●●[Rec Area] should be interpreted as a guideline. 192 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures ●●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera. ●●If Extra optical zoom is used before pressing the motion picture button, these settings will be cleared, and the recordable area will be changed significantly. ●●Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion picture, operation noise may be recorded. ●●The zoom speed will be slower than normal during motion picture recording. ●●The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly. ●●Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. ●●If you stop recording motion pictures too soon when you have set picture effect (Filter) of [Miniature Effect], the camera may continue recording for a certain time. Hold the camera until the camera stops recording. ●●[ISO Limit Set] is disabled when you are recording motion pictures. ●●Even if you set [Stabilizer] to [ ] (Panning) when you are recording motion pictures, it is fixed to [ ] (Normal). ●●It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) when recording motion pictures. (→292) ●●If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor and the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not be recorded. Not available in the following cases: ●●Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases: •• During panorama picture recording •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect]*, [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine]) * Only when recording motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K] •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] 193 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Recording 4K motion pictures Recording mode: You can record high-resolution 4K motion pictures by setting [Rec Quality] to [4K]. ••To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→25) ••When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion pictures of other sizes. ■■To record 4K motion pictures Select the recording mode (→59) Set the [Rec Format] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [MP4] (→187) Set [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [4K/100M/25p] or [4K/100M/24p] (→188) Press the motion picture button to start recording Press the motion picture button again to end recording 194 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Creating a high-resolution still picture from a 4K motion picture [4K PHOTO] You can create a still picture with approximately 8 megapixel resolution from a 4K motion picture recorded by setting [4K PHOTO]. You can create a still picture that captures a moment, similar to high-speed burst recording. This setting is not available in [Intelligent Auto] Mode. Recording 4K motion pictures ••To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→25) 1 Set the menu → 2 Press [Motion Picture] → [4K PHOTO] to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET] A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• The appropriate motion picture mode for capturing a still picture from a 4K motion picture is selected and the motion picture can be recorded using still picture quality. •• Since the camera puts higher priority on the focus of a still picture captured from a 4K motion picture, focusing movement during motion picture recording may be noticeable. The camera will automatically perform the following setting items. Menu [Rec Format] [Rec Quality] 3 195 Press [ Item [MP4] [4K/100M/25p] ] button to display the recording screen SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures 4 Turn the aperture ring and shutter speed dial to set the recording mode 5 Operate the aspect ratio selector switch to set the aspect ratio for a motion picture •• We recommend setting [Shutter-Priority] Mode and setting the shutter speed to 1/1000 seconds or higher to minimise subject blur. To record a subject that is moving quickly, set the shutter speed to 1/2000 seconds or higher. •• The aspect ratio of a still picture captured from a 4K motion picture is the same as the aspect ratio of the motion picture. 6 Press the motion picture button to start recording •• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion pictures of other sizes. Setting a marker ●●When you press the [Fn2] button while recording, you can add a marker to the motion picture. ●●When you create still pictures from a motion picture, you can quickly move to a marker position you want to capture as a still picture. ●●You can add up to 40 markers in a single motion picture. 7 196 Press the motion picture button again to end recording •• Motion picture recording can also be started or finished by pressing the shutter button. SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Recording motion pictures Creating still pictures from a motion picture 1 Display the picture that you want to capture as a still picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being played back on the camera •• You can press to perform single-frame forward/rewind operations. , you can quickly •• When you press the [Fn2] button and press move to the marker position you set while recording the motion picture. (You can perform the same operation even during motion picture playback.) If you press the [Fn2] button again, you can perform single-frame . forward/rewind operations by pressing 2 Fn2 Press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. •• [ ] is displayed for a captured still picture. ●●If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF]. 197 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded Recording mode: Still pictures can be recorded even while a motion picture is being recorded. (Simultaneous recording) 1 Press the shutter button fully during the motion picture recording ••When you take a still picture, the simultaneous still/motion picture recording icon is displayed. Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode Recording mode: You can use [Picture Mode] in the [Motion Picture] menu to set the recording method of a still picture to be taken while you record a motion picture. (motion picture priorities) (Still picture priorities) •• Takes a still picture using [Picture Size] [S] (2M). The picture quality may be different to [S] (2M) of standard pictures. ], [ ], •• Only pictures in JPEG file format are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ or [ ]. ([Quality] is used with the [ ] setting when [ ] is set.) •• You can take up to 30 still pictures while you are recording a motion picture. •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set to [Miniature Effect], a still picture may be taken with a slight delay from the time you fully press the shutter button. •• A still picture is taken with [Picture Size] and [Quality] that you have set. •• While a still picture is being taken, the screen turns black. During this period, the still picture is taken in the motion picture and the audio is muted. •• You can take up to 4 still pictures while you are recording a motion picture. ●●The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9]. Not available in the following cases: ●●Still pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases: •• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/25p], [4K/100M/24p], or [VGA/4M/25p] •• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD], [Rec Quality] is set to [FHD/24M/24p] (only available with [ ] ([Photo Priority]) setting) 198 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Using the [Motion Picture] menu For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→31). ••The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. ••[Motion Picture] menu will not be displayed in the following cases: –– During panorama picture recording [4K PHOTO] ••For details (→195). [Rec Format] ••For details (→187). [Rec Quality] ••For details (→187). [Picture Mode] ••For details (→198). [Continuous AF] ••For details (→189). 199 SQW0024 Recording motion pictures Using the [Motion Picture] menu For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→31). [Mic Level Disp.] Recording mode: You can set whether or not to display the microphone level on the recording screen. Settings: [ON] / [OFF] Not available in the following case: ●●When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect]) [Mic Level Adj.] Recording mode: You can adjust the audio input level in 4 steps. Not available in the following case: ●●When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect]) [Wind Cut] Recording mode: If you hear wind noise during an audio recording, you can use [Wind Cut] to effectively reduce the wind noise. Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF] ●●When [Wind Cut] is set, the sound quality may differ from that of normal recordings. Not available in the following case: ●●When the picture effect (Filter) is set ([Miniature Effect]) 200 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Viewing the group picture You can consecutively play back multiple pictures in a group or play back group pictures one by one. ]: Group pictures recorded consecutively by setting [ [Burst Rate] to [SH] (→142) 15 pic. [ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Time Lapse Shot] (→153) [ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion Animation] (→156) ••You can delete or edit pictures in group units. (For example, if you delete one of pictures in a group, all pictures in that group will be deleted.) Playing back group pictures consecutively 1 Select a picture with the group picture icon ([ and press ], [ ], or [ ]), •• When you play back group pictures one by one, the option settings are displayed. [From the first picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the first picture in a group. [From the current picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the picture currently played back. ■■Operations during continuous playback 201 Continuous playback / Pause Stop Fast rewind playback Fast forward playback Returning to the previous picture (while paused) Scrolling to the next picture (while paused) SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Viewing the group picture Playing back group pictures one by one 1 Select a picture with the submenu icon ([ press 2 Use to select [Display In Group] and press [MENU/SET] 3 Use ]), and •• The submenu screen will appear. Display In Group Upload(Wi-Fi) to scroll through the pictures •• When you use to select [Exit Display In Group] and press [MENU/SET] after pressing again, the normal playback screen reappears. •• You can use the same operations for pictures stored in a group as in normal still picture playback. (Multi Playback, Playback Zoom, deletion of pictures, etc.) ●●Pictures will not be grouped if they are recorded without setting [Clock Set]. ●●Burst pictures recorded on another device may not be recognised as group pictures. 202 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Capturing still pictures from motion pictures Save a scene from a motion picture as a still picture. ••For the method of capturing a still picture from a 4K motion picture recorded by setting [4K PHOTO] to [ON], refer to (→195). 1 Display the picture that you want to capture as a still picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being played back on the camera ••When you press while paused, you can perform fast forward/rewind operations. 2 Press [MENU/SET] ••A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. ••The still picture is saved with aspect ratio of [16:9] and [Quality] of [ ]. The picture size varies depending on the motion picture being played back. –– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K]: [M] (8M) –– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [FHD], [HD]: [S] (2M) ●●The picture quality becomes slightly lower depending on the [Rec Quality] setting of the original motion picture. ●●When a still picture captured from a motion picture is played back, [ ] is displayed. ●●If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF]. Not available in the following case: ●●You cannot capture a still picture from the following motion pictures. •• Motion pictures recorded in [MP4] using the [VGA/4M/25p] setting 203 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures you have taken. ••For the setting procedures of the menu. (→31) ●●In the following cases, new pictures are created after they have been edited. Before starting to edit, make sure that there is enough free space in the memory card. •• [RAW Processing] •• [Text Stamp] •• [Time Lapse Video] •• [Stop Motion Video] •• [Resize] •• [Cropping] ●●It may not be possible to set or edit pictures taken with other cameras. [Slide Show] Automatically play pictures in order. Recommended when viewing on TV screen. 1 Set the menu → 2 Use 3 Use [Playback] → [Slide Show] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] •• When you select [Category Selection], use to select category and press [MENU/SET]. For details about category, refer to (→206). to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET] ■■Operations during Slide Show Pause/Play Stop Previous Control dial (counterclockwise) 204 Volume down Next Control dial (clockwise) Volume up SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu ■■To change settings such as music or display time Select [Effect] or [Setup] and then press [MENU/SET]. [Effect] [Setup] [AUTO] / [NATURAL] / [SLOW] / [SWING] / [URBAN] / [OFF] [Duration] [1SEC] / [2SEC] / [3SEC] / [5SEC] [Repeat] [ON] / [OFF] [Sound] [OFF]: Music and audio will not play back. [AUTO]: W ith still pictures, music will play back, and with motion pictures, audio will play back. [Music]: Music effect will play back. [Audio]: Audio is played back from motion pictures. ●●When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect. ●●[AUTO] can be used only when [Category Selection] is selected. The pictures are played back with the recommended effects for each category. ●●When you perform a Slide Show playback by setting [Video Only] or [Category Selection] to [ ], [ ], or [ ], [Effect] is fixed to [OFF]. ●●When you perform a Slide Show playback for a group picture, and even if [Effect] is set, the effects are disabled. ●●When panorama pictures, motion pictures, or group pictures are played back, the [Duration] setting is disabled. ●●[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to [OFF]. ●●Part of [Effect] cannot be used when displaying pictures on television using an HDMI micro cable or when displaying pictures recorded in portrait position. ●●Music effects cannot be added. 205 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Playback Mode] Recorded pictures can be played back in a variety of ways. 1 Set the menu → 2 Use [Playback] → [Playback Mode] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] When selecting [Category Play] in step 2 above 3 Use to select the category and press [MENU/SET] •• The available categories are as follows. [Face Recog.]* [i-Portrait], [i-Night Portrait], [i-Baby] in Automatic Scene Detection [i-Scenery], [i-Sunset] in Automatic Scene Detection [i-Night Portrait], [i-Night Scenery], [i-Handheld Night Shot] in Automatic Scene Detection [i-Food] in Automatic Scene Detection [Travel Date] A burst of pictures recorded by setting [Burst Rate] to [SH] [Time Lapse Shot], [Time Lapse Video] [Stop Motion Animation], [Stop Motion Video] * Use to select a person to be played back and press [MENU/SET]. Face Recognition is applied for all the pictures in the group. ●●[Playback Mode] automatically changes to [Normal Play] when the camera is turned on, or when switching from the recording standby screen to the playback screen. ●●The category for recording motion pictures is different from the category of still pictures used in some Recording Modes. For that reason, the pictures may not be played back. 206 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Location Logging] After you send location information (latitude and longitude) obtained by your smartphone/ tablet to this unit, you can write this information on pictures using the unit. Preparation Send location information to this unit from your smartphone/tablet. (→237) •• You must install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone/tablet. (→228) 1 Set the menu 2 Use to select a period for writing location information, and then press [MENU/SET] → [Playback] → [Location Logging] → [Add Location Data] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it. •• [ ■■Abort writing location information Press [MENU/SET] while location information is being written •• [ ] is displayed for the period of the abort operation. If selected again while [ ] is displayed, writing location information will resume where it left off. ■■Delete received location information Use to select [Delete Location Data] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select a period for deleting location information, and then press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ●●Location information can be written only to pictures recorded with this unit. Not available in the following cases: ●●Location information may not be written if there is not enough free space on your card. ●●The location information will not be written on pictures that were recorded after you sent the location information (→237). ●●Location information will not be written to AVCHD motion pictures. ●●The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock Set]. Writing the location information using a smartphone/tablet When you use your smartphone/tablet as a remote controller for this unit, you can write the location information on pictures using the smartphone/tablet. (→238) 207 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [RAW Processing] You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format. The created still pictures are saved in JPEG format. You can develop the pictures while confirming the effects on the screen. 1 Set the menu → 2 3 [Playback] → [RAW Processing] Press to select RAW file and press [MENU/SET] Press to select the item •• The following items can be set. The settings used during recording are applied at the time of setting. 208 [White Balance] You can select White Balance to make adjustments. When you select an item with [ ], you can develop the pictures using the same settings that were applied for recording. [Exposure Comp.] You can perform Exposure Compensation in the range from –1 EV to +1 EV. [Photo Style] You can select the [Photo Style] effects ([Standard], [Vivid], [Natural], [Monochrome], [Scenery], or [Portrait]). [i.Dynamic] You can select the [i.Dynamic] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], or [OFF]). [Contrast] You can adjust the contrast. [Highlight] You can adjust the brightness of a highlighted area. [Shadow] You can adjust the brightness of a shadowed area. [Saturation] / [Color Tone] You can adjust the saturation. (You can adjust the colouring when [Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style].) [Filter Effect] You can select a Filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style]) [Noise Reduction] You can set noise reduction. [i.Resolution] You can select the [i.Resolution] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], [EXTENDED], or [OFF]). [Sharpness] You can adjust the impression of resolution. [Setup] You can perform the following settings. [Reinstate Adjustments]: You can restore the settings to the ones used during recording. [Color Space]: You can select [Color Space] from either [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. [Picture Size]: You can select the picture size ([L], [M], or [S]) of a JPEG file when saving pictures. SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu 4 Press [MENU/SET] to set 5 Press [MENU/SET] 6 Press •• The setting methods vary depending on the item. For details, refer to “Setting each item”. •• The screen in step 3 reappears. To set another item, repeat steps 3 to 5. to select [Begin Processing] and press [MENU/SET] •• Confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. ■■Setting each item When you select an item, the setting screen appears. Control dial Used to make adjustments Used to display the colour temperature setting screen (→105) (Only when [White Balance] is set to [ ]) Used to display the White Balance fine adjustment screen (→105) (Only when [White Balance] is set) [DISP.] [MENU/SET] Used to display the comparison screen Used to finalise an adjustment you just made and to return to the item selection screen ••If you have selected [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the comparison screen is not displayed. ••Pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever. The following operating methods are available to make adjustments on the comparison screen. Control dial [DISP.] [MENU/SET] Used to make adjustments Used to return to the setting screen Used to finalise an adjustment you just made and to return to the item selection screen Current setting 209 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu When [Setup] is selected When you select an item, the screen for selecting [Reinstate Adjustments], [Color Space], or [Picture Size] is displayed. Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] •• When [Reinstate Adjustments] is selected, confirmation screen is displayed. When you select [Yes], the item selection screen reappears. Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] ●●The result of a RAW file developed by this camera and a RAW file developed by the supplied DVD software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” will not be exactly the same. ●●The range that can be set using Exposure Compensation varies from the range used during recording. ●●The [White Balance] setting of still pictures recorded using [Multi Exp.] is fixed to the setting used during recording. ●●If [Red-Eye Removal] is activated during recording, you can use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu to save JPEG file pictures in which red-eye was detected and corrected. ●●You cannot perform RAW processing using multiple still pictures simultaneously. Not available in the following cases: ●●When an AV cable (optional) or an HDMI micro cable is connected, [RAW Processing] is disabled. ●●You can perform RAW processing on pictures recorded using this unit only. [RAW Processing] cannot be used for pictures recorded on other devices or for pictures recorded in formats other than the RAW format. 210 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Title Edit] You can enter characters (comments) on a recorded picture. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Title Edit] → [Single] or [Multi] Select a still picture [Single] Use Title Edit to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] [Multi] (up to 100 pictures) Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. •• To execute → Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]. 3 [Title Edit] setting OK [Title Edit] already set Enter characters (Entering text (→52)) •• To delete a title, delete all the characters in the character input screen. ●●To print text, use [Text Stamp] or “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD. Not available in the following cases: •• Motion pictures •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ 211 ], [ ] or [ ] SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Text Stamp] You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on the recorded still pictures. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Text Stamp] → [Single] or [Multi] Select a still picture [Single] Use Text Stamp to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] [Multi] (up to 100 pictures) Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] ( [Text Stamp] setting [Text Stamp] already set) •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. •• To execute → Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]. OK 3 4 5 6 7 212 Use to select [Set] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] (→213) Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] (→213) Press [ Use ] button to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET] •• Confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu ■■Items that can be stamped [Shooting Date] [Name] [W/O TIME]: Stamp recording date [WITH TIME]: Stamp recording date and time : Stamp name registered in Face Recognition : Stamp name registered in [Profile Setup] [Location] Stamp location registered in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date] [Travel Date] Stamp number of days that have elapsed since the travel date set in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date] [Title] Stamp text registered in [Title Edit] ••Items set to [OFF] are not stamped. ●●Do not request date printing in store or make date printing on printer for still pictures with date stamps. (Date printing may be overlapped.) ●●Characters may be cut off on certain printers. ●●If you stamp text on the pictures in a group, those pictures are saved as new pictures. ●●Text is difficult to read when stamped on pictures of 0.3M or less. Not available in the following cases: •• Motion pictures •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ] •• Panorama pictures •• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped •• Still pictures taken without setting clock 213 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Video Divide] A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. This is convenient when you want to keep just the necessary scenes, or if you wish to delete unnecessary scenes to increase free space on your card, such as when travelling. 1 Set the menu → [Playback] → [Video Divide] 2 3 Use to select a motion picture to split and press [MENU/SET] Press at where you want to split a motion picture to pause it 4 Press •• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments to the splitting positions in a motion picture. •• If you press again, the motion picture is played back from the last position prior to activating pause. •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. •• The original motion picture that was split does not remain. (There will only be the 2 motion pictures that were created after the split.) ●●During dividing, do not turn off the camera or remove the card or battery. If you do so, the motion picture may be deleted. ●●If you divide a motion picture recorded in [MP4] when the picture display sequence is set to [FILE NAME], the order of the pictures will change. It is recommended to set the display sequence to [DATE/TIME] or to display using [Calendar]. Not available in the following cases: ●●Motion pictures cannot be divided at a location close to the start or end of the motion picture. ●●Motion pictures with a short recording time cannot be divided. 214 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Time Lapse Video] You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format. 1 Set the menu → 2 3 [Playback] → [Time Lapse Video] Use to select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group and press [MENU/SET] Create a motion picture after selecting a production method •• The process is the same as that used to create a motion picture after recording pictures using [Time Lapse Shot]. For details, refer to step 5 and the subsequent steps (→154). For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→155). [Stop Motion Video] You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using [Stop Motion Animation]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format. 1 Set the menu → 2 3 215 Use [Playback] → [Stop Motion Video] to select a stop motion animation group and press [MENU/SET] Create a motion picture after selecting a production method •• The process is the same as that used to create a motion picture after recording pictures using [Stop Motion Animation]. For details, refer to step 8 and the subsequent steps (→157). For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→158). SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Resize] Picture size can be reduced to facilitate e-mail attachment and use in web pages, etc. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Resize] → [Single] or [Multi] Select a still picture and size [Single] Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] Use to select size and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. [Multi] (up to 100 pictures) Use to select size and press [MENU/SET] Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. OK •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. •• To execute → Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]. Resize setting ●●Picture quality is reduced after resizing. Not available in the following cases: ●●Still pictures recorded at the smallest recording pixel level cannot be further reduced. ●●Cannot resize the following pictures: •• Motion pictures •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ] •• Panorama pictures •• Group pictures •• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped 216 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Cropping] Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas. 1 Set the menu → 2 3 Use [Playback] → [Cropping] to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET] Select area to crop and press [MENU/SET] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. Expand Change position ●●Perform cropping for each picture in the group. (You cannot edit pictures in group units.) ●●If you crop a picture in the group, it is saved as a new picture. ●●Original Face Recognition information will not be copied when still pictures are cropped. ●●Picture quality is reduced after cropping. Not available in the following cases: •• Motion pictures •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ] •• Panorama pictures •• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped 217 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.] You can automatically display a still picture recorded in portrait orientation by taking the picture with the camera held vertically, or manually rotate the picture in 90-degree units. [Rotate] Rotating a picture manually ••You cannot select [Rotate] when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF]. 1 Set the menu → [Playback] → [Rotate] 2 Use 3 Use to select the rotation direction and press [MENU/SET] to select picture and press [MENU/SET] •• You cannot rotate group pictures. [ [ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise. ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise. [Rotate Disp.] 1 Rotating a picture automatically to display Set the menu → [Playback] → [Rotate Disp.] → [ON] •• When this function is set to [OFF], the picture is displayed without changing its orientation. Not available in the following cases: ●●When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association)”. ●●A picture may not be automatically rotated to display it with portrait orientation on the Multi Playback screen, which is displayed for settings such as [Delete Multi]. 218 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Favorite] By labelling your favourite pictures with a star [ ], you can play back your favourite pictures only, or you can delete all pictures except your favourites. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Favorite] → [Single] or [Multi] Select picture [Single] Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. Favourite picture setting [Multi] (up to 999 pictures) Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Favourite picture setting ■■To clear all In step 1, select [Favorite] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET] ●●When you set [Favorite] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the [Favorite] icon of the first picture. ●●Only when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play], you can select [Cancel]. Not available in the following case: •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ] 219 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Print Set] Picture/picture no./date printing settings can be made for when printing with DPOF print-compatible shops or printers. (Ask at the shop to check for compatibility.) 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Print Set] → [Single] or [Multi] Select a still picture [Single] Use to select still picture and press [MENU/SET] Count Date [Multi] Use to select still picture and press [MENU/SET] Count 3 Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 Date to set number of still pictures and press [MENU/SET] (Repeat steps 2 and 3 when using [Multi] (up to 999 pictures)) •• Date print setting/release → Press . ■■To clear all In step 1, select [Print Set] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET] ●●When you have performed [Print Set] for pictures in a group, printing settings are made for the total of number of pictures set in that group. If the total number of pictures is 1,000 or higher, [999+] is displayed. ●●When you perform [Print Set] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set and the total number of pictures are displayed with the Print Set icon of the first picture. ●●Date print setting cannot be made for pictures with a [Text Stamp] applied. ●●Depending on the type of printer, the printer settings may take priority over camera settings. ●●Some DPOF information (print settings) set by other equipment cannot be used. In such cases, delete all of the DPOF information and then set it again with this camera. Not available in the following cases: •• Motion pictures •• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ] •• Cannot be set for files that are not compliant with the DCF standard. 220 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Protect] Set protection to disable picture deletion. Prevents deletion of important pictures. 1 Set the menu → 2 [Playback] → [Protect] → [Single] or [Multi] Select picture [Single] Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. Picture protected [Multi] Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] •• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Picture protected ■■To clear all In step 1, select [Protect] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET] When you set the write-protect switch on the card to the “LOCK” position, the picture is not erased. ●●The picture is erased when formatting, even if it is protected. ●●May not be effective when using other devices. ●●When you set [Protect] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the [Protect] icon of the first picture. 221 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Face Rec Edit] Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with mistaken Face Recognition. 1 Set the menu → [Playback] → [Face Rec Edit] → [REPLACE] or [DELETE] 2 3 Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET] Use to select a person and press [MENU/SET] 4 5 Use •• If [DELETE], go to step 5. •• People whose Face Recognition information has not been registered cannot be selected. Use to select the person to replace for another and press [MENU/SET] to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET] ●●When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot be restored. ●●Pictures for which all Face Recognition information has been deleted are not categorised in Face Recognition during [Category Play] or [Category Selection]. ●●Edit the Face Recognition information in group units for a group picture. (You cannot edit the information for each picture in a group.) ●●You can edit only the first picture in a group. 222 SQW0024 Playing Back and Editing Pictures Using the [Playback] menu [Picture Sort] You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit. 1 Set the menu → 2 Use [Playback] → [Picture Sort] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] [FILE NAME] [DATE/TIME] Displays pictures in the folder name or file name sequence. This display format allows you to find the storage location of a picture on a card more easily. Displays pictures according to the date and time that the pictures were taken in chronological order. When the pictures are taken using several cameras and stored on the same card, this display format allows you find a specific picture more easily. ●●Pictures may not be displayed according to the [DATE/TIME] sequence immediately after a card is inserted into this unit. In that case, wait a while, and the pictures will be displayed in the [DATE/ TIME] sequence. [Delete Confirmation] You can set the Yes/No options that you want to select first on the confirmation screen when you delete a picture from either [Yes] or [No]. "Yes" first "No" first 1 Set the menu 2 Use → to select the item and press [MENU/SET] ["Yes" first] ["No" first] 223 [Playback] → [Delete Confirmation] [Yes] is selected by default to quickly perform a deletion. [No] is selected by default. This setting will prevent you from accidentally deleting pictures. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Wi-Fi® Function and NFC Function ■■Use the camera as a wireless LAN device When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device. ■■Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this camera is sold There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any violations. ■■There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted by a third party. We strongly recommend that you enable encryption in the settings of your wireless access point to ensure information security. ■■Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference ••Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as near microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach the camera. ••Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices. ■■Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use (SSID*) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as unauthorised access. * SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible. ■■Before Use ••To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device equipped with the wireless LAN function is required. ■■The camera is compatible with NFC Using the NFC (Near Field Communication) function, the camera and a smartphone/tablet can easily exchange the information needed to establish a Wi-Fi connection. 224 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Wi-Fi® Function and NFC Function ■■About the Wi-Fi connection lamp Wi-Fi connection lamp Lit blue: When the Wi-Fi function is ON Blinking blue: When sending data [Wi-Fi] button ■■About the [Wi-Fi] button You can operate the [Wi-Fi]/[Fn2] button in two ways, using it either as the [Wi-Fi] button or as a function button [Fn2]. It is set to [Wi-Fi] at the time of purchase. For more details about the function button (→37) ••Before a Wi-Fi connection is established, press the [Wi-Fi] button to perform the following operations: → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also display the same menu by selecting [Wi-Fi Function].) [New Connection] [Select a destination from History] (→268) [Select a destination from Favorite] (→268) 225 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Wi-Fi® Function and NFC Function ••Pressing the [Wi-Fi] button during a Wi-Fi connection enables the following operation. [Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. [Change the Destination]*1 Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection. [Change Settings for Sending Images]*2 For details (→271). [Register the Current Destination to Favorite]*1 Registering the current connection destination or the connection method, you can easily connect with the same connection method next time. [Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit (→273). *1 This item will not be displayed if you press to send pictures to WEB services while the pictures are displayed (→254). * item will not be displayed if the destination for [Remote Shooting & View], [Playback on TV] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Printer]. 2 This ●●Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while sending images. ●●The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection. ●●Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless access point. ●●We recommend that you use a fully charged battery when you send pictures. ●●When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.) ●●When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract. ●●Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent. ●●The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service, however this will not affect the image being sent. 226 SQW0024 Wi-Fi What you can do with the Wi-Fi function Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone (→228) Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording) Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone/tablet Saving pictures in the camera to the smartphone/tablet Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services Writing the location information on pictures in the camera Connect easily, transfer pictures easily You can easily use the Wi-Fi function by pressing and holding the [Wi-Fi] button or using the NFC function. Press and hold Hold the device close to the camera or Displaying still pictures on a TV (→242) Wireless printing (→243) Sending pictures to AV device (→244) Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV device in the home (home AV device). Sending pictures to a PC (→247) Using WEB services (→251) Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social networking services, etc. You can receive still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone/tablet using the Cloud Sync. Service. ••Hereafter, this manual uses the term “smartphone” for both smartphones and tablets unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. 227 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone. The “Panasonic Image App” (hereafter “Image App”) must be installed on your smartphone. Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App” The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic that allows your smartphone to perform the following operations of a Wi-Fi-compatible LUMIX. For Android™ apps Supported OS Installation procedure Android 2.3.3 or later* Connect your Android device to a network Select “Google PlayTM Store” Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” to search for the app Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it •• The icon will be added to the menu. For iOS apps iOS 6.0 or later (iPhone 3GS is not supported.) Connect the iOS device to the network Select “App StoreSM” Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” to search for the app Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it •• The icon will be added to the menu. * To connect this unit with [Wi-Fi Direct], Android OS 4.0 or above is required and the device must be compatible with Wi-Fi Direct™. ••Use the latest version. ••Supported OS versions as of September 2014. Supported OS versions may be changed without prior notice. ••Some of the screens and information provided in this document may be different depending on the supported operating system and “Image App” version. ••The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being used. ••For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu. ••For the latest information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.) •• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract. 228 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Connecting to a smartphone You can easily establish a Wi-Fi connection on the camera by pressing and holding the [Wi-Fi] button or using the NFC function. Preparation Install “Image App” in advance. (→228) 1 Press and hold the [Wi-Fi] button Wi-Fi connection lamp (Lit blue) [Wi-Fi] button •• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed. •• After the second time, the screen for the previously used connection method will appear. •• The same screen can be displayed by selecting items from the menu as follows. → [New Connection] → [Remote Shooting & View] 2 229 •• When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an enlarged size. If it is difficult to read the code, use the enlarge view. (If your smartphone cannot read the QR code, move the camera away from the smartphone or use a connection method other than the QR code.) •• To change the connection method, press the [DISP.] button and select the connection method. (→232) SSID and Password QR Code Operate the smartphone •• When the connection is complete, live images being captured by the camera are displayed on the smartphone. (It may take some time after the operation for the connection to be established.) •• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used. (→230, 231) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone ■■Using an iOS device ••When reading a QR Code to connect (Steps to are not necessary when reconnecting.) Start “Image App” (→228) Select [QR Code] → [OK] Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App” (When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an enlarged size.) Install the IMAGE APP profile Select [Install]*, then select [Install Now]* → [Done]*. •• The message is displayed in the Web browser. •• If a passcode is required to unlock the smartphone, you will have to input the passcode. Press the home button to close the Web browser Select [Wi-Fi]* under [Settings]* on the smartphone Turn on [Wi-Fi]* and select the SSID displayed on this unit Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→228) * The display may differ depending on the system language setting. 230 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone ••When connecting with SSID and password Select [Wi-Fi]* under [Settings]* on the smartphone Turn on [Wi-Fi]* and select the SSID displayed on this unit Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only) Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→228) * The display may differ depending on the system language setting. ■■Using an Android device ••When reading a QR Code to connect Start “Image App” (→228) Select [QR Code] Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App” (When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an enlarged size.) ••When connecting with SSID and password Start “Image App” (→228) Select [Wi-Fi] Select the SSID displayed on this unit Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only) ••If you check the item to display the password, you can confirm the password as you enter it. 231 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Changing the connection method To change the connection method, press the [DISP.] button and select the connection method. ■■When connecting with [Via Network] (On the camera) Select [Via Network] and press [MENU/SET] •• Connect the camera to a wireless access point by following the connection method (→264). (On your smartphone) Set Wi-Fi function to “ON” Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set Start “Image App” (→228) ■■When connecting with [Direct] (On the camera) Select [Direct] and press [MENU/SET] •• Select [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection], and connect the camera to the smartphone by following the connection method (→267). (On your smartphone) Start “Image App” (→228) Closing the connection After use, close the connection with the smartphone. (On the camera) 1 Press [Wi-Fi] button (On the recording standby screen, you can also close the connection by pressing → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) 2 Select [Terminate the Connection] •• A confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. (On your smartphone) 3 Close “Image App” <Using an iOS device> From the “Image App” screen, press the home button on the smartphone to close the app <Using an Android device> From the “Image App” screen, press the back button on the smartphone twice to close the app 232 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Connecting to a smartphone using NFC function Using the NFC (Near Field Communication) function, the camera and a smartphone can easily exchange the information needed to establish a Wi-Fi connection. Compatible models: This function can be used with NFC compatible devices with Android (2.3.3 or above). (Not available in certain models) ••See the operating instructions of your NFC-compatible smartphone for more information about smartphone operation and settings. Preparations (On the camera) •• Set [NFC Operation] to [ON] (→272) (On your smartphone) •• Check if your smartphone is a compatible model •• Set Wi-Fi function to “ON” •• Install “Image App” in advance (→228) 1 2 3 4 Start “Image App” on your smartphone While the [ ] is displayed on the connection screen of the “Image App”, hold the smartphone close to the camera Use to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET] Hold the smartphone close to this area of the unit again •• When the connection is complete, live images captured by the camera will be displayed on your smartphone. •• It may take some time to complete the connection. •• Connected smartphones are registered to this unit. •• From the next time and on, you can connect by performing steps 1 and 2. 233 Hold the smartphone close to this area (within 5 mm (0.20 inch)) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone ●●You can register up to 20 smartphones. If the number of registered smartphones exceeds 20, registrations will be deleted starting from the smartphone touched first. ●●If you perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], smartphone registration will be deleted. ●●If the communication environment is bad, the NFC function may not be usable. ●●If there is not a response immediately, shift the position slightly. ●●Do not bump your smartphone strongly against this unit. ●●See the operating instructions of your NFC-compatible smartphone for more information about smartphone operation and settings. ●●Metal objects between this unit and the smartphone may interfere with communication. Also, any stickers, etc., near the NFC area may affect communication performance. Not available in the following cases: ●●The NFC function cannot be used in the following cases: •• When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode]) •• During motion picture recording •• While recording still pictures (during self-timer countdown) •• When using [Time Lapse Shot] •• When using [Stop Motion Animation] •• When using [Multi Exp.] •• During motion picture playback, during slide shows, during panorama picture playback, and during continuous playback of group pictures (including pauses in each case) •• While sending pictures by Wi-Fi •• When connected to computer/printer ●●You cannot transfer still pictures in RAW format, AVCHD motion pictures, or MP4 motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K]. Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording) 1 2 3 234 Connect to a smartphone (→229) Select [ ] from “Image App” Take pictures •• The recorded images are saved in the camera. •• When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the camera in place with a tripod or by other means. •• Some settings are not available. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone 1 2 Connect to a smartphone (→229) Select [ ] from “Image App” •• The images captured by the camera are displayed on the smartphone. •• You can switch a picture to be displayed using the icon at the top left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved in the camera. •• When the picture is touched, it is played back at a larger size. Switch the location of the pictures to be displayed Saving pictures in the camera to the smartphone 1 2 3 Connect to a smartphone (→229) Select [ ] from “Image App” Press and hold the picture and drag it to save it on the smartphone •• The picture is saved on the smartphone. •• Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish. Not available in the following case: ●●You cannot save still pictures in RAW format, AVCHD motion pictures, or MP4 motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K]. 235 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Easily transferring pictures in the camera You can establish a Wi-Fi connection using the NFC function and easily transfer over Wi-Fi the picture on display simply by holding the smartphone close to the camera. Pictures can be transferred as soon as they are recorded, so you can easily transfer them to your friends’ and family’s smartphones.* * “Image App” must be installed to use this function. Preparations (On the camera) •• Set [NFC Operation] to [ON] (→272) •• Set [Touch Sharing] to [ON] (→272) (On your smartphone) •• Check if your smartphone is a compatible model •• Set Wi-Fi function to “ON” •• Install “Image App” in advance (→228) 1 2 3 On the camera, play back the picture you wish to transfer to a smartphone Start “Image App” on the smartphone you are transferring the picture to While the [ ] is displayed on the connection screen of the “Image App”, hold the smartphone close to the camera •• It will be transferred to the smartphone. •• If you are transferring multiple pictures, repeat steps 1 and 3. (Multiple pictures cannot be transferred in one batch.) •• It may take several minutes to complete the picture transfer depending on the environment used. 236 Hold the smartphone close to this area (within 5 mm (0.20 inch)) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services 1 2 3 Connect to a smartphone (→229) Select [ ] from “Image App” Press and hold the picture and drag it to send it to the social networking service, etc. Switch the location of the pictures to be displayed •• The picture will be sent to the social networking service or other WEB services. •• Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish. Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a smartphone You can send the location information acquired from a smartphone to the camera. After the information is sent, you can write it on the pictures in the camera. GPS Starts location information recording Ends location information recording Sends and writes the location information Start the recording ••Location information that is different from the information acquired during recording may be written. Take care regarding the following matters. –– Set [Home] of [World Time] of the camera to your home area. –– Once a smartphone starts recording the location information, do not change the [Home] setting of [World Time] of the camera. ••The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock Set]. 237 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone ■■Starts location information recording Operate the smartphone Select [ ] Select [Geotagging] Select [ ] ■■Ends location information recording Operate the smartphone Select [ ] Select [Geotagging] Select [ ] ■■Sends and writes the location information Connect to a smartphone (→229) Operate the smartphone Select [ ] Select [Geotagging] Select [ ] •• Follow the messages on the screen to perform the operation. •• Location information will not be written to AVCHD motion pictures. •• Location information may not be written if there is not enough free space on your card. •• You can also use [Location Logging] in the [Playback] menu to write the sent location information to the pictures. ●●Caution: Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk. ●●On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the transfer status of location information. Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu for details. ●●(When using “Image App” for iOS) If you press the Home or On/Off button of a smartphone while location information recording is in progress, recording is stopped. 238 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone Operating the camera to send pictures to a smartphone ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent [Send Images While Recording] (→240) [Send Images Stored in the Camera] (→241) JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD ○ – – – – ○* – ○ * Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about picture playback. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) Preparation Install “Image App” in advance. (→228) 239 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone [Send Images While Recording] 1 Set the menu 2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] and press [MENU/SET] → [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [Smartphone] ■■When connecting with [Via Network] (On the camera) Connect the camera to a wireless access point (→264) (On your smartphone) Set Wi-Fi function to “ON” Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set Start “Image App” (→228) ■■When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct] (On the camera) Connect the camera to a smartphone (→267) (On your smartphone) Start “Image App” (→228) ■■When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct] Perform step 2 (→229). 3 Select the device you wish to connect to 4 Take still pictures 240 •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→271) •• The still pictures are sent automatically after taking them. •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete. → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone [Send Images Stored in the Camera] 1 Set the menu 2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] and press [MENU/SET] → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Smartphone] ■■When connecting with [Via Network] (On the camera) Connect the camera to a wireless access point (→264) (On your smartphone) Set Wi-Fi function to “ON” Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set Start “Image App” (→228) ■■When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct] (On the camera) Connect the camera to a smartphone (→267) (On your smartphone) Start “Image App” (→228) ■■When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct] Perform step 2 (→229). 3 Select the device you wish to connect to 4 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select] •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→271) [Single Select] Select the picture Press [MENU/SET] [Multi Select] Select the picture (repeat) •• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled. Select [OK] •• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is limited. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. •• To close the connection, select [Exit]. 241 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Displaying still pictures on a TV You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA certified digital media renderer (DMR) function. Preparation Set the TV to DLNA waiting Mode. •• Read the operating instructions for your TV. 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) 4 Take or play back still pictures on this unit → [New Connection] → [Playback on TV] Select the device you wish to connect to •• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed. •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) ●●When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not output using 4K resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro cable. (→276) ●●When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures. ●●Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled when the pictures are played back on a TV during Slide Show playback. ●●It may take some time to establish the Wi-Fi connection or it may not be connected at all depending on the distance from this unit to the TV. Not available in the following cases: ●●Playback of motion pictures or panorama pictures, and continuous playback of group pictures are not displayed on a TV. ●●During the multi/calendar playback, pictures displayed on the screen of this unit are not displayed on TV. 242 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Wireless printing You can print out recorded still pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible)* printer. * Compliant with the DPS over IP standards. Contact the printer manufacturers for details on PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers. ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent [Send Images Stored in the Camera] JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD ○ – – – ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) 1 Set the menu 2 3 4 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Printer] Select a printer you want to connect Select the still picture and print •• Pictures are selected the same way as when connecting by USB connection cable (supplied). For more details (→287). •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) ] button.) (You can also close the connection by pressing the [ Not available in the following case: ●●Motion pictures cannot be printed. 243 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to AV device Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders. Home AV device Wireless access point ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD [Send Images While Recording] (→245) ○ – – – [Send Images Stored in the Camera] (→246) ○ – – – ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about picture playback. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) Preparations When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting Mode. •• Read the operating instructions of your device for details. 244 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to AV device [Send Images While Recording] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) 4 Take still pictures 245 → [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [AV device] Select the device you wish to connect to •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete. → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to AV device [Send Images Stored in the Camera] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) 4 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select] → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [AV device] Select the device you wish to connect to •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) [Single Select] Select the picture Press [MENU/SET] [Multi Select] Select the picture (repeat) •• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled. Select [OK] •• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is limited. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. •• To close the connection, select [Exit]. 246 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to a PC Still pictures and motion pictures recorded by the camera can be sent to a PC. ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD* [Send Images While Recording] (→249) ○ ○ – – [Send Images Stored in the Camera] (→250) ○ ○ ○ ○ * Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent in file sizes of up to 4 GB. Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent. ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about picture playback. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) Preparations •• Turn the computer on. •• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC. (→248) •• If the standard settings are changed for the workgroup on the connected PC, you must change settings in [PC Connection] on this unit. (→272) 247 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to a PC To create a folder that receives images ••Create a PC user account (account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to 32 characters)) consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive folder may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters. ■■When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the PC •• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac. •• For details on hardware requirements and installation, read “Installing supplied software” (→281, 283). Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” •• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new folder, or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually]. •• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF). ■■When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (For Windows) Supported OS: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista Example: Windows 7 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder •• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system. (For Mac) Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.9 Example: OS X v10.8 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the following order [File] → [Get Info] Enable sharing of the folder •• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system. 248 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to a PC [Send Images While Recording] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) 4 Select the folder you want to send to 5 Take still pictures 249 → [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [PC] Select the PC you want to connect to •• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name). •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete. → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Sending pictures to a PC [Send Images Stored in the Camera] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→263) 4 Select the folder you want to send to 5 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select] → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [PC] Select the PC you want to connect to •• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name). •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) [Single Select] Select the picture Press [MENU/SET] [Multi Select] Select the picture (repeat) •• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled. Select [OK] •• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is limited. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. •• To close the connection, select [Exit]. ●●Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in those folders. ●●If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC. ●●If the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) contains spaces, etc., the name may not be properly recognised. If you cannot connect, we recommend changing the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) to a combination of 15 or less alphanumeric characters only. 250 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social networking services, etc. By selecting the setting to automatically transfer still pictures and motion pictures to [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive the transferred still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone. WEB services Cloud synchronisation services LUMIX CLUB Wireless access point When sending images to WEB service ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD [Send Images While Recording] (→253) ○ – – – [Send Images Stored in the Camera] (→253) ○ – ○* – * Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••For details about playback of pictures, check the WEB service to which you will send the pictures. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) Preparation You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→258) to send a picture to a WEB service. To send images to a WEB service, you need to register the WEB service. (→252) 251 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services ●●Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as a title, the time and date when the images were taken, and the location where the image was taken. Check this information before uploading images to WEB services. ●●Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc. of images uploaded on WEB services. ●●When uploading images to the WEB service, do not delete images from this camera, even after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly uploaded to the WEB service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit. ●●Images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check images by accessing the WEB service with your smartphone or computer. ●●If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address registered with “LUMIX CLUB”. Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB” When sending images to WEB services, the WEB service being used must be registered with the “LUMIX CLUB”. ••Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services. http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/ Preparation Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the login information available. 1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer 2 3 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service 4 252 http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/ If you have not registered your email address with “LUMIX CLUB”, register the email address Select the WEB service to be used for WEB service link settings and register it •• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services [Send Images While Recording] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] and connect (→264) 4 Take still pictures → [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [Web service] Select a WEB service you want to connect •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete. → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) [Send Images Stored in the Camera] 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Via Network] and connect (→264) 4 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select] → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Web service] Select a WEB service you want to connect •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) [Single Select] Select the picture Press [MENU/SET] [Multi Select] Select the picture (repeat) •• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled. Select [OK] •• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is limited. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. •• To close the connection, select [Exit]. 253 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services ■■Quickly sending pictures in the camera to WEB services Once you send a picture, you can send pictures to the WEB service as quickly and easily as using a smartphone, only when the environment for connecting to a wireless access point is available. Display the picture Use to select [Yes] after pressing (When a group picture is being displayed, select [Upload(Wi-Fi)] → [Yes]) •• The camera is connected to the previously used wireless access point and the pictures are sent to the WEB service.*1, *2 Upload this image by Wi-Fi? Yes No *1 When no connection history is available for the wireless access point, proceed to the connection method selection screen. Select the connection method and connect the camera to a wireless access point. (→264) *2 If you do not have a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID, proceed to the new login ID sign up screen. Get a login ID and set a password. (→259) Performing the operation for the first time After you select [Yes] in step above, the WEB service selection screen appears. Use to select WEB services and press [MENU/SET] Check the setting on the confirmation screen for the transmission setting and press [MENU/SET] •• The picture is sent to the WEB service. •• To change the transmission setting for the picture, press the [DISP.] button. (→271) •• After the second time, the pictures are sent using the same WEB service and the same picture transmission settings as before. ●●When pictures are displayed as a group, they are all sent. When a single picture in a group is displayed, only the picture being displayed is sent. ●●To change the transmission settings of a picture or to close the Wi-Fi connection, press the [Wi-Fi] button. You can also close the connection by pressing the Playback button or [MENU/SET] and selecting [Yes]. When you switch to Recording Mode, the Wi-Fi connection is closed. 254 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ■■Sending method, and pictures that can be sent [Send Images While Recording] (→256) [Send Images Stored in the Camera] (→257) JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD ○ – – – – ○* – ○ * Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] ••Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device. ••See the operating instructions of the destination device for more information about picture playback. ••For more details about picture sending methods. (→270) Preparation You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→258) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to send a picture to a Cloud Folder. Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on a PC or “Image App” on a smartphone to configure the Cloud Sync. settings. ■■About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of [Cloud Sync. Service] (Current as of September 2014) ••If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are temporarily saved in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronised with the device in use, such as the PC or smartphone. ••A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1,000 pictures). Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer. Furthermore, when the number of stored images exceeds 1,000, some images may be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (→271) setting even within 30 days after the transfer. ••When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is complete, images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the transfer. 255 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services [Send Images While Recording] 1 Set the menu 2 3 4 Check the message and press [MENU/SET] 5 Take still pictures 256 → [New Connection] → [Send Images While Recording] → [Cloud Sync. Service] Select [Via Network] and connect (→264) Check the send setting •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) •• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi] button. (→226) You cannot change the settings while sending still pictures. Wait until sending is complete. → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → (You can also close the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes].) SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using WEB services [Send Images Stored in the Camera] 1 Set the menu 2 3 4 Check the message and press [MENU/SET] 5 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select] → [New Connection] → [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Cloud Sync. Service] Select [Via Network] and connect (→264) Check the send setting •• When the connection is established, the confirmation screen for the transmission setting is displayed. Check the setting and press [MENU/SET]. To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. (→271) [Single Select] Select the picture Press [MENU/SET] [Multi Select] Select the picture (repeat) •• If selected again, the setting will be cancelled. Select [OK] •• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is limited. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 •• A confirmation screen is displayed. If you select [Yes], the operation is executed. •• To change the send setting, press [DISP.] button. •• To close the connection, select [Exit]. 257 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using “LUMIX CLUB” About the [LUMIX CLUB] Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free). If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronise images between the devices you are using, or transfer these images to WEB services. Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to WEB services. ••You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (→261) Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details. http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/ Please note; ••The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected problems, and service contents may be changed or added to, without prior notice to the users. ••The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice. 258 SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using “LUMIX CLUB” Acquiring a new login ID ([New account]) 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Set/Add Account] 4 Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set 5 Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and press [MENU/SET] 6 Enter the password 7 Check the login ID and press [MENU/SET] 259 → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB] Select [New account] •• Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by pressing [MENU/SET]. •• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the camera. Select [Yes] to acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire a new login ID. •• For details (→264). •• The settings screen will only appear during the first connection. Connection methods set on this unit are stored and will be used for subsequent connections. If you want to change the wireless access point to connect to, press the [DISP.] button, then change the connecting destination. •• You can press to switch pages. •• Turn the zoom lever clockwise to enlarge the page display (x2 magnification). •• If you turn the zoom lever counterclockwise after enlarging the page, the page returns to its original size (no magnification). to move the position of the area to be enlarged. •• You can use ] button to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID. •• Press [ •• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password. •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). •• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically. When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the numbers. •• A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Press [MENU/SET]. •• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using “LUMIX CLUB” Using a previously acquired login ID/confirming and changing login ID and password ([Set Login ID]) Preparation To use a previously acquired login ID, confirm your ID and password. To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in advance. 1 Set the menu 2 3 Select [Set/Add Account] 4 5 Select the item you wish to change 6 Select [Exit] 260 → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB] Select [Set Login ID] •• The login ID and password are displayed. •• The password is displayed as “ ”. •• Close the menu if only checking the login ID. Enter your login ID or password •• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter text. •• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera. If the password differs from the one you created on your smartphone or PC, you will not be able to upload images. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using “LUMIX CLUB” To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone ••Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending images on this unit to other devices or WEB services. ■■When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID Connect this unit to the smartphone (→229) From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID •• The login IDs for this unit and the smartphone become the same. ••After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID may appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login ID by following the on-screen instructions. ••This operation is not available for [Wi-Fi Direct] connection. ■■When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone. When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this unit. Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use Check the details if the terms of use have been updated. 1 Set the menu → 2 261 [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB] Select [Terms of use] •• The camera will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed. SQW0024 Wi-Fi Using “LUMIX CLUB” Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB” Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it. You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account. 1 Set the menu → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB] 2 Select [Delete account] 3 Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account 5 Press [MENU/SET] •• The message is displayed. Press [MENU/SET]. •• The message is displayed. Press [MENU/SET]. •• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID. Exit the menu after it is executed. •• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed. Press [MENU/SET]. ●●Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the camera. 262 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections After selecting the Wi-Fi function and sending destination, select the connection method. If you are out and unable to use your wireless access point, or temporarily connecting to equipment you do not ordinarily use, or in a similar situation, it is convenient to make a direct connection. If you are connecting with the same settings as used previously, you can quickly start using the Wi-Fi function by connecting with [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite]. Wireless access point Connection method Description [Via Network] Connects through a wireless access point. (→264) [Direct] Your equipment connects directly to the camera. (→267) 263 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections [Via Network] Connecting via a wireless access point Select a connection method to the wireless access point. ••WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the connection and security of wireless LAN devices. To check if the wireless access point you are using is compatible with WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless access point. Connection method Description Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark. [WPS (Push-Button)] 1 Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS Mode •• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details. Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark. [WPS (PIN code)] 1 2 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to 3 Press [MENU/SET] Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access point •• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details. [From List] 264 Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility, or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access point. •• For details (→265). SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting by [From List]) Search for available wireless access points. ••Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network authentication is encrypted. ••When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, network authentication type, encryption type, encryption key of the wireless access point you are using. 1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to •• Pressing [DISP.] button will search for a wireless access point again. •• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When connecting with [Manual Input]” (→266). 2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). 265 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections ■■When connecting with [Manual Input] On the screen of step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input] (→265) Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set] •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). Select the network authentication type •• For information on network authentication, see the instruction manual of the wireless access point. Select the encryption type •• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network authentication settings. Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set [WPA2-PSK] / [WPA-PSK] [TKIP] / [AES] [Common Key] [WEP] [Open] [No Encryption] / [WEP] (When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key ●●Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when a saving wireless access point. ●●If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak. Refer to “Message displays” (→299) and “Q&A Troubleshooting” (→310) for details. ●●Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used in. 266 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections [Direct] Connecting directly You can select the connection method to your equipment. Select a connection method with which your equipment is compatible. Connection method [Wi-Fi Direct]*1 1 2 3 Description Set the device to Wi-Fi Direct™ mode Select [Wi-Fi Direct] Select the device to connect to •• Read the operating instructions of your device for details. [WPS (Push-Button)] 1 2 [WPS Connection]*2 [Manual Connection] Select [WPS (Push-Button)] Set the device to WPS mode •• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the [DISP.] button on this unit. [WPS (PIN code)] 1 2 Select [WPS (PIN code)] 1 Enter the SSID and password into the device. The SSID and password are displayed on the connection waiting screen of this unit. Enter the PIN code of the device into this unit •• If the transfer destination is [Smartphone], you can read the QR Code with your smartphone to connect. (→229) QR Code SSID and Password *1 To connect this unit with [Wi-Fi Direct], Android OS 4.0 or above is required and the device must be compatible with Wi-Fi Direct™. *2 WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the connection and security of wireless LAN devices. 267 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously ([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from Favorite]) The camera keeps a History of times you used the Wi-Fi function. You can register items in the History to Favourite. You can easily connect with the same settings as used previously by connecting from History or Favourite. 1 Press [Wi-Fi] button 2 Select [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] Item 3 Description [Select a destination from History] Connects using the same settings as used previously. [Select a destination from Favorite] Connects using settings registered in Favourite. Select the desired connection setting Registering History items to Favourite 1 2 3 4 268 Press [Wi-Fi] button Select [Select a destination from History] Select the item you wish to register and press Enter a registration name •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). •• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters. SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections Editing items registered in Favourite 1 2 3 4 Press [Wi-Fi] button Select [Select a destination from Favorite] Select the Favourite item you wish to edit and press Select item Item Description [Remove from Favorite] — [Change the Order in Favorite] Select the destination [Change the Registered Name] •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). •• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters. Registering and saving frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to Favourites ●●The number of settings that can be saved in the history is limited. We recommend that you register and save frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to Favourite. (→268) Checking connection details of History or Favourite ●●When selecting History or Favourite items, you can view connection details by pressing the [DISP.] button. ●●Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] deletes content registered in History and Favourite. ●●When using [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] to connect to a network to which many PCs are connected, it may be difficult to make the connection because the camera searches for previously connected equipment out of a large number of equipment pieces. If you cannot connect, retry the connection using [New Connection]. 269 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections Settings for sending pictures When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then select the method of sending pictures. After you have completed connecting, you can also change the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent. [Send Images While Recording] A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it. ●●[ ] is displayed on the recording screen while connected by [Send Images While Recording], and [ ] is displayed while files are being sent. ●●If you turn off the camera before you have completed sending, or if you close the Wi-Fi connection, or in similar situations, unsent files will not be resent. ●●You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending. 1 Not available in the following case: ●●Motion pictures cannot be sent. [Send Images Stored in the Camera] You can select and send recorded images. ●●Details of the [Playback] menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent. Not available in the following cases: ●●Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent. ●●Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent. 270 SQW0024 Wi-Fi About connections Changing the settings for sending images After you have completed connecting, you can change the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent, by pressing the [DISP.] button. Item [Size] Description Resize the image to send. [Original] / [Auto]*1 / [Change] •• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the circumstances at the destination. •• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S], or [VGA]. The aspect ratio does not change. [File Format]*2 [JPG] / [RAW+JPG] / [RAW] [Delete Location Data]*3 Select whether to delete the location information from images before sending them. [ON]: Delete the location information, then send. [OFF]: Keep the location information and send. •• This operation only deletes the location information from the images that are set to be sent. (The location information will not be deleted from the original images stored in this unit.) [Cloud Limit]*4 You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs out of free space. [ON]: Do not send images. [OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images. *1 Only available when the destination is set to [Web service]. *2 Only available when the destination is set to [PC]. *3 Only available when the destination for [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Cloud Sync. Service] or [Web service]. *4 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service]. 271 SQW0024 Wi-Fi [Wi-Fi Setup] Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. [Wi-Fi Setup] cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi. 1 Set the menu → [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → Desired setting Item Description [LUMIX CLUB] Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID. •• For details (→258). [PC Connection] You can set the workgroup. You must connect to the same workgroup as the destination computer when sending pictures to the computer. (The default is set to “WORKGROUP”) [Change Workgroup Name]: Enter the workgroup of the connecting computer. Close the menu after changing settings. [Restore to Default]: Returns settings to default settings. A confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected. Exit the menu after it is executed. •• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter text. •• To use with a computer of the standard settings, you do not have to change the workgroup. [Device Name] You can change the name of this unit. Press [DISP.] button Enter the desired device name •• Refer to “Entering Text” (→52) for information on how to enter text. •• Up to 32 characters can be entered. [NFC Operation] Makes NFC function setting. [ON]: The NFC function works. [OFF] [Touch Sharing] Set the operation to be performed when a Wi-Fi connection is established using the NFC function. [ON]: When a Wi-Fi connection is established using the NFC function while playing back a single picture, the picture (1 picture) is transferred. [OFF] 272 SQW0024 Wi-Fi [Wi-Fi Setup] Item [Wi-Fi Password] To prevent incorrect operation or use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, it is recommended that you protect the Wi-Fi function with a password. Description Setting a password will automatically display the password input screen when the Wi-Fi function is used. [Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password. Close the menu after changing settings. [Delete]: A confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected. Exit the menu after it is executed. •• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52). •• Make a copy of password. If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu, however other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB]) [Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit. 273 •• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment. •• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87) SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Enjoying 4K motion pictures Viewing 4K motion pictures ■■Viewing on TV screen When you connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV and play back a motion picture recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K], you can enjoy high-resolution 4K motion pictures. Although resolution output will be lower, you can also play back 4K motion pictures by connecting to a high-definition TV and other devices that do not have 4K support. Preparation When motion pictures are recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K], set [HDMI Mode] (→48) to [AUTO] or [4K]. Connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the playback screen (→276) •• When the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA), the television automatically switches its input and the playback screen is displayed. For details, refer to (→278). •• You can also play back motion pictures by inserting the card in a 4K-compatible TV equipped with a SD card slot. •• Read the operating instructions for the TV. ■■Viewing 4K motion pictures on a PC screen To play back motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” stored in the DVD (supplied). ••To play back and edit 4K motion pictures, a high-performance PC environment is required. ••For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF). 274 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Enjoying 4K motion pictures Storing 4K motion pictures ■■Storing 4K motion pictures on your PC Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the two together. For details, refer to (→280). ■■Storing 4K motion pictures on a DVD You cannot transfer or copy motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K] to a Blu-ray disc or DVD using a Panasonic recorder. (Current as of October 2014) You can use the supplied DVD software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to convert the file size of a motion picture to a smaller size or copy it to a DVD. ••For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF). 275 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Viewing on TV screen You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the HDMI micro cable or AV cable (optional). Preparation Turn off both camera and TV. 1 Connect camera to TV Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit. ■■To connect with an HDMI micro cable An HDMI micro cable can be used to enable viewing of still and motion pictures in high-resolution. [HDMI] socket Align the marks, and insert. To HDMI video/audio input socket HDMI micro cable Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work. “High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long) ■■To connect with an AV cable (optional) [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket Align the marks, and insert. AV cable (optional) 2 3 276 Yellow: To video socket White: To audio socket* *Monaural audio output. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input source to match the connection socket Turn on the camera and press the playback button SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Viewing on TV screen ■■To connect with an HDMI micro cable ●●Check the [HDMI Mode]. (→48) ●●To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is not output at 24 frames per second. ●●Bars may appear at the sides or at the top and bottom of the screen, depending on the aspect ratio setting. ●●Cables that do not comply with HDMI standards will not work. ●●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, pictures are not displayed on the screen. ●●HDMI output will be cancelled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected simultaneously. ●●When the AV cable (optional) and HDMI micro cable are connected at the same time, no picture is output from the AV cable. ●●Pictures may be momentarily distorted immediately after commencing playback or pausing on certain televisions. ●●Audio output is stereo. ●●Read the operating instructions for the TV. ■■To connect with an AV cable (optional) ●●Check the [TV Aspect]. (→47) ●●Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional). ●●You can play back pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL system. You can find [Video Out] setting in [TV Connection] from the [Setup] menu. ●●Pictures rotated to portrait may be blurred slightly. ●●Change picture mode settings on TV if aspect ratios are not displayed correctly on widescreen or high-definition televisions. ●●The viewfinder display cannot be used. ●●Read the operating instructions for the TV. The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot ●●Proper playback (aspect ratio) will be dependent on the TV used for viewing. ●●The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV model. ●●You may not be able to play back panorama pictures. Also you cannot perform automatic scrolling playback of panorama pictures. ●●For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 277 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Viewing on TV screen VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™) What is VIERA Link (HDMI)? ●●VIERA Link is a function that automatically links this camera to VIERA Linkcompatible devices by connecting HDMI micro cables for enabling easy operation with the VIERA remote control. (Some operations are not available.) ●●VIERA Link (HDMI) is an exclusive Panasonic function added to the industrystandard HDMI control functions known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control). Operation is not guaranteed when connecting with non-Panasonic HDMI CEC-compatible devices. Refer to your product manual to verify compatibility with VIERA Link (HDMI). ●●This camera supports VIERA Link (HDMI) Version 5. This is the Panasonic standard that also supports previous Panasonic VIERA Link devices. Preparation Set [VIERA Link] to [ON] (→49). 1 2 3 278 Connect the camera to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA) with an HDMI micro cable (→276) Turn on the camera and press the playback button Operate with the remote control for the TV •• Operate with reference to the operation icons displayed on the screen. SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Viewing on TV screen ■■Other related operations Turning the unit OFF ••The camera can also be turned off when the television is turned off with the remote control. Automatic input select ••This function automatically switches the television input to the camera screen whenever the camera is turned on while it is connected via the HDMI micro cable. The television can also be switched on via the camera from Standby Mode (if “Power on link” on the television is set to “on”). ••If VIERA Link (HDMI) does not function correctly (→323) ●●Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work. “High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long) ●●If you do not know if your TV is VIERA Link (HDMI) compatible, see the TV’s operating instructions. ●●Cables that do not comply with HDMI standards will not work. ●●When VIERA Link is activated, the [HDMI Mode] setting of this unit is automatically recognised. ●●If the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is [ON], operations via the camera buttons will be limited. ●●Ensure that the television you are connecting to has been set up to enable VIERA Link (HDMI) (consult your television operating instructions for details). 279 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the two together. ••Some computers can read directly from the camera’s memory card. For details, see the instruction manual for your computer. ••If your computer does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message will be displayed requesting you to format the card. (Do not format the card. This will erase recorded pictures.) If the card is not recognised, refer to the following support website. http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html ■■Computer specifications You can connect the camera to a computer that can detect a mass storage device (device that stores a large volume of data). ••Windows: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista ••Mac: OS X v10.5 - v10.9 Some motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] may not be scanned correctly by copying a file or folder ●●When using Windows, be sure to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD to copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]. ●●When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”. Note, however, that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture quality settings. (For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.) 280 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC About supplied software The supplied DVD contains the following software. Install the software on your computer before using. PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.6 PE You can capture still pictures or motion pictures to your PC, or organise captured pictures by categorising by recording date, model name of the digital camera used to record, etc. You can also correct still pictures, edit motion pictures, or write to DVD. ••Operating environment Supported OS Windows® 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows® 8 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit) and SP1 Windows Vista® (32-bit) SP2 Windows® 8.1 CPU Windows® 8 Windows Vista® Display Pentium® III 1 GHz or higher Windows® 7 Pentium® III 800 MHz or higher 1024×768 pixels or more (1920×1080 pixels or more recommended) Windows® 8.1 RAM Windows® 8 Windows Vista® Free hard disk space 1 GB or more (32-bit) / 2 GB or more (64-bit) Windows® 7 512 MB or more 450 MB or more for installing software ••To edit 4K motion pictures, you need the 64-bit versions of Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7. ••Refer to the Operating Instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF) for further information about the operating environment. You can read the Operating Instructions after launching the software. 281 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC SILKYPIX Developer Studio 4.2 SE This software develops and edits RAW file pictures. Edited pictures can be saved in a file format such as JPEG or TIFF that can be displayed on a PC, etc. ••Operating environment Supported OS Windows® 8.1 Windows® 8 Windows® 7 Windows Vista® Mac® OS X v10.5/v10.6/v10.7/v10.8/v10.9 ••For details on how to use the SILKYPIX Developer Studio, refer to the “Help” or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website: http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/support/ LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version (Windows 8.1 / 8 / 7 / Vista) LoiLoScope is a video editing software that draws out the full power of your PC. Creating videos is as easy as organising cards on top of a desk. Use your music, picture and video files to create videos to share with your friends and family by burning it to a DVD, uploading it to websites, or simply share your videos with your friends via e-mail. ••This will only install a shortcut to the trial version download site. ••For more information on how to use LoiLoScope, read the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the link below. Manual URL: http://loilo.tv/product/20 282 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC Installing supplied software The software compatible with your PC will be installed. Preparations •• Check your PC’s specifications and operating environment for each software. •• Before inserting the DVD (supplied), close all running applications. 1 Insert the DVD with the supplied software 2 3 Click [Applications] •• If the automatic playback screen is displayed, you can display the menu by selecting and executing [Launcher.exe]. •• In Windows 8.1/Windows 8, you can display the menu by clicking a message that is displayed after inserting the DVD and then selecting and executing [Launcher.exe]. •• You can also display the menu by double-clicking [SFMXXXX] in [Computer]. (The “XXXX” portion differs depending on the model.) Click [Recommended Installation] •• Continue the installation procedure following the instructions displayed on the screen. ●●If you are using a Mac, you can manually install SILKYPIX. Insert the DVD with the supplied software Double-click the application folder on the DVD Double-click the folder that automatically appears Double-click the icon in the folder Not available in the following case: ●●PHOTOfunSTUDIO / LoiLoScope are not compatible with Mac. 283 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC Copying still pictures and motion pictures Preparations •• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on your computer before starting the copying procedure. (→283) •• Turn on the camera and computer. 1 Connect camera to computer •• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit. •• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional). Using cables other than the above may cause a malfunction. [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket Align the marks, and insert. [Access] (sending data) •• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) while [Access] is displayed. USB connection cable (supplied) 2 Use 3 Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to copy pictures to your computer to select [PC] and press [MENU/SET] •• Setting the [USB Mode] to [PC] removes the need to make the setting each time the camera is connected to the computer. •• For details on how to use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, see the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” manual (PDF). ●●Do not delete or move copied files and folders using Windows Explorer or other browsers. Otherwise, you will not be able to play back or edit the files using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”. ■■For PTP mode The camera can be connected to your computer even if [USB Mode] (→47) is set to [PictBridge(PTP)]. ••Only picture output can be performed. ••If you cannot connect to your PC in PTP mode, set [USB Mode] to [PC] and reconnect. ••It may not be possible to import if there are 1,000 or more pictures on the card. ••Motion pictures or RAW pictures cannot be read. 284 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC ■■Copying to your computer without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” You can save pictures to use on your computer by dragging and dropping folders and files into separate folders on your computer. ••The card of this unit contains the following files (folder structure). DCIM (Still/motion pictures) 100_PANA (Up to 999 pictures/folder) Card ●●Windows Drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in “Computer”. ●●Mac Drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop. Folder number P1000001.JPG*1 File number : P1000999.JPG Colour Space P: sRGB _: AdobeRGB 101_PANA : 999_PANA *2 MISC (DPOF files, Favourite) PRIVATE AVCHD (Motion pictures in AVCHD) *1 .JPG: Still pictures .RW2: Still pictures recorded in RAW file .MP4: [MP4] Motion Pictures *2 New folders are created in the following cases: •• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder. •• When using cards already containing the same folder number (for example, pictures taken with other cameras, etc.). •• When recording after performing [No.Reset]. (→50) ●●Turn off the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. ●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). When the battery starts to run out during communications, a warning beep sounds. Cancel communication via your computer immediately. ●●For more details, consult your computer operating manual. 285 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in the recorder Follow the correct method for your device. Copying by inserting the card into the recorder You can copy pictures using Panasonic equipment (such as Blu-ray disc recorders) with support for each file format. ••See the instruction manual for the recorder for details for copying and playing back. 32 Dubbing playback pictures via AV cables (optional) You can transfer or copy the pictures played back on this unit to a recorder, disc, video tapes, or other media using the standard picture quality. This method is useful as it allows dubbing to be performed even with devices that are not compatible with high definition images. Audio will be monaural. 1 Connect camera to recorder •• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit. [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket Align the marks, and insert. AV cable (optional) 2 3 To recorder’s input socket Start recording on recorder Start playback on camera •• To stop recording (dubbing), stop the recording on your recorder first before stopping the playback on the camera. ●●Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional). ●●When using a TV with a 4:3 aspect ratio, always change the camera’s [TV Aspect] setting (→47) to [4:3] before dubbing. Motion pictures copied in the [16:9] setting will appear vertically stretched when viewed on a 4:3 TV screen. ●●For details on dubbing and playback methods, refer to your recorder’s operating instructions. 286 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Printing You can connect directly to a PictBridge-compatible printer for printing. ••Some printers can print directly from the camera’s memory card. For details, see the manual for your printer. Preparations •• Adjust the print quality or other settings on your printer, as needed. •• Turn on the camera and printer. 1 Connect camera to printer •• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit. •• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional). Using cables other than the above may cause a malfunction. [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket Align the marks, and insert. •• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) when the cable disconnection icon [ ] is displayed (may not be displayed with some printers). 2 3 4 Use USB connection cable (supplied) to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and press [MENU/SET] Use to select a picture and press [MENU/SET] Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET] (Print settings (→290)) ■■To cancel print Press [MENU/SET]. 287 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Printing Printing multiple pictures Multiple pictures are printed at one time. 1 2 3 Press to select [Multi Print] in step 3 (→287) Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET] Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET] •• [Multi Select]: Scroll between pictures with , select pictures to print with the [MENU/SET]. (Press [MENU/SET] again to release selection.) Use to select [OK], and press [MENU/SET]. •• [Select All]: Print all pictures. •• [Print Set (DPOF)]: Print pictures selected in [Print Set]. (→220) •• [Favorite]: Print pictures selected as [Favorite]. (→219) (Print settings (→290)) •• Select [Yes] if print confirmation screen is displayed. ●●The group pictures are displayed one by one instead of all pictures at the same time. ●●Turn off the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. ●●Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) after printing. ●●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). When the battery starts to run out during connection, a warning beep sounds. Cancel printing and disconnect USB connection cable. ●●An orange “●” displayed during printing indicates an error message. ●●Print may be divided into several pictures if printing a large amount of pictures. (Remaining sheets display may differ from the number of pictures set for printing.) Not available in the following cases: ●●Motion pictures cannot be printed. ●●Still pictures recorded in a RAW file cannot be printed. (The still pictures recorded in JPEG file format at the same time as the RAW file can be printed.) 288 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Printing Printing with date and text Time and date can be set to be printed on the picture when taking the picture by activating the [Text Stamp] function in the [Playback] menu. (→212) ■■Printing date without [Text Stamp] Printing in store: Only recording date can be printed. Request date printing in store. ••Making [Print Set] (→220) settings on the camera in advance allows settings for numbers of copies and date printing to be designated before giving the card to the store. ••When printing still pictures of 16:9 Aspect Ratio, check in advance that the store can accept this size. Using computer: Print settings for recording date and text information can be made using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD. Using printer: Recording date can be printed by setting [Print Set] on the camera, or by setting [Print with Date] (→290) to [ON] when connecting to a printer compatible with date printing. 289 SQW0024 Connecting with other devices Printing Making print settings on the camera Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before selecting [Print start]. to select the item and press [MENU/SET] 1 Use Item 2 Settings [Print with Date] [ON] / [OFF] [Num.of prints] Set number of pictures (up to 999 pictures) [Paper Size] When [ [Page Layout] [ [ Use ] is selected, the printer settings take priority. ] (printer takes priority) / [ ] (1 picture, no border) / ] (1 picture, with border) / [ ] (2 pictures) / [ ] (4 pictures) to select the setting and press [MENU/SET] ●●When setting [Print with Date] to [ON], check the date printing settings on the printer (printer settings may be prioritised). ●●To print a picture on which text or a date has been stamped, set [Print with Date] to [OFF]. (The still picture is printed with the date superimposed on it.) ●●Items may not be displayed if incompatible with printer. ●●To arrange [ ] “2 pictures” or [ ] “4 pictures” in the same still picture, set the number of prints for the still picture to 2 or 4. ●●To print to paper sizes/layouts not supported by this camera, set to [ ] and make settings on the printer. (Consult your printer’s operating manual.) ●●Even with completed [Print Set] settings, dates may not be printed, depending on the shop or printer used. 290 SQW0024 Others Optional accessories External Flash (optional) When you use the flashes (optional: DMW-FL220, DMW-FL360L, or DMW-FL580L), a wider effective flash range is provided than with the flash (supplied). Preparation Set the camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF]. Removing the hot shoe cover The hot shoe cover is already attached to the hot shoe at the time of purchase. Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction indicated by arrow while pressing it in the direction indicated by arrow ••Be sure to attach the hot shoe cover when the hot shoe is not in use. ••Keep the hot shoe cover safely after removing it so that you do not lose it. ■■Using the flash (DMW-FL360L: optional) Attach the external flash to the hot shoe and then turn on the camera and the external flash Set the menu → [Rec] → [Flash] Press Press to select [Flash Mode] and press [MENU/SET] to select the item and press [MENU/SET] •• While the external flash is connected, the following icons are displayed. : External flash Forced ON : External flash Red-Eye Removal Forced ON* : External flash Slow Sync. : External flash Red-Eye Removal Slow Sync.* : External flash Forced OFF •• Signal-flashing with wireless flashes is also disabled. * When the flash mode is set to [AUTO] or [MANUAL] on the external flash, you cannot select the item. 291 SQW0024 Others Optional accessories When using other commercially available external flashes that don’t offer direct communication with the camera (DMC-LX100) ••It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash when it is used. When you use an external flash in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and ISO Sensitivity to match the same settings on the camera. ••Set the camera to [Aperture-Priority] Mode or [Manual Exposure] Mode and then set the same aperture value and ISO Sensitivity on the external flash. (The proper exposure cannot be achieved because the aperture value changes in [Shutter-Priority] Mode. The light of the external flash cannot be properly adjusted since the aperture value cannot be fixed in [Program AE] Mode.) ●●You can set the aperture value, shutter speed and ISO Sensitivity on the camera even when the external flash is attached. ●●Some commercially available external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or reversed polarity. If such flashes are used, they could cause a malfunction or hinder normal operation of the camera. ●●If you use commercially available external flashes (with communication functions) other than the ones compatible with this unit, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not use them. ●●Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it. ●●When the external flash is attached, the camera will become unstable, and therefore we recommend using a tripod to take pictures. ●●Detach the external flash when you carry the camera. ●●Be sure to hold both the camera and the external flash when it is attached to the camera. If you hold only the external flash, it could become detached from the camera. ●●If the White Balance is set to [ ] when the external flash is used, perform fine adjustment of the White Balance if the recording results are not satisfactory. (→105) ●●If you take pictures close to the subject while taking wide-angle pictures, the light of the flash is obstructed by the lens and the bottom of the screen may be dark. ●●Refer to (→184) about the settings for the wireless flash. ●●Refer to the operating instructions of the external flash for further details. Using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) instead of the battery By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play back without worrying about the remaining battery charge. The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor. ●●Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional). ●●Also read the AC adaptor and DC coupler operating instructions. 292 SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays ••The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ style) in the monitor. ] (monitor In recording 50i XXmXXs Recording Mode (→59) Motion picture recording mode (→58) Motion picture recording mode when [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] (→195) Custom Set (→60) Panorama picture recording mode (→150) Elapsed recording time* (→190) Simultaneous recording indicator (→198) Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor (→54) [Peaking] (→130) [Highlight Shadow] (→102) [HDR] (→112) [Multi Exp.] (→159) Electronic shutter (→140) [Photo Style] (→100) 50i →←↑↓ EXPS Flash Mode (→180, 291) Flash (→182, 184) [Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] (→187) Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size] (→108) Card (displayed only during recording) (→25) Panorama Direction (→150) Types of picture effects (Filter) (→89) Picture effect (Filter) adjustment display (→91) * [m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”. 293 SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays 50i [Quality] (→109) AFS AFF AFC MF Focus Mode (→114) AF Mode (→115) AFL [Face Recog.] (→162) AF Lock (→133) Burst (→142) [Auto Bracket] (→145) [Aspect Bracket] (→147) Self-timer (→148) Panorama Direction (→150) Remaining battery (→21) Picture Mode (Still picture priorities) (→198) Macro recording (→126) Recording state (Flashes red.)/ Focus (Lights green.) (→56) Focus (Under low illumination) (→56) Wi-Fi connection status [4K PHOTO] marker (→196) [Time Lapse Shot] (→153) [Stop Motion Animation] (→156) Histogram (→64) Stabiliser (→168) Jitter alert (→168) 294 SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays 50i Destination settings / Travel elapsed days*2 (→42) Name*2 (→165) Age in years/months*2 (→165) Current date/time*2 World time*2: (→41) AEL 1.7 60 AF area (→56, 121) Spot metering target (→139) Self-timer*3 (→148) [Silent Mode] (→161) [Mic Level Disp.] (→200) AE Lock (→133) [Metering Mode] (→139) Programme Shift (→81) Aperture value (→56) Shutter speed (→56) Exposure compensation value (→135) Manual Exposure Assist (→87) ISO Sensitivity (→136) [Dial Guide] (→18) White Balance Bracket (→106) White Balance Fine Adjustment (→105) White Balance (→103) 98 R8m30s Number of recordable pictures*4 (→27) Available recording time*1*4 (→27) Exposure meter (→81) Zoom (→170, 174) *1 [m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”. *2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode. *3 This is displayed during countdown. *4 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu. 295 SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays ■■On-monitor recording information F1.7 1/60 Recording Mode (→59) Programme Shift (→81) Motion picture recording mode (→58) Motion picture recording mode when [4K PHOTO] is set to [ON] (→195) Custom Set (→60) Panorama picture recording mode (→150) Aperture value (→56) Shutter speed (→56) T (time) recording (→87) Remaining battery (→21) Card (displayed only during motion picture recording) (→25) ISO Sensitivity (→136) Exposure compensation value (→135) Manual Exposure Assist (→87) Flash Mode (→180, 291) Flash (→182, 184) Single (→141) Burst (→142) [Auto Bracket] (→145) [Aspect Bracket] (→147) Self-timer (→148) Panorama Direction (→150) AFS AFF AFC MF Focus Mode (→114) AF Mode (→115) 50i Wi-Fi [Quality] (→109) [Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] (→187) Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size] (→108) Wi-Fi (→225) Function button setting (→37) [Photo Style] (→100) AWB White Balance (→103) [i.Dynamic] (→111) 98 R8m30s [Metering Mode] (→139) Number of recordable pictures (→27) Available recording time* (→27) * [m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”. 296 SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays In playback 15 pic. 1ST DAY 11 months 30 days Playback Mode (→206) Protected picture (→221) Number of prints (→220) With location information (→207) Favourites (→219) Cable disconnect prohibit icon (→287) Motion picture playback (→70) Panorama picture playback (→152) Continuous playback of burst picture group (→201) Continuous playback of Time Lapse Shot picture group (→201) Continuous playback of stop motion animation group (→201) Text stamped display (→212) XXmXXs 50i 1/98 15 pic. XXmXXs 297 Acquiring information icon (→302) 1ST DAY Travel elapsed days (→42) Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→254) Submenu icon (→202, 254) [Silent Mode] (→161) 11 months 30 days Age in years/months (→165) Name*2 (→164, 165) Location*2 (→42) Title*2 (→211) Recording information*3 Elapsed playback time*1 (→70) Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size] (→108) [Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] (→187) [Quality] (→109) Remaining battery (→21) *1 [m] and [s] indicate “minute” and “second”. Picture number/Total pictures *2 The displaying is performed in the following Number of pictures in burst priority order: title, travel destination, name Motion picture recording time*1 (babies and pets), and name ([Face Recog.]). 3 (→70) * This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]. SQW0024 Others List of monitor/viewfinder displays ■■Detailed information display 10:00 1.DEC.2014 100-0001 Recording information [i.Dynamic]*1 (→111) Recording date/time World time (→41) [HDR]*2 (→112) [i.Resolution] (→111) 4K motion picture recorded by setting [4K PHOTO] to [ON] or a still picture captured from that 4K motion picture (→195) 50i 100-0001 Aspect Ratio/[Picture Size] (→108) [Quality] (→109) [Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] (→187) [Color Space]*2 (→113) Folder/File number*1 (→285) ■■Histgram display R G B Y 1/98 Histogram (→64) 100-0001 1/98 100-0001 Picture number/Total pictures Folder/File number*1 (→285) Recording information*1 *1 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]. *2 This is not displayed for motion pictures. 298 SQW0024 Others Message displays The following explains the meaning of major messages displayed on the monitor or viewfinder, and how to respond to them. ■■Memory cards [Memory Card Error] [Format this card?] •• The card format cannot be used with this camera. → Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→26) [Insert SD card again] [Try another card] •• Access to card has failed. → Insert card again. •• Try with a different card. [Read Error] / [Write Error] [Please check the card] •• Data read has failed. → Check whether card has been inserted correctly (→24) •• Data write has failed. → Turn off the camera and remove the card. Reinsert the card and turn the camera on again. •• Card may possibly be damaged. → Try with a different card. [Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card] •• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About the motion picture recording and speed class” (→25). → If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class (→25), the data writing speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and formatting it (→26). [Memory Card Error] [This memory card cannot be used] •• Not compatible with the camera. Use a compatible card. [Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.] •• Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (→26) → Insert a different card. 299 SQW0024 Others Message displays ■■Battery [This battery cannot be used] •• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. •• Battery cannot be recognised as terminal is dirty. → Wipe any dirt away from the battery terminal. ■■Wi-Fi function [Failed to connect wireless access point] / [Connection failed] / [No destination found] •• Check following regarding the wireless access point. → The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong. Check the authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key. (→266) → Power of the wireless access point is not turned on. → Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit. •• Check the network setting of the destination. •• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point. → Check other devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the 2.4 GHz band. [No picture to send] •• This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination. Check the file type of the image to transmit. (→239, 243, 244, 247, 251, 255) [Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.] / [Network disconnected. Transfer stopped.] •• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak. → Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point. •• There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time. → Try again after a while. •• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after specific time has passed. → Reconnect the connection again. [Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up on downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones.] •• Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered. •• Perform Cloud Sync setting. Configure the settings on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” or on a smartphone with “Image App”. For details on [Cloud Sync. Service], refer to (→255). [Connection failed] •• Check following regarding the smartphones you intend to connect. → The smartphone does not operate. → Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera. → There is no free storage space on the smartphone. 300 SQW0024 Others Message displays [Login failed. Please check Login ID and Password.] •• Login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not correct. Please enter it again. If you have forgotten the login ID or the password, there is information in the login screen of the “LUMIX CLUB” website. [Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit] / [Transfer completed. Some files are left because of destination limit.] •• Check the file format of the image to send. •• Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large. Split the motion picture using [Video Divide]. (→214) [Unavailable. Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site.] •• Login to the “LUMIX CLUB” from your smartphone or PC, and set the login details of the destination WEB service. [Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together] •• WEB services designed only for pictures, and WEB services designed only for motion pictures cannot be selected at the same time. Deselect one of the services. [Cannot get IP address. Please set wireless AP’s IP address setting to DHCP.] •• Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points. [Cannot connect to server] •• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root certificate. 301 SQW0024 Others Message displays ■■Others [Some pictures cannot be deleted] [This picture cannot be deleted] •• Non-DCF pictures (→67) cannot be deleted. → Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→26) [Cannot be set on this picture] •• [Print Set], [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], and other functions cannot be used for pictures that are not compliant with the DCF standard (→67). [Please turn camera off and then on again] [System Error] •• The lens is not working correctly. → Turn the camera on again. (Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Centre if display still remains.) [A folder cannot be created] •• Folder numbers in use have reached 999. → Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera (→26). Folder number is reset to 100 when performing [No.Reset] (→50). [Picture is displayed for 16:9 TV] [Picture is displayed for 4:3 TV] •• AV cable (optional) is connected to camera. → To remove message immediately → Press [MENU/SET]. → To change aspect ratio → Change [TV Aspect] (→47). •• USB connection cable (supplied) is only connected to camera. → Message disappears when cable is also connected to another device. [Editing operation cannot proceed as information processing is ongoing.] •• If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring ] or [ ] may be displayed for a long time. While either one of information icon [ these icons is displayed, some of the [Playback] menus cannot be used. →W hen the camera is turned off while information is being acquired, only the pictures whose information has been acquired up to that time are saved as a group. When the camera is turned on again, the camera once again begins acquiring information of the remaining pictures in the group. 302 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Rec] You can perform settings such as picture size and flash (supplied/optional). ••The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. [Photo Style] You can select the effects according to the concept of the picture that you want to create. Adjusts the colours of effects and picture quality. →100 [Picture Size] Set the number of pixels. →108 [Quality] Set the compression rate used for storing pictures. →109 [AFS/AFF/AFC] Select how the focus is adjusted. →114 [Metering Mode] Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed. →139 [Burst Rate] Sets the burst speed to be used for burst recording. →142 [Auto Bracket] Sets the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording sequence of Auto Bracket. →146 [Self Timer] Sets the time before recording starts when you take a picture using the self-timer. →148 [Highlight Shadow] You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while confirming the brightness of these areas on the screen. →102 [i.Dynamic] Correcting contrast and exposure. →111 [i.Resolution] Records still pictures with sharper outlines and the impression of high-resolution. →111 [Simultaneous record w/o filter] Sets whether to record pictures with Filter and those without Filter at the same time. →91 [iHandheld Night Shot] Combines nightscape pictures recorded using high-speed burst recording into a single picture. →78 [iHDR] When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject, [iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to create a single still picture rich in gradation. →79 [HDR] The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken with different exposures into a single properly exposed picture with rich gradation. →112 [Multi Exp.] You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times →159 of exposure on a single picture. 303 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Time Lapse Shot] You can preset the recording start time, recording interval, and the number of pictures to be taken when automatically recording time lapse motion pictures of subjects such as animals and plants. →153 [Stop Motion Animation] You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation. →156 [Panorama Direction] You can set the recording direction to be used for recording panorama pictures. →150 [Shutter Type] You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and electronic shutter. →140 [Flash] Performs flash settings in accordance with the recording conditions. →180 [Red-Eye Removal] Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash. →180 [ISO Limit Set] Sets the optimal ISO Sensitivity using the selected value as the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity when [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or ]. [ →137 [ISO Increments] Changes the ISO Sensitivity settings every 1/3 EV or 1 EV steps. →138 [Extended ISO] You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO Sensitivity. →138 [Long Shtr NR] Eliminates the noise made when taking pictures at a slower shutter →113 speed. [i.Zoom] Allows increasing the zoom ratio while suppressing the deterioration of picture quality. →172 [Digital Zoom] Improves the telephoto effect of your pictures. Note that enlarging will decrease picture quality. →173 [Color Space] You can set the method for reproducing the colours to correctly display the recorded pictures on the screens of a PC or printer, etc. →113 [Stabilizer] Automatically detects jitter during recording and makes corrections. →168 [Face Recog.] Recognises a registered face and automatically adjusts the focus and exposure for this face with higher priority. →162 [Profile Setup] You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the name or age in months/years in the picture. →165 304 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Motion Picture] You can perform settings, such as recording format and quality, for recording motion pictures. ••The [Photo Style], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also be changed automatically. For details, refer to the corresponding item of the [Rec] menu. [4K PHOTO] You can set the motion picture mode used for creating a highresolution still picture by capturing a single frame from a 4K motion →195 picture. [Rec Format] Sets the file format (AVCHD, MP4) of the motion picture to be recorded. [Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture (size, frame rate, etc.) →187 to be recorded. [Picture Mode] Sets the recording method of still pictures to be taken while recording motion pictures. →198 [Continuous AF] Constantly adjusts the focus on a subject that is in focus. →189 [Mic Level Disp.] You can set whether or not to display the microphone level on the recording screen. →200 [Mic Level Adj.] You can adjust the audio input level in 4 steps. →200 [Wind Cut] If you hear wind noise during an audio recording, you can use [Wind Cut] to effectively reduce the wind noise. →200 305 →187 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Custom] You can set operations of this unit, such as the screen display method and functions of a button, according to your preferences. You can also register the changed settings. [Utilize Custom Set feature] Calls up the setting registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. [Cust.Set Mem.] Registers the current camera settings as a custom setting. →60 [Silent Mode] Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time. →161 [AF/AE Lock] Performs the lock setting of the focus and/or exposure used for executing AF/AE lock. →133 [AF/AE Lock Hold] Sets the [AF/AE LOCK] button operation used for recording by fixing the focus and/or exposure. →133 [Shutter AF] Enables focus adjustment automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway. →124 [Half Press Release] Enables shutter release when the shutter button is pressed halfway. →124 [Quick AF] Enables faster focusing when the shutter button is pressed. →124 [Eye Sensor AF] Automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is activated. →55 [Pinpoint AF Time] Sets the time for displaying the enlarged screen if the shutter button is pressed halfway when Auto Focus mode is set to [ →122 [Pinpoint AF Display] Sets whether the assist screen is to be enlarged on a part of the screen or the entire screen when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ]. →122 [AF Assist Lamp] Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too dark to facilitate focusing. →125 [Direct Focus Area] Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button while recording. →123 →131 [Focus/Release Priority] Disables recording when a subject is out of focus. →125 [AF+MF] Allows manual adjustment of the focus after AF is performed. →125 [MF Assist] Sets the display method for MF Assist (enlarged screen). →131 [MF Assist Display] Sets whether the Assist screen (enlarged screen) is to be enlarged →132 on part of the screen or over the entire screen. [MF Guide] Displays the MF guide used to check the direction of focus on the screen when the focus is manually adjusted. 306 →60 ]. →129 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Peaking] When you perform Manual Focus operation, this function automatically adds colour to the portions of the image that are in focus. →130 [Histogram] Sets whether to display the histogram. →64 [Guide Line] Sets the pattern of the guidelines to be displayed while recording. →65 [Highlight] Flashes the overexposed areas in black and white during [Auto Review] or playback. →72 [Zebra Pattern] Displays the area, where overexposure may occur, using a zebra pattern. →166 [Monochrome Live View] You can display the recording screen in black and white. →167 [Constant Preview] (M Mode) Allows the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed on the recording screen to be checked when [Manual Exposure] Mode is set. →87 [Expo.Meter] Sets whether to display the exposure meter. →81 [Dial Guide] Sets whether to display the operation guide. →18 [LVF Disp.Style] Sets the viewfinder display method. →63 [Monitor Disp. Style] Switching the monitor display method. →62 [Monitor Info. Disp.] Switches the recording information screen of the monitor. →65 [Rec Area] Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures and motion pictures. →192 [Remaining Disp.] Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures that you can take and the available recording time. →28 [Auto Review] Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures. →57 [Fn Button Set] You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons. →37 [Zoom lever] Switches the zoom lever operation setting. →175 [Control Ring] You can assign frequently-used functions to control ring. →40 [Zoom Resume] Retaining the zoom position when the camera is turned off. →175 [Q.MENU] Switches the method for setting Quick Menu items. →34 [iA Button Switch] Changes the operation method of the [iA] button used for switching →75 to [Intelligent Auto] Mode. [Video Button] Enabling/disabling the motion picture button. →192 [Eye Sensor] Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor. →55 307 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Setup] You can perform settings for convenience of use such as the clock setting and changing of the beep sounds. You can also perform Wi-Fi function related settings. [Clock Set] Set time, date, and display format. [World Time] Set the local time at travel destination. →41 [Travel Date] If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the picture was taken will be recorded. →42 [Wi-Fi] Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. →272 [Beep] Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds. →43 [Live View Mode] Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View →43 screen) when recording pictures. [Monitor Display]/ [Viewfinder] Adjust brightness and colour of the monitor or viewfinder. →44 [Monitor Luminance] You can adjust the brightness of the monitor depending on how bright it is around the camera. →45 [Sleep Mode] The camera automatically turns off if no operation is performed for a preset period of time. →46 [USB Mode] Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with USB connection cable (supplied). →47 [TV Connection] Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to a TV or other device. →47 [Menu Resume] Save the last operated menu position. →49 [Menu Background] Set the background colour for the menu screen. →49 [Menu Information] Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen. →49 [Language] Set the language displayed on the screen. →49 [Version Disp.] Check the firmware version of the camera or supplied flash (when the flash is attached). →50 [Self Timer Auto Off] The self-timer is cancelled if the unit is turned off. →50 [No.Reset] Reset picture file numbers. →50 [Reset] Reset to the default settings. →50 [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] Return [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings. →51 [Format] Format (initialise) a memory card. →26 308 →29 SQW0024 Others Menu list [Playback] You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures you have taken. [Slide Show] Automatically play pictures in order. →204 [Playback Mode] You can narrow down the pictures to be displayed with set filters, such as categories or favourite pictures. →206 [Location Logging] You can write location information (longitude/latitude) sent from the →207 smartphone to the pictures. [RAW Processing] You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format. The created still pictures are saved in JPEG format. →208 [Title Edit] Allows characters (comments) to be entered on a recorded picture. →211 [Text Stamp] You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on the recorded still pictures. →212 [Video Divide] A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. →214 [Time Lapse Video] You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]. →215 [Stop Motion Video] You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using [Stop Motion Animation]. →215 [Resize] Picture size can be reduced. →216 [Cropping] Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas. →217 [Rotate] Manually rotate pictures by 90°. →218 [Rotate Disp.] Automatically rotate portrait pictures. →218 [Favorite] Allows a label to be assigned to a picture with a mark to set it as your favourite picture. →219 [Print Set] Sets the pictures and the number of pictures to be printed. →220 [Protect] Set protection to prevent deletion of pictures by mistake. →221 [Face Rec Edit] Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with mistaken →222 Face Recognition. [Picture Sort] You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit. →223 [Delete Confirmation] You can set the Yes/No options that you want to select first on the confirmation screen when you delete a picture from either [Yes] or [No]. →223 309 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting Try checking these items (→310 - 325) first. If the problem persists, Performing [Reset] in the [Setup] menu may resolve the issue (→50). (Note that except for some items such as [Clock Set], all settings are returned to their values at the time of purchase.) Also, see the Panasonic support site for the latest support information. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.) ■■Battery, power Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on. •• Battery is not inserted correctly (→24), or needs recharging. Camera switches off as soon as the camera is turned on. •• Battery needs recharging. This unit is turned off automatically. •• [Sleep Mode] is activated. (→46) •• If you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link (HDMI) with an HDMI micro cable and turn off the TV with the remote control for the TV, this unit also turns off. → If you are not using VIERA Link (HDMI), set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (→49) The battery runs down quickly. •• The Wi-Fi connection has been on for a long time. → The battery is used up faster with a Wi-Fi connection. Turn off the camera as often as possible using [Sleep Mode] (→46) or other methods. 310 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Recording Cannot record pictures. •• Card is full. → Free space by deleting unwanted pictures (→73). •• When a large capacity card is used, you may not be able to take a picture for a while after you turn on the camera. •• Focus is not aligned. → When [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], the camera will not record until proper focusing is achieved. (→125) Recorded pictures look white. •• Lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.). → Turn the camera on to extract lens barrel, and clean lens surface with a soft, dry cloth. •• Lens is foggy (→12). Recorded pictures are too bright/too dark. •• Adjust the exposure (→135). •• AE Lock (→133) is set inappropriately. Zooming stops instantaneously. •• When using the Extra Optical Zoom, the zooming action will stop temporarily. This is not a malfunction. Some pictures are taken when I press the shutter button just once. •• Camera is set to use [Auto Bracket], White Balance Bracket, [Aspect Bracket], or [Burst]. SelfTimer is set to [ ]. → Clear the setting. (→106, 141) Unable to perform bracket recording. •• The remaining memory space in the card is low. → Check the remaining memory space in the card. Focus not aligned correctly. •• Subject outside of focus range. (→126) •• Caused by jitter or subject movement. (→168) •• [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [RELEASE]. (→125) •• [Shutter AF] is set to [OFF]. (→124) •• AF Lock (→133) is set inappropriately. Recorded pictures are blurred. The stabiliser function ineffective. •• Shutter speed is slower in dark locations and the stabiliser function is less effective. → Hold camera firmly with both hands, keeping arms close to body. •• Use a tripod and the self-timer when using a slower shutter speed (→148). 311 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting Recorded pictures appear coarse, or there is interference. •• We recommend trying the following methods. → Lower [Sensitivity] (→136). → Take pictures in brighter locations. → Either adjust [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to a higher setting or set each item other than [Noise Reduction] to a lower setting. (→101) → Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (→113) → Change the settings of [Picture Size] (→108) and [Quality] (→109). •• When Digital Zoom is used, the picture quality will become lower if you zoom in higher. Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting fixture. The subject appears distorted. •• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a malfunction. If the subject passes quickly in front of the lens, it will appear slightly distorted. •• If you are taking still pictures using [ESHTR], the striping may be reduced by setting a slower shutter speed. (→84) Brightness or colouring of recorded picture different from real life. •• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc., increasing the shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness and colour. These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction. •• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting etc., the colours and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen. Reddish horizontal streaks appear on the screen during recording. •• This is characteristic of the MOS sensors, which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. The streaks appear when the subject has a bright part. Some unevenness may occur in the surrounding areas, but this is not a malfunction. It is recorded in motion pictures but is not recorded on still pictures. •• It is recommended that you take pictures while taking care not to expose the screen to sunlight or any other source of strong light. Motion picture recording stops midway. •• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About the motion picture recording and speed class” (→25). •• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class, the data writing speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and formatting it (→26). 312 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting The screen turns dark while recording motion pictures. •• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may turn dark as time passes in order to slow battery consumption. This condition, however, will not affect the recorded motion picture. The screen turns momentarily black or noise is recorded. •• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may momentarily turn black or noise may be recorded due to static electricity or strong electromagnetic waves (radio transmitters, high-voltage lines, etc.) under some environmental conditions. Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult while recording 4K motion pictures. •• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the focus at high precision. This is not a malfunction. Panorama picture recording stops before finishing. •• If the pan motion of the camera is too slow, the camera assumes that the operation has been aborted and stops recording. •• If the pan motion of the camera is too shaky when it is moved toward the recording direction, the camera stops recording. The subject cannot be locked. (AF track fails) •• If the colour of the subject is similar to that of its background, AF Tracking may not function. Set the AF lock to the colours specific to the subject. Low or inaudible operating sound. •• The speaker is blocked. •• [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (→161). 313 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Monitor/viewfinder The monitor/viewfinder is turned off although the camera is turned on. •• When a hand or object is close to the eye sensor, the monitor display mode could be switched to viewfinder display mode without your knowledge. (→54) Pictures do not show on the monitor. •• Viewfinder display mode is activated. → Press the [LVF] button to switch to the monitor display mode. (→54) •• Monitor is turned off. → Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display information. (→62) •• When you connect the camera to a TV using an HDMI micro cable, the picture is not displayed on a monitor/viewfinder in the following cases. –– During playback Brightness is unstable. •• Aperture value is set while shutter button is pressed halfway. (Does not affect recorded picture.) This symptom may also occur when the brightness changes because the zoom is operated or the camera is moved. This is the automatic aperture operation of the camera and is not a malfunction. The screen flickers indoors. •• The screen may flicker for a few seconds after turning on. This is an operation to correct flicker caused by lighting such as fluorescent lights, LED lights, etc. and is not a malfunction. The screen is too bright/too dark. •• Check [Monitor Luminance] setting. (→45) •• Use [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] to adjust the brightness of the screen. (→44) Black/blue/red/green dots or interference appears. Monitor looks distorted when touched. •• This is not a fault, and will not be recorded on the actual pictures. Noise appears on the monitor/viewfinder. •• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor/viewfinder. Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder when pressing [LVF] button. •• When it is connected to a computer or printer, the camera can display pictures on the monitor only. 314 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Flash Unable to perform [Flash]. •• Flash (supplied/optional) is not attached properly. → Properly attach a flash (supplied/optional) to the camera. (→176, 291) •• For details about flash settings, refer to (→176 - 186, 291). No flash emitted. The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases. •• When the picture effect (Filter) is set •• When camera is set to use [Auto Bracket], White Balance Bracket, or [Aspect Bracket] •• When using [Burst] •• During panorama picture recording •• When [HDR] is set to [ON] •• When the electronic shutter is used (→140) → Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [MSHTR]. •• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (→161) → Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF]. The flash fires twice. •• The flash (supplied) fires twice. (Except when [Firing Mode] of [Flash] is set to [MANUAL]) When red-eye reduction (→180) is set, the firing interval will be longer. Make sure that the subject does not move until the second firing is completed. 315 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Playback Pictures have been rotated. •• [Rotate Disp.] is activated. (→218) Cannot view pictures. There are no recorded pictures. •• A card is not inserted in the camera. •• There is no picture on the card to play back. •• Has the file name of the picture been changed on a computer? If so, it cannot be played back on the camera. •• [Playback Mode] is set to other than [Normal Play]. → Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (→206) Folder/file number displayed as [-]. Picture is black. •• Picture edited on computer or taken with different device. •• Battery removed immediately after picture taken, or picture taken with low battery. → Use [Format] to delete (→26). Incorrect date displayed in Calendar Search. •• Picture edited on computer or taken with different device. •• [Clock Set] is incorrect (→29). (Incorrect date may be displayed in Calendar Search on pictures copied to a computer and then back to this unit, if computer and camera dates differ.) White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture. •• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting particles of dust in the air. This is not a fault. A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots and their position differ in every picture. [Thumbnail is displayed] is shown on the screen. •• The pictures may have been recorded on another device. If so, they may be displayed with poor picture quality. Red areas in pictures appear blackened. ]) is operating, if a subject is recorded that has skin•• When digital red-eye correction ([ ], [ coloured areas with red areas inside, the digital red-eye correction function may blacken the red areas. → We recommend setting the flash (supplied/optional) to [ ], or [Red-Eye Removal] to [OFF] before recording. (→180) 316 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting An unusual noise, such as a clicking or buzzing noise, is recorded on a motion picture. Audio is recorded at low volumes. •• When recording a motion picture in a quiet environment, noise due to the motion of the aperture and focusing mechanism may be recorded on the motion picture. Note that this is not a fault. You can set the focus operation during motion picture recording to [OFF] using [Continuous AF] (→189). •• Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion picture, operation noise may be recorded. •• If you block the microphone with your fingers while motion pictures are being recorded, the audio may be recorded at a low volume or may not be recorded at all. In this case, the camera may pick up the lens operating sounds more easily. Operating sounds are recorded at the end of the motion picture recording. •• Since motion pictures are recorded until the motion picture button is pressed to stop recording, the operating sound level in the picture may be higher. To suppress this sound, we recommend trying the following method. → Divide the end part of a motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214) in the [Playback] menu. In some cases, motion pictures cannot be divided at a position close to the end part of the motion picture. To avoid this problem, continue recording for an extra 3 seconds. Playback and operation sounds are too low. •• The speaker is blocked. (→15) Motion pictures taken with this camera cannot be played in other cameras. •• Even if a device is compatible with AVCHD and MP4, the motion pictures that were recorded on this unit may have bad picture quality or sound quality upon playback, or may be unable to be played back. Also, the recording information may not be displayed correctly. 317 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Wi-Fi function It cannot connect to the wireless LAN. Radio waves get disconnected. •• Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network. •• Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access point. → Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point. •• When the radio waves are interrupted, the condition may improve by moving the location or changing the angle of the wireless access point. •• When this unit is placed on a metal table or shelf, the connection may not be established easily because the camera is affected by radio waves. Use the camera away from metal surfaces. •• It may not automatically connect when the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to broadcast. → Set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast. •• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency operated nearby? → Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away from the device. •• Is the 5 GHz/2.4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the 5 GHz band? → The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz/2.4 GHz simultaneously is recommended. It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible. •• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.) •• Perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. 318 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting Wireless access point is not displayed. Or it cannot be connected. •• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state. •• The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave condition. → Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point. → Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point. → Change the direction of this unit. •• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access point. → Check the settings of the wireless access point. •• The wireless access point may not be found depending on the radio wave condition. → Perform the [Manual Input]. (→266) •• Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast? → It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast. Enter and set the network SSID. (→265) •• Connection methods differ depending on the wireless access point. → Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point. It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone. •• It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi connection setting of the smartphone, but it is not a malfunction. This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone. → Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone. I have forgotten the login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB”. •• Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”. http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/ 319 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting I do not have a wireless access point at my home, but I would like to perform service user registration of the “LUMIX CLUB”. •• Service user registration for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not possible in the environment without a wireless access point. The camera cannot be connected to Mac computer/Windows PC via Wi-Fi connection. → Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed. → When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs. Please confirm clock set and world time of the camera matches with time, date and time zone in Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely, please match them. I am having a problem connecting to my Windows 8 PC. The user name and password are not recognised. •• Depending on the OS version, on Windows 8, for example, there are two types of user account (local account/Microsoft account). → Be sure to set the local account and use the user name and password for the local account. The Wi-Fi connection is not recognising my PC. •• By default, the Wi-Fi connection uses the default workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If the name of the workgroup has been changed, it will not be recognised. → Select [PC Connection] then [Change Workgroup Name] in the [Wi-Fi Setup] to change the workgroup name to match that of your PC. (→272) Pictures cannot be transmitted to the computer. •• If a firewall is enabled by the OS or security software, this unit may be unable to connect to the computer. Images cannot be transmitted to the WEB service. •• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct. •• WEB service server or the network may be busy. → Try again after a while. → Check the site of the WEB service you are sending the image to. 320 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting It takes time to transmit an image to the WEB service. •• Is the size of the image too large? → Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (→214). → Reduce the image size at [Size] (→271), and then send. •• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far. → Transmit closer to the wireless access point. The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the WEB service is not there. •• Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image. •• It may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the WEB service depending on the status of the server. → Wait for a while and try again. •• You can check the transmission status on the WEB service link settings by logging into “LUMIX CLUB”. I would like to return the image in the WEB service to the camera. •• The images in the WEB Service cannot be saved (downloaded) to this unit. Do not delete the uploaded images, and make a backup of them. I cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the WEB service by this unit. •• The images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit. → Perform the task using a smartphone or a PC. Your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password were deleted after sending the camera in to be repaired. •• The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair. → Always make a copy of important settings. Transmission of the image fails midway. There is an image that could not be transmitted. •• Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red. •• Is the size of the image too large? → Divide the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→214). → Reduce the image size at [Size] (→271), and then send. •• File format of the picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (→239, 243, 244, 247, 251, 255) •• Capacity or number of images in the WEB service is full. → Login to “LUMIX CLUB”, and check the status of the destination on the WEB service link settings. 321 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi. → Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (→51) However, the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] will be reset. I cannot send images to an AV device. •• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take a while. I cannot connect using the NFC function. •• The smartphone is not NFC compatible. This function can be used with NFC compatible devices with Android (2.3.3 or above). •• Is the NFC function on the smartphone turned off? •• The [NFC Operation] on this unit is set to [OFF]. (→272) •• The camera has a hard time recognising some smartphone models. If it is not recognised, slowly shift the smartphone while it is beside the unit. •• If you hold the smartphone for too short a time, the camera may not be able to recognise the smartphone. Hold the smartphone for a while. 322 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■TV, computer, printer No image appears on TV. Image blurred or not coloured. •• Not connected correctly (→276). •• The television has not been switched to auxiliary input. The display on the TV and on the camera do not match. •• Aspect ratio may be incorrect or edges may be cut off with certain televisions. Cannot play motion pictures on TV. •• Card is inserted into TV. → Connect with AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable and play on camera (→276). Picture is not displayed on full TV screen. •• Check [TV Aspect] settings (→47). No sound is output from the camera speaker. •• When the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is connected to the camera, no sound is output from the camera. VIERA Link (HDMI) is not working. •• Is the HDMI micro cable connected correctly? (→276) → Check that the HDMI micro cable is fully inserted. •• Is the camera’s [VIERA Link] setting set to [ON]? (→49) → The input setting may not be able to be changed automatically with certain television HDMI sockets. In this case, please change the input setting with your television’s remote control (consult your television’s operating instructions for details). → Check the VIERA Link (HDMI) settings on the device you are connecting to. → Turn the camera off and on again. → Turn the “VIERA Link control (HDMI device control)” setting on your television (VIERA) to off and then to on again. (Consult your VIERA’s operating instructions for details.) Cannot communicate with the computer. •• Not connected correctly (→284). •• Check whether computer has recognised camera. → Set [USB Mode] to [PC] (→47). → Turn the camera off and then on again. Computer does not recognise card. •• Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect with card in place. •• If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC, try connecting the USB connection cable to another USB terminal. 323 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting Computer does not recognise card. (When using an SDXC Memory Card) → Check whether your computer is compatible with SDXC Memory Cards. http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html → A message prompting you to format the card may appear when you connect it. Do not format the card. → If the [Access] indicator on the screen does not go off, turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB connection cable. Cannot print when connecting to printer. •• Printer not compatible with PictBridge. •• Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)] (→47, 287). The edges of pictures are cut off when printing. •• Release any trimming or edgeless printing settings on printer before printing. (Refer to the instruction manual for the printer.) •• The aspect ratio of pictures is different from that of paper used for printing. → If printing in shop, check if 16:9 sizes can be printed. Cannot print panorama pictures properly. •• The aspect ratio of panorama pictures is different from that of regular still pictures, and some panorama pictures may not be printed correctly. → Use a printer with support for panorama pictures. (Refer to the instruction manual for the printer.) → We recommend adjusting the size of a picture in accordance with print paper using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the DVD (supplied). 324 SQW0024 Others Q&A Troubleshooting ■■Others Menu not displayed in desired language. •• Change [Language] setting (→49). Camera rattles if shaken. •• This sound is made by the lens movement and is not a fault. The lens makes a clicking noise. •• When the camera is turned on or off, the lens is moved, or an aperture operation is performed, such a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. •• When the brightness changes after a zooming operation or moving the camera, the lens may make a noise while adjusting the aperture. This is not a malfunction. Red lamp illuminated when pressing shutter button halfway in dark locations. •• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [ON] (→125). AF Assist Lamp is not illuminated. •• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [OFF] (→125). •• Not illuminated in bright locations. Part of a picture flashes black and white. •• [Highlight] is set to [ON]. (→72) Camera is hot. •• Camera may become a little warm during use, but this does not affect performance or quality. Clock is incorrect. •• Camera has been left for a long period. → Reset the clock (→30). •• A long time was taken to set the clock (clock will be behind by the same lapse of time). When using zoom, picture becomes slightly warped and the edges of the subject become coloured. •• Pictures may be slightly warped or coloured around the edges, depending on the zoom ratio, but this is not a fault. File numbers are not recorded in sequence. •• File numbers are reset when new folders are created (→50). •• If you perform this operation after performing a specific operation, the picture may be saved in a folder with a different folder number than the previous folder number. File numbers have jumped backwards. •• Battery was removed/inserted with the camera turned on. (Numbers may jump backwards if folder/ file numbers are not correctly recorded.) 325 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes When in use ●●Camera may become warm if used for long periods of time, but this is not a fault. ●●Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.). ••If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation. ••Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting the pictures and/or sound. ••Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields created by speakers or large motors. ••Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or sound. ••If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (optional). Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on. Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines. ••If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/ or sound may be adversely affected. ●●Do not extend the supplied cord or cable. ●●Do not allow camera to come into contact with pesticides or volatile substances (can cause surface damage or coating to peel). ●●Do not keep objects that may be influenced magnetically close to the speaker. ••Magnetised objects such as bank cards, commuter passes, watches, may be adversely affected by the magnetic influence of the speaker. ●●Never leave the camera and the battery in a car or on a car hood in the summer. Doing so may cause leakage of the battery electrolyte, overheating, fire or a battery explosion due to the high temperature. Caring for your camera To clean your camera, remove the battery or the DC coupler (optional), or disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and wipe with a soft, dry cloth. ●●Use a damp cloth to remove stubborn stains, before wiping with a dry cloth. ●●Do not use benzine, thinners, alcohol, or kitchen detergent, as these may damage the outer casing and finish of the camera. ●●If using a chemically-treated cloth, read the supplied instructions carefully. 326 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes When not using for a while ●●Turn off the camera before removing battery and card (ensure that battery is removed to prevent damage through over-discharge). ●●Do not leave in contact with rubber or plastic bags. ●●Store together with a drying agent (silica gel) if leaving in drawer, etc. Store batteries in cool (15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)) places with low humidity (40%RH to 60%RH) and no major temperature changes. ●●Charge battery once per year and use completely before storing again. Memory cards ●●To prevent damage to cards and data ••Avoid high temperatures, direct sunlight, electromagnetic waves, and static electricity. ••Do not bend, drop, or expose to strong impacts. ••Do not touch terminals on reverse of card or allow them to become dirty or wet. ●●Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data. ●●When disposing of/transferring memory cards ••If using the “format” or “delete” functions on your camera or computer, this only changes the file management information, and does not completely delete the data from within the memory card. When disposing of or transferring your memory cards, we recommend physically destroying them, or using commercially available computer data erasing software to completely delete the data from the card. Data within memory cards should be managed responsibly. Monitor/viewfinder ●●Do not press hard on the monitor. This may cause uneven display and damage the monitor. ●●In cold climates or other situations when the camera becomes cold, the monitor or the viewfinder may appear slightly darker than normal immediately after the camera is turned on. Normal brightness will return once the internal components have warmed up. The monitor and viewfinder are made with extremely high precision technology. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. The monitor and viewfinder screens are controlled with extremely high precision, but some pixels may be inactive. The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card. 327 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes Battery The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. This battery is easily affected by temperature and humidity, and is affected more when the temperature is high or low. ●●The time required for charging varies depending on conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer at high or low temperatures and when the battery has not been used in some time. ●●Battery will be warm during charging and for some time thereafter. ●●Battery will run out if not used for long periods of time, even after being charged. ●●Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug. Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the resulting heat generated. ●●Frequently charging up battery is not recommended. (Frequently charging battery reduces maximum usage time and can cause battery to expand.) ●●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please purchase a new battery. ●●When charging: ••Wipe dirt from the battery terminal with a dry cloth. ••Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference). ●●Do not use a damaged or dented battery (especially connectors), e.g. by dropping (can cause faults). Charger ●●Depending on the environment while charging, the charging light may flicker due to static electricity or electromagnetic radiation, etc. This has no effect on charging. ●●Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference). ●●The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction. ●●After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.) ●●Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean. When they get dirty, clean with a dry cloth. 328 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes Lens ●●Images may appear slightly white if lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.). Turn the camera on, hold the extracted lens barrel with your fingers, and gently wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry cloth. ●●Do not leave the lens exposed to direct sunlight. When using a tripod or unipod ●●Do not apply excessive force or tighten screws when they are crooked. (This may damage the camera, screw hole, or label.) ●●Ensure that the tripod is stable. (Refer to the tripod instructions.) ●●You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod. Personal Information To protect personal information, we recommend that you set a Wi-Fi password. (→273) If names or birthdays are set in [Profile Setup] or in the [Face Recog.] function, keep in mind that the camera and recorded pictures will contain personal information. ●●Disclaimer ••Data containing personal information can be altered or lost due to malfunction, static electricity, accidents, breakdowns, repairs, or other operations. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage that occurs, direct or indirect, as a result of the alteration or loss of data containing personal information. ●●When ordering repairs or transferring/disposing of the camera ••After you make a note of the personal information, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/ [Delete account] to delete data containing personal information such as wireless LAN connection settings that you registered or set in this unit. (→51, 262) ••To protect your personal information, please reset the settings. (→50) ••Remove the memory card from the camera. ••When ordering repairs, settings may be returned to the initial purchase state. ••If the above operations cannot be performed because of a camera malfunction, consult with the dealer or nearest Service Centre. ●●When transferring or disposing of your memory card, see “When disposing of/ transferring memory cards” in the previous section. (→327) ●●Uploading pictures to WEB services ••Pictures may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as titles, recording dates and times, and location information. Before uploading the pictures to WEB services, check the pictures carefully for information that should not be disclosed. 329 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes ●●SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. ●●HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. ●●HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation. ●●“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. ●●Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ●●Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. ●●Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. ●●Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ●●iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ●●iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ●●App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. ●●Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc. ●●The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. ●●The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. ●●“Wi-Fi®” and “Wi-Fi Direct®” are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®. ●●“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™” and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®. ●●DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance. ●●QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED. ●●This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc. ●●Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned. 330 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and noncommercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. 331 SQW0024 Others Usage cautions and notes This product incorporates the following software: (1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation, (2) the software owned by third party and licenced to Panasonic Corporation, and/or (3) open source software The software categorised as (3) is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET] → [Setup] → [Version Disp.] → [Software info]. Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation. By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment. For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local municipality. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation. Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. 332 SQW0024